Delta CNC Lathe Machine Solution Operation and Maintenance Manual

Industrial Automation Headquarters

Taiwan: Delta Electronics, Inc.
Taoyuan Technology Center
No.18, Xinglong Rd., Taoyuan District,
Taoyuan City 330477, Taiwan
TEL: +886-3-362-6301 / FAX: +886-3-371-6301

Asia EMEA
China: Delta Electronics (Shanghai) Co., Ltd. EMEA Headquarters: Delta Electronics (Netherlands) B.V.
No.182 Minyu Rd., Pudong Shanghai, P.R.C. Sales: Sales.IA.EMEA@deltaww.com
Post code : 201209 Marketing: Marketing.IA.EMEA@deltaww.com
TEL: +86-21-6872-3988 / FAX: +86-21-6872-3996 Technical Support: iatechnicalsupport@deltaww.com
Customer Service: 400-820-9595 Customer Support: Customer-Support@deltaww.com
Service: Service.IA.emea@deltaww.com
TEL: +31(0)40 800 3900
Japan: Delta Electronics (Japan), Inc.
Industrial Automation Sales Department
BENELUX: Delta Electronics (Netherlands) B.V.
2-1-14 Shibadaimon, Minato-ku Automotive Campus 260, 5708 JZ Helmond, The Netherlands
Tokyo, Japan 105-0012 Mail: Sales.IA.Benelux@deltaww.com
TEL: +81-3-5733-1155 / FAX: +81-3-5733-1255
TEL: +31(0)40 800 3900

Korea: Delta Electronics (Korea), Inc. DACH: Delta Electronics (Netherlands) B.V.
1511, 219, Gasan Digital 1-Ro., Geumcheon-gu, Coesterweg 45, D-59494 Soest, Germany
Seoul, 08501 South Korea Mail: Sales.IA.DACH@deltaww.com
TEL: +82-2-515-5305 / FAX: +82-2-515-5302 TEL: +49(0)2921 987 0

France: Delta Electronics (France) S.A.

Singapore: Delta Energy Systems (Singapore) Pte Ltd. ZI du bois Challand 2, 15 rue des Pyrénées,
4 Kaki Bukit Avenue 1, #05-04, Singapore 417939
Lisses, 91090 Evry Cedex, France
TEL: +65-6747-5155 / FAX: +65-6744-9228
Mail: Sales.IA.FR@deltaww.com

Delta CNC Lathe Machine

TEL: +33(0)1 69 77 82 60
India: Delta Electronics (India) Pvt. Ltd.
Plot No.43, Sector 35, HSIIDC Gurgaon,
Iberia: Delta Electronics Solutions (Spain) S.L.U
PIN 122001, Haryana, India Ctra. De Villaverde a Vallecas, 265 1º Dcha Ed.

Solution
TEL: +91-124-4874900 / FAX: +91-124-4874945 Hormigueras – P.I. de Vallecas 28031 Madrid
TEL: +34(0)91 223 74 20
Thailand: Delta Electronics (Thailand) PCL.
Carrer Llacuna 166, 08018 Barcelona, Spain
909 Soi 9, Moo 4, Bangpoo Industrial Estate (E.P.Z),

Operation and
Mail: Sales.IA.Iberia@deltaww.com
Pattana 1 Rd., T.Phraksa, A.Muang,
Samutprakarn 10280, Thailand Italy: Delta Electronics (Italy) S.r.l.
TEL: +66-2709-2800 / FAX: +66-2709-2827 Via Meda 2–22060 Novedrate(CO)

Maintenance Manual
Piazza Grazioli 18 00186 Roma Italy
Australia: Delta Electronics (Australia) Pty Ltd. Mail: Sales.IA.Italy@deltaww.com
Unit 2, Building A, 18-24 Ricketts Road, TEL: +39 039 8900365
Mount Waverley, Victoria 3149 Australia
Mail: IA.au@deltaww.com Russia: Delta Energy System LLC
TEL: +61-1300-335-823 / +61-3-9543-3720 Vereyskaya Plaza II, office 112 Vereyskaya str.
17 121357 Moscow Russia

Americas
Mail: Sales.IA.RU@deltaww.com
TEL: +7 495 644 3240

USA: Delta Electronics (Americas) Ltd. Turkey: Delta Greentech Elektronik San. Ltd. Sti. (Turkey)
5101 Davis Drive, Research Triangle Park, NC 27709, U.S.A. Şerifali Mah. Hendem Cad. Kule Sok. No:16-A
TEL: +1-919-767-3813 / FAX: +1-919-767-3969 34775 Ümraniye – İstanbul
Mail: Sales.IA.Turkey@deltaww.com
Brazil: Delta Electronics Brazil Ltd. TEL: + 90 216 499 9910
Estrada Velha Rio-São Paulo, 5300 Eugênio de
Melo - São José dos Campos CEP: 12247-004 - SP - Brazil MEA: Eltek Dubai (Eltek MEA DMCC)
TEL: +55-12-3932-2300 / FAX: +55-12-3932-237 OFFICE 2504, 25th Floor, Saba Tower 1,
Jumeirah Lakes Towers, Dubai, UAE
Mexico: Delta Electronics International Mexico S.A. de C.V. Mail: Sales.IA.MEA@deltaww.com
Gustavo Baz No. 309 Edificio E PB 103 TEL: +971(0)4 2690148
Colonia La Loma, CP 54060
Tlalnepantla, Estado de México www.deltaww.com
TEL: +52-55-3603-9200

*We reserve the right to change the information in this manual without prior notice. DELTA_IA-CNC_Lathe application_OM_MM_EN_20221228
Preface
Thank you for purchasing this product. Read this manual carefully before using the product to ensure the
correct use of the product. Keep this manual handy for quick reference whenever needed.

This manual includes:

 Installation and inspection of NC controllers
 Wiring for connectors of the NC controllers
 Description of the function and operation of NC controllers
 Description of parameters
 Troubleshooting

NC controller product features:

 Built-in 32-bit high-speed dual CPU for multi-task execution, improving operating
performance
 User-friendly human machine interface
 Interfaces for auto tuning and gain adjustment of the servo, meeting different machine
characteristics
 CNCSoft software for configuring user-defined screens
 Front USB interface (port) for easy data access, data backup, and parameter file copying
 In Spindle mode, you can control the spindle system with DMCNET communication or analog
voltage according to the requirements
 Serial I/O modules for flexible I/O configuration

How to use this manual:

Use this manual as a reference when installing, setting up, using, and maintaining the NC
controller. Read this manual before using and setting this product.

Delta technical services:

Consult your Delta equipment distributors or Delta Customer Service Center if you encounter any
problem.

i
 Safety Precautions

 Refer to the pin assignments when wiring. Ensure the product is properly grounded.
 Do not disassemble the controller, change the wiring, or touch the power supply when the
power is on to avoid electric shock.

Pay special attention to the following safety precautions at all times during installation, wiring, operation,
maintenance, and examination of the controller.

The symbols of “DANGER”, “WARNING” and “STOP” indicate:

Danger. May cause severe or fatal injuries to personnel if the instructions are not followed.

Warning. May cause moderate injury to personnel, or lead to severe damage or even

WAR NING malfunction of the product if the instructions are not followed.

Absolute prohibited activities. May cause serious damage or even malfunction of the
ST OP
product if the instructions are not followed.

Installation
 Follow the installation instructions in the manual, or it may result in damage to the
equipment.
 Do not expose the product to an environment containing vapor, corrosive gas,
inflammable gas, or other foreign matter to reduce the risk of electric shock or fire.

Wiring

 Connect the ground terminal to class-3 ground system. Ground resistance should not
exceed 100 Ω. Improper grounding may result in electric shock or fire.

Operation
 Correctly plan the I/O configuration with the MLC editor software, or abnormal operation
may occur.
 Before operating the machine, properly adjust the parameter settings, otherwise it may

WAR NING cause abnormal operation or malfunction.

 Ensure you can activate the emergency stop at any time, and avoid operating the
machine in unprotected condition.

 Do not change the wiring when the power is on, or it may lead to personal injury caused
by electric shock.
ST OP
 Do not use a sharp-pointed object to touch the panel. Doing this may dent the screen and
lead to malfunction of the controller.

ii
Maintenance and Inspection
 When the power is on, do not disassemble the controller panel or touch the internal parts
of the controller, or it may cause electric shock.
 Do not touch the wiring terminal within 10 minutes after turning off the power since the
residual voltage may cause electric shock.
ST OP
 Turn off the power before replacing the battery, and check the system settings after the
replacement.
 Do not block the ventilation holes when operating the controller since poor ventilation
may cause malfunction of the controller.

Wiring Method
 Power supply: use a 24 VDC power supply for the controller and comply with the wire
specification when wiring to avoid danger.

 Wire selection: use stranded wires and shielded multi-core stranded wires for signal
cables.

WAR NING  Cable length: the maximum cable length of the signal cable for remote I/O and DMCNET
communication is 20 m and the maximum cable length of other signal cables is 10 m.

 The local I/O and remote I/O require an additional 24 VDC power for signal input and
output.

Wiring of Communication Circuit

 DMCNET wiring: the wiring materials should comply with the standard specification.
 Make sure the controller and servo drive are firmly connected, or loose cables may cause
WAR NING
abnormal operation.

Note: the content of this manual may be revised without prior notice. Download the latest version from Delta’s website.

iii
 (This page is intentionally left blank.)

iv
Table of Contents
Before Operation

Product Inspection and Model Explanation

1.1 Product inspection ····························································································· 1-2
1.2 Model explanation - A series ················································································ 1-3
1.3 Product interface of NC controller - A series ·····························································1-4
1.4 Model explanation - B series ················································································ 1-7
1.5 Product interface of NC controller - B series ···························································· 1-9

Installation
2.1 A series product installation ··················································································2-2
2.1.1 Ambient storage conditions ············································································2-2
2.1.2 Ambient installation conditions ········································································2-2
2.1.3 Mounting method and space ···········································································2-3
2.1.4 Hardware specifications·················································································2-3
2.1.5 Outline and mounting dimensions ····································································2-4
2.1.6 Operating interface installation (for OPENCNC models)········································2-7
2.2 B series product installation ··················································································2-9
2.2.1 Ambient storage conditions ············································································2-9
2.2.2 Ambient installation conditions ········································································2-9
2.2.3 Mounting method and space ·········································································2-10
2.2.4 Hardware specifications···············································································2-10
2.2.5 Outline and mounting dimensions ··································································2-11
2.2.6 Operating interface installation (for OPENCNC models)······································2-15

Wiring
3.1 Wiring for A series products ··················································································3-3
3.1.1 A series product interface ··············································································3-3
3.1.2 Connectors of A series controller ·····································································3-7
3.1.2.1 NC200 series connectors ········································································3-7
3.1.2.2 OPENCNC series connectors ································································3-10
3.1.3 Wiring for power connector ···········································································3-12
3.1.4 Wiring for RS-485·······················································································3-13
3.1.5 Wiring for spindle feedback input ···································································3-14
3.1.6 Wiring for spindle analog output ····································································3-15
 3.1.7 Wiring for high-speed counter input (HSI) ························································3-18
3.1.8 Wiring for emergency stop ···········································································3-20
3.1.9 Wiring for MPG connector ············································································3-21
3.1.10 Wiring for remote I/O connector ···································································3-25
3.1.10.1 NC-EIO-R2010 ··················································································3-28
3.1.10.2 NC-EIO-R3216 ··················································································3-31
3.1.10.3 NC-EIO-R3232 ··················································································3-34
3.1.11 Wiring for local I/O connector ······································································3-38
3.2 Wiring for B series products ················································································3-42
3.2.1 B series product interface ············································································3-42
3.2.2 Connectors of B series controller ···································································3-48
3.2.2.1 NC200B series connectors ····································································3-48
3.2.2.2 OPENCNC series connectors ································································3-49
3.2.3 Wiring for power connector ···········································································3-51
3.2.4 Wiring for RS-485 (CN1) ··············································································3-52
3.2.5 Wiring for spindle pulse output connector (SPINDLE) ·········································3-53
3.2.6 Wiring for spindle analog output (CN1)····························································3-55
3.2.7 Wiring for spindle analog feedback connector (SPINDLE) ···································3-57
3.2.8 Wiring for high-speed counter input (HSI) (CN1) ···············································3-59
3.2.9 Wiring for emergency stop (CN1) ···································································3-61
3.2.10 Wiring for MPG connector ··········································································3-62
3.2.11 Wiring for remote I/O connector ···································································3-66
3.2.11.1 NC-EIO-R2010 ··················································································3-69
3.2.11.2 NC-EIO-R3216 ··················································································3-72
3.2.11.3 NC-EIO-R3232 ··················································································3-75
3.2.11.4 NC-EIO-T3232 ··················································································3-78
3.2.12 Wiring for local I/O connector ······································································3-81
3.2.13 External machine operation panel B for NC200B series models ··························3-85

Operation and Settings

Table of Function Groups

4.1 Tables of function groups ···················································································· 4-2
4.2 Machine operation panel A - function of keys ··························································4-13
4.3 Machine operation panel B - function of keys ··························································4-15
4.4 Table of corresponding buttons (for OPENCNC models) ···········································4-17
Introduction to NC System Modes
5.1 Auto mode (AUTO) ·····························································································5-2
5.2 Program edit mode (EDIT) ····················································································5-2
5.3 Manual input mode (MDI) ·····················································································5-2
5.4 MPG feeding mode (MPG) ····················································································5-2
5.5 Jog feeding mode (JOG) ······················································································5-2
5.6 Rapid feeding mode (RAPID) ················································································5-3
5.7 Homing mode (HOME)·························································································5-3
5.8 Function group screen overview ·············································································5-4

Position (POS) Group

6.1 Absolute coordinates ···························································································6-3
6.2 Relative coordinates ··························································································· 6-3
6.3 Machine coordinates ···························································································6-3

Program (PRG) Group

7.1 Ethernet setting ··································································································7-3
7.2 Create a new file (NEW F) ····················································································7-8
7.3 Copy files (COPY F) ····························································································7-9
7.4 Paste files (PASTE)·····························································································7-9
7.5 Delete files and directories (DEL) ···········································································7-9
7.6 Select / cancel selection of multiple files & select / cancel selection of all files
(SEL TOGL / CANCEL & ALL SEL TOGL / CANCEL) ················································7-10
7.7 Rename files (RENAME) ····················································································7-12
7.8 Create directories (FOLDER)···············································································7-13
7.9 Search for files (FIND F) ·····················································································7-14
7.10 File merging (MERGE) ·····················································································7-14
7.11 Sorting (SORT) ·······························································································7-15
7.12 Convert DXF files (DXF) ···················································································7-16
7.13 Macro files (FILE / MACRO) ··············································································7-17
7.14 File editing (File edit) ························································································7-17
7.14.1 Line search (LABEL) ·················································································7-18
7.14.2 String search (STRING) ·············································································7-18
7.14.3 Specify the start and end of highlighted area (B START / B END) ·······················7-20
7.14.4 Delete lines and sections (DEL) ···································································7-21
7.14.5 Copy and paste lines / sections (COPY & PASTE) ···········································7-21
7.14.6 Undo the action (UNDO) ············································································7-21
7.15 Graphic edit (lathe system) ················································································7-22
 7.15.1 Objective ································································································7-22
7.15.2 Project management ·················································································7-22
7.15.3 Description of graphic edit procedures for lathe system·····································7-25
7.15.4 Operation steps for graphic programming ······················································7-47
7.16 Program function in other modes ········································································7-49

Offset (OFS) Group

8.1 Coordinate setting (COORD) ·················································································8-2
8.1.1 Auto set (AUTO) ··························································································8-3
8.1.2 Absolute input (ABS)·····················································································8-6
8.1.3 Incremental input (INC) ·················································································8-6
8.2 Tool setting ·······································································································8-7
8.2.1 Tool length setting (OFFSET) ·········································································8-7
8.2.2 Tool wear setting (WEAR) ············································································8-10
8.3 Tool magazine management (MAGA)····································································8-11
8.3.1 Multi-magazine management ········································································8-15
8.4 Macro variables (MACRO) ··················································································8-16
8.4.1 Local variables (LOCAL) ··············································································8-16
8.4.2 Global variables (GLOBAL) ··········································································8-16
8.4.3 Non-volatile variables (HOLD) ·······································································8-16
8.4.4 Extension variables (EXTEND) ·····································································8-17

Diagnosis (DGN) Group

9.1 Machining information (PROCESS) ········································································9-2
9.2 User variable (USR VAR) ·····················································································9-4
9.3 MLC·················································································································9-5
9.3.1 Bit device (BIT) ····························································································9-6
9.3.2 Register (REG) ····························································································9-7
9.3.3 Device monitoring (DEV MON) ········································································9-8
9.3.4 Line search (JUMP TO) ···············································································9-10
9.3.5 Program editing (EDITOR) ···········································································9-10
9.3.6 Status switching (SET) ················································································9-13
9.4 System monitoring (SYS MON) ············································································9-14
9.4.1 Servo monitoring (SRV MON) ·······································································9-14
9.4.2 I/O monitoring (I/O MON) ·············································································9-14
9.4.3 System variables (SYS VAR) ········································································9-15
9.4.4 Variable monitoring (VAR MON) ····································································9-16
9.5 Password setting (PWD) ····················································································9-18
9.5.1 System permissions (S SCP) ········································································9-18
 9.5.2 Machine permissions (M SCP) ······································································9-19
9.5.3 User permissions (U1 SCP & U2 SCP) ···························································9-22
9.5.4 Usage duration (EXPIRE) ············································································9-23
9.6 System information (STATUS) ·············································································9-26
9.7 Gain tuning (TUNING) ·······················································································9-27
9.8 Import data (IMPORT) ·······················································································9-31
9.9 Export data (EXPORT)·······················································································9-32
9.10 Multi-language display (TEXT WR) ·····································································9-34
9.11 LOGO (LOGO WR) ·························································································9-34

Alarm (ALM) Group

10.1 Current alarms (ALARM) ··················································································10-2
10.2 Alarm history (HISTORY) ··················································································10-3

Graph (GRA) Group

11.1 Trajectory display ····························································································11-2
11.2 Program simulation··························································································11-3

Parameter Settings

Parameter (PAR) Group

12.1 Machining parameter (PROCESS) ······································································12-4
12.1.1 Machining parameter descriptions ································································12-4
12.2 Operating parameter (OPERATE) ····································································· 12-11
12.2.1 Operating parameter descriptions ······························································ 12-11
12.3 Tool magazine parameter (MAGA) ···································································· 12-26
12.3.1 Tool magazine parameter descriptions ························································ 12-26
12.4 Spindle parameter (SPINDLE) ········································································· 12-27
12.4.1 Spindle parameter descriptions ································································· 12-27
12.5 Machine parameter (MACHINE) ······································································· 12-34
12.5.1 Machine parameter descriptions ································································ 12-34
12.6 Homing parameter (HOME) ············································································· 12-37
12.6.1 Homing parameter descriptions ································································· 12-37
12.7 Ethernet setting (ETH.) ··················································································· 12-42
12.7.1 Ethernet parameter descriptions ································································ 12-42
12.8 Compensation parameter (COMP) ···································································· 12-43
12.8.1 Compensation parameter descriptions ························································ 12-43
12.9 System parameter (SYSTEM) ·········································································· 12-46
 12.9.1 System parameter descriptions ································································· 12-46
12.10 MLC setting (MLC)······················································································· 12-54
12.10.1 MLC parameter descriptions ··································································· 12-54
12.11 Graph parameter (GRAPHIC)········································································· 12-58
12.11.1 Graph parameter descriptions ································································· 12-58
12.12 Servo parameter (SERVO) ············································································ 12-59
12.12.1 Servo parameter descriptions ·································································· 12-59
12.13 Channel setting (CONFIG) ············································································ 12-62
12.14 RIO setting (SET RIO) ·················································································· 12-63
12.14.1 Details of RIO setting ············································································· 12-64
12.14.2 Setting DAC module (NC-EIO-DAC04) ······················································ 12-66
12.15 Search (SEARCH) ······················································································· 12-67
12.16 Parameter group (PAR GRP) ········································································· 12-67
12.17 Other settings ····························································································· 12-69
12.17.1 Setting for absolute motor ······································································· 12-69
12.17.2 Setting synchronous motion control ·························································· 12-71
12.17.3 Command transfer ················································································ 12-74

Customized Function

Software (SOFT) Group

13.1 ScreenEditor software ······················································································13-2

How to Check Device Status

MLC Special M Relay and Special D Register

14.1 Introduction to MLC special M relay and special D register ······································ 14-2
14.2 List of special M ····························································································· 14-3
14.3 List of special D ··························································································· 14-29
Troubleshooting

Troubleshooting
15.1 Alarm description ··························································································· 15-2
15.1.1 MLC errors (1200 - 13FF)·········································································· 15-3
15.1.2 Servo error (1E00) ··················································································· 15-4
15.1.3 Remote I/O error (1F00)············································································ 15-4
15.1.4 HMI related alarms (3010 - 3FFF) ······························································· 15-5
15.1.5 NC system errors (4200 - 4FFF) ································································· 15-7
15.1.6 Machining related alarms (B000 - B0FF)······················································· 15-9
15.1.7 Tool compensation related alarms (B100 - B1FF) ·········································· 15-11
15.1.8 Lathe related alarms (B300 - B3FF) ···························································· 15-13
15.1.9 Command related alarms (B600 - B6FF; B64x not included) ···························· 15-14
15.1.10 Synchronous motion and temperature compensation related
alarms (B640 - B64F) ············································································ 15-17
15.1.11 Lathe cycle command alarms (B6A1 - B6AF) ·············································· 15-17
(This page is intentionally left blank.)
Product Inspection and
Model Explanation
Before using the NC series products, read this chapter for information about the model
explanation and product interface.

1.1 Product inspection ·············································································1-2

1.2 Model explanation - A series ································································1-3
1.3 Product interface of NC controller – A series············································1-4
1.4 Model explanation - B series ································································1-7
1.5 Product interface of NC controller – B series············································1-9

1-1
 Product Inspection and Model Explanation Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual

1.1 Product inspection

In case of packaging mistakes or damages during shipping, check the items listed in the

1
following table carefully. If any issue occurs, contact the distributor for service.

Item Content
Check the model number on the nameplate of the controller. Refer to
Purchased product
Section 1.2 and Section 1.4 for Model explanations.
Buttons Press the buttons to check if the operation is smooth*.
Appearance Visually check if there are any damages on the exterior of the product.
Connectors Check if there are any loose connectors.

Note: check the buttons for all models except for the NC30E(H) series, which does not have operation

panels.

1-2
Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual Product Inspection and Model Explanation

1.2 Model explanation - A series

 Nameplate information

Model number 2 L
1
Input power
CE RTI FIE D
SAFETY US CA
Barcode and E206327
200ALIA6T16010001
serial number

 Model explanation

NC series controller (MOP integrated)

NC2 0 0 A – L I – A E
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8)

No. Item Description

(1) Series name NC2: 2 series controller

(2) Display 0: 8” screen

(3) Screen orientation 0: horizontal

A: MPG not included on machine operation panel B

(4) Series type
P: MPG included on machine operation panel B

(5) Model L: lathe

(6) Type I: integrated (machine operation panels integrated)

(7) Version A: standard

Blank: Traditional Chinese

(8) Language S: Simplified Chinese

E: English

OPENCNC series controller

NC30 E
(1) (2)
No. Item Description

(1) Series name NC30: 3 series controller

E: embedded A series
(2) Series type
EH: embedded multi-axis A series

1-3
 Product Inspection and Model Explanation Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual

1.3 Product interface of NC controller – A series

NC200A-LI-A

No. Item No. Item

(1) Screen (5) Machine operation panel B
(2) Machine operation panel A (6) USB port
(3) CYCLE START (7) Function keys
(4) FEED HOLD - -

1-4
Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual Product Inspection and Model Explanation

NC200P-LI-A

No. Item No. Item

(1) Screen (6) USB port
(2) Machine operation panel A (7) Function keys
(3) CYCLE START (8) Emergency stop
(4) FEED HOLD (9) MPG
(5) Machine operation panel B - -

1-5
 Product Inspection and Model Explanation Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual

NC30E(H)

No. Item
(1) Indicators
Remote I/O module connector
(2)
(high-speed serial I/O)
HSI connector
(3)
(high-speed input)
(4) MPG (handwheel) connector
(5) Spindle connector
(6) 24 VDC power input for the controller
(7) CF card slot
PAN interface
(8)
(USB port for connecting to machine operation panel B)
USB ports
(9)
(for connecting to the mouse, keyboard and USB drive)
VGA connector
(10)
(for connecting to a screen)
(11) Ethernet connector
(12) DMCNET connector
(13) Mode switch

1-6
Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual Product Inspection and Model Explanation

1.4 Model explanation - B series

 Nameplate information

Model number 2 BL
1
Input power
CE RTI FIE D
SAFETY US CA
Barcode and E206327
200BLIA6T16010001
serial number

 Model explanation

NC series controller (MOP integrated)

NC2 0 0 B -LI-
(1) (2)(3) (4) (5)(6) (7) (8)

No. Item Description

NC2: 2 series controller

(1) Series name
NC3: 3 series controller

0: 8” screen
(2) Display
1: 10” screen

0: horizontal
(3) Screen orientation
1: vertical

B: B series
(4) Series type
BH: multi-axis B series

(5) Model L: lathe

I: integrated (machine operation panels integrated)

(6) Type P: split (machine operation panels not integrated)

S: split (machine operation panel A integrated)

A: MPG not included on machine operation panel B

(7) Version
P: MPG included on machine operation panel B

Blank: Traditional Chinese

(8) Language S: Simplified Chinese

E: English

1-7
 Product Inspection and Model Explanation Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual

OPENCNC series controller

NC30 EB
1 No.

(1)
Item

Series name
(1) (2)

NC30: 3 series controller

Description

EB: embedded B series

(2) Series type
EBH: embedded multi-axis B series

1-8
Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual Product Inspection and Model Explanation

1.5 Product interface of NC controller – B series

NC200B-LI-A

No. Item
(1) Screen
(2) Machine operation panel A
(3) USB port
(4) Function keys
(5) CYCLE START
(6) FEED HOLD
(7) Machine operation panel B

1-9
 Product Inspection and Model Explanation Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual

NC200B-LI-P

No. Item
(1) Screen
(2) Machine operation panel A
(3) MPG
(4) USB port
(5) Function keys
(6) Emergency stop
(7) CYCLE START
(8) FEED HOLD
(9) Machine operation panel B

1-10
Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual Product Inspection and Model Explanation

NC200B-LS-A

No. Item
(1) Screen
(2) Machine operation panel A
(3) USB port
(4) Function keys

1-11
 Product Inspection and Model Explanation Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual

NC30EB

(12) (13) (14)

1 (6)

(7)
(1)

(8)
(2)

(9)

(3)

(10)

(4)

(5) (11)

No. Item No. Item

(1) CF card slot (8) MPG connector
USB ports (for connecting to
(2) (9) Spindle connector
the mouse, keyboard and USB drive)
VGA connector
(3) (10) CN1 connector
(for connecting to a screen)
24 VDC power input
(4) Ethernet connector (11)
for the controller
(5) DMCNET connector (12) Keypad I/O module connector
(6) Indicators (13) I/O 1 module connector
(7) Remote I/O module connector (14) I/O 2 module connector

1-12
Installation
This chapter provides the outline dimensions, mounting dimensions, and hardware
specifications of the products. Follow the precautions of voltage, current, temperature,
or other conditions for installation. Otherwise, personnel injury or equipment damage
may occur.

2.1 A series product installation ·································································2-2

2.1.1 Ambient storage conditions ····························································2-2
2.1.2 Ambient installation conditions ·······················································2-2
2.1.3 Mounting method and space ··························································2-3
2.1.4 Hardware specifications ································································2-3
2.1.5 Outline and mounting dimensions ···················································2-4
2.1.6 Operating interface installation (for OPENCNC models) ·······················2-7
2.2 B series product installation ·································································2-9
2.2.1 Ambient storage conditions ····························································2-9
2.2.2 Ambient installation conditions ·······················································2-9
2.2.3 Mounting method and space ························································ 2-10
2.2.4 Hardware specifications ······························································ 2-10
2.2.5 Outline and mounting dimensions ················································· 2-11
2.2.6 Operating interface installation (for OPENCNC models) ····················· 2-15

2-1
 Installation Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual

2.1 A series product installation

2.1.1 Ambient storage conditions

2
Before installation, this product must be kept in the shipping carton. To retain the warranty
coverage and ensure future maintenance, follow these instructions for storage. While the product
is temporarily not in use:
 Store the product in a dust-free and dry location.
 Store the product in an ambient temperature range of -20°C to +60°C (-4°F to +140°F).
 Store the product in a relative humidity range of 10% to 95% RH (non-condensing).
 Avoid storing the product in an environment containing corrosive gas and liquids.
 The environment should be free of devices that generate excessive heat; no water, vapor,
dust, and oily dust; no corrosive and inflammable gas or liquids; no airborne dust or metal
particles; the environment should be solid without vibration and interference of
electromagnetic noise.

2.1.2 Ambient installation conditions

Operating temperature for the NC series controller: 0°C to 55°C (32°F to 131°F). During
long-term operation, it is advisable to keep the temperature of the operating environment below
45°C (113°F). If the temperature is above 45°C, install the product in a distribution board which is
well-ventilated without overheating risks. Also check if the vibration of the machine affects the
electrical devices in the distribution board.

In addition, follow these precautions when selecting the installation site to retain the warranty
coverage and ensure future maintenance for the Delta NC controller.
 The environment should be free of devices that generate excessive heat; no water, vapor,
dust, and oily dust; no corrosive and inflammable gas or liquids; no airborne dust or metal
particles; the environment should be solid without vibration and interference of
electromagnetic noise.
 The temperature and humidity of the installation site for the NC controller should be within
the specification range.
 Avoid storing the NC controller in an environment where the vibration exceeds the
specification range.

2-2
Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual Installation

2.1.3 Mounting method and space

Important:

2
 The NC series controller must be mounted vertically on a dry and solid platform which
complies with the requirement of NEMA.
 For better ventilation and cooling, allow sufficient clearance space (50 mm (1.97”) is
recommended) between the NC controller and the adjacent objects or wall, or it may cause
malfunction of the controller.
 Do not block the ventilation holes of the NC controller, or it may cause malfunction of the
controller.

2.1.4 Hardware specifications

NC200 A series lathe controller

Model NC200A-LI-A_ NC200P-LI-A_
Operating environment 10% to 95% RH [0°C to +55°C (32°F to 131°F)]
Storage environment 10% to 95% RH [-20°C to +60°C (-4°F to +140°F)]
Cooling method Natural cooling
Voltage +24 VDC (-10% to +15%) (built-in isolated circuit)
Dielectric withstanding
Between 24 VDC and FG terminals: 500 VAC for 1 minute
voltage
Power consumption 15 W (24V; 0.6 A)
3V lithium battery (CR2032) × 1
Battery Battery life varies according to the ambient temperature and operating conditions;
approximately 3 years in room temperature of 25°C (77°F)
Weight (kg) 4.5 4.7

OPENCNC A series controller

Model NC30E(H)
Operating environment 10% to 95% RH [0°C to +55°C (32°F to 131°F)]
Storage environment 10% to 95% RH [-20°C to +60°C (-4°F to +140°F)]
Cooling method Natural cooling
Voltage +24 VDC (-10% to +15%) (built-in isolated circuit)
Dielectric withstanding
Between 24 VDC and FG terminals: 500 VAC for 1 minute
voltage
Power consumption 15 W (24V; 0.6 A)
3V lithium battery (CR2032) × 1
Battery Battery life varies according to the ambient temperature and operating conditions;
approximately 3 years in room temperature of 25°C (77°F)
Weight (kg) 0.8

2-3
 Installation Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual

2.1.5 Outline and mounting dimensions

NC200 A series lathe controller - appearance and dimension tables

2 NC200-A-LI-A_ dimension drawing

Outline dimension table

Symbol Dimensions
A 400 mm
B 390 mm
C 320 mm
D 310 mm
E 22 mm
F 70 mm
130 mm
G
(Min. required distance for installation)

Mounting dimension table

Symbol Dimensions
H 302 ± 0.3 mm
H1 310 mm
W 378 ± 0.3 mm
W1 130 mm
W2 130 mm
W3 130 mm
I Φ4 mm

2-4
Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual Installation

NC200P-LI-A_ dimension drawing

Outline dimension table

Symbol Dimensions
A 400 mm
B 390 mm
C 320 mm
D 310 mm
E 22 mm
F 70 mm
130 mm
G
(Min. required distance for installation)

Mounting dimension table

Symbol Dimensions
H 302 ± 0.3 mm
H1 310 mm
W 378 ± 0.3 mm
W1 130 mm
W2 130 mm
W3 130 mm
I Φ4 mm

2-5
 Installation Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual

A series OPENCNC - appearance and dimension tables

NC30E(H) dimension drawing

Outline dimension table

Symbol Dimensions
A 60 mm
B 19 mm
C 196 mm
D 213 mm
E 164 mm
G 70 mm

Mounting dimension table

Symbol Dimensions
H1 201 ± 0.3 mm
W1 19 ± 0.3 mm
I M5

2-6
Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual Installation

2.1.6 Operating interface installation (for OPENCNC models)

 Operating interface installation

2
A. Connect the OPENCNC series controller to standard operating interfaces, including (1) Delta
HMI screen, (2) keyboard (functions the same as machine operation panel A), and (3)
machine operation panel B.
B. Connect the OPENCNC series controller to non-Delta operating interfaces, including (4)
screen and (5) keyboard.

The NC series controller can connect to (6) ASDA series AC servo drives, (7) ASDA-S spindle
servo drive, (8) ECMA series servo motors, and (9) ECMS series spindle servo motor.

2-7
 Installation Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual

 Connection through computer and network

Connect the OPENCNC series controller to (3) ASDA series AC servo drives, (4) ASDA-S

2
spindle servo drive, (5) ECMA series servo motors, and (6) ECMS series spindle servo motor
through the computer and network, including (1) PC-based controller and (2) mouse and the
public software for Delta OPENCNC.

2-8
Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual Installation

2.2 B series product installation

2.2.1 Ambient storage conditions

2
Before installation, this product must be kept in the shipping carton. To retain the warranty
coverage and ensure future maintenance, follow these instructions for storage. While the product
is temporarily not in use:
 Store the product in a dust-free and dry location.
 Store the product in an ambient temperature range of -20°C to +60°C (-4°F to +140°F).
 Store the product in a relative humidity range of 10% to 95% RH (non-condensing).
 Avoid storing the product in an environment containing corrosive gas and liquids.
 The environment should be free of devices that generate excessive heat; no water, vapor,
dust, and oily dust; no corrosive and inflammable gas or liquids; no airborne dust or metal
particles; the environment should be solid without vibration and interference of
electromagnetic noise.

2.2.2 Ambient installation conditions

Operating temperature for the NC series controller: 0°C to 50°C (32°F to 131°F). During
long-term operation, it is advistable to keep the temperature of the operating environment below
45°C (113°F). If the temperature is above 45°C, install the product in a distribution board which is
well-ventilated without overheating risks. Also, check if the vibration of the machine affects the
electrical devices in the distribution board.

In addition, follow these precautions when selecting the installation site to retain the warranty
coverage and ensure future maintenance for the Delta NC controller.
 The environment should be free of devices that generate excessive heat; no water, vapor,
dust, and oily dust; no corrosive and inflammable gas or liquids; no airborne dust or metal
particles; the environment should be solid without vibration and interference of
electromagnetic noise.
 The temperature and humidity of the installation site for the NC controller should be within
the specification range.
 Avoid storing the NC controller in an environment where the vibration exceeds the
specification range.

2-9
 Installation Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual

2.2.3 Mounting method and space

Important:

2
 The NC series controller must be mounted vertically on a dry and solid platform which
complies with the requirement of NEMA.
 For better ventilation and cooling, allow sufficient clearance space (50 mm (1.97”) is
recommended) between the NC controller and the adjacent objects or wall, or it may cause
malfunction of the controller.
 Do not block the ventilation holes of the NC controller, or it may cause malfunction of the
controller.

2.2.4 Hardware specifications

NC200 B series lathe controller

Model NC200B-LI-A NC200B-LI-P NC200B-LS-A
Operating environment 10% to 95% RH [0 to +50°C (32°F to 122°F)]
Storage environment 10% to 95% RH [-20 to +60°C (-4°F to +140°F)]
Cooling method Natural cooling
Voltage +24 VDC (-10% to +15%) (built-in isolated circuit)
Dielectric withstanding
Between 24 VDC and FG terminals: 500 VAC for 1 minute
voltage
Power consumption 21.6 W (24V; 0.9 A)
3V lithium battery (CR2032) × 1
Battery Battery life varies according to the ambient temperature and operating conditions;
approximately 3 years in room temperature of 25°C (77°F)
Supported USB drive
FAT16 / FAT32
format
Supported CF card
FAT16 / FAT32 / EXT4 (only for Linux)
format
Weight (kg) 4.5 4.7 3.7

OPENCNC B series controller

Model NC30EB
Operating environment 10% to 95% RH [0°C to +50°C (32°F to 122°F)]
Storage environment 10% to 95% RH [-20°C to +60°C (-4°F to +140°F)]
Cooling method Natural cooling
Voltage +24 VDC (-10% to +15%) (built-in isolated circuit)
Dielectric withstanding
Between 24 VDC and FG terminals: 500 VAC for 1 minute
voltage
Power consumption 19.2 W (24V; 0.8 A)
3V lithium battery (CR2032) × 1
Battery Battery life varies according to the ambient temperature and operating conditions;
approximately 3 years in room temperature of 25°C (77°F)
Supported USB drive
FAT16 / FAT32
format
Supported CF card
FAT16 / FAT32 / EXT4 (only for Linux)
format
Weight (kg) 1.8

2-10
Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual Installation

2.2.5 Outline and mounting dimensions

NC200 B series lathe controller - appearance and dimension tables

NC200B-LI-A dimension drawing

2

Outline dimension table

Symbol Dimensions
A 400 mm
B 390 mm
C 320 mm
D 310 mm
E 22 mm
F 70 mm

Mounting dimension table

Symbol Dimensions
H 302 ± 0.3 mm
H1 310 mm
W 378 ± 0.3 mm
W1 130 mm
W2 130 mm
W3 130 mm
I Φ4 mm

2-11
 Installation Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual

NC200B-LI-P dimension drawing

Outline dimension table

Symbol Dimensions
A 400 mm
B 390 mm
C 320 mm
D 310 mm
E 22 mm
F 70 mm

Mounting dimension table

Symbol Dimensions
H 302 ± 0.3 mm
H1 310 mm
W 378 ± 0.3 mm
W1 130 mm
W2 130 mm
W3 130 mm
I Φ4 mm

2-12
Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual Installation

NC200B-LS-A dimension drawing

2
Outline dimension table
Symbol Dimensions
A 400 mm
B 390 mm
C 200 mm
D 190 mm
E 22 mm
F 70 mm

Mounting dimension table

Symbol Dimensions
H 182 ± 0.3 mm
H1 190 mm
W 378 ± 0.3 mm
W1 130 mm
W2 130 mm
W3 130 mm
I Φ4 mm

2-13
 Installation Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual

B series OPENCNC - appearance and dimension tables

NC30EB dimension drawing

2
A F G
B W1

C D E H1

Outline dimension table

Symbol Dimensions
A 65 mm
B 25 mm
C 205 mm
D 220 mm
E 236 mm
F 70 mm
G 191 mm

Mounting dimension table

Symbol Dimensions
H1 220 ± 1.0 mm
W1 25 ± 0.3 mm
I M4

2-14
Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual Installation

2.2.6 Operating interface installation (for OPENCNC models)

 Operating interface installation

2
A. Connect the OPENCNC series controller to standard operating interfaces, including
(1) Delta HMI screen, (2) keyboard (functions the same as machine operation panel A), and
(3) machine operation panel B.
B. Connect the OPENCNC series controller to non-Delta operating interfaces, including
(4) screen and (5) keyboard.

The NC series controller can connect to (6) ASDA series AC servo drives, (7) ASDA-S spindle
servo drive, (8) ECMA series servo motors, and (9) ECMS series spindle servo motor.

2-15
 Installation Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual

 Connection through computer and network

Connect the OPENCNC series controller to (3) ASDA series AC servo drives, (4) ASDA-S

2
spindle servo drive, (5) ECMA series servo motors, and (6) ECMS series spindle servo motor
through the computer and network, including (1) PC-based controller and (2) mouse and the
public software for Delta OPENCNC.

2-16
Wiring
This chapter illustrates the wiring and connectors of the controller, and provides the
3
wiring diagrams for each function.

3.1 Wiring for A series products ································································· 3-3

3.1.1 A series product interface ······························································ 3-3
3.1.2 Connectors of A series controller ····················································· 3-7
3.1.2.1 NC200 series connectors ························································ 3-7
3.1.2.2 OPENCNC series connectors ················································ 3-10
3.1.3 Wiring for power connector ·························································· 3-12
3.1.4 Wiring for RS-485 ······································································ 3-13
3.1.5 Wiring for spindle feedback input ·················································· 3-14
3.1.6 Wiring for spindle analog output ···················································· 3-15
3.1.7 Wiring for high-speed counter input (HSI) ······································· 3-18
3.1.8 Wiring for emergency stop ··························································· 3-20
3.1.9 Wiring for MPG connector ··························································· 3-21
3.1.10 Wiring for remote I/O connector ·················································· 3-25
3.1.10.1 NC-EIO-R2010 ·································································· 3-28
3.1.10.2 NC-EIO-R3216 ·································································· 3-31
3.1.10.3 NC-EIO-R3232 ·································································· 3-34
3.1.11 Wiring for local I/O connector ······················································ 3-38
3.2 Wiring for B series products ······························································· 3-42
3.2.1 B series product interface ···························································· 3-42
3.2.2 Connectors of B series controller ·················································· 3-48
3.2.2.1 NC200B series connectors ···················································· 3-48
3.2.2.2 OPENCNC series connectors ················································ 3-49
3.2.3 Wiring for power connector ·························································· 3-51
3.2.4 Wiring for RS-485 (CN1) ····························································· 3-52
3.2.5 Wiring for spindle pulse output connector (SPINDLE) ························ 3-53
3.2.6 Wiring for spindle analog output (CN1) ··········································· 3-55
3.2.7 Wiring for spindle analog feedback connector (SPINDLE) ·················· 3-57
3.2.8 Wiring for high-speed counter input (HSI) (CN1) ······························· 3-59
3.2.9 Wiring for emergency stop (CN1) ·················································· 3-61
3.2.10 Wiring for MPG connector ·························································· 3-62
3.2.11 Wiring for remote I/O connector··················································· 3-66
 Wiring Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual

3.2.11.1 NC-EIO-R2010 ·································································· 3-69

3.2.11.2 NC-EIO-R3216 ·································································· 3-72

3
3.2.11.3 NC-EIO-R3232 ·································································· 3-75
3.2.11.4 NC-EIO-T3232 ·································································· 3-78
3.2.12 Wiring for local I/O connector ····················································· 3-81
3.2.13 External machine operation panel B for NC200B series models ········· 3-85

3-2
Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual Wiring

3.1 Wiring for A series products

3.1.1 A series product interface

3
 NC200 series

NC200A-LI-A_

No. Connector Description

Connects to high-speed serial I/O module: each module has 32
input and 32 output points. The maximum distance between
(1) Remote I/O
stations is 20 m (65.62 ft) and up to 8 remote I/O modules can be
connected.
(2) HSI connector Connects to high-speed counter and emergency stop inputs.
One set of spindle encoder signal input.
(3) Spindle connector One set of analog signal output.
One set of RS-485 serial communication signal.
Connects to an external MPG handwheel (powered by the built-in
(4) MPG connector 5 VDC power).
7 input and 1 output points are available.
(5) CF card slot For storing G-code programs.
(6) Ethernet connector For DNC control and system monitoring.
(7) DMCNET connector High-speed communication network interface.
Press the switch to open the circuit and have the system stop in
(8) Emergency stop switch
an emergency.
(9) Battery Battery holder.
(10) 24 VDC power 24 VDC power input; for supplying power to the controller.
(11) Local I/O input terminal 8 input points.
(12) Local I/O output terminal 5 output points.
(13) 24 VDC power For supplying power to the local I/O.

3-3
 Wiring Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual

NC200P-LI-A_

No. Connector Description

Connects to high-speed serial I/O module: each module has 32
input and 32 output points. The maximum distance between
(1) Remote I/O
stations is 20 m (65.62 ft) and up to 8 remote I/O modules can be
connected.
(2) HSI connector Connects to high-speed counter and emergency stop inputs.
One set of spindle encoder signal input.
(3) Spindle connector One set of analog signal output.
One set of RS-485 serial communication signal.
(4) MPG Embedded MPG on machine operation panel B.
(5) CF card slot For storing G-code programs.
(6) Ethernet connector For DNC control and system monitoring.
(7) DMCNET connector High-speed communication network interface.
(8) Emergency stop switch -
(9) Battery Battery holder.
(10) 24 VDC power 24 VDC power input; for supplying power to the controller.
(11) Local I/O input terminal 8 input points.
(12) Local I/O output terminal 5 output points.
For supplying power to the local I/O and the lights for CYCLE
(13) 24 VDC power
START and FEED HOLD buttons.

Safety precautions for installation:

1. Check if the wiring for 24 VDC power is correct.
2. The local I/O requires an additional 24 VDC power supply to drive X inputs and Y outputs.
3. Short-circuit the IES (input contact of emergency stop signal) to have the controller ready for
use.
4. If an alarm occurs or the emergency stop signal is On, power off the servo drive by
disconnecting the power at the magnetic contactor (MC) with Y outputs.

3-4
Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual Wiring

 OPENCNC series

NC30E(H)

No. Connector Description

(1) - Indicators.
Connects to high-speed serial I/O module: each module has 32 input
(2) Remote I/O and 32 output points. The maximum distance between stations is
20 m (65.62 ft) and up to 8 remote I/O modules can be connected.
(3) HSI connector Connects to high-speed counter and emergency stop inputs.
Connects to an external MPG handwheel (powered by the built-in
(4) MPG connector 5 VDC power).
8 input points are available.
One set of spindle encoder signal input.
(5) Spindle connector One set of analog signal output.
One set of RS-485 serial communication signal.
(6) 24 VDC power 24 VDC power input; for supplying power to the controller.
(7) CF card slot For storing G-code programs.
(8) PAN interface One USB connector for connecting to machine operation panel B.
Three USB host connectors for connecting to the mouse, keyboard,
(9) USB ports
and flash drive.
(10) VGA connector For connecting to a screen.
(11) Ethernet connector Ethernet interface.
DMCNET
(12) High-speed communication network interface.
connector
(13) - Rotary switch for switching the debugging mode.

3-5
 Wiring Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual

Description of setting the rotary switch for switching the debugging mode:
Setting value Mode

3
Standard mode
Description of the indicator lights:
PWR Green: system power is on
Flashing green: system is ready
RDY
Orange: in modes 1 - 3
0
SON Green: servo is ready
RIO Green: remote I/O connection is normal
ETH Green: network communication is normal
Red: system alarm occurs
ALM
Flashing green: software is updating
1 System update mode
2 Default mode
Reset IP to default setting.
Default IP addresses:
3 Controller IP 192.168.1.11
Subnet mask 255.255.255.0
Remote PC IP 192.168.1.10

Safety precautions for installation:

1. Check if the wiring for 24 VDC power is correct.
2. The remote I/O requires an external 24 VDC power supply to drive X inputs and Y outputs.
3. If an alarm occurs or the emergency stop signal is On, power off the servo drive by
disconnecting the power at the magnetic contactor (MC) with Y outputs.

3-6
Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual Wiring

3.1.2 Connectors of A series controller

3.1.2.1 NC200 series connectors

3
Symbol Function Description
Connects to 24 VDC power (15 W at 0.6 A).
Symbol Description
Power input for +24V +24 VDC power
0V, +24V,
controller
0V 0 VDC power
Power ground
Connects to 24 VDC power (15 W at 0.6 A).
Power input for Symbol Description
0V, +24V machine operation
panel B +24V +24 VDC power
0V 0 VDC power
Power specifications for DI points:
voltage < 24 VDC, current: 8 - 25 mA.
DI
Pin No. Description
X112 - X119 8 input points in total.
I/O
Power specifications for DO points:
voltage < 24 VDC, current < 120 mA.
DO
Pin No. Description
Y112 - Y116 5 output points in total.
Includes signals of spindle feedback, analog output, and 1 set
of RS-485 serial communication.
Pin No. Description
1 RS485_GND
2 RS485_D+
3 RS485_D-
4 SP_OUT
5 SP_GND
6 Reserved
SPINDLE Spindle connector
7 EMG_IN; connects to +24 VDC
8 SP_A+
9 SP_A-
10 DC +5V_OUT
11 SP_B+
12 SP_B-
13 SP_Z+
14 SP_Z-
15 GND

3-7
 Wiring Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual

Symbol Function Description

7 DI points, 1 DO point, and 1 set of differential type MPG input
signal.

3
Pin No. Description
1 DI_COM; connects to +24 VDC or 0 VDC
2-7 DI (X28 - X33)
8 DI (X26)
MPG (Handwheel) 9 DO (Y27)
MPG
connector
10 5VDC_OUT (< 200 mA)
11 XA+
12 XA-
13 XB+
14 XB-
15 5VDC_GND
2 sets of high-speed and 1 set of emergency stop signal
inputs.
Pin No. Description
High-speed counter 1 EMG_IN
and emergency stop 2 EMG_GND
HSI
signal input
connector 3 HSI_1
4 HSI_COM; connects to +24 VDC or 0V
5 HSI_2
6 HSI_COM; short-circuit Pin 4 and Pin 6.
The remote I/O module communication connector can
connect to 8 modules. Each module has 32 input and 32
output points. The input points range from X256 - X511 and
the output points range from Y256 - Y511.
Pin No. Description
Remote I/O module 1 TX+
REMOTE I/O
connector 2 TX-
3 RX-
4 RX+
5 GND
6 SHIELD
The Ethernet connector is an RJ45 connector. You can use a
network cable to connect to the PC.
Pin definition of both ends:
Pin No. / color of end A Pin No. / color of end B
1: orange & white 1: orange & white
2: orange 2: orange
ETHERNET Ethernet connector 3: green & white 3: green & white
4: blue 4: blue
5: blue & white 5: blue & white
6: green 6: green
7: brown & white 7: brown & white
8: brown 8: brown
Connects to Deltas DMCNET servo drive . The DMCNET
DMCNET DMCNET connector connector is a standard RJ45 connector and the wiring
method is the same as that of the Ethernet connector.

3-8
Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual Wiring

Symbol Function Description

Emergency stop A normally-closed contact. Press the switch to open the circuit
EMG
switch in an emergency.

3
CYCLE CYCLE START
Contact of the CYCLE START button.
START button
FEED HOLD FEED HOLD button Contact of the FEED HOLD button.
The emergency stop contact. The EMG flag is enabled when
Emergency stop
IES the circuit is open. (Wire this contact to the normally-closed
contact
contact of the emergency stop switch.)

Pay special attention to the following when wiring:

1. The IES connector is the input contact of the emergency stop signal. The EMG flag is
enabled when the circuit is open.
2. The power for the lights of CYCLE START and FEED HOLD buttons is 24 VDC.

3-9
 Wiring Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual

3.1.2.2 OPENCNC series connectors

Symbol Function Description

3
Connects to 24 VDC power (15 W at 0.6 A).
Symbol Description
Power input for +24V +24 VDC power
0V, +24V,
controller
0V 0 VDC power
Power ground
Includes signals of spindle feedback, analog output, and 1 set
of RS-485 serial communication.
Pin No. Description
1 RS485_GND
2 RS485_D+
3 RS485_D-
4 SP_OUT
5 SP_GND
6 Reserved
SPINDLE Spindle connector
7 Reserved
8 SP_A+
9 SP_A-
10 DC +5V_OUT
11 SP_B+
12 SP_B-
13 SP_Z+
14 SP_Z-
15 GND
8 DI points and 1 set of differential type MPG signal input.
Pin No. Description
1 DI_COM; connects to +24 VDC or 0 VDC
2-9 DI (X28 - X35)
MPG (Handwheel) 10 5VDC_OUT (< 200 mA)
MPG
connector 11 XA+
12 XA-
13 XB+
14 XB-
15 5VDC_GND

3-10
Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual Wiring

Symbol Function Description

2 sets of high-speed and 1 set of emergency stop input signal.
Pin No. Description

3
1 EMG_IN (+5 VDC voltage output)
High-speed counter 2 MODE_ENABLE (+5 VDC voltage output)
HSI and emergency stop
signal input connector 3 HSI_1
4 GND_COM (EMG_IN / MODE_ENABLE)
5 HSI_2
6 HSI_COM; connects to +24 VDC or 0V
The remote I/O module communication connector can
connect to 8 modules. Each module has 32 input and 32
output points. The input points range from X256 - X511 and
the output points range from Y256 - Y511.
Pin No. Description
Remote I/O module 1 TX+
REMOTE I/O
connector 2 TX-
3 RX-
4 RX+
5 GND
6 SHIELD
Connector for The USB host connector for connecting to the machine
PAN2 machine operation operation panel B. Do not connect any USB devices to this
panel B connector.
USB connectors for connecting to USB devices, such as a
USB USB connector USB flash drive, a mouse, or a keyboard. This connector
does not support connecting multiple USB devices in series.
Connects to an external monitor (only monitors with the
VGA VGA connector
refresh rate of 60 Hz are supported).
The Ethernet connector is an RJ45 connector. You can use a
network cable to connect to the PC.
Pin definition of both ends:
Pin No. / color of end A Pin No. / color of end B
1: orange & white 1: orange & white
2: orange 2: orange
ETHERNET Ethernet connector 3: green & white 3: green & white
4: blue 4: blue
5: blue & white 5: blue & white
6: green 6: green
7: brown & white 7: brown & white
8: brown 8: brown
Connects to Deltas DMCNET servo drive . The DMCNET
DMCNET DMCNET connector connector is a standard RJ45 connector and the wiring
method is the same as that of the Ethernet connector.
MODE Debugging mode The rotary switch for switching to the debugging mode.

3-11
 Wiring Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual

3.1.3 Wiring for power connector

The power supply is directly connected to the 24 VDC connector on the NC series controller.

3  NC200 series models

24 VDC power
supply

DCOUT 24 VDC

AC power ACIN

FG 24 VDC

FG

 OPENCNC series models

24 VDC power
supply

DCOUT 24 VDC

AC power ACIN

FG

FG

24 VDC

3-12
Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual Wiring

3.1.4 Wiring for RS-485

The NC series controller has one set of RS-485 communication signal for serial communication

3
with external devices.

Pin assignment for NC200 series models

(1) RS-485 pins (female); (2) RS-485 pins (male)

Model Symbol Pin No. Function description

2 D+
NC200 SPINDLE
3 D-

Pin assignment for OPENCNC series models

(1) RS-485 pins (female); (2) RS-485 pins (male)

Model Symbol Pin No. Function description

2 D+
NC30E(H) SPINDLE
3 D-

3-13
 Wiring Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual

3.1.5 Wiring for spindle feedback input

The NC series controller has one set of spindle feedback input.

3 Pin assignment for NC200 series models

(1) Spindle feedback input pins (female); (2) Spindle feedback input pins (male)

Pin assignment for OPENCNC series models

(1) Spindle feedback input pins (female); (2) Spindle feedback input pins (male)

Model Symbol Pin No. Function description

8 SP_A+ Spindle encoder A+ pulse input
9 SP_A- Spindle encoder A- pulse input
10 DC +5V_OUT Spindle encoder +5 VDC power output
11 SP_B+ Spindle encoder B+ pulse input
All SPINDLE
12 SP_B- Spindle encoder B- pulse input
13 SP_Z+ Spindle encoder Z+ pulse input
14 SP_Z- Spindle encoder Z- pulse input
15 GND Power ground for spindle encoder

3-14
Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual Wiring

3.1.6 Wiring for spindle analog output

The NC series controller has one set of spindle analog output which controls the spindle speed.

Pin assignment for NC200 series models

3

(1) Spindle analog output pins (female); (2) Spindle analog output pins (male)

Pin assignment for OPENCNC series models

(1) Spindle analog output pins (female); (2) Spindle analog output pins (male)

Model Symbol Pin No. Function description

4 SP_OUT Spindle analog output
All SPINDLE
5 SP_GND Ground for spindle analog output

3-15
 Wiring Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual

Spindle settings

1. Pr.399 settings

3
Spindle control mode
Parameter description
Communication Analog
Spindle function
1 1
0: off; 1: on
Closed-loop control flag
0: off 1 0 or 1
1: on (feedback encoder is required)
Spindle output mode
0: communication (DMCNET); 1: pulse (B series); 0 2
2: analog voltage
Speed control mode
1 1
1: PUU
Spindle encoder magnification
0 1
0: 1000 times; 1: 4 times
Analog spindle speed source
0 1
0: system command; 1: encoder feedback
Analog spindle feedback encoder source
0 0
0: spindle; 1: motor
Spindle voltage output mode
0: -10V to +10V 0 0 or 1
1: 0V to +10V (effective only under open-loop control)

2. In the [CONFIG] (channel setting) screen, enable SP1 and set its port number to 10
(dedicated port for analog output).
Pins 4 and 5 of the SPINDLE connector are used for spindle analog output.
The analog voltage resolution is 14-bit.
When Pr.399 [Spindle voltage output mode] = 0, the analog voltage output ranges from
-10V to +10V.*
Output voltage Corresponding speed
+10 VDC Maximum speed (forward)
0 VDC Zero speed
-10 VDC Maximum speed (reverse)
Note: applicable to closed-loop and open-loop control; meeting the application requirements for

tapping and threading functions.

When Pr.399 [Spindle voltage output mode] = 1, the analog voltage output ranges from
0V to +10V.*
Output voltage Corresponding speed
+10 VDC Maximum speed
0 VDC Zero speed
Note: only applicable to open-loop control.

3-16
Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual Wiring

If the encoder feedback signal is received, the threading function is available, but the tapping
function is not available. The spindle connector conversion card (NC-EXM-S01) is as follows.

3-17
 Wiring Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual

3.1.7 Wiring for high-speed counter input (HSI)

The NC series controller has two sets of hardware high-speed counter signal inputs. For the

3
wiring of high-speed counter input (bi-directional coupling), the maximum input bandwidth is up
to 5 MHz; the operating voltage ranges from 22 to 26V; the permissible current ranges from 8 to
20 mA; and the surge current is below 50 mA.
 When a signal is input to HSI_1, the corresponding special M, M2142, is On. If there is a
G31 Skip command in the block, the system skips the block and jumps to the next block.
 When a signal is input to HSI_2, the corresponding special M, M2143, is On. If there is a
G31 Skip command in the block, the system skips the block and jumps to the next block.
Relevant parameters:
Parameter
Name Function
address
G31 high speed input 1 0: NC; 1: NO
Pr.25
G31 high speed input 2 0: NC; 1: NO
Switch for G31 high speed input 1 0: off; 1: on
Pr.46
Switch for G31 high speed input 2 0: off; 1: on
Pr.307 G31 input source 0: off; 1: HSI 1; 2: HSI 2; 3: HSI 1 & 2

Note: the connection direction of the external power input for HSI does not affect the operation.

3-18
Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual Wiring

Pin assignment for NC200 series models

3
(1) High-speed counter input pins (female); (2) High-speed counter input pins (male)

Model Symbol Pin No. Function description

3 HSI_1 High-speed counter input 1 (10 mA)
4 HSI_COM High-speed counter COM; connects to +24 VDC or 0V
NC200 HSI
5 HSI_2 High-speed counter input 2 (10 mA)
6 HSI_COM High-speed counter COM; short-circuit Pin 4 and Pin 6.

Pin assignment for OPENCNC series models

(1) High-speed counter input pins (female); (2) High-speed counter input pins (male)

Model Symbol Pin No. Function description

3 HSI_1 High-speed counter input 1 (10 mA)
4 GND GND
NC30E(H) HSI
5 HSI_2 High-speed counter input 2 (10 mA)
6 HSI_COM High-speed counter COM; connects to +24 VDC or 0V

Note: HSI_1 and HSI_2 can output +5V power, so either HSI_1 or HSI_2 can form a circuit with GND.

3-19
 Wiring Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual

3.1.8 Wiring for emergency stop

The NC series controller has one set of emergency stop signal input.

3 Pin assignment for NC200 series models

(1) & (2) EMG pins; (3) Emergency stop button

Model Symbol Pin No. Function description

7 EMG_IN Emergency stop power input (+24 VDC)
SPINDLE
15 GND Emergency stop power input (0 VDC)
NC200
1 EMG_IN Emergency stop signal input
HSI
2 EMG_GND Emergency stop signal input

Pin assignment for OPENCNC series models

(1) EMG pins; (2) Emergency stop button

Model Symbol Pin No. Function description

1 EMG_IN EMG (+5 VDC output)
NC30E(H) HSI
4 GND GND

3-20
Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual Wiring

3.1.9 Wiring for MPG connector

The NC series controller has one MPG connector for receiving pulses generated by the MPG

3
handwheel. This connector can directly supply +5 VDC power to the MPG handwheel.

Pin assignment for NC200 series models

(1) MPG connector (female); (2) MPG connector (male)

Model Symbol Pin No. Function description

1 EXT_24 DI COM point; connects to +24 VDC or 0 VDC
2 DI_1 X28
3 DI_2 X29
4 DI_3 X30
5 DI_4 X31
6 DI_5 X32
7 DI_6 X33
NC200 MPG 8 DI_7 X26
9 DO_8 Y27
10 5V_OUT 5VDC_OUT
11 XA+ XA+
12 XA- XA-
13 XB+ XB+
14 XB- XB-
15 5V_GND 5VDC_GND

3-21
 Wiring Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual

Pin assignment for OPENCNC series models

(1) MPG connector (female); (2) MPG connector (male)

Model Symbol Pin No. Function description

1 EXT_24 DI COM point; connects to +24 VDC or 0 VDC
2 DI_1 X28
3 DI_2 X29
4 DI_3 X30
5 DI_4 X31
6 DI_5 X32
7 DI_6 X33
NC30E_ MPG 8 DI_7 X34
9 DI_8 X35
10 5V_OUT 5VDC_OUT
11 XA+ XA+
12 XA- XA-
13 XB+ XB+
14 XB- XB-
15 5V_GND 5VDC_GND

3-22
Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual Wiring

Depending on the signal types, the wiring of MPG handwheel can be divided into single-ended
type (EHDW-BA6SI) and differential type (EHDW-BE6SI).

3
Wiring diagram for the pulse signals of the single-ended type MPG handwheel (EHDW-BA6SI):
Contacts on
MPG connector on CNC MPG handwheel
5V_OUT P10 DC 5V
XA+ P11 DC 0V
XA- P12 A
XB+ P13 B
XB- P14
5V_GND P15
Contacts on
MPG connector on CNC
MPG handwheel
5V_OUT P10 DC 5V
XA+ P11 DC 0V
XA- P12 A
XB+ P13 B
XB- P14
5V_GND P15

Wiring diagram for the pulse signals of the differential type MPG handwheel (EHDW-BE6SI):
Contacts on
MPG connector on CNC
MPG handwheel
5V_OUT P10 DC 5V
XA+ P11 A
XA- P12 A-
XB+ P13 B
XB- P14 B-
5V_GND P15 DC 0V

3-23
 Wiring Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual

Wiring diagram for the MPG switch:

 The MPG connector on the controller supplies 5V power to the MPG.

3
MPG handwheel Circuit of MPG connector

Axis X P2 (X28)
Axis Y

Internal
circuit
Axis Z EXT_24V
X1
5V_OUT
X 10
X 100
5 VDC
5V_GND
COM

 External 24V power supply: EXT_24 can connect to +24V or 0V.

MPG handwheel Circuit of MPG connector MPG handwheel Circuit of MPG connector

Axis X P2 (X28) Axis X P2 (X28)

Axis Y Axis Y
Internal

Internal
circuit

circuit
Axis Z EXT_24V Axis Z EXT_24V
X1 X1
5V_OUT 5V_OUT
X 10 X 10
24 VDC 24 VDC
X 100 X 100
5 VDC 5 VDC
5V_GND 5V_GND
COM COM

3-24
Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual Wiring

3.1.10 Wiring for remote I/O connector

The NC series controller can connect to 8 remote I/O modules at most. There is an offset of 32

3
points for the I/O address of every additional station. Thus, up to 256 input points and 256
output points are available for use.

RS422

X256 X288 X320 X352

Y256 Y288 Y320 Y352

X384 X416 X448 X480

Y384 Y416 Y448 Y480

(1) Remote I/O connector (female); (2) Remote I/O connector (male)

Pin No. Function description

1 TX+
2 TX-
3 RX-
4 RX+
5 GND
6 SHIELD

Wiring diagram for the remote I/O connector:

3-25
 Wiring Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual

There are two types of remote I/O module: opto-isolated type and relay type. The model name
explanation is as follows.

3 NC - EIO - T 32 32 _
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)

(1) Series name

(2) Product name

(3) Type:

T: opto-isolated type (permissible current: below 50 mA; surge current: below 100 mA)
R: relay type (the permissible current can be 5A or 16A according to the relay
specification)

(4) Number of inputs

(5) Number of outputs

(6) Permissible current:

None: 5A (G2R relay)

A: 16A (G2R relay)

B: 16A (IDEC relay)

The remote I/O module models are as follows.

Model Description Note
G2R relay
Relay type I/O module with 20 input points and 10 output
NC-EIO-R2010 Permissible
points.
current: 5A
G2R relay
Relay type I/O module with 20 inputs points and 10 output
NC-EIO-R2010A Permissible
points.
current: 16A
IDEC relay
Relay type I/O module with 20 inputs points and 10 output
NC-EIO-R2010B Permissible
points.
current: 16A
G2R relay
Relay type I/O module with 32 input points and 16 output
NC-EIO-R3216 Permissible
points.
current: 5A
G2R relay
Relay type I/O module with 32 input points and 16 output
NC-EIO-R3216A Permissible
points.
current: 16A
IDEC relay
Relay type I/O module with 32 input points and 16 output
NC-EIO-R3216B Permissible
points.
current: 16A
Relay type I/O module with 32 input points and 32 output Permissible
NC-EIO-R3232
points. current: 5A
Opto-isolated type I/O module with 32 input points and 32 Permissible
NC-EIO-T3232
output points. current: 50 mA

3-26
Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual Wiring

Precautions for wiring the remote I/O module are as follows.

(1) The COM input point is used for signal current. Do not connect DC24V or 0V power to the

3
COM point.

(2) You can select the H (PNP) or L (NPN) signal with the H / L switch according to the
specification of the external sensor. When H (PNP) is selected, the COM point is +24V;
when L (NPN) is selected, the COM point is 0V.

L (NPN)
VDD
COM +
GND
GND
COM
VDD
H (PNP)

SW1 = H (PNP) SW1 = L (NPN)

COM COM

Direction of current Direction of current

X256 X257 X258 X259

COM+ R COM+ R

R R

Internal circuit

(3) Up to 8 modules can be connected to the remote I/O module connector simultaneously.
Turn the rotary switch on the PCB to switch the station number. 0 = Station 1, 1 = Station
2, 2 = Station 3, and so on to 7, which is Station 8.

When you turn the rotary switch to 8 and 9 to set the remote I/O modules as Stations 9
and 10, the system regards Station 9 (position: 8) as Station 1 (position: 0) and Station 10
(position: 9) as Station 2 (position: 1), so do not turn the rotary switch to 0 and 1 at the
same time.

Rotary switch for station number

3-27
 Wiring Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual

3.1.10.1 NC-EIO-R2010

X256 X258

3
GND GND

24V 24V
X257 X259

Y256 Y257

DI wiring example

NPN 2-wire proximity sensor with polarity:

(1) Set the H / L switch to L (NPN), and short-circuit the GND (commonly a blue wire) of the
sensor and the GND (0V) of the same power system.

(2) Connect Vcc (commonly a brown wire) to the input contact.

NPN 2-wire proximity sensor

Brown
Direction of current

Blue

GND

X257 X259
24V 24V

3-28
Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual Wiring

PNP 2-wire proximity sensor with polarity:

(1) Set the H / L switch to H (PNP), and short-circuit the Vcc (commonly a brown wire) of the

3
sensor and the +24V of the same power system.

(2) Connect GND (commonly a blue wire) to the input contact.

PNP 2-wire proximity sensor

Blue

Direction of current
X256 X258
GND GND
Brown

X259

24V

NPN 3-wire proximity sensor with polarity:

(1) Set the H / L switch to L (NPN).

(2) Connect the Vcc (commonly a brown wire) of the sensor to +24V.

(3) Connect the GND (commonly a blue wire) of the sensor to GND (0V).

(4) Connect the signal wire (commonly a black wire) of the sensor to the input contact.

NPN 3-wire proximity sensor

Brown

Black
Blue
GND
Direction of current

X257 X259
24V 24V

3-29
 Wiring Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual

PNP 3-wire proximity sensor:

(1) Set the H / L switch to H (PNP).

3
(2) Connect the Vcc (commonly a brown wire) of the sensor to +24V.

(3) Connect the GND (commonly a blue wire) of the sensor to GND (0V).

(4) Connect the signal wire (commonly a black wire) of the sensor to the input contact.

PNP 3-wire proximity sensor

Blue

Black

Brown
Direction of current

X256 GND

X257 X259
24V 24V

DO wiring example

(1) The output contacts of the remote I/O module are in pairs. Use these contacts as dry
contacts.

(2) The output contacts should be connected to an external power supply.

(3) After the controller sets the output contacts to On, the current circuit is closed and the
Lamp is On.

Y256 Y257

DC

R Lamp

3-30
Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual Wiring

3.1.10.2 NC-EIO-R3216

DI wiring example

NPN 2-wire proximity sensor with polarity:

(1) Set the H / L switch to L (NPN), and the COM point is 0V. Connect the GND (commonly a
blue wire) of the sensor to the COM point or short-circuit the GND of the sensor to the GND
(0V) of the same power system.

(2) Connect Vcc (commonly a brown wire) to the input contact.

NPN 2-wire proximity sensor

Brown
Direction of current

Blue

COM

X256 X258
X257 X259

3-31
 Wiring Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual

PNP 2-wire proximity sensor with polarity:

(1) Set the H / L switch to H (PNP), and the COM point is +24V. Connect the Vcc (commonly a

3
brown wire) of the sensor to the COM point or short-circuit the Vcc of the sensor to the
+24V of the same power system.

(2) Connect GND (commonly a blue wire) to the input contact.

PNP 2-wire proximity sensor

Blue

Direction of current
Brown
COM

X256 X258
X257 X259

NPN 3-wire proximity sensor:

(1) Set the H / L switch to L (NPN).

(2) Connect the Vcc (commonly a brown wire) of the sensor to +24V.

(3) Connect the GND (commonly a blue wire) of the sensor to COM (0V).

(4) Connect the signal wire (commonly a black wire) of the sensor to the input contact.

NPN 3-wire proximity sensor

Brown
VDC+24V
Black
Blue

COM
Direction of current

X256 X258
X257 X259

3-32
Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual Wiring

PNP 3-wire proximity sensor:

(1) Set the H / L switch to H (PNP).

3
(2) Connect the Vcc (commonly a brown wire) of the sensor to +24V.

(3) Connect the GND (commonly a blue wire) of the sensor to 0V.

(4) Connect the signal wire (commonly a black wire) of the sensor to the input contact.

PNP 3-wire proximity sensor

Blue

Black GND (0V)

Brown
Direction of current

COM

X256 X258
X257 X259
DO wiring example

(1) The output contacts of the remote I/O module are in pairs. Use these contacts as dry
contacts.

(2) The output contacts should be connected to an external power supply.

(3) After the controller sets the output contacts to On, the current circuit is closed and the
Lamp is On.

Y256 Y257

DC

R Lamp

3-33
 Wiring Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual

3.1.10.3 NC-EIO-R3232

SW3

3 X256 ~ X263
L H L NPN H PNP

L H L H L H L H

SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4

Y256 ~ Y263

Y256 ~ Y263

DI wiring example
NPN 2-wire proximity sensor with polarity:

(1) Switch the short circuit jumper to L (NPN), and short-circuit the GND (commonly a blue
wire) of the sensor and the GND (0V) of the same power system.

(2) Connect Vcc (commonly a brown wire) to the input contact.

NPN 2-wire proximity sensor

Brown
Direction of current

Blue

GND (0V)

X256 X263

3-34
Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual Wiring

PNP 2-wire system proximity sensor with polarity:

(1) Switch the short circuit jumper to H (PNP), and short-circuit the Vcc (commonly a brown

3
wire) of the sensor and the +24V of the same power system.

(2) Connect GND (commonly a blue wire) to the input contact.

COM COM
COM COM

X256 X258
X257 X259
Y257 Y259
Y256 Y258

G0 G2
G1 G3

NPN 2-wire proximity switch with polarity:

(1) Set the H / L switch to L (NPN), and the COM point is 0V. Then, connect the GND
(commonly a blue wire) of the sensor to the COM, or short-circuit the GND of the sensor
and the GND (0V) of the same power system.

(2) Connect Vcc (commonly a brown wire) to the input contact.

NPN 2-wire proximity sensor

Brown
Direction of current

Blue

COM

X256 X258
X257 X259

3-35
 Wiring Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual

PNP 2-wire proximity sensor with polarity:

(1) Set the H / L switch to H (PNP), and the COM point is +24V. Then, connect Vcc

3
(commonly a brown wire) of the sensor to the COM point or short-circuit the Vcc and the
+24V of the same power system.

(2) Connect GND (commonly a blue wire) to the input contact.

PNP 2-wire proximity sensor

Blue

Direction of current
Brown
COM

X256 X258
X257 X259

NPN 3-wire proximity sensor:

(1) Set the H / L switch to L (NPN).

(2) Connect the Vcc (commonly a brown wire) of the sensor to +24V.

(3) Connect the GND (commonly a blue wire) of the sensor to 0V.

(4) Connect the signal wire (commonly a black wire) of the sensor to the input contact.

NPN 3-wire proximity sensor

Brown
VDC+24V
Black
Blue

COM
Direction of current

X256 X258
X257 X259

3-36
Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual Wiring

PNP 3-wire proximity sensor:

(1) Set the H / L switch to H (PNP).

3
(2) Connect the Vcc (commonly a brown wire) of the sensor to +24V.

(3) Connect the GND (commonly a blue wire) of the sensor to 0V.

(4) Connect the signal wire (commonly a black wire) of the sensor to the input contact.

PNP 3-wire proximity sensor

Blue

Black GND (0V)

Brown
Direction of current

COM

X256 X258
X257 X259

DO wiring example

(1) The output contacts of the remote I/O module are in pairs. Use these contacts as dry
contacts.

(2) The output contacts should be connected to an external power supply.

(3) After the controller sets the output contacts to On, the current circuit is closed and the
Lamp is On.

Y256

G0
DC

R Lamp

3-37
 Wiring Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual

3.1.11 Wiring for local I/O connector

The pin assignment for the local I/O connector of the NC200 series controllers is as follows.

3 Note: NC30E(H) series models do not have the local I/O connector.

(1) Local I/O connector (female); (2) Local I/O connector (male)

DI DO
Pin 1 X112 Pin 2 X113 Pin 1 Y112 Pin 2 Y113
Pin 3 X114 Pin 4 X115 Pin 3 Y114 Pin 4 Y115
Pin 5 X116 Pin 6 X117 Pin 5 Y116 - -
Pin 7 X118 Pin 8 X119 - - - -

3-38
Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual Wiring

DI wiring (24V power is supplied from machine operation panel B)

DO wiring (24V power is supplied from machine operation panel B)

3-39
 Wiring Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual

Pin assignment for OPENCNC series models

3
(1) Local I/O connector (female); (2) Local I/O connector (male)

I/O 1 I/O 2
Pin 1 X0 Pin 2 X1 Pin 1 X16 Pin 2 X17
Pin 3 X2 Pin 4 X3 Pin 3 X18 Pin 4 X19
Pin 5 X4 Pin 6 X5 Pin 5 X20 Pin 6 X21
Pin 7 X6 Pin 8 X7 Pin 7 X22 Pin 8 X23
Pin 9 X8 Pin 10 X9 Pin 9 X24 Pin 10 X25
Pin 11 X10 Pin 12 X11 Pin 11 X26 Pin 12 X27
Pin 13 X12 Pin 14 X13 Pin 13 X28 Pin 14 X29
Pin 15 X14 Pin 16 X15 Pin 15 X30 Pin 16 X31
Pin 17 DO_COM Pin 18 DI_COM Pin 17 DO_COM Pin 18 DI_COM
Pin 19 Y0 Pin 20 Y1 Pin 19 Y16 Pin 20 Y17
Pin 21 Y2 Pin 22 Y3 Pin 21 Y18 Pin 22 Y19
Pin 23 Y4 Pin 24 Y5 Pin 23 Y20 Pin 24 Y21
Pin 25 Y6 Pin 26 Y7 Pin 25 Y22 Pin 26 Y23
Pin 27 Y8 Pin 28 Y9 Pin 27 Y24 Pin 28 Y25
Pin 29 Y10 Pin 30 Y11 Pin 29 Y26 Pin 30 Y27
Pin 31 Y12 Pin 32 Y13 Pin 31 Y28 Pin 32 Y29
Pin 33 Y14 Pin 34 Y15 Pin 33 Y30 Pin 34 Y31

3-40
Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual Wiring

P1 P2(X17) P1 P2(X17)

3
DC
DC

P18(DI_COM) P18(DI_COM)

P33 P34 P33 P34

Local I/O - DI wiring

P1 P2

P17(DO_COM)
DC

Load

P33(Y14) P34

Local I/O - DO wiring

3-41
 Wiring Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual

3.2 Wiring for B series products

3.2.1 B series product interface

3
 NC200B series

NC200B-LI-A
(1) (2) (3) (4)

(5)

(6)

(10)

(7)

(11) (8)

(9)

(12) (13) (14)

No. Connector Description

Connects to high-speed serial I/O module: each module has 32 DI
(1) Remote I/O and 32 DO points. The maximum distance between stations is 20 m
(65.62 ft) and up to 8 remote I/O modules can be connected.
An RS-485 connector for communication with external devices.
2 sets of DA analog voltage output.
(2) CN1
2 sets of high-speed counter input.
Emergency stop contact.
One set of spindle encoder signal input.
(3) Spindle connector
One set of spindle pulse signal output.
Connects to an external MPG handwheel (powered by the built-in
(4) MPG connector 5 VDC power).
8 DI points are available.
(5) USB port Connects to the mouse, keyboard, or flash drive.
(6) CF card CF card slot: for storing files and programs.
(7) Ethernet connector For DNC control and system monitoring.
(8) DMCNET connector High-speed communication network interface.
Connects to an external emergency stop switch. When the circuit is
(9) IES
open, the system stops immediately.
(10) Battery Battery holder.
(11) 24 VDC power 24 VDC power input for supplying power to the controller.
(12) Local I/O input terminal 8 input points.
Local I/O output
(13) 5 output points.
terminal
(14) 24 VDC power For supplying power to the local I/O.

3-42
Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual Wiring

Safety precautions for installation:

1. Check if the wiring for 24 VDC power is correct.

3
2. The local I/O requires an additional 24 VDC power supply to drive X inputs and Y outputs.
3. Short-circuit the IES (input contact of emergency stop signal) to have the NC system ready
for use.
4. If an alarm occurs or the emergency stop signal is On, power off the servo drive by
disconnecting the power at the magnetic contactor (MC) with Y outputs.

3-43
 Wiring Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual

NC200B-LI-P
(1) (2) (3) (4)

3 (9)
(5)

(6)

(7)
(8)
(10)

(11) (12) (13)

No. Connector Description

Connects to high-speed serial I/O module: each module has 32 DI
(1) Remote I/O and 32 DO points. The maximum distance between stations is 20 m
(65.62 ft) and up to 8 remote I/O modules can be connected.
An RS-485 connector for communication with external devices.
2 sets of DA analog voltage output.
(2) CN1
2 sets of high-speed counter input.
Emergency stop contact.
One set of spindle encoder signal input.
(3) Spindle connector
One set of spindle pulse signal output.
The NC200B-LI-P series model does not have the MPG
(4) -
connector.
(5) USB port Connects to the mouse, keyboard, or flash drive.
(6) CF card CF card slot: for storing files and programs.
(7) Ethernet connector Ethernet connector; for DNC control and system monitoring.
(8) DMCNET connector High-speed communication network interface.
(9) Battery Battery holder.
(10) 24 VDC power 24 VDC power input for supplying power to the controller.
(11) Local I/O input terminal 8 input points.
(12) Local I/O output terminal 5 output points.
24 VDC power input. For supply power to local I/O and the lights for
(13) 24 VDC power
CYCLE START and FEED HOLD buttons.

Safety precautions for installation:

1. Check if the wiring for 24 VDC power is correct.
2. The local I/O requires an additional 24 VDC power supply to drive X inputs and Y outputs.
3. Short-circuit the IES (input contact of emergency stop signal) to have the NC system ready
for use.
4. If an alarm occurs or the emergency stop signal is On, power off the servo drive by
disconnecting the power at the magnetic contactor (MC) with Y outputs.

3-44
Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual Wiring

NC200B-LS-A

3
(9)

(10) (8)

(11)

No. Connector Description

Connects to high-speed serial I/O module: each module has 32 DI
(1) Remote I/O and 32 DO points. The maximum distance between stations is 20 m
(65.62 ft) and up to 8 remote I/O modules can be connected.
An RS-485 connector for communication with external devices.
2 sets of DA analog voltage output.
(2) CN1
2 sets of high-speed counter input.
Emergency stop contact.
Spindle One set of spindle encoder signal input.
(3)
connector One set of spindle pulse signal output.
Connects to an external MPG handwheel (powered by the built-in
(4) MPG connector
5 VDC power). 8 DI points are available.
(5) USB port Connects to the mouse, keyboard, or flash drive.
(6) CF card CF card slot: for storing files and programs.
Ethernet
(7) For DNC control and system monitoring.
connector
DMCNET
(8) High-speed communication network interface.
connector
(9) Battery Battery holder.
(10) 24 VDC power 24 VDC power input for supplying power to the controller.
(11) Keypad I/O Flat cable connector on machine operation panel B.

Safety precautions for installation:

1. Check if the wiring for 24 VDC power is correct.

3-45
 Wiring Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual

 OPENCNC series

NC30EB(H)

3 (6)
(12) (13) (14)

(7)
(1)

(8)
(2)

(9)

(3)

(10)

(4)

(5) (11)

No. Connector Description

(1) CF card CF card slot: for storing files and programs.
Three USB host connectors for connecting to the mouse,
(2) USB port
keyboard, and flash drive.
(3) VGA connector For connecting to a screen.
(4) Ethernet connector Ethernet connector; for DNC control and system monitoring.
(5) DMCNET connector High-speed communication network interface.
PWR Green: system power is on
RDY Flashing green: system is ready
(6) Indicators
SON Flashing green: servo is ready
ALM Red: system alarm occurs
Connects to high-speed serial I/O module: each module has 32
DI and 32 DO points. The maximum distance between stations
(7) Remote I/O
is 20 m (65.62 ft) and up to 8 remote I/O modules can be
connected.
Connects to an external MPG handwheel (powered by the built-
(8) MPG connector
in 5 VDC power). 8 DI points are available.
One set of spindle encoder signal input.
(9) Spindle connector
One set of spindle pulse signal output.
An RS-485 connector for communication with external devices.
2 sets of DA analog voltage output.
(10) CN1
2 sets of high-speed counter input.
Emergency stop contact.
(11) 24 VDC power 24 VDC power input for supplying power to the controller.
(12) Keypad I/O Connects to machine operation panel B.
(13) I/O 1 16 input / 16 output points.
(14) I/O 2 16 input / 16 output points.

3-46
Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual Wiring

Safety precautions for installation:

1. Check if the wiring for 24 VDC power is correct.

3
2. Remote I/O requires an additional 24 VDC power supply to drive X inputs and Y outputs.
3. If an alarm occurs or the emergency stop signal is on, power off the servo drive by
disconnecting the power at the magnetic contactor (MC) with Y output.

3-47
 Wiring Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual

3.2.2 Connectors of B series controller

3.2.2.1 NC200B series connectors

3
Connector Diagram / Function Description
Connects to the 24 VDC power (24 W at 1 A).
DC 24V Pin 1 Symbol Description
(Power input for 1 +24 V +24 VDC
controller) 1 2 3 2 0V 0 VDC
3 Power grounding; FGND
8 DI points and 1 set of differential type MPG input signal.
Pin Definition Pin Definition
1 DI_COM 9 DI7
15 5
2 DI0 10 +5 VDC OUT
MPG 3 DI1 11 A
(Handwheel) 4 DI2 12 A#
11 1 5 DI3 13 B
6 DI4 14 B#
7 DI5 15 GND
8 DI6 - -
Includes spindle pulse output and pulse feedback signals.
Pin Definition Pin Definition
1 FBK_OA 9 SERVO_ON_OUT
15 5
2 FBK_OA# 10 +5 VDC OUT
3 FBK_OB 11 CMD_A
SPINDLE
4 FBK_OB# 12 CMD_A#
11 1 5 FBK_OZ 13 CMD_B
6 FBK_OZ# 14 CMD_B#
7 +24V_IN 15 GND
8 ALM - -
Includes RS-485 communication, spindle analog output, HSI
high-speed counter input, and emergency stop signals.
Pin Definition Pin Definition
1 2
1 RS485_ D+ 7 EMG
CN1 2 RS485_ D- 8 GND
3 RS485 GND 9 DAC1
11 12 4 HSI_1 10 DAC1_GND
5 HSI_2 11 DAC2
6 HSI_COM 12 DAC2_GND
The remote I/O module communication connector can
connect to 8 modules. Each module has 32 input and 32
1
Remote I/O output points. The input points range from X256 to X511 and
module the output points range from Y256 to Y511.
(Remote I/O Pin Definition Pin Definition
module serial
1 T+ 4 R+
communication) 6
2 T- 5 GND
3 R- 6 SHIELD
Power specifications for DI points:
Local IO Digital input voltage < 24 VDC, current: 8 - 25 mA.
(Note: machine
operation panel B DI points X112 - X119(NPN). 8 points in total.
supplies 24V Power specifications for DO points:
power to the local voltage < 24 VDC, current < 120 mA.
Digital output
I/O connector)
DO points Y112 - Y116. 5 points in total.

3-48
Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual Wiring

3.2.2.2 OPENCNC series connectors

Connector Diagram / Function Description

3
Connects to the 24 VDC power (24 W at 1 A).
Pin Symbol Description
DC 24V
(Power input for 1 +24V +24 VDC
controller) 1 2 3 2 0V 0 VDC
3 Power grounding; FGND

8 DI points and 1 set of differential type MPG input signal.

Pin Definition Pin Definition
1 DI_COM 9 DI7
15 5
2 DI0 10 +5 VDC OUT
MPG 3 DI1 11 A
(Handwheel) 4 DI2 12 A#
11 1 5 DI3 13 B
6 DI4 14 B#
7 DI5 15 GND
8 DI6 - -

Includes spindle pulse output and pulse feedback signals.

Pin Definition Pin Definition
1 FBK_OA 9 SERVO_ON_OUT
15 5
2 FBK_OA# 10 +5 VDC OUT
3 FBK_OB 11 CMD_A
SPINDLE
4 FBK_OB# 12 CMD_A#
11 1 5 FBK_OZ 13 CMD_B
6 FBK_OZ# 14 CMD_B#
7 +24V_IN 15 GND
8 ALM - -
Includes RS-485 communication, spindle analog output, HSI
high-speed counter input, and emergency stop signals.
Pin Definition Pin Definition
1 2
1 RS485_ D+ 7 EMG
CN1 2 RS485_ D- 8 GND
3 RS485 GND 9 DAC1
11 12 4 HSI_1 10 DAC1_GND
5 HSI_2 11 DAC2
6 HSI_COM 12 DAC2_GND

The remote I/O module communication connector can

connect to 8 modules. Each module has 32 input and 32
Remote I/O 1 output points. The input points range from X256 - X511 and
module the output points range from Y256 - Y511.
(Remote I/O Pin Definition Pin Definition
module serial
1 T+ 4 R+
communication) 6
2 T- 5 GND
3 R- 6 SHIELD

3-49
 Wiring Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual

Connector Diagram / Function Description

DI/DO range: X0 - X15, Y0 - Y15.
Power specifications: voltage < 24 VDC, current < 60 mA.

3
Pin Description
I/O1 1 - 16 DI points X0 - X15. 16 points in total. (8 - 25 mA)
17 Output COM point. The voltage is 0V.
18 Input COM point. Connects to +24 VDC or 0V.
19 - 34 DO points Y0 - Y15. 16 points in total. (< 120 mA)
Local IO
DI/DO range: X16 - X31, Y16 - Y31.
Power specifications: voltage < 24 VDC, current < 60 mA.
Pin Description
I/O2 1 - 16 DI points X16 - X31. 16 points in total. (8 - 25 mA)
17 Output COM point. The voltage is 0V.
18 Input COM point. Connects to +24 VDC or 0V.
19 - 34 DO points Y16 - Y31. 16 points in total. (< 120 mA)

3-50
Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual Wiring

3.2.3 Wiring for power connector

3
 NC200B series models

24 VDC
24Vdc

 NC30EB series models

2424Vdc
VDC

3-51
 Wiring Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual

3.2.4 Wiring for RS-485 (CN1)

The B series controller has one set of RS-485 signal for serial communication with external

3
devices.

Pin assignment for NC200B series models

1 2

11 12

(2)

(1) CN1 connector (female); (2) RS-485 pins (male)

Model Symbol Pin No. Function description

1 D+
NC200B CN1 2 D-
3 RS485_GND

Pin assignment for OPENCNC series models

(1) CN1 connector (female); (2) RS-485 pins (male)

Model Symbol Pin No. Function description

1 D+
NC30EB□ CN1 2 D-
3 RS485_GND

3-52
Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual Wiring

3.2.5 Wiring for spindle pulse output connector (SPINDLE)

The B series NC controller has one set of spindle pulse output for controlling the spindle speed.

Note: the NC3□□ series models have 2 spindle pulse output ports while the NC200 and OPENCNC

models have only 1 spindle pulse output port. 3

Pin assignment for NC200B series models

(1) Spindle pulse output connector (female); (2) Spindle pulse output connector (male)

Pin assignment for OPENCNC series models

(1) Spindle pulse output connector (female); (2) Spindle pulse output connector (male)

3-53
 Wiring Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual

Model Symbol Pin No. Function description

1 Feedback A+ Pulse feedback signal A+
2 Feedback A- Pulse feedback signal A-

3
3 Feedback B+ Pulse feedback signal B+
4 Feedback B- Pulse feedback signal B-
5 Feedback Z+ Pulse feedback signal Z+
6 Feedback Z- Pulse feedback signal Z-
7 +24V_IN 24V input
All Spindle 8 ALM_DI_IN Alarm signal input
9 SERVO_ON_DO_OUT Servo On signal output
10 +5 VDC _OUT 5V voltage output
11 Command A+ Pulse command A+
12 Command A- Pulse command A-
13 Command B+ Pulse command B+
14 Command B- Pulse command B-
15 GND GND

Spindle pulse output settings:

1. Pr.399 settings
Description Pulse control
Spindle function
1
0: off; 1: on
Closed-loop control flag
0: off 1
1: on (feedback encoder is required)
Spindle output mode
1
0: communication (DMCNET); 1: pulse (B series); 2: analog voltage
Speed control mode
1
1: PUU
Spindle encoder magnification
1
0: 1000 times; 1: 4 times
Analog spindle speed source
0
0: system command; 1: encoder feedback
Analog spindle feedback encoder source
0
0: spindle; 1: motor
Spindle voltage output mode
0: -10V to +10V 0
1: 0V to +10V (only effective in open-loop control)

2. In the [CONFIG] (channel setting) screen, set the Port numbers of the pulse spindles SP1
and SP2 to 10 and 11 respectively.

3-54
Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual Wiring

3.2.6 Wiring for spindle analog output (CN1)

The B series NC controllers have 2 sets of analog voltage outputs, and you can use the

3
following methods to control the spindle speed.
Control method 1: controls the spindle speed with the S code with the acceleration /
deceleration planning.
Control methods 2: controls the analog voltage output with special D without the acceleration /
deceleration planning.

Pin assignment for NC200B series models

1 2

11 12

(2)

(1) CN1 connector (female); (2) Analog output pins

Pin assignment for OPENCNC series models

(1) CN1 connector (female); (2) Analog output pins

Model Symbol Pin No. Function description

9 DAC_1 First set of analog voltage output
10 DAC_1_GND First set of DAC output_GND
All CN1
11 DAC_2 First set of analog voltage output
12 DAC_2_GND Second set of DAC output_GND

3-55
 Wiring Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual

Control method 1: spindle analog output control (set with S code or through HMI screen)

1. Pr.399 settings

3
Spindle control mode Communication Analog
Spindle function
1 1
0: off; 1: on
Closed-loop control flag
0: off 1 0 or 1
1: on (feedback encoder is required)
Spindle output mode
0: communication (DMCNET); 1: pulse (B series); 0 2
2: analog voltage
Speed control mode
1 1
1: PUU
Spindle encoder magnification
0 1
0: 1000 times; 1: 4 times
Analog spindle speed source
0 1
0: system command; 1: encoder feedback
Analog spindle feedback encoder source
0 0
0: spindle; 1: motor
Spindle voltage output mode
0: -10V to +10V 0 0 or 1
1: 0V to +10V (only effective in open-loop control)

2. In the [CONFIG] (channel setting) screen, enable SP1 and set its Port number to 10; enable
SP2 and set its Port number to 11.
Note: the DAC_2 contact of the NC200 and OPENCNC series models is only for open-loop

application, which does support receiving speed feedback signals.

3. The analog voltage resolution is 14-bit.

When Pr.399 [Spindle voltage output mode] = 0, the analog voltage output ranges from -10V to +10V.
Applicable to closed-loop and open-loop control.
Output voltage Corresponding speed
+10 VDC power Maximum speed (forward)
0 VDC Zero speed
-10 VDC Maximum speed (reverse)

When Pr.399 [Spindle voltage output mode] = 1, the analog voltage output ranges from 0V to +10V.
Only applicable to open-loop control.
Output voltage Corresponding speed
+10 VDC Maximum speed
0 VDC Zero speed

Control method 2: controls the analog voltage with special D.

Model Symbol Function description

DAC_1 D1125 Setting range: -1000 to +1000 (-10V to +10V)
All CN1
DAC_2 D1114 Unit: 0.01V

Note: the DAC_2 contact of the NC200 and OPENCNC series models is only for open-loop application,

which does not support receiving speed feedback signals.

3-56
Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual Wiring

3.2.7 Wiring for spindle analog feedback connector (SPINDLE)

The NC3□□ series models support 2 sets of pulse feedback signals from external devices while

3
the NC200 and OPENCNC models support only 1 set of spindle pulse feedback signal.

Pin assignment for NC200B series models

(1) Spindle feedback input connector (female); (2) Spindle feedback input connector (male)

Pin assignment for OPENCNC series models

(1) Spindle feedback input connector (female); (2) Spindle feedback input connector (male)

3-57
 Wiring Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual

The function description of each pin is as follows.

Model Symbol Pin No. Function description

3
1 Feedback A+ Pulse feedback signal A+
2 Feedback A- Pulse feedback signal A-
3 Feedback B+ Pulse feedback signal B+
4 Feedback B- Pulse feedback signal B-
5 Feedback Z+ Pulse feedback signal Z+
6 Feedback Z- Pulse feedback signal Z-
7 +24V_IN 24V input
All Spindle 8 ALM_DI_IN Alarm signal input
9 SERVO_ON_DO_OUT Servo On signal output
10 +5 VDC _OUT 5V voltage output
11 Command A+ Pulse output signal A+
12 Command A- Pulse output signal A-
13 Command B+ Pulse output signal B+
14 Command B- Pulse output signal B-
15 GND GND

3-58
Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual Wiring

3.2.8 Wiring for high-speed counter input (HSI) (CN1)

The B series NC controller has two sets of hardware high-speed counter signal inputs. For the

3
wiring of high-speed counter input (bi-directional coupling), the maximum input bandwidth is up
to 5 MHz; voltage: 22 - 26V; permissible current: 8 - 20 mA; surge current: below 50 mA.
 When a signal is input to HSI_1, the corresponding special M, M2142, is On. If there is a
G31 Skip command in the block, the system skips the block and jumps to the next block.
 When a signal is input to HSI_2, the corresponding special M, M2143, is On. If there is a
G31 Skip command in the block, the system skips the block and jumps to the next block.

Parameter
Name Function
address
G31 high speed input point 1 0: NC; 1: NO
Pr.25
G31 high speed input point 2 0: NC; 1: NO
Switch for G31 high speed input 1 0: off; 1: on
Pr.46
Switch for G31 high speed input 2 0: off; 1: on
Pr.307 G31 input source 0: off; 1: HSI 1; 2: HSI 2; 3: HSI 1 & 2

Note: the connection direction of the external power input for HSI does not affect the operation.

3-59
 Wiring Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual

Pin assignment for NC200B series models

3 1 2

11 12

(2)

(1) CN1 connector (female); (2) HSI pins

Pin assignment for OPENCNC series models

(1) CN1 connector (female); (2) HSI pins

The function description of each pin is as follows.

Model Symbol Pin No. Function description
4 HSI_1 High-speed counter input 1 (10 mA)
All CN1 5 HSI_2 High-speed counter input 2 (10 mA)
6 HSI_COM High-speed counter COM; connects to +24 VDC or 0V

3-60
Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual Wiring

3.2.9 Wiring for emergency stop (CN1)

3
The B series NC controller has one set of emergency stop signal input.

Pin assignment for NC200B series models

1 2

11 12

(2)

(1) CN1 connector (female); (2) EMG pins

Pin assignment for OPENCNC series models

(1) CN1 connector (female); (2) EMG pins

Model Symbol Pin No. Function description

7 EMG EMG (+5 VDC output)
All CN1
8 GND GND
Note: EMG can output +5V power, so it can form a circuit with GND without an external power supply.

3-61
 Wiring Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual

3.2.10 Wiring for MPG connector

The B series NC controller has one MPG connector for receiving pulses generated by the MPG

3
handwheel. This connector directly supplies +5 VDC power to the MPG handwheel.

Pin assignment for NC200 series models

(1) MPG connector (female); (2) MPG connector (male)

Pin assignment for OPENCNC series models

(1) MPG connector (female); (2) MPG connector (male)

3-62
Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual Wiring

The function description of each pin is as follows.

Model Symbol Pin No. Function description
1 EXT_24 DI COM point; connects to +24V or 0V.

3
2 DI_1 X32
3 DI_2 X33
4 DI_3 X34
5 DI_4 X35
6 DI_5 X36
7 DI_6 X37
NC200
MPG 8 DI_7 X38
OPENCNC
9 DI_8 X39
10 5V_OUT 5VDC_OUT
11 XA+ XA+
12 XA- XA-
13 XB+ XB+
14 XB- XB-
15 5V_GND 5VDC_GND

3-63
 Wiring Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual

Depending on the signal type, the wiring of MPG handwheel can be divided into single-ended
type (EHDW-BA6SI) and differential type (EHDW-BE6SI).

3
Wiring diagram for the pulse signals of the single-ended type MPG handwheel (EHDW-BA6SI):
Contacts on
MPG connector on CNC
MPG handwheel
5V_OUT P10 DC 5V

XA+ P11 DC 0V

XA- P12 A

XB+ P13 B

XB- P14

5V_GND P15
Contacts on
MPG connector on CNC
MPG handwheel
5V_OUT P10 DC 5V

XA+ P11 DC 0V

XA- P12 A

XB+ P13 B

XB- P14

5V_GND P15

Wiring diagram for the pulse signals of the differential type MPG handwheel (EHDW-BE6SI):
Contacts on
MPG connector on CNC
MPG handwheel
5V_OUT P10 DC 5V

XA+ P11 A

XA- P12 A-

XB+ P13 B

XB- P14 B-

5V_GND P15 DC 0V

3-64
Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual Wiring

Wiring diagram for the MPG switch:

 The MPG connector on the controller supplies 5V power to the MPG.

3
MPG handwheel Circuit of MPG connector

Axis X P2 (X32)

Internal circuit
Axis Y
Axis Z EXT_24V
X1
5V_OUT
X 10
X 100
5 VDC
5V_GND
COM

 External 24V power supply: EXT_24 can connect to +24V or 0V.

MPG handwheel Circuit of MPG connector MPG handwheel Circuit of MPG connector

Axis X P2 (X32) Axis X P2 (X32)

Internal circuit

Internal circuit
Axis Y Axis Y
Axis Z EXT_24V Axis Z EXT_24V
X1 X1
5V_OUT 5V_OUT
X 10 X 10
24 VDC 24 VDC
X 100 X 100
5 VDC 5 VDC
5V_GND 5V_GND
COM COM

3-65
 Wiring Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual

3.2.11 Wiring for remote I/O connector

The B series NC controller has a remote I/O connector which can connect to up to 8 extension

3
modules with 256 DI and 256 DO points.

RS422

X256 X288 X320 X352

Y256 Y288 Y320 Y352

X384 X416 X448 X480

Y384 Y416 Y448 Y480

Pin assignment for the remote I/O connector is as follows.

(1) (2)
(1) Remote I/O connector (female); (2) Remote I/O connector (male)

Pin No. Function description

1 TX+
2 TX-
3 RX-
4 RX+
5 GND
6 SHIELD

Wiring diagram of the remote I/O connector:

3-66
Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual Wiring

There are two types of remote I/O module: opto-isolated type and relay type. The model name
explanation is as follows.

NC - EIO - T 32 32 _
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) 3
(1) Series name

(2) Product name

(3) Type:

T: opto-isolated type (permissible current: below 50 mA; surge current: below 100 mA)
R: relay type (the permissible current can be 5A or 16A according to the relay
specification)

(4) Number of inputs

(5) Number of outputs

(6) Permissible current:

None: 5A (G2R relay)

A: 16A (G2R relay)
B: 16A (IDEC relay)

The remote I/O module models are as follows.

Model Description Note
G2R relay
Relay type I/O module with 20 input points and 10 output
NC-EIO-R2010 Permissible
points.
current: 5A
G2R relay
Relay type I/O module with 20 input points and 10 output
NC-EIO-R2010A Permissible
points.
current: 16A
IDEC relay
Relay type I/O module with 20 input points and 10 output
NC-EIO-R2010B Permissible
points.
current: 16A
G2R relay
Relay type I/O module with 32 input points and 16 output
NC-EIO-R3216 Permissible
points.
current: 5A
G2R relay
Relay type I/O module with 32 input points and 16 output
NC-EIO-R3216A Permissible
points.
current: 16A
IDEC relay
Relay type I/O module with 32 input points and 16 output
NC-EIO-R3216B Permissible
points.
current: 16A
Relay type I/O module with 32 input points and 32 output Permissible
NC-EIO-R3232
points. current: 5A
Opto-isolated type I/O module with 32 input points and 32 Permissible
NC-EIO-T3232
output points. current: 50mA

3-67
 Wiring Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual

Precautions for wiring the remote I/O module are as follows.

(1) The COM input point is used for signal current. Do not connect 24 VDC or 0V power to the

3
COM point.

(2) You can select the H ((PNP) or L (NPN) signal with the H / L switch according to the
specification of the external sensor. When H (PNP) is selected, the COM point is +24V;
when L (NPN) is selected, the COM point is 0V.

L (NPN)
VDD
COM +
GND
GND
COM
VDD
H (PNP)

SW1 = H (PNP) SW1 = L (NPN)

COM COM

Direction of current Direction of current

X256 X257 X258 X259

COM+ R COM+ R

R R

Internal circuit

(3) Up to 8 modules can be connected to the remote I/O module connector simultaneously.
Turn the rotary switch on the PCB to switch the station number. 0 = Station 1, 1 = Station
2, 2 = Station 3, and so on to 7, which is Station 8.

When you turn the rotary switch to 8 and 9 to set the remote I/O modules as Stations 9
and 10, the system regards Station 9 (position: 8) as Station 1 (position: 0) and Station 10
(position: 9) as Station 2 (position: 1), so do not turn the rotary switch to 0 and 1 at the

same time.

Rotary switch for station number

3-68
Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual Wiring

3.2.11.1 NC-EIO-R2010

3
X256 X258
GND GND

24V 24V
X257 X259

Y256 Y257

DI wiring example

NPN 2-wire proximity sensor with polarity:

(1) Set the H / L switch to L (NPN), and short-circuit the GND (commonly a blue wire) of the
sensor and the GND (0V) of the same power system.

(2) Connect Vcc (commonly a brown wire) to the input contact.

NPN 2-wire proximity sensor

Brown
Direction of current

Blue

GND

X257 X259
24V 24V

3-69
 Wiring Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual

PNP 2-wire proximity sensor with polarity:

(1) Set the H / L switch to H (PNP), and short-circuit the Vcc (commonly a brown wire) of the

3
sensor and the +24V of the same power system.

(2) Connect GND (commonly a blue wire) to the input contact.

PNP 2-wire proximity sensor

Blue

Direction of current
X256 X258
GND GND
Brown

X259

24V

NPN 3-wire proximity sensor with polarity:

(1) Set the H / L switch to L (NPN).

(2) Connect the Vcc (commonly a brown wire) of the sensor to +24V.

(3) Connect the GND (commonly a blue wire) of the sensor to GND (0V).

(4) Connect the signal wire (commonly a black wire) of the sensor to input contact.

NPN 3-wire proximity sensor

Brown

Black
Blue
GND
Direction of current

X257 X259
24V 24V

3-70
Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual Wiring

PNP 3-wire proximity sensor:

(1) Set the H / L switch to H (PNP).

3
(2) Connect the Vcc (commonly a brown wire) of the sensor to +24V.

(3) Connect the GND (commonly a blue wire) of the sensor to GND (0V).

(4) Connect the signal wire (commonly a black wire) of the sensor to input contact.

PNP 3-wire proximity sensor

Blue

Black

Brown
Direction of current

X256 GND

X257 X259
24V 24V

DO wiring example

(1) The output contacts of the remote I/O module are in pairs. Use these contacts as dry
contacts.

(2) The output contacts should be connected to an external power supply.

(3) After the controller sets the output contacts to On, the current circuit is closed and the
Lamp is On.
Y256 Y257

DC

R Lamp

3-71
 Wiring Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual

3.2.11.2 NC-EIO-R3216

COM COM

3
COM COM

X256 X258 X259

X257

Y256 Y257

DI wiring example

NPN 2-wire proximity sensor with polarity:

(1) Set the H / L switch to L (NPN), and the COM point is 0V. Connect the GND (commonly a
blue wire) of the sensor to the COM point or short-circuit the GND of the sensor to the
GND (0V) of the same power system.

(2) Connect Vcc (commonly a brown wire) to the input contact.

NPN 2-wire proximity sensor

Brown
Direction of current

Blue

COM

X256 X258
X257 X259

3-72
Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual Wiring

PNP 2-wire proximity sensor with polarity:

(1) Set the H / L switch to H (PNP), and the COM point is +24V. Connect the Vcc (commonly a

3
brown wire) of the sensor to the COM point or short-circuit the Vcc of the sensor to the
+24V of the same power system.

(2) Connect GND (commonly a blue wire) to the input contact.

PNP 2-wire proximity sensor

Blue

Direction of current
Brown
COM

X256 X258
X257 X259

NPN 3-wire proximity sensor:

(1) Set the H / L switch to L (NPN).

(2) Connect the Vcc (commonly a brown wire) of the sensor to +24V.

(3) Connect the GND (commonly a blue wire) of the sensor to COM (0V).

(4) Connect the signal wire (commonly a black wire) of the sensor to the input contact.

NPN 3-wire proximity sensor

Brown
VDC+24V
Black
Blue

COM
Direction of current

X256 X258
X257 X259

3-73
 Wiring Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual

PNP 3-wire proximity sensor:

(1) Set the H / L switch to H (PNP).

3
(2) Connect the Vcc (commonly a brown wire) of the sensor to +24V.

(3) Connect the GND (commonly a blue wire) of the sensor to 0V.

(4) Connect the signal wire (commonly a black wire) of the sensor to the input contact.

PNP 3-wire proximity sensor

Blue

Black GND (0V)

Brown
Direction of current

COM

X256 X258
X257 X259
DO wiring example

(1) The output contacts of the remote I/O module are in pairs. Use these contacts as dry
contacts.

(2) The output contacts should be connected to an external power supply.

(3) After the controller sets the output contacts to On, the current circuit is closed and the
Lamp is On.

Y256 Y257

DC

R Lamp

3-74
Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual Wiring

3.2.11.3 NC-EIO-R3232

SW3

X256 ~ X263
L H L NPN H PNP
3
L H L H L H L H

SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4

Y256 ~ Y263

Y256 ~ Y263

DI wiring example
NPN 2-wire proximity sensor with polarity:

(1) Switch the short circuit jumper to L (NPN), and short-circuit the GND (commonly a blue
wire) of the sensor and the GND (0V) of the same power system.

(2) Connect Vcc (commonly a brown wire) to the input contact.

NPN 2-wire proximity sensor

Brown
Direction of current

Blue

GND (0V)

X256 X263

3-75
 Wiring Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual

PNP 2-wire proximity sensor with polarity:

(1) Switch the short circuit jumper to H (PNP), and short-circuit the Vcc (commonly a brown

3
wire) of the sensor and the +24V of the same power system.

(2) Connect GND (commonly a blue wire) to the input contact.

PNP 2-wire proximity sensor

Blue

Direction of current
Brown

VDC+24V

X256 X263

NPN 3-wire proximity sensor:

(1) Switch the short circuit jumper to L (NPN).

(2) Connect the Vcc (commonly a brown wire) of the sensor to +24V (same power system).

(3) Connect the GND (commonly a blue wire) of the sensor to 0V (same power system).

(4) Connect the signal wire (commonly a black wire) of the sensor to the input contact.

NPN 3-wire proximity sensor

Brown
VDC+24V
Black
Blue
Direction of current

GND (0V)

X256 X263

3-76
Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual Wiring

PNP 3-wire proximity sensor:

(1) Switch the short circuit jumper to H (PNP).

3
(2) Connect the Vcc (commonly a brown wire) of the sensor to +24V (same power system).

(3) Connect the GND (commonly a blue wire) of the sensor to 0V (same power system).

(4) Connect the signal wire (commonly a black wire) of the sensor to the input contact.

PNP 3-wire proximity sensor

Blue

Black GND (0V)

Brown
VDC+24V
Direction of current

X256 X263

DO wiring example

(1) The output contacts of the remote I/O module are in pairs. Use these contacts as dry
contacts.

(2) The output contacts should be connected to an external power supply.

(3) After the controller sets the output contacts to On, the current circuit is closed and the
Lamp is On.

Y256

Y256
DC

R Lamp

3-77
 Wiring Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual

3.2.11.4 NC-EIO-T3232

COM COM

3
COM COM

X256 X258
X257 X259
Y257 Y259
Y256 Y258

G0 G2
G1 G3

DI wiring example

NPN 2-wire proximity sensor with polarity:

(1) Set the H / L switch to L (NPN), and the COM point is 0V. Connect the GND (commonly a
blue wire) of the sensor to the COM point or short-circuit the GND of the sensor to the
GND (0V) of the same power system.

(2) Connect Vcc (commonly a brown wire) to the input contact.

NPN 2-wire proximity sensor

Brown
Direction of current

Blue

COM

X256 X258
X257 X259

3-78
Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual Wiring

PNP 2-wire proximity sensor with polarity:

(1) Set the H / L switch to H (PNP), and the COM point is +24V. Connect the Vcc (commonly a

3
brown wire) of the sensor to the COM point or short-circuit the Vcc of the sensor to the
+24V of the same power system.

(2) Connect GND (commonly a blue wire) to the input contact.

PNP 2-wire proximity sensor

Blue

Direction of current
Brown
COM

X256 X258
X257 X259

NPN 3-wire proximity sensor:

(1) Set the H / L switch to L (NPN).

(2) Connect the Vcc (commonly a brown wire) of the sensor to +24V.

(3) Connect the GND (commonly a blue wire) of the sensor to 0V.

(4) Connect the signal wire (commonly a black wire) of the sensor to the input contact.

NPN 3-wire proximity sensor

Brown
VDC+24V
Black
Blue

COM
Direction of current

X256 X258
X257 X259

3-79
 Wiring Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual

PNP 3-wire proximity sensor:

(1) Set the H / L switch to H (PNP).

3
(2) Connect the Vcc (commonly a brown wire) of the sensor to +24V.

(3) Connect the GND (commonly a blue wire) of the sensor to 0V.

(4) Connect the signal wire (commonly a black wire) of the sensor to the input contact.

PNP 3-wire proximity sensor

Blue

Black GND (0V)

Brown
Direction of current

COM

X256 X258
X257 X259

DO wiring example

(1) The output contacts of the remote I/O module are in pairs. Use these contacts as dry
contacts.

(2) The output contacts should be connected to an external power supply.

(3) After the controller sets the output contacts to On, the current circuit is closed and the
Lamp is On.

Y256

G0
DC

R Lamp

3-80
Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual Wiring

3.2.12 Wiring for local I/O connector

The pin assignment for the NC200B series models is as follows.

(1)

DI DO

(2)

8 1 5 1

(1) Local I/O connector (female); (2) Local I/O connector (male)

DI DO
Pin 1 X112 Pin 2 X113 Pin 1 Y112 Pin 2 Y113
Pin 3 X114 Pin 4 X115 Pin 3 Y114 Pin 4 Y115
Pin 5 X116 Pin 6 X117 Pin 5 Y116 - -
Pin 7 X118 Pin 8 X119 - - - -

3-81
 Wiring Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual

DI wiring (machine operation panel B supplies 24V power to the local I/O connector)

24 VDC
DI DO

P8(X119) P1(X112)
24VDC 0V

DO wiring (machine operation panel B supplies 24V power to the local I/O connector)

24 VDC
DI DO

P8 P1 P5(Y116) P1
Load 0V

24VDC

3-82
Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual Wiring

The pin assignment for the OPENCNC series models is as follows.

(1) Local I/O connector (female); (2) Local I/O connector (male)

I/O 1 I/O 2
Pin 1 X0 Pin 2 X1 Pin 1 X16 Pin 2 X17
Pin 3 X2 Pin 4 X3 Pin 3 X18 Pin 4 X19
Pin 5 X4 Pin 6 X5 Pin 5 X20 Pin 6 X21
Pin 7 X6 Pin 8 X7 Pin 7 X22 Pin 8 X23
Pin 9 X8 Pin 10 X9 Pin 9 X24 Pin 10 X25
Pin 11 X10 Pin 12 X11 Pin 11 X26 Pin 12 X27
Pin 13 X12 Pin 14 X13 Pin 13 X28 Pin 14 X29
Pin 15 X14 Pin 16 X15 Pin 15 X30 Pin 16 X31
Pin 17 DO_COM Pin 18 DI_COM Pin 17 DO_COM Pin 18 DI_COM
Pin 19 Y0 Pin 20 Y1 Pin 19 Y16 Pin 20 Y17
Pin 21 Y2 Pin 22 Y3 Pin 21 Y18 Pin 22 Y19
Pin 23 Y4 Pin 24 Y5 Pin 23 Y20 Pin 24 Y21
Pin 25 Y6 Pin 26 Y7 Pin 25 Y22 Pin 26 Y23
Pin 27 Y8 Pin 28 Y9 Pin 27 Y24 Pin 28 Y25
Pin 29 Y10 Pin 30 Y11 Pin 29 Y26 Pin 30 Y27
Pin 31 Y12 Pin 32 Y13 Pin 31 Y28 Pin 32 Y29
Pin 33 Y14 Pin 34 Y15 Pin 33 Y30 Pin 34 Y31

3-83
 Wiring Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual

P1 P2(X17) P1 P2(X17)

3 DC

P18(DI_COM)
DC

P18(DI_COM)

P33 P34 P33 P34

Local I/O - DI Wiring

P1 P2

P17(DO_COM)
DC

Load

P33(Y14) P34

Local I/O - DO Wiring

3-84
Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual Wiring

3.2.13 External machine operation panel B for NC200B series models

Model explanation:

(1) (2)
NC -
(1)
PAN - 300 B L -
(2)

(3)
(3) (4) (5)

(4) (5)
P
(6)
E
(7)

(6) (7)
3
300: horizontal; 8”
Machine L: lathe E: English
NC series 301: vertical; 8” B P: button
operation M: milling S: Simplified
product 310: horizontal; 10” series type
panel machine Chinese
311: vertical; 10”

NC-PAN-300BL-PE

NC-PAN-300BL-PS

3-85
 Wiring Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual

NC-PAN-301BL-PE

NC-PAN-301BL-PS

3-86
Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual Wiring

NC-PAN-310BL-PE

NC-PAN-310BL-PS

3-87
 Wiring Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual

NC-PAN-311BL-PE

NC-PAN-311BL-PS

3-88
Table of Function Groups
This chapter provides tables of function groups for you to quickly view all the functions
of the NC series controller.

4.1 Tables of function groups ····································································4-2

4.2 Machine operation panel A - function of keys ········································· 4-13
4.3 Machine operation panel B - function of keys ········································· 4-15
4.4 Table of corresponding buttons (for OPENCNC models) ·························· 4-17

4-1
 Table of Function Groups Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual

4.1 Tables of function groups

Available in all modes
POS

4
Layer 1 Layer 2 Layer 3 Layer 4
ABS - - -
CLR ALL - -
CLR X - -
REL
(the clear function of the CLR Y - -
corresponding axis is CLR Z - -
available only when you CLR A - -
connect the axis)
CLR B - -
CLR C - -
MECH - - -

4-2
Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual Table of Function Groups

EDIT mode
PRG_File manage
Layer 1 Layer 2 Layer 3 Layer 4
COPY F - - -
PASTE
DEL (file / folder)
SEL TOGL / CANCEL
ALL SEL TOGL / CANCEL
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
4
File Manage - - -
NAME - -
SORT SIZE - -
DATE - -
NEW F - - -
FOLDER - - -
RENAME - - -
FIND F - - -
MERGE - - -
FILE / MACRO - - -
SET - -
COPY F - -
PASTE - -
DEL - -
DXF
SEL TOGL / CANCEL - -
SEL ALL - -
CANCEL - -
RENAME - -
ADD PRJ - -
ADD PRC - -
DEL - -
COPY - -
PASTE - -
GRA EDT CONVERT - -
MOVE UP - -
MOVE DN - -
RENAME - -
DFT INIT - -
DFT FNIH - -
INT MCR - - -

4-3
 Table of Function Groups Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual

EDIT mode
PRG_File edit
Layer 1 Layer 2 Layer 3 Layer 4
COPY - - -

4 CUT
PASTE
DEL
UNDO
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
B START - - -
B END - - -
LABLE - - -
NEXT - -
PREV - -
STRING
REPLACE - -
Replace all - -

AUTO mode
PRG
Layer 1 Layer 2 Layer 3 Layer 4
Spindle speed (S) range: 0 - Pr.409 setting range;
SF SET
feed rate (F) range: 0 - Pr.318 setting range
START RUN - -

BARCODE LOAD - -
(set Pr.10053 to enable this CLEAR - -
function) CLEAR ALL - -
LOAD - -
MODE CHG - -
CLR ALL - -
FILE QUEUE ADD FILE - -
(Set Pr.10045 to enable or
disable this function) UP -
MOVE DOWN -
Jump To -
DISP CHG - -
← - -
→ - -
SEL TOGL / CANCEL - -
File Manage DEL - -
RENAME - -
FOLDER - -
SORT - -

4-4
Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual Table of Function Groups

JOG / MPG mode

PRG
Layer 1 Layer 2 Layer 3 Layer 4
Spindle speed (S) range: 0 - Pr.409 setting range;

4
SF SET
feed rate (F) range: 0 - Pr.318 setting range
POSITION - -
LINEAR - -
P1 -

TEACH CIRCULAR P2 -
(set Pr.10044 to enable P3 -
this function)
DEL - -
SAVE - -
NEW FILE - -
SET - -

MDI mode
PRG
Layer 1 Layer 2 Layer 3 Layer 4
LOAD - - -
SAVE - - -
CLEAR - - -

HOME mode
PRG
Layer 1 Layer 2 Layer 3 Layer 4
Spindle speed (S) range: 0 - Pr.409 setting range;
SF SET
feed rate (F) range: 0 - Pr.318 setting range

4-5
 Table of Function Groups Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual

Available in all modes

OFS
Layer 1 Layer 2 Layer 3 Layer 4
ABS - -

4 WEAR
INC
CLR ALL
CLR ONE
ABS / INC MODE
-
-
-
-
-
-
Set Pr.10059 to enable this function (1: Abs; 2: Inc).
ABS - -
INC - -
LEN OFST - -
OFFSET
ABS OFST - -
CLR ONE - -
ABS / INC MODE Set Pr.10059 to enable this function (1: Abs; 2: Inc).
SET -
Maga No 1
(functions in Layer 3 are RST ALL -
only available in JOG LOCK -
mode)
UNLOCK -
MAGA
SET -
Maga No 2
(functions in Layer 3 are RST ALL -
only available in JOG LOCK -
mode)
UNLOCK -
LOCAL - -
GLOBAL - -
MACRO HOLD - -
(set Pr.10045 to enable
this function) EXTEND - -
MECH WR _ (axis coordinate) -
ABS WR _ (axis coordinate) -
CLR REL -
CLR ALL -
SET L -
AUTO Point1
COORD SET L/2 Point2
SET
SET P -
ABS - -
INC - -

4-6
Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual Table of Function Groups

Available in all modes

GRA
Layer 1 Layer 2 Layer 3 Layer 4
CENT SET - - -
WIN RST -
UP
DOWN
LEFT
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
4
RIGHT - -
WIN SET
ZM IN - -
ZM OUT - -
OK - -
CANCEL - -
PV(STEP) This function is only available in AUTO mode.
GRAPHIC - - -
PREVIEW This function is only available in AUTO mode.
CLEAR - - -

Available in all modes

ALM
Layer 1 Layer 2 Layer 3 Layer 4
ALARM - - -
HISTORY CLR ALL - -

4-7
 Table of Function Groups Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual

Available in all modes

DGN
Layer 1 Layer 2 Layer 3 Layer 4
SET NR - -

4 PROCESS CLR TIME

CLR NR
-
-
DEL
US DEC
-
-
-
-
USR VAR HEX -
S DEC -
FLOAT -
USR VAR SYS VAR - -
DEL -
US DEC -
M VAR HEX -
S DEC -
FLOAT -
X -
Y -
M -
BIT
A -
T -
C -
T -
C(16) -
C(32) -
D -
MLC
V -
REG
Z -
US DEC -
HEX -
S DEC -
FLOAT -
US DEC -
HEX -
DEV MON
S DEC -
FLOAT -

4-8
Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual Table of Function Groups

DGN
Layer 1 Layer 2 Layer 3 Layer 4
LD -
LDI -

4
LDP -
LDF -
OUT -
APP -
— -
｜ -
DEL V-LN -
ADD LN -
DEL LN -
DEL -
LABEL -
TABLE -
X
Y
M
A
EDITOR
T
MLC (only available in EDIT
mode) C
SYMBOL
D
P
I
DEL
COPY
PASTE
SAVE -
IMPORT IMPORT
EXPORT
NEW FILE
EXPORT NAME SR
SIZE SR
DATE SR
JUMP TO -
SELECT -
CUT -
COPY -
PASTE -

4-9
 Table of Function Groups Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual

DGN
Layer 1 Layer 2 Layer 3 Layer 4
ON -
SET OFF -

4
MLC
RUN / STP -
JUMP TO - -
SRV MON - -
I/O MON - -
SYS VAR - -
SYS VAR -
CH VAR -
AXIS VAR -
SYS MON
IF VAR -
VAR MON MLC VAR -
US DEC -
BIN -
HEX -
S DEC -
SYSTEM - -
FW SN - -
STATUS
HW SN - -
M INFO DEL -
LOCK / UNLOCK -
S SCP
SYS CHECK -
PWD CHG -
LOCK / UNLOCK -
RST U1 -
RST U2 -
M SCP
OK
FUN ENA CANCEL
DEFAULT
PWD
RESET -
PWD CHG -
U1 SCP
LOCK / UNLOCK -
PWD CHG -
U2 SCP
LOCK / UNLOCK -
SETTING -
RELEASE -
EXPIRE
PWD CHG
EXP SCP
LOCK / UNLOCK

4-10
Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual Table of Function Groups

DGN
Layer 1 Layer 2 Layer 3 Layer 4
NEXT AX - -
READ - -

4
COMPUTE - -
WR GAIN - -
WR Notch - -
TUNING
(only available in JOG or RUN / STOP - -
MPG mode) JOG← - -
(set Pr.10045 to enable or
JOG→ - -
disable this function)
POS1 - -
POS2 - -
TAP SET(1) -
TAP RIV
TAP SET(2) -
SERVO READ -
TEXT WR Set Pr.10045 to enable or disable this function.
IMPORT - - -
EXPORT - -
EXPORT SEL ALL - -
CLR ALL - -
LOGO WR Set Pr.10045 to enable or disable this function.

4-11
 Table of Function Groups Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual

Available in all modes

PAR
Layer 1 Layer 2 Layer 3 Layer 4
PROCESS - - -

4 OPERATE
MAGA
SPINDLE
MACHINE
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
HOME - - -
ETH. DEFAULT - -
OK - -
um - -
COMP um+ - -
IMPORT - -
IMPORT+ - -
DEFAULT - -
SYSTEM
COLOR - -
DEFAULT - -
MLC
COLOR - -
DEFAULT - -
GRAPHIC
COLOR - -
SERVO READ - -
SEARCH - - -
CONFIG
(except AUTO and MDI OK - -
modes)
SET RIO
(except AUTO and MDI OK - -
modes)
SAVE - -
DEL GRP - -
WRT PAR - -
PAR GRP
RED PAR - -
SRT PAR - -
AVERAGE - -

Available in all modes

SOFT
You can configure the panel screen with the ScreenEditor software for application needs.

4-12
Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual Table of Function Groups

4.2 Machine operation panel A - function of keys

Key Description Supported mode / group

4
The key of coordinate display. All modes and groups

The key of program editing. All modes and groups

The key of coordinate and tool offset settings. All modes and groups

The key of diagnosis functions, system

All modes and groups
parameters, and system status.

The key of alarm display. All modes and groups

The key of tool path graphic display. All modes and groups

The key of system parameter settings. All modes and groups

The key of panel screen configuration. All modes and groups

Reset key All modes and groups

Axis position and command code keys PRG

Numeric keys (operation symbols) PRG, OFS, DGN

Decimal point key (operation symbol) PRG, OFS

Negative sign key (operation symbol) PRG, OFS

PAGE UP and PAGE DN (page down) keys PRG, OFS, DGN

Cursor keys (operation symbols) PRG, OFS, DGN

Home (end) key PRG

Space key PRG

4-13
 Table of Function Groups Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual

Key Description Supported mode / group

Shift key PRG

4 Delete (insert) key

Backspace key
PRG

PRG

Enter key PRG, OFS, DGN

Exit key PRG, DGN

Parentheses key PRG

Left and right function keys All modes and groups

Function keys All modes and groups

4-14
Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual Table of Function Groups

4.3 Machine operation panel B - function of keys

Key Description

4
AUTO mode: for program execution.

EDIT mode: for file management and program editing.

JOG mode: for manual machine operation.

MPG mode: for operating the machine axis with MPG.

MDI mode: for simple program input and execution.

HOME mode: for rapidly returning to the machine origin.

Single block execution: execute one single block at a time and then stop.

Single block skip: skip one single block when there is a "/” symbol in the block.

Optional stop: stop at the specified block if there is an M01 command in the
block.

MPG simulation: during program execution, enable this function to control the
execution speed with MPG.

Air blow switch

Coolant switch: coolant On / coolant Off

Limit cancellation: when the hardware limit is triggered, press this key to clear
the alarm.

Light switch: light On / light Off

Rapid traverse mode: execute axis movement based on the set rapid override.

X axis direction: in JOG mode, manually operate the X axis in forward or reverse
direction.

Y axis direction: in JOG mode, manually operate the Y axis in forward or reverse
direction.

Z axis direction: in JOG mode, manually operate the Z axis in forward or reverse
direction.

Rotation axis direction: in JOG mode, manually operate the rotation axis in
clockwise or counterclockwise direction.

4-15
 Table of Function Groups Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual

Key Description

Spindle forward: manually run the spindle in forward direction.

4
Spindle stop: manually stop the spindle rotation.

Spindle reverse: manually run the spindle in reverse direction.

Feedrate / JOG override: increment / decrement

Feedrate / JOG

Rapid override: increment / decrement

Rapid override

Spindle override: increment / decrement

Spindle override

Chip discharge conveyor: motor runs in forward / reverse direction.

Tailstock center: forward / backward

Tool turret: clockwise / counterclockwise

Spindle hydraulic chuck: release / tighten

MPG magnification selection: X1, X10, X100

User-defined function keys

4-16
Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual Table of Function Groups

4.4 Table of corresponding buttons (for OPENCNC models)

NC key PC keyboard Description
F1 - F8 (function keys) F1 - F8 Function keys

4
► (function key) Tab Next page (of the function bar)
◄ (function key) Ctrl + Tab Previous page (of the function bar)
POS Ctrl + F1 The POS function group key
PRG Ctrl + F2 The PRG function group key
OFS Ctrl + F3 The OFS function group key
DGN Ctrl + F4 The DGN function group key
ALM Ctrl + F5 The ALM function group key
GRA Ctrl + F6 The GRA function group key
PAR Ctrl + F7 The PAR function group key
SOFT Ctrl + F8 The SOFT function group key
Numeric keys Numeric keys -
Alphabetic keys Alphabetic keys -
Symbol keys Symbol keys -
Direction keys Direction keys -
PAGE UP / PAGE DN Page Up / Page Down -
BACKSPACE Backspace -
SPACE Space -
DEL / INS Delete / Insert -
SHIFT Shift -
HOME / END Home / End -
ENTER Enter -
EXIT Esc -
RESET Ctrl + Esc -
- F12 Help (function descriptions for keys)
SHIFT + GRA PrtScn Screen capturing

4-17
 Table of Function Groups Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual

(This page is intentionally left blank.)

4-18
Introduction to
NC System Modes
This chapter introduces the system modes supported by the NC controller.

5.1 Auto mode (AUTO) ············································································5-2

5.2 Program edit mode (EDIT)···································································5-2
5.3 Manual input mode (MDI) ····································································5-2
5.4 MPG feeding mode (MPG) ··································································5-2
5.5 Jog feeding mode (JOG) ·····································································5-2
5.6 Rapid feeding mode (RAPID) ·······························································5-3
5.7 Homing mode (HOME) ·······································································5-3
5.8 Function group screen overview ···························································5-4

5-1
 Introduction to NC System Modes Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual

5.1 Auto mode (AUTO)

After opening the file for execution, you have to switch the system to AUTO mode to execute the

5
program. This procedure allows you to verify the machining program, cutting conditions, and
position coordinates before execution as well as avoid mistakenly pressing CYCLE START in
other system modes. In this mode, you can only execute the program rather than edit the
program or manually move the axes.

5.2 Program edit mode (EDIT)

You can edit the program only in EDIT mode. In this mode, the editing functions in PRG group
are enabled for you to edit the program. In addition, program execution and manual axis
movement are not available in this mode.

5.3 Manual input mode (MDI)

In MDI mode, you can enter and execute a single block of program in the PRG group screen. In
this mode, you can enter up to 14 program blocks in the PRG screen. General program editing,
program execution, and manual axis operation are not available in this mode.

5.4 MPG feeding mode (MPG)

In MPG mode, you can use the external MPG handwheel to manually move the axes promptly
and accurately. Program editing, program execution, and jog operation are not available in this
mode.

5.5 Jog feeding mode (JOG)

In JOG mode, press the axis direction keys on machine operation panel B to have the axes jog.
Set the jog speed and moving distance with the JOG override key. You can move the work
platform at high speed with the rapid traverse override key and axis direction keys. The axis
moving speed is determined by the rapid override setting. Program execution and editing are not
available in this mode.

5-2
Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual Introduction to NC System Modes

5.6 Rapid feeding mode (RAPID)

When you press RAPID in JOG mode, the jog operation refers to the speed setting of rapid

5
feeding.

5.7 Homing mode (HOME)

In HOME mode, you can return the axes to the machine origin by simply pressing the
corresponding axis direction keys on machine operation panel B. After restarting the controller,
you need to set the system to HOME mode to have each axis return to the machine origin before
executing the program. If you do not perform homing after starting the controller, program
execution is prohibited.

5-3
 Introduction to NC System Modes Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual

5.8 Function group screen overview

A variety of information is provided on the function group screens of this controller. The following

5
introduces the screens of specific functions.

 Position (POS) group

(1) (2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(11)

(6) (7) (8) (9) (10)

Figure 5.8.1

(1) Current program name (6) Current system mode

(2) Currently executed program line (7) Alarm display
(3) Current function group screen (8) Rapid traverse override
(4) Current coordinate information (9) Feed rate override
(5) Machining information display: (10) Spindle override
Spindle speed: command value
(11) System status
Cutting feed rate: command value
Spindle load rate: %
Actual speed: rpm
Actual feed rate: mm/min
System time
Tool number (T)
Count of machining operations
Cutting time

In Figure 5.8.1, (11) displays the current status of the system for your reference. There are 7
system statuses with the display priority as follows: MLC stop > SV NO RDY (servo not ready) >
Emg Stop (emergency stop) > PROC (in progress) > RUN (in execution) > STOP (program stops)
> Ready.

5-4
Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual Introduction to NC System Modes

 Program (PRG) group

AUTO mode:

(3)
(1) (2)
5
(8)

(4)

(9)

(5)

(6) (7)

Figure 5.8.2

(1) Current program name

(2) Currently executed program line
(3) Current function group screen
(4) Currently executed program content
(5) Coordinate information during program execution
(6) Current system mode
(7) Current override settings
(8) F.act: actual feed rate per minute
M.act: actual feed rate per revolution
S.act: actual spindle speed
T: tool number
F: feed rate (command value)
M: feed rate per revolution (command value)
S: spindle speed
t: dwell time
CYC: cycle time
(9) Current command status

5-5
 Introduction to NC System Modes Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual

EDIT mode:

5
(2)
(1)

Figure 5.8.3

(1) File list: displays folders and program files

(2) File information: displays the size and modification date
and time of the file or folder

(1)

Figure 5.8.4

(1) File content: displays the program content in the file

5-6
Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual Introduction to NC System Modes

MDI mode:

(1) (3)

5
(4)
(2)

Figure 5.8.5

(1) MDI program

(2) Information of feed rate (F), feed rate per revolution (M),
spindle speed (S), tool number (T), and program dwell time (t)
(3) Coordinate information: absolute (ABS) / residual coordinates
(4) Status of currently executed commands

 Offset (OFS) group

Coordinate information:

(2)
(1)

Figure 5.8.6

(1) Workpiece coordinate setting: offset coordinates, G54 - G59 coordinate system
(2) Coordinate information display: machine (MECH) / relative (REL) / absolute (ABS) coordinates

5-7
 Introduction to NC System Modes Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual

Tool Wear:

5
(1)
(3)

(4)

(2)

Figure 5.8.7

(1) Compensation data No.

(2) Input field for compensation data
(3) Auxiliary display: coordinate systems
(4) Auxiliary display: illustration of tool tip type

Tool length (Tool Offset):

(1)
(3)

(4)

(2)

Figure 5.8.8

(1) Compensation data No.

(2) Input field for compensation data
(3) Auxiliary display: coordinate systems
(4) Auxiliary display: illustration of tool tip type

5-8
Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual Introduction to NC System Modes

 Diagnosis (DGN) group

Servo Tuning:

(1)
(4)
5

(5)

(2) (3)

Figure 5.8.9

(1) Servo parameter: number and name of the servo parameter

(2) Results after gain tuning: displays the calculation results of auto tuning
(3) System settings: displays the current servo settings
(4) Position setting: Position 1 / Position 2
(5) Tuning conditions

MLC Operation / Edit:

(1)

(2)

Figure 5.8.10

(1) MLC program

(2) Input field for command name

5-9
 Introduction to NC System Modes Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual

 Alarm (ALM) group

5
(1)

(2)

(3)

Figure 5.8.11

(1) Alarm message

(2) Sequence number of the alarm occurred
(3) Alarm code

5-10
Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual Introduction to NC System Modes

 Graph (GRA) group

5
(1) (2)

Figure 5.8.12 Screen of setting Pr.14003 to 0

(1)

(2)

Figure 5.8.13 Screen of setting Pr.14003 to 1

(1) Trajectory display: displays the motion trajectory

(2) Displays the program in execution, system information, and coordinate information

5-11
 Introduction to NC System Modes Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual

(This page is intentionally left blank.)

5-12
Position (POS) Group
POS group displays the axes positions, which are represented in absolute, relative,
6
and machine coordinates.

6.1 Absolute coordinates ··········································································6-3

6.2 Relative coordinates ···········································································6-3
6.3 Machine coordinates ··········································································6-3

6-1
 Position (POS) Group Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual

POS group displays the axes positions, which are represented in absolute, relative, and
machine coordinates. It can display the coordinates of up to three linear axes and one rotation
axis according to the setting of number of axes.

6 Note: bold function names in a box (such as POS) mean the keys on machine operation panel A; bold

function names (such as CLR ALL) means the function keys of F1 - F6.

(1) (2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(11)

(6) (7) (8) (9) (10)

(1) Current program name (6) Current system mode

(2) Currently executed program line (7) Alarm display
(3) Current function group (8) Rapid traverse override
(4) Current coordinates (9) Feed rate override
(5) Machining information display: (10) Spindle override
Spindle speed: command value (11) System status
Cutting feed rate: command value
Spindle load rate: %
Actual speed: rpm
Actual feed rate: mm/min
System time
Tool number (T)
Count of machining operations
Cutting time

6-2
Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual Position (POS) Group

6.1 Absolute coordinates

The absolute coordinates refer to the program origin of G code, which you can use to check

6
whether the axis movement planned in the program block matches the actual movement. The
operation steps are as follows.

(1) Press POS to display the POS group screen and the available functions include absolute
coordinates (ABS), relative coordinates (REL), and machine coordinates (MECH).
(2) Press ABS to enter the absolute coordinate screen.

6.2 Relative coordinates

The relative coordinates indicate the moving distance from the program zero position.
The operation steps are as follows.

(1) Press POS to display the POS group screen and the available functions include absolute
coordinates (ABS), relative coordinates (REL), and machine coordinates (MECH).
(2) Press REL to enter the relative coordinate screen.
(3) The functions available in the 2nd layer function bar include:
CLR ALL: clear the relative coordinate values of all axes.
CLR X: clear the relative coordinate value of X axis.
CLR Y: clear the relative coordinate value of Y axis.
CLR Z: clear the relative coordinate value of Z axis.
CLR A: clear the relative coordinate value of A axis.
CLR B: clear the relative coordinate value of B axis.
CLR C (next page): clear the relative coordinate value of C axis.

Note: the clear functions for the axes (X, Y, Z, A, B, and C) are available only when the corresponding

physical axes are connected.

6.3 Machine coordinates

The machine coordinates are defined according to the position of the mechanical part after
homing. The machine coordinate data is neither removable nor changeable when a different
workpiece coordinate system is selected. The operation steps are as follows.

(1) Press POS to display the POS group screen and the available functions include absolute
coordinates (ABS), relative coordinates (REL), and machine coordinates (MECH).
(2) Press MECH to enter the machine coordinate screen.

6-3
 Position (POS) Group Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual

(This page is intentionally left blank.)

6-4
Program (PRG) group
The PRG group provides functions of file management and program editing for G-code
and macro files. In addition, different system modes have their dedicated functions.

7
7.1 Ethernet setting ·················································································7-3
7.2 Create a new file (NEW F) ···································································7-8
7.3 Copy files (COPY F) ···········································································7-9
7.4 Paste files (PASTE)············································································7-9
7.5 Delete files and directories (DEL) ··························································7-9
7.6 Select / cancel selection of multiple files & select / cancel selection of all files
(SEL TOGL / CANCEL & ALL SEL TOGL / CANCEL) ······························· 7-10
7.7 Rename files (RENAME) ··································································· 7-12
7.8 Create directories (FOLDER) ····························································· 7-13
7.9 Search for files (FIND F) ··································································· 7-14
7.10 File merging (MERGE) ···································································· 7-14
7.11 Sorting (SORT) ·············································································· 7-15
7.12 Convert DXF files (DXF) ·································································· 7-16
7.13 Macro files (FILE / MACRO) ····························································· 7-17
7.14 File editing (File edit) ······································································ 7-17
7.14.1 Line search (LABEL) ······························································· 7-18
7.14.2 String search (STRING) ··························································· 7-18
7.14.3 Specify the start and end of highlighted area (B START / B END) ····· 7-20
7.14.4 Delete lines / sections (DEL) ····················································· 7-21
7.14.5 Copy and paste lines / sections (COPY & PASTE) ························· 7-21
7.14.6 Undo the action (UNDO) ·························································· 7-21
7.15 Graphic edit (lathe system) ······························································ 7-22
7.15.1 Objective ·············································································· 7-22
7.15.2 Project management ······························································· 7-22
7.15.3 Description of graphic edit procedures for lathe system ·················· 7-25
7.15.4 Operation steps for graphic programming ···································· 7-47
7.16 Program functions in other modes ····················································· 7-49

7-1
Program (PRG) Group Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual

You can manage and edit G-code and macro files with PRG group functions. The File
manage function includes 3-level function layers:
1st layer: CF (CF card), INTER (internal memory), USB (USB disk), and NETWORK

7 2nd layer: folders and G-code files

3rd layer: G-code files

Different system modes have their own dedicated functions. For example, you can use the
function of break line search in AUTO mode or you can enter and execute a program in MDI
mode.

Note: bold function names in a box (such as POS) mean the keys on machine operation panel A; bold

function names (such as CLR ALL) means the function keys of F1 - F6.

(1) (2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(1) Current program name

(2) Currently executed program line
(3) Current function group screen
(4) Disk options
(5) Current system mode

Set the system to EDIT mode and press PRG on machine operation panel A to display the PRG
screen. In the File manage screen, move the cursor, press ENTER to enter the second or third
layer, and then select a G-code file.

After selecting the G-code file, press ENTER to open the file and enter the edit screen. Press
and (scroll the screen up or down by 1 line), and PAGE UP and PAGE DN (scroll the screen
up or down by 20 lines) to display the file content.

Note: the suggested specifications for the USB disk is as follows.

USB disk specification

Disk format FAT32
Disk capacity As required

7-2
Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual Program (PRG) Group

7.1 Ethernet setting

You can connect the NC system to the PC with Ethernet to enable remote communication. Use

7
the CNCNetwork software to manage the online files of multiple NC controllers with one PC,
enabling data sharing and file management with the PC, and transmission-along-with-machining
(DNC).

Set the communication protocol between the NC system and PC by referring to Section 12.7.1
before using the network function. The following gives simple instructions.

Set the protocol of the NC system by going to PAR > ETH..

Figure 7.1.1

Network setting parameter

Parameter No. Parameter name Setting range or format
Character length: 1 - 8
10030 Host name
Actual setting: 1 - 8 characters
Character length: ×××． ×××． ×××． ×××
10031 IP address
Actual setting: 192． 168． 0． 2
Character length: ×××． ×××． ×××． ×××
10032 Subnet mask
Actual setting: 255． 255． 255． 0
Character length: ×××． ×××． ×××． ×××
10033 Default gateway
Actual setting: 0． 0． 0． 0
Character length: 0 - 1
10034 Network function
Actual setting: 1
Character length: 0 - 1
10035 DHCP switch
Actual setting: 0
Character length: ×××． ×××． ×××． ×××
10036 Remote PC IP address 1
Actual setting: 192． 168． 0． 1
Character length: ×××． ×××． ×××． ×××
10037 Remote PC IP address 2
Actual setting: 0． 0． 0． 0
Character length: ×××． ×××． ×××． ×××
10038 Remote PC IP address 3
Actual setting: 0． 0． 0． 0
Character length: ×××． ×××． ×××． ×××
10039 Remote PC IP address 4
Actual setting: 0． 0． 0． 0

7-3
Program (PRG) Group Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual

Network setting parameter

Parameter No. Parameter name Setting range or format
Character length: ×××． ×××． ×××． ×××
10040 Remote PC IP address 5

7
Actual setting: 0． 0． 0． 0
Shared remote directory IP Character length: 0 - 5
10041
address Actual setting: 0
FTP setting
FTP function switch 0: off; 1: on
10055 0: off; 1: on
FTP anonymous user Users without an account can connect to the CNC
FTP.
Set as main file after loaded 0: off; 1: on
Character length: 1 - 32. The first character must be
10057 FTP username
an English letter in lower case.
10058 FTP password Character length: 1 - 8

Set the protocol of the PC by setting Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties of the PC operating
system (as shown in Figure 7.1.2) or going to CNCNetwork > Options.

Network settings on PC:

Figure 7.1.2

Steps:
(1) Select the radio button for Use the following IP address and enter the following in
sequence:
IP address: 192 . 168 . 0 . 1
Subnet mask: 255 . 255 . 255 . 0
(2) Click OK to finish the settings.

7-4
Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual Program (PRG) Group

Network settings on CNCNetwork:

Figure 7.1.3

Steps:
(1) Execute CNCNetwork software and go to the Options screen.
(2) Click Search CNC to connect to the CNC according to the setting in Figure 7.1.3.

7-5
Program (PRG) Group Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual

DNC operation:

Execute CNCNetwork, open the file to be shared in the File Sharing screen, and then you can

7
execute the G-code file while it is being processed (DNC operation) using Ethernet. No
additional disk space is required to store the file as only the path of the shared files is recorded.
The connection steps are as follows.
(1) Use Ethernet communication to set the Internet connection between PC and NC.
(2) Execute CNCNetwork.
(3) Click the DNC tab and select the host (NC controller) to connect to.

Figure 7.1.4

(4) After the host is connected, click the File Sharing tab and set the file to be shared.
(5) Set the NC system to EDIT mode and go to File manage > NETWORK.

Figure 7.1.5

7-6
Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual Program (PRG) Group

(6) The shared file(s) is displayed in the NETWORK folder.

(7) Set the NC system to AUTO mode, press CYCLE START, and the system executes the
G-code file by DNC operation. The execution method is the same as that for general files.
(8) During DNC operation, file information is displayed in the DNC screen of CNCNetwork.
The information includes the name of the connected host, name of the file undergoing DNC
operation, total number of lines, the line number being executed, and file content (the
7
content is scrolled down along with the execution progress, as shown in Figure 7.1.6).

Figure 7.1.6

7-7
Program (PRG) Group Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual

7.2 Create a new file (NEW F)

In EDIT mode, you can use this function to create a new G-code file on the controller. The

7
operation steps are as follows.
(1) Set the system to EDIT mode.
(2) Press PRG to switch to the PRG screen.
(3) In the File manage screen, move the cursor to the folder of the disk where the file is to be
created (for example, the 2nd or 3rd layer of CF or USB directory).
(4) Press to display the function bar on the next page.
(5) Press NEW F and a dialog box appears for you to enter the file name.
(6) Enter alphanumeric characters (no symbols) in the dialog box, press ENTER, and a new file
is created.

Filename format requirements

No restrictions on the format of main file names (no duplicate file
Format of machining file names under the same directory)
name (G-code)
O + 0001 to 8999 (for calling subprograms)
Format of macro file name
O + 9000 to 9999
(O macro)
Notes in file name Suffix ‘-’ and alphanumeric characters in sequence to the file name
Valid file extension .NC .ANC .CNC .PIM .TAP .PTP .UOO .DEMO
Format of M macro file name M + 10000 to 29999
Format of G macro file name G + 30000 to 49999
Maximum number of
31
characters in the file name
Storage location 2nd or 3rd layer of File manage
Invalid symbols in file name ＊ ／ ＼ ∣ ＜ ＞ ？ “ ﹕

Note:

1. No duplicate file names are allowed under the same directory. For example, O0001 and O1 are

regarded as the same.

2. The File manage screen only displays general machining files. Macro files can be displayed by setting

the parameter Pr.50 Macro file display.

3. Multiple dots can be used in the file name of a G-code file whereas the last one should come with a valid

file extension, such as “1.1.1.1.NC”.

7-8
Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual Program (PRG) Group

7.3 Copy files (COPY F)

You can use this function to batch copy all the existing files in the disk drives of the system.

7
The operation steps are as follows.
(1) Set the system to EDIT mode.
(2) Press PRG to switch to the PRG screen.
(3) In the File manage screen, move the cursor to the folder of the disk where the files are to be
copied (for example, the 2nd or 3rd layer of CF or USB directory).
(4) Move the cursor to the file to be copied.
(5) Press COPY F and then PASTE, so the copy action is complete.

7.4 Paste files (PASTE)

As described in Section 7.3, you should use the paste function together with the copy function to
complete file copying. The paste function is also a function of File manage in PRG group, so you
can refer to Steps (1) and (2) in Section 7.3.
(1) Move the cursor to the disk, directory, or folder where the file is to be pasted.
(2) Enter the folder, press PASTE, and a dialog box appears for you to enter a new file name or
use the original one. Press ENTER to complete the actions of file copying and pasting.

Note:

1. The specification of file naming for this function is the same as that of the file creation function. That is,

duplicate file names are not allowed.

2. If you do not execute COPY F before using the PASTE function, an error dialog box appears to remind
you to copy a file first, and thus the current pasting action failed.

3. To copy the files from the USB disk to the CF card, you can follow the same operation steps.

7.5 Delete files and directories (DEL)

You can use this function to delete the G-code files and directories in the second layer of File
manage.
The operation steps are as follows.
(1) Set the system to EDIT mode.
(2) Press PRG to switch to the PRG screen.
(3) In the File Manage screen, move the cursor and press ENTER to enter the second or third
layer of the disk.
(4) Move the cursor to the directory or file to be deleted.
(5) Press DEL and a dialog box appears for you to confirm the execution. Enter “Y” and press
ENTER to delete.

Note: the file or directory cannot be recovered once being deleted.

7-9
Program (PRG) Group Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual

7.6 Select / cancel selection of multiple files & select / cancel

selection of all files
(SEL TOGL / CANCEL & ALL SEL TOGL / CANCEL)

7 In addition to the functions of copying and deleting a single file, you can use SEL TOGL /
CANCEL or ALL SET TOGL / CANCEL to select multiple files or cancel the selection of multiple
files, and then use the copy, paste, or delete function.
The operation steps for copying and pasting multiple files are as follows.
(1) Set the system to EDIT mode.
(2) Press PRG to switch to the PRG screen.
(3) Enter the directory where you desire to select the files.
(4) In the File Manage screen, move the cursor to the location of the file(s) to be selected. To
select multiple files, repeat the action of selecting a file and pressing SEL TOGL (as shown
in Figure 7.6.1). To cancel the selection, press CANCEL. To select all files, press ALL SEL
TOGL. To cancel the selection of all files, press CANCEL.

Figure 7.6.1

(5) After selecting the files, press COPY F.

(6) Go to another directory and press PASTE to paste the selected files, as shown in
Figure 7.6.2.

Figure 7.6.2

7-10
Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual Program (PRG) Group

The operation steps for deleting multiple files are as follows.

(1) Set the system to EDIT mode.
(2) Press PRG to switch to the PRG screen.
(3) Enter the directory where you desire to select the files.
(4) In the File manage screen, move the cursor to the location of the file(s) to be selected.
To select multiple files, repeat the action of selecting a file and pressing SEL TOGL.
7
To cancel the selection, press CANCEL. To select all files, press ALL SEL TOGL.
To cancel the selection of all files, press CANCEL.
(5) After selecting the files, press DEL, and a dialog box appears for you to confirm the
execution (as shown in Figure 7.6.3). Enter “Y” and press ENTER to delete.

Figure 7.6.3

Note:

1. After copying multiple files, you should paste them to another directory. If you paste the files in the

same directory, a dialog box appears to remind you to select another directory, and the current paste
action is invalid.

2. When the pasted file names and the existing file names are duplicated, a dialog box appears for you to

decide whether to overwrite the existing files. Enter “Y” to replace the existing files with the new ones;

enter “N” or press EXIT to keep the existing files.

7-11
Program (PRG) Group Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual

7.7 Rename files (RENAME)

You can use this function to rename the created files. The operation steps are as follows.

7
(1) Set the system to EDIT mode.
(2) Press PRG to switch to the PRG screen.
(3) In the File manage screen, move the cursor to the folder of the disk where the file is located
(for example, the 2nd or 3rd layer of CF or USB directory).
(4) Press to display the function bar on the next page.
(5) Move the cursor to the file to be renamed, press RENAME, and a dialog box appears for
you to enter the new file name.
(6) Enter a name that is not identical to the names of the files in the directory, and press
ENTER to complete renaming the file.

Note:

1. You can create G-code files only in the 2nd and 3rd layers of File manage.

2. The filename format requirement is the same for both file renaming and file creation. If you enter a

name that is already used for another file in the directory when renaming, an error dialog box appears,

and the renaming action is invalid.

7-12
Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual Program (PRG) Group

7.8 Create directories (FOLDER)

This function is for creating a directory to store G-code files in the 2nd layer of File manage.

7
This function is available only in the 2nd layer of File manage. Accordingly, the 2nd layer of File
manage can contain both directories and G-code files. The operation steps are as follows.
(1) Set the system to EDIT mode.
(2) Press PRG to switch to the PRG screen.
(3) Press to display the function bar on the next page.
(4) In the 2nd layer of File manage, press FOLDER, and a dialog box appears for you to enter
the directory name.

Figure 7.8.1

(5) After entering the directory name, press ENTER to complete creating the directory.

By following the preceding steps, you can create a new directory in the 2nd layer of File manage,
and you can also create and edit G-code files in this directory (the 3rd layer).

Directory format requirements

Format of directory name Alphanumeric characters
Maximum number of characters for directory name 31
Storage location 2nd layer of File manage

7-13
Program (PRG) Group Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual

7.9 Search for files (FIND F)

When there are a number of G-code files in the directory, if the file name is known, you can use

7
this function to quickly search for and open the target file. The operation steps are as follows.
(1) Set the system to EDIT mode.
(2) Press PRG to switch to the PRG screen.
(3) In the File manage screen, move the cursor and press ENTER to enter the 2nd or 3rd layer of
the disk.
(4) Press to display the function bar on the next page.
(5) Press FIND F and a dialog box appears for you to enter the name of the file to be searched.
After entering the file name, press ENTER to search for and open the file.

Note:

1. You can only search for files in the same directory with this function.

2. Enter the complete file name to accurately search for and open the file.

7.10 File merging (MERGE)

You can use this function together with the file copying function to merge the program content of
two different G-code files. The operation steps are as follows.
(1) Set the system to EDIT mode.
(2) Press PRG to switch to the PRG screen.
(3) In the File manage screen, move the cursor and press ENTER to enter the 2nd or 3rd layer of
the disk.
(4) Select the G-code file to be copied.
(5) Press COPY F and the content is saved to the system’s clipboard.
(6) Move the cursor to the directory which contains the file to be merged.
(7) Press to display the function bar on the next page.
(8) Press MERGE and a dialog box appears for you to enter the name of the merged file. After
entering the name, press ENTER to open the file.
(9) Move the cursor to the line where you desire to paste the copied program content, and press
PASTE.
(10) To save the merged file, switch to different system modes, open another file, or press
RESET.

7-14
Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual Program (PRG) Group

7.11 Sorting (SORT)

This function is for sorting the directories or files in a directory by a specified order, facilitating the

7
operation of file search or management.
(1) Set the system to EDIT mode.
(2) Press PRG to switch to the PRG screen.
(3) In the File manage screen, move the cursor and press ENTER to enter the 2nd or 3rd layer of
the disk.
(4) Press to display the function bar on the next page.
(5) Press SORT to display the function bar in the 2nd layer.
(6) When you press NAME, the directories and files are sorted in the order of numbers > English
letters from top to bottom. When you press NAME again, they are sorted in the order of
English letters > numbers from top to bottom.
(7) When you press SIZE, the directories and files are sorted by the file size from small to large
from top to bottom. When you press SIZE again, they are sorted by the file size from large to
small from top to bottom.
(8) When you press DATE, the directories and files are sorted by the date from most recent to
earlier from top to bottom. When you press DATE again, they are sorted by the date from
earlier to most recent from top to bottom.

7-15
Program (PRG) Group Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual

7.12 Convert DXF files (DXF)

In the DXF file manage screen, you can select the DXF file, enter relevant parameter settings,

7 and convert the DXF file into an executable G-code file.

(1) Set the system to EDIT mode.
(2) Press PRG to switch to the PRG screen.
(3) Press twice to display the function bar on the third page.
(4) Press DXF to display the DXF file manage screen.
(5) In the DXF file manage screen, move the cursor and press ENTER to select the DXF file to
be converted.
(6) After selecting the DXF file, you are redirected to the screen for setting the relevant
parameters, as shown in the following figure.

Figure 7.12.1

(7) After finishing setting the parameters, press Transform, and a dialog box appears for
you to enter the new file name.
(8) After entering the file name, press ENTER to convert the DXF file into a G-code file, and
the G-code file is stored under the CF directory.
(9) Then, you can execute the G-code file in AUTO mode.

7-16
Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual Program (PRG) Group

7.13 Macro files (FILE / MACRO)

In response to the application requirements, this function is for managing the equipment-specific

7
macro files. Upon accessing the security authorization, you can use all the editing functions
described in Section 7.14. Otherwise, you can only browse the existing macro files rather than
open and edit them. Contact the local distributor for authorization settings.

Note: this is a dual-function key. When you press MACRO, the system screen switches to the Macro file

screen, and the key is displayed as FILE. When you press FILE, the system switches back to the File
Manage screen, and the key is displayed as MACRO.

7.14 File editing (File edit)

With the file edit functions, you can modify or delete the content of the G-code files. When you
open the file in the File manage screen, the system switches to the File edit screen. Move the
cursor to any position in the program and use the alphabetic, numeric, and editing keys on
machine operation panel A to edit the program. To save the file after editing the program, switch
to different system modes, press RESET, or open another file. The operation steps for entering
the File edit screen are as follows.
(1) Set the system to EDIT mode.
(2) Press PRG to switch to the PRG screen.
(3) Move the cursor and press ENTER to enter the 2nd or 3rd layer of the disk.
(4) Select the G-code file to be edited and press ENTER to open the file and enter the edit
screen.
(5) Move the cursor to any position in the program.
(6) Edit the content by pressing the alphabetic, numeric, and editing keys on machine operation
panel A.
(7) To save the file after editing the program, switch to different system modes, press RESET, or
open another file.

Requirements for editing

Maximum number of characters in a single line 255
Supported system mode EDIT mode
Allowable file size Below 3 MB

Note:

1. When using the File manage or File edit function, you have to set the system to EDIT mode to display

the corresponding function bar. Otherwise, the PRG screen is only for viewing the currently opened

program file and displays the coordinate information.

2. You can insert “( )” (parentheses) at the end of each program block in the G-code file for adding notes.

Do not insert parentheses in the beginning of the program block, or the block may be regarded as a

note and be skipped.

7-17
Program (PRG) Group Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual

7.14.1 Line search (LABEL)

This function is to search for the specific line of program in the G-code file. The operation steps

7
are as follows.
(1) Set the system to EDIT mode.
(2) Press PRG to switch to the PRG screen.
(3) Move the cursor and press ENTER to enter the 2nd or 3rd layer of the disk.
(4) Select the G-code file to be edited, and press ENTER to open the file and enter the edit
screen.
(5) Press to display the function bar on the next page.
(6) Press LABEL and a dialog box appears for you to enter the line number (by pressing the
numeric keys 0 - 9).
(7) Enter the line number and press ENTER. Then, the cursor jumps to the specified line, and
the search action is complete.

Requirements for line search

Maximum number of input digits 62
Search format The specific line number

7.14.2 String search (STRING)

The line search function is only used to search for a specific line while you can use this string
search function to search for a specific string. The accuracy of the searching result depends on
how precise the input string is. The string search function includes the function of string
replacement. You can determine whether to replace a string when searching for a string, which
enables you to directly replace the string on the panel screen. The operation steps are as
follows.
(1) Set the system to EDIT mode.
(2) Press PRG to switch to the PRG screen.
(3) Move the cursor and press ENTER to enter the 2nd or 3rd layer of the disk.
(4) Select the G-code file to be edited, and press ENTER to open the file and enter the edit
screen.
(5) Press to display the function bar on the next page.

7-18
Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual Program (PRG) Group

(6) Press STRING and a dialog box appears for you to enter the string to be searched, as shown
in the following figure.

Figure 7.14.2.1

(7) After entering the string to be searched and the string to be replaced, press ENTER to
search the string.
(8) When the search is complete, the searched string becomes highlighted. At the same time,
the function bar displays the functions of NEXT, PREV, REPLACE, and Replace all.
(9) Press NEXT to search the next match or press PREV to search the previous match.
(10) Press REPLACE when you desire to replace one single string. You can also press
Replace all to batch replace the matches with the new string.
(11) Press to exit the string search function and go back to the function bar of File edit.
(12) After replacing the string, ensure to save the results (by switching to different system
modes, opening another file, or pressing RESET).

Requirements for string replacement

Supported system mode EDIT mode
Allowable file size for editing and replacement Below 3 MB

7-19
Program (PRG) Group Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual

7.14.3 Specify the start and end of highlighted area (B START / B END)

To edit a section of a program, you can use cursor and press B START and B END to specify the

7
start and end of the content to be edited. Then, you can delete, copy, and paste the selected
program content as required, which simplifies the editing process. The operation steps are as
follows.
(1) Set the system to EDIT mode.
(2) Press PRG to switch to the PRG screen.
(3) Move the cursor and press ENTER to enter the 2nd or 3rd layer of the disk.
(4) Select the G-code file to be edited, and press ENTER to open the file and enter the edit
screen.
(5) Move the cursor to the start of the section to be edited and press B START.
(6) Move the cursor to the end of the section to be edited and press B END. See the following
figure for the selected section.

Figure 7.14.3.1

(7) By following Steps (5) - (6) and then pressing DEL, you can delete the selected content.
(8) By following Steps (5) - (6) and then pressing COPY, you can copy the selected content.
Then, move the cursor to where you desire to paste the copied content and press PASTE to
insert the content.

7-20
Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual Program (PRG) Group

7.14.4 Delete lines / sections (DEL)

You can use this function to delete a single line of program where the cursor is located. Besides,

7
you can use this function with B START and B END to delete a whole section of the program.
The operation steps are as follows.
(1) Set the system to EDIT mode.
(2) Press PRG to switch to the PRG screen.
(3) Move the cursor and press ENTER to enter the 2nd or 3rd layer of the disk.
(4) Select the G-code file to be edited, and press ENTER to open the file and enter the edit
screen.
(5) Move the cursor to the line to be deleted and press DEL to delete the line of program.
(6) To delete a whole section of a program, refer to Step (8) in Section 7.14.3 for operation.

7.14.5 Copy and paste lines / sections (COPY & PASTE)

You can move the cursor to a specific line and press COPY to copy the line of the program,
but this action only takes effect when it is used with the PASTE function. When using the
COPY function with B START and B END, you can copy a section of the program content.
The operation steps are as follows.
(1) Set the system to EDIT mode.
(2) Press PRG to switch to the PRG screen.
(3) Move the cursor and press ENTER to enter the 2nd or 3rd layer of the disk.

(4) Select the G-code file to be edited, and press ENTER to open the file and enter the edit
screen.
(5) Move the cursor to the line of program to be copied and press COPY.
(6) Move the cursor to the position to paste the copied content, and press PASTE to paste
the line of program to that position.
(7) To copy a whole section of a program, refer to Step (8) in Section 7.14.3 for operation.

7.14.6 Undo the action (UNDO)

During program editing, use this function to undo the previous edit. You can repeatedly use
this function for undoing up to 7 previous steps. The operation steps are as follows.
(1) Set the system to EDIT mode.
(2) Move the cursor and press ENTER to enter the 2nd or 3rd layer of the disk.
(3) Select the G-code file to be edited, and press ENTER to open the file and enter the edit
screen.
(4) After editing the program, press UNDO to undo the previous edit.

7-21
Program (PRG) Group Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual

7.15 Graphic edit (lathe system)

7.15.1 Objective

7
The Graphic edit function of the lathe system provides a graphical user interface for you to select
the machining procedure and enter relevant machining parameters to generate a tool path
program, which replaces manual programming and calculation as well as machining path
planning with CAM.

7.15.2 Project management

(1) (2)

Previous Next

(1) Project Management screen; (2) Process Management screen

 ADD PRJ (Add a new project)

Enter the Graphic edit screen, press ADD PRJ, and a dialog box appears for you to enter the file
name. Press ENTER, and a new project file is added with the file extension as .DLC. You can
repeatedly use the project file. Simply open the .DLC project file in the Project Management
screen, and you can get all the previously set procedures, or you can modify and generate the
machining program.

If you press ADD PRJ in the Process Management screen, a dialog box appears to remind you
to return to the Project Management screen. Press to return to the Project Management
screen for operation.

7-22
Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual Program (PRG) Group

 ADD PRC (Add a new procedure)

Open a project file before you add a new procedure. If no project file is selected, a dialog box

7
displaying “Please open a file!” appears when you press ADD PRC.

Select a project file and press ENTER to enter its corresponding Process Management screen.
The system automatically generates two default machining procedures for each created project
file, INITIAL and FINISH, which start and end the program respectively. You can add or modify
procedures between the two default procedures.

To select another project file, press to exit the Process Management screen.

 DEL (Delete a file or procedure)

Press this key to delete the selected project file or procedure, except INITIAL and FINISH. Move
the cursor to the project file or procedure to be deleted, press DEL, and a dialog box appears.
Enter “Y” to confirm the deletion.

 COPY & PASTE (Copy and paste a file or procedure)

These two functions are for copying and pasting the project file or procedure. Move the cursor to
the file to be copied, press COPY and then PASTE, and a dialog box appears. Enter the new file
name and press ENTER to complete the action.

 CONVERT (Convert a file)

Press this key to convert the selected .DLC project file into an .NC file. After the conversion, the
system automatically switches to the corresponding Program Management screen of the
converted file.

Important:
(1) If you press CONVERT without selecting the disk in the File manage screen, a dialog box
appears to remind you to return to the File manage screen. In this case, you need to press
to return to the File manage screen to select the disk to store the file. Then, you can
start the conversion.
(2) Select a .DLC file and press ENTER to open that file. If no project file is selected, a dialog
box displaying “Please open one DLC file!” appears on the screen.

 MOVE UP & MOVE DN (Change the sequence of procedures)

The two functions are only available in the Process Management screen. To change the
sequence of a specific procedure, you need to select a project file, enter its corresponding
Process Management screen, and move the cursor to the procedure. Then, press MOVE UP or
MOVE DN to change its sequence. Note that the MOVE UP and MOVE DN functions cannot
change the sequence of INITIAL and FINISH.

7-23
Program (PRG) Group Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual

 RENAME (Rename a file or procedure)

Press this key to rename the selected project file or procedure, except INITIAL and FINISH.

7
Move the cursor to the project file or procedure to be renamed, press RENAME, and a dialog box
appears. Enter a new file name and press ENTER to rename the file.

 DFT INIT & DFT FNIH (Edit the content of default procedures)

Press DFT INIT to edit the default content of INITIAL and press DFT FNIH to edit the default
content of FINISH. The changed content of INITIAL and FINISH will be displayed in the project
that is added next time. The content in the existing projects remains unchanged.

7-24
Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual Program (PRG) Group

7.15.3 Description of graphic edit procedures for lathe system

Categorization of currently available procedures

7
1. External step turning
[EX_STEP]
2. Internal step turning
Step turning
[IN_STEP]
3. Face step turning
[FC_STEP]

1. External taper turning

[EX_TAPER]
Taper turning
2. Internal taper turning
[IN_TAPER]

1. External threading
[EX_THRD]
Threading 2. Internal threading
[IN_THRD]

Graphic edit for 1. External grooving

lathe [EX_GRV]
2. Internal grooving
Grooving
[IN_GRV]
3. Face grooving
[FC_GRV]

1. Outer convex turning

[EX_ROUT]
2. Inner convex turning
[IN_ROUT]
Arc turning
3. Outer concave turning
[EX_RIN]
4. Inner concave turning
[IN_RIN]

1. External profile turning

[EX_PROF]
Profile turning
2. Internal profile turning
[IN_PROF]

7-25
Program (PRG) Group Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual

 External step turning [EX_STEP]

7 (1) (3)

(2)
(4)

(1) Input fields for coordinates of each step point

Item Description Item Description
1st point X1_, Z1_ 2nd point X2_, Z2_
3rd point X3_, Z3_ 4th point X4_, Z4_

These 8 input fields are for setting the three-step contour machining. If the application
requires less than three steps, you can leave the fields of items in blue blank. To delete the
values in the input fields, press BACK SPACE or DEL and then press ENTER to confirm the
action. Refer to section (4) in the preceding figure for the position of each point.

(2) Parameter settings for contour machining

Item Description Item Description
X-coordinate of tool change Z-coordinate of tool change
Tx_ Tz_
position position
Cutting mode setting
Feeding amount of rough turning
Ud_ Wm_ (0 = rough & finish; 1 = rough;
(absolute coordinate of X axis)
2 = finish)
Allowance of finish turning Allowance of finish turning
Rdx_ Rdz_
(absolute coordinate of X axis) (absolute coordinate of Z axis)
Coolant switch Safe retraction position
M_ Sx, Sz
(8 = on; 9 = off) (coordinates)

 The input values for Ud, Rdx, and Rdz must be greater than 0.
 Wm is for setting the cutting mode. Set Wm to 0 to perform a complete turning process
including rough and finish turning. Set Wm to 1 to perform rough turning and reserve the
allowance of finish turning. Set Wm to 2 to perform finish turning once according to the
given path.
 Tx and Tz are for setting the tool change position. After completing a machining
procedure, the system moves the tool to the position specified by Tx and Tz to perform
tool change for the next machining procedure.

7-26
Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual Program (PRG) Group

(3) Parameter settings for tool compensation, tool nose radius compensation, speed, and feed
rate
Item Description Item Description

T_

F_
Tool number + tool compensation
number
Format: TXXXX
Axis feed rate
G70_T

G70_F
Tool for executing G70 Finish turning
cycle

Feed rate for executing G70 Finish

7
Unit: mm/min or mm/rev turning cycle
Tool nose radius compensation
G92_ Maximum spindle speed G_
(40 = disabled; 41 = left; 42 = right)
Spindle speed control mode
G_ S_ Spindle speed
(G96 = constant; G97 = fixed)
Spindle control
M_ - -
(3 = forward; 4 = reverse; 5 = stop)

 T is for selecting the machining tool. Enter numbers in this field with the first two (or the
first one if the number is a one-digit number) as the tool number and the last two as the
compensation number. As shown in the preceding figure, 303 means tool No.3 is used
and tool compensation No.3 is enabled.

 G70_T is for specifying the tool number for executing G70 Finish turning cycle. The
format is the same as that for item T.

 G70_F is for specifying the tool feed rate for executing G70 Finish turning cycle.

 Tool nose compensation (G_): G40 / G41 / G42

G40 means the function is disabled, G41 is tool nose radius left compensation, and
G42 is tool nose radius right compensation. You have to fill the correct tool nose type
and tool radius value in the tool compensation table before using this function.

 Spindle speed control mode (G_): G96 / G97

Set this field to G96 to enable constant surface speed control and the S field is for
setting the cutting speed in units of m/min or feed/min.
Set this field to G97 to enable fixed spindle speed control and the S field is for setting
the speed per minute in units of rpm.

 G92 is for setting the maximum spindle speed. If the command speed exceeds this
setting, the spindle runs with this setting.

(4) Illustration

7-27
Program (PRG) Group Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual

 Internal step turning [IN_STEP]

7 (1) (3)

(2)
(4)

(1) Input fields for coordinates of each step point (You can leave the fields of items in blue blank,
which means the points do not exist.)
Item Description Item Description
1st point X1_, Z1_ 2nd point X2_, Z2_
3rd point X3_, Z3_ 4th point X4_, Z4_

Refer to section (4) in the preceding figure for the position of each point.

(2) Parameter settings for contour machining

Item Description Item Description
X-coordinate of tool change
Tx_ Tz_ Z-coordinate of tool change position
position
Cutting mode setting
Feeding amount of rough turning
Ud_ Wm_ (0 = rough & finish; 1 = rough;
(absolute coordinate of X axis)
2 = finish)
Allowance of finish turning Allowance of finish turning
Rdx_ Rdz_
(absolute coordinate of X axis) (absolute coordinate of Z axis)
Coolant switch Safe retraction position
M_ Sx, Sz
(8 = on; 9 = off) (coordinates)

7-28
Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual Program (PRG) Group

(3) Parameter settings for tool compensation, tool nose radius compensation, speed, and feed
rate
Item Description Item Description

T_

F_
Tool number + tool compensation
number
Format: TXXXX
Axis feed rate
G70_T

G70_F
Tool for executing G70 Finish turning
cycle

Feed rate for executing G70 Finish

7
Unit: mm/min or mm/rev turning cycle
Tool nose radius compensation
G92_ Maximum spindle speed G_
(40 = disabled; 41 = left; 42 = right)
Spindle speed control mode
G_ S_ Spindle speed
(G96 = constant; G97 = fixed)
Spindle control
M_ - -
(3 = forward; 4 = reverse; 5 = stop)

(4) Illustration

7-29
Program (PRG) Group Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual

 Face step turning [FC_STEP]

7 (1) (3)

(2)
(4)

(1) Input fields for coordinates of each step point (You can leave the fields of items in blue blank,
which means the points do not exist.)
Item Description Item Description
1st point X1_, Z1_ 2nd point X2_, Z2_
3rd point X3_, Z3_ 4th point X4_, Z4_

Refer to section (4) in the preceding figure for the position of each point.

(2) Parameter settings for contour machining

Item Description Item Description
X-coordinate of tool change
Tx_ Tz_ Z-coordinate of tool change position
position
Cutting mode setting
Feeding amount of rough turning
Ud_ Wm_ (0 = rough & finish; 1 = rough;
(absolute coordinate of X axis)
2 = finish)
Allowance of finish turning Allowance of finish turning
Rdx_ Rdz_
(absolute coordinate of X axis) (absolute coordinate of Z axis)
Coolant switch Safe retraction position
M_ Sx, Sz
(8 = on; 9 = off) (coordinates)

7-30
Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual Program (PRG) Group

(3) Parameter settings for tool compensation, tool nose radius compensation, speed, and feed
rate
Item Description Item Description

T_

F_
Tool number + tool compensation
number
Format: TXXXX
Axis feed rate
G70_T

G70_F
Tool for executing G70 Finish turning
cycle

Feed rate for executing G70 Finish

7
Unit: mm/min or mm/rev turning cycle
Tool nose radius compensation
G92_ Maximum spindle speed G_
(40 = disabled; 41 = left; 42 = right)
Spindle speed control mode
G_ S_ Spindle speed
(G96 = constant; G97 = fixed)
Spindle control
M_ - -
(3 = forward; 4 = reverse; 5 = stop)

(4) Illustration

7-31
Program (PRG) Group Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual

 External taper turning [EX_TAPER]

7 (1) (3)

(2)
(4)

(1) Input fields for coordinates of each step point (You can leave the fields of items in blue blank,
which means the points do not exist.)
Item Description Item Description
1st point X1_, Z1_ 2nd point X2_, Z2_
3rd point X3_, Z3_ Ad Taper angle

Refer to section (4) in the preceding figure for the position of each point.

(2) Parameter settings for contour machining

Item Description Item Description
X-coordinate of tool change
Tx_ Tz_ Z-coordinate of tool change position
position
Cutting mode setting
Feeding amount of rough turning
Ud_ Wm_ (0 = rough & finish; 1 = rough;
(absolute coordinate of X axis)
2 = finish)
Taper type
Rd_ Allowance of finish turning Kd_
(0 = XZ; 1 = XA; 2 = ZA)
Coolant switch Safe retraction position
M_ Sx, Sz
(8 = on; 9 = off) (coordinates)

Kd: taper type

0: XZ type 1: XA type 2: ZA type

(3) Parameter settings for tool compensation, tool nose radius compensation, speed, and feed
rate
Refer to [EX_STEP] for the parameter settings in section (3).

(4) Illustration

7-32
Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual Program (PRG) Group

 Internal taper turning [IN_TAPER]

(1) (3) 7
(2)
(4)

(1) Input fields for coordinates of each step point (You can leave the fields of items in blue blank,
which means the points do not exist.)
Item Description Item Description
1st point X1_, Z1_ 2nd point X2_, Z2_
3rd point X3_, Z3_ Ad Taper angle

Refer to section (4) in the preceding figure for the position of each point.

(2) Parameter settings for contour machining

Item Description Item Description
X-coordinate of tool change Z-coordinate of tool change
Tx_ Tz_
position position
Cutting mode setting
Feeding amount of rough turning
Ud_ Wm_ (0 = rough & finish; 1 = rough;
(absolute coordinate of X axis)
2 = finish)
Taper type
Rd_ Allowance of finish turning Kd_
(0 = XZ; 1 = XA; 2 = ZA)
Coolant switch Safe retraction position
M_ Sx, Sz
(8 = on; 9 = off) (coordinates)

Kd: taper type

0: XZ type 1: XA type 2: ZA type

(3) Parameter settings for tool compensation, tool nose radius compensation, speed, and feed
rate
Refer to [EX_STEP] for the parameter settings in section (3).

(4) Illustration

7-33
Program (PRG) Group Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual

 External threading [EX_THRD]

7 (1) (3)

(2)
(4)

(1) Input fields for coordinates of each step point

Item Description Item Description
1st point X1_, Z1_ 2nd point X2_, Z2_
0 = thread lead
A Thread angle L/TPI
1 = number of threads per inch
Unit for L/TPI
H Total thread cutting depth L L = thread lead in units of mm/pitch
TPI = number of threads per inch
Threading infeed
N Number of threads Lm
(0: right; 1: middle; 2: left; 3: right-left shift)

(2) Parameter settings for contour machining

Item Description Item Description
X-coordinate of tool change Z-coordinate of tool change
Tx_ Tz_
position position
Ud_ Depth of the first cut mt Number of finish turning
Qd_ Minimum cutting depth Rd_ Allowance of finish turning
Coolant switch Safe retraction position
M_ Sx, Sz
(8 = on; 9 = off) (coordinates)

 Ud is for specifying the depth of the first cut. Depth of the n cut (n >= 2) is automatically
calculated by the system with the formula Ud [√𝑛 − √(𝑛 − 1)] .

 Qd is for specifying the minimum cutting depth. When the cutting amount of the n cut is
smaller than the amount set by Qd, the system sets the value of Qd as the feed amount.

 Rd is the allowance of finish turning and mt is the number of finish turning, so the amount
of each finish turning is Rd/mt.

(3) Parameter settings for tool compensation, tool nose radius compensation, speed, and feed
rate
Refer to [EX_STEP] for the parameter settings in section (3).

(4) Illustration

7-34
Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual Program (PRG) Group

 Internal threading [IN_THRD]

(1) (3)
7
(2)
(4)

(1) Input fields for coordinates of each step point

Item Description Item Description
1st point X1_, Z1_ 2nd point X2_, Z2_
0 = thread lead
A Thread angle L/TPI
1 = number of threads per inch
Unit for L/TPI
H Total thread cutting depth L L = thread lead in units of mm/pitch
TPI = number of threads per inch
Threading infeed
N Number of threads Lm (0: right; 1: middle; 2: left;
3: right-left shift)

(2) Parameter settings for contour machining

Item Description Item Description
X-coordinate of tool change Z-coordinate of tool change
Tx_ Tz_
position position
Ud_ Depth of the first cut mt Number of finish turning
Qd_ Minimum cutting depth Rd_ Allowance of finish turning
Coolant switch Safe retraction position
M_ Sx, Sz
(8 = on; 9 = off) (coordinates)

 Ud is for specifying the depth of the first cut. Depth of the n cut (n >= 2) is automatically
calculated by the system with the formula Ud [√𝑛 − √(𝑛 − 1)] .

 Qd is for specifying the minimum cutting depth. When the cutting amount of the n cut is
smaller than the amount set by Qd, the system sets the value of Qd as the feed amount.

 Rd is the allowance of finish turning and mt is the number of finish turning, so the amount
of each finish turning is Rd/mt.

(3) Parameter settings for tool compensation, tool nose radius compensation, speed, and feed
rate
Refer to [EX_STEP] for the parameter settings in section (3).

(4) Illustration

7-35
Program (PRG) Group Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual

 External grooving [EX_GRV]

7 (1) (3)

(2)
(4)

(1) Input fields for coordinates of each step point

Item Description Item Description
1st point X1_, Z1_ 2nd point X2_, Z2_
Tw Groove width - -

(2) Parameter settings for contour machining

Item Description Item Description
X-coordinate of tool change
Tx_ Tz_ Z-coordinate of tool change position
position
X axis feeding amount of each Cutting mode setting
Ud_ Cm_
peck turning (0 = peck; 1 = straight; 2 = finish)
Retraction amount of Z axis after
Qd_ Z axis feeding amount of each cut Rd_ the cutting in X-axis direction is
finished
Coolant switch Retraction amount of X axis after
M_ Re_
(8 = on; 9 = off) each peck turning
Safe retraction position
Sx, Sz - -
(coordinates)

 The input values for Ud, Qd, and Rd must be greater than 0.

 Cm is for setting the cutting mode. Set Cm to 0 to have the system perform peck turning.
Set Cm to 1 to perform straight cutting. Set Cm to 2 to perform finish turning once
according to the given path.

(3) Parameter settings for tool compensation, tool nose radius compensation, speed, and feed
rate
Refer to [EX_STEP] for the parameter settings in section (3).

(4) Illustration

7-36
Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual Program (PRG) Group

 Internal grooving [IN_GRV]

(1) (3) 7
(2)
(4)

(1) Input fields for coordinates of each step point

Item Description Item Description
1st point X1_, Z1_ 2nd point X2_, Z2_
Tw Groove width - -

(2) Parameter settings for contour machining

Item Description Item Description
X-coordinate of tool change
Tx_ Tz_ Z-coordinate of tool change position
position
X axis feeding amount of each Cutting mode setting
Ud_ Cm
peck turning (0 = peck; 1 = straight; 2 = finish)
Retraction amount of Z axis after the
Qd_ Z axis feeding amount of each cut Rd_
cutting in X-axis direction is finished
Coolant switch Retraction amount of X axis after
M_ Re_
(8 = on; 9 = off) each peck turning
Safe retraction position
Sx, Sz - -
(coordinates)

 The input values for Ud, Qd, and Rd must be greater than 0.

 Cm is for setting the cutting mode. Set Cm to 0 to have the system perform peck turning.
Set Cm to 1 to perform straight cutting. Set Cm to 2 to perform finish turning once
according to the given path.

(3) Parameter settings for tool compensation, tool nose radius compensation, speed, and feed
rate
Refer to [EX_STEP] for the parameter settings in section (3).

(4) Illustration

7-37
Program (PRG) Group Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual

 Face grooving [FC_GRV]

7 (1) (3)

(2)
(4)

(1) Input fields for coordinates of each step point

Item Description Item Description
1st point X1_, Z1_ 2nd point X2_, Z2_
Tw Groove width - -

(2) Parameter settings for contour machining

Item Description Item Description
X-coordinate of tool change
Tx_ Tz_ Z-coordinate of tool change position
position
Z axis feeding amount of each Cutting mode setting
Wd_ Cm_
peck turning (0 = peck; 1 = straight; 2 = finish)
Retraction amount of X axis after the
Qd_ X axis feeding amount of each cut Rd_
cutting in Z-axis direction is finished
Coolant switch Retraction amount of Z axis after
M_ Re_
(8 = on; 9 = off) each peck turning
Safe retraction position
Sx, Sz - -
(coordinates)

 The input values for Wd, Qd, and Rd must be greater than 0.

 Cm is for setting the cutting mode. Set Cm to 0 to have the system perform peck turning.
Set Cm to 1 to perform straight cutting. Set Cm to 2 to perform finish turning once
according to the given path.

(3) Parameter settings for tool compensation, tool nose radius compensation, speed, and feed
rate
Refer to [EX_STEP] for the parameter settings in section (3).

(4) Illustration

7-38
Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual Program (PRG) Group

 Outer convex turning [EX_ROUT]

(1) (3) 7
(2)
(4)

(1) Input fields for coordinates of each step point

Item Description Item Description
1st point X1_, Z1_ 2nd point X2_, Z2_
3rd point X3_, Z3_ - -

(2) Parameter settings for contour machining

Item Description Item Description
X-coordinate of tool change Z-coordinate of tool change
Tx_ Tz_
position position
Cutting mode setting
Feeding amount of rough turning
Ud_ Wm_ (0 = rough & finish; 1 = rough;
in X-axis direction
2 = finish)
Rd_ Allowance of finish turning R_ Arc radius
Coolant switch Safe retraction position
M_ Sx, Sz
(8 = on; 9 = off) (coordinates)

 R is for specifying the arc radius. Set R according to the X1-, Z1-, X2-, and Z2-
coordinates to ensure the center of the arc and circle is the same. If the R value is
inappropriate, an alarm occurs when you press CYCLE START.

 Wm is for setting the cutting mode. Set Wm to 0 to perform a complete turning process
including rough and finish turning. Set Wm to 1 to perform rough turning and keep the
allowance of finish turning. Set Wm to 2 to perform finish turning once according to the
given path.

(3) Parameter settings for tool compensation, tool nose radius compensation, speed, and feed
rate
Refer to [EX_STEP] for the parameter settings in section (3).

(4) Illustration

7-39
Program (PRG) Group Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual

 Inner convex turning [IN_ROUT]

7 (1) (3)

(2)
(4)

(1) Input fields for coordinates of each step point

Item Description Item Description
1st point X1_, Z1_ 2nd point X2_, Z2_
3rd point X3_, Z3_ - -

(2) Parameter settings for contour machining

Item Description Item Description
X-coordinate of tool change Z-coordinate of tool change
Tx_ Tz_
position position
Cutting mode setting
Feeding amount of rough turning
Ud_ Wm_ (0 = rough & finish; 1 = rough;
in X-axis direction
2 = finish)
Rd_ Allowance of finish turning R_ Arc radius
Coolant switch Safety retraction position
M_ Sx, Sz
(8 = on; 9 = off) (coordinates)

 R is for specifying the arc radius. Set R according to the X1-, Z1-, X2-, and Z2-
coordinates to ensure the center of the arc and circle is the same. If the R value is
inappropriate, an alarm occurs when you press CYCLE START.

 Wm is for setting the cutting mode. Set Wm to 0 to perform a complete turning process
including rough and finish turning. Set Wm to 1 to perform rough turning and keep the
allowance of finish turning. Set Wm to 2 to perform finish turning once according to the
given path.

(3) Parameter settings for tool compensation, tool nose radius compensation, speed, and feed
rate
Refer to [EX_STEP] for the parameter settings in section (3).

(4) Illustration

7-40
Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual Program (PRG) Group

 Outer concave turning [EX_RIN]

(1) (3) 7
(2)
(4)

(1) Input fields for coordinates of each step point

Item Description Item Description
1st point X1_, Z1_ 2nd point X2_, Z2_
3rd point X3_, Z3_ - -

(2) Parameter settings for contour machining

Item Description Item Description
X-coordinate of tool change Z-coordinate of tool change
Tx_ Tz_
position position
Cutting mode setting
Feeding amount of rough turning in
Ud_ Wm_ (0 = rough & finish; 1 = rough;
X-axis direction
2 = finish)
Rd_ Allowance of finish turning R_ Arc radius
Coolant switch Safe retraction position
M_ Sx, Sz
(8 = on; 9 = off) (coordinates)

 R is for specifying the arc radius. Set R according to the X1-, Z1-, X2-, and Z2-
coordinates to ensure the center of the arc and circle is the same. If the R value is
inappropriate, an alarm occurs when you press CYCLE START.

 Wm is for setting the cutting mode. Set Wm to 0 to perform a complete turning process
including rough and finish turning. Set Wm to 1 to perform rough turning and keep the
allowance of finish turning. Set Wm to 2 to perform finish turning once according to the
given path.

(3) Parameter settings for tool compensation, tool nose radius compensation, speed, and feed
rate
Refer to [EX_STEP] for the parameter settings in section (3).

(4) Illustration

7-41
Program (PRG) Group Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual

 Inner concave turning [IN_RIN]

7 (1) (3)

(2)
(4)

(1) Input fields for coordinates of each step point

Item Description Item Description
1st point X1_, Z1_ 2nd point X2_, Z2_
3rd point X3_, Z3_ - -

(2) Parameter settings for contour machining

Item Description Item Description
X-coordinate of tool change Z-coordinate of tool change
Tx_ Tz_
position position
Cutting mode setting
Feeding amount of rough
Ud_ Wm_ (0 = rough & finish; 1 = rough;
turning in X-axis direction
2 = finish)
Rd_ Allowance of finish turning R_ Arc radius
Coolant switch Safe retraction position
M_ Sx, Sz
(8 = on; 9 = off) (coordinates)

 R is for specifying the arc radius. Set R according to the X1-, Z1-, X2-, and Z2-
coordinates to ensure the center of the arc and circle is the same. If the R value is
inappropriate, an alarm occurs when you press CYCLE START.

 Wm is for setting the cutting mode. Set Wm to 0 to perform a complete turning process
including rough and finish turning. Set Wm to 1 to perform rough turning and keep the
allowance of finish turning. Set Wm to 2 to perform finish turning once according to the
given path.

(3) Parameter settings for tool compensation, tool nose radius compensation, speed, and feed
rate
Refer to [EX_STEP] for the parameter settings in section (3).

(4) Illustration

7-42
Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual Program (PRG) Group

 External profile turning [EX_PROF]

(1)
(3)
7
(2) (4)

(6)
(5)

(7)

Go back to
[EX_PROF]
screen

(1) Settings of machining parameters

Item Description Item Description
Cutting mode setting
G_ G71 / G72 / G73 Wm_ (0 = rough & finish; 1 = rough;
2 = finish)
Z-coordinate of tool change
Tx_ X-coordinate of tool change position Tz_
position
Feeding amount of rough turning Feeding amount of rough turning
Ud_ Wd_
(X-axis direction) (Z-axis direction)
Allowance of finish turning Allowance of finish turning
Rdx_ Rdz_
(X-axis direction) (Z-axis direction)
Coolant switch
M_ Tm_ Number of cutting in a cycle
(8 = on; 9 = off)
Sx, Sz Safe retraction position (coordinates) - -

7-43
Program (PRG) Group Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual

 Profile turning type (G_): G71 / G72 / G73

G71 is suitable for machining of longer and thinner bars in Z-axis direction. G72 is

7
suitable for machining of shorter and thicker bars in X-axis direction. G73 is suitable for
workpiece that has been machined (such as forging or roughing).

 Ud is available for G71 or G73 command. It specifies the feeding amount of each rough
turning in X-axis direction in a G71 command or specifies the total cutting depth in X-axis
direction in a G73 command.

 Wd is available for G72 or G73 command. It specifies the feeding amount of each rough
turning in Z-axis direction in a G72 command or specifies the total cutting depth in Z-axis
direction in a G73 command.

 Tm is only available for G73 command, specifying the number of cutting in a cycle. The
feeding amount of each cut is dividing the total feeding amount specified in Ud and Wd
by Tm.

(2) Profile edit screen

The program generated in the PROFILE EDIT screen is displayed in this section. Or you can
directly enter program in this section and move the cursor to the line to be edited.

(3) Parameter settings for tool compensation, tool nose radius compensation, speed, and feed
rate
Refer to [EX_STEP] for the parameter settings in section (3).

(4) Illustration

(5) Profile edit screen. The function is the same as that of section (2).

(6) Program edit screen

Enter the parameters of the G-code in this section and press INSERT to insert the program.

(7) Illustration for each command format

When editing the path, you can create the path according to the command formats shown in
the preceding table. The three types in this section are G01, G02, and G03.

There are nine formats for the G01 command, including G01X_Z_, G01X_,A_, G01Z_,A_,
G01X_Z_,C_, G01X_Z_,R_, G01X_,A_,R_, G01Z_,A_,R_, G01X_,A_,C_, and
G01Z_,A_,C_.

The G02 format is G02X_Z_R_ and the G03 format is G03X_Z_R_. “,C” represents
automatic chamfer and “,R” represents automatic corner rounding.

7-44
Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual Program (PRG) Group

 Internal profile turning [IN_PROF]

(1) (3) 7
(4)
(2)

(6)

(5)

Go back to (7)
[IN_PROF]
screen

(1) Settings of machining parameters

Item Description Item Description
Cutting mode setting
G_ G71 / G72 / G73 Wm_
(0 = rough & finish; 1 = rough; 2 = finish)
Tx_ X-coordinate of tool change position Tz_ Z-coordinate of tool change position
Feeding amount of rough turning Feeding amount of rough turning
Ud_ Wd_
(X-axis direction) (Z-axis direction)
Allowance of finish turning Allowance of finish turning
Rdx_ Rdz_
(X-axis direction) (Z-axis direction)
Coolant switch
M_ Tm_ Number of cutting in a cycle
(8 = on; 9 = off)
Safe retraction position
Sx, Sz - -
(coordinates)

7-45
Program (PRG) Group Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual

 Profile turning type (G_): G71 / G72 / G73

G71 is suitable for machining of longer and thinner bars in Z-axis direction. G72 is

7
suitable for machining of shorter and thicker bars in X-axis direction. G73 is suitable for
workpiece that has been machined (such as forging or roughing).
 Ud is available for G71 or G73 command. It specifies the feeding amount of each rough
turning in X-axis direction in a G71 command or specifies the total cutting depth in X-axis
direction in a G73 command.

 Wd is available for G72 or G73 command. It specifies the feeding amount of each rough
turning in Z-axis direction in a G72 command or specifies the total cutting depth in Z-axis
direction in a G73 command.

 Tm is only available for G73 command, specifying the number of cutting in a cycle. The
feeding amount of each cut is dividing the total feeding amount specified in Ud and Wd
by Tm.

(2) Profile edit screen

The program generated in the PROFILE EDIT screen is displayed in this section. Or you can
directly enter program in this section and move the cursor to the line to be edited.

(3) Parameter settings for tool compensation, tool nose radius compensation, speed, and feed
rate
Refer to [EX_STEP] for the parameter settings in section (3).

(4) Illustration

(5) Profile edit screen. The function is the same as that of section (2).

(6) Program edit screen

Enter the parameters of the G-code in this section and press INSERT to insert the program.

(7) Illustration for each command format

When editing the path, you can create the path according to the command formats shown in
the preceding table. The three types in this section are G01, G02, and G03.

There are nine formats for the G01 command, including G01X_Z_, G01X_,A_, G01Z_,A_,
G01X_Z_,C_, G01X_Z_,R_, G01X_,A_,R_, G01Z_,A_,R_, G01X_,A_,C_, and
G01Z_,A_,C_.

The G02 format is G02X_Z_R_ and the G03 format is G03X_Z_R_. “,C” represents
automatic chamfer and “,R” represents automatic corner rounding.

7-46
Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual Program (PRG) Group

7.15.4 Operation steps for graphic programming

(1) Set the controller to EDIT mode to enter the Graphic edit (GRA EDT) screen.

7
(2) GRA EDT is on the last page of the function bar in the File manage screen.
(3) Enter the Graphic edit screen and then select the disk type (CF or USB).
(4) After entering the disk, press ADD PRJ, enter the file name, and press ENTER to generate
a project file.
(5) Move the cursor to one of the project files and press ENTER to enter the file.
(6) After entering the project file, press ADD PRC to enter the screen of procedure selection.
(7) There are 18 procedures available. Every 6 procedures are in a row, respectively
corresponding to the function keys. Press and to shift the cursor to another row.
When you shift to another row of procedures, the corresponding function keys change as
well.

(8) Select the required procedure and press the corresponding function key to enter the screen
for procedure editing.
(9) After setting the parameters, press OK, name the procedure, and press ENTER to finish the
editing.
(10) To continue with other procedures, press ADD PRC again.
(11) After finishing editing the procedures, press CONVERT to convert the files into G-code
format.
(12) The system jumps to the File edit screen after file conversion, and you can verify the
program in the screen. Then, switch to the GRA (graphic display) screen, press PREVIEW
to check if the generated graph is correct, and then you can perform MPG simulation or
actual machining.

7-47
Program (PRG) Group Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual

[File conversion example - External step turning]

The following illustrates the G-code file generated by the parameters for the external step

7
turning.

O0000 //The string set in the INITIAL file, which is automatically added to the beginning of the
program.
;EXstep_DR0
T0303 //Tool number and compensation number
G95 F0.500 //0.5 mm/feeding amount per revolution
G92 S2000 //Maximum spindle speed
G97 S1000 //Fixed spindle speed
M3 //Spindle On - forward
M8 //Coolant On
G00 X42.000 Z5.000
G42 //Tool nose radius compensation On
G71 U3.000 R0.5 //Feeding amount of rough turning in X-axis direction
G71 P210 Q250 U0.200 W0.200 //Allowance of finishing turning in X- and Z-axis directions
N210 G00 X10.000 Z5.000
G01 X10.000 Z0.000 //1st point
G01 Z-20.000
G01 X20.000 Z-20.000 //2nd point
G01 Z-30.000
G01 X30.000 Z-30.000 //3rd point
G01 Z-40.000
G01 X40.000 Z-40.000 //4th point
N250 G01 U2.0 //U2.0
G00 X42.000 Z5.000
T0404 //Tool for finish turning
G70 P210 Q250 F0.100 //Program block for finish turning
G00 Z5.000
G40
G00 X50.000 Z10.000 //Coordinates of tool change point
M09
M05
M30 //The string set in the FINISH file, which is automatically added to the end of the program.

7-48
Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual Program (PRG) Group

7.16 Program functions in other modes

AUTO mode:

7
The PRG screen displays the content of the opened G-code file. In the screen, you can view
the status information about the currently opened or executed file and the block being
executed. The PRG screen in AUTO mode only displays information about the program and
the coordinates of motion trajectory during program execution. The operation steps are as
follows.

(1) In AUTO mode, press PRG to display the program execution screen, as shown in the
following figure.

Figure 7.16.1

7-49
Program (PRG) Group Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual

(2) Continued from Step (1), press PRG again, and the screen displays the information of
program content and coordinates simultaneously, as shown in the following figure.

7 (3)
(1) (2)

(7)

(4)

(8)
(5)

(6)

(9)

Figure 7.16.2

(1) Current program name

(2) Currently executed program line
(3) Current function group screen
(4) Currently executed program content
(5) Coordinate information during program execution
(6) Current system mode
(7) F.act: actual feed rate
M.act: actual feed rate per revolution
S.act: actual spindle speed
T: tool number
F: feed rate
M: feed rate per revolution (mm/rev)
S: spindle speed
t: dwell time
CYC: cycle time
(8) Current command status
(9) Current override settings

7-50
Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual Program (PRG) Group

 Breakpoint search (START)

The function of breakpoint search is available in AUTO mode. When the program execution is

7
interrupted, the system records the line number where the program is interrupted (breakpoint).
You can go to the PRG screen in AUTO mode to enable the breakpoint search function.

When the system searches for the breakpoint, the cursor quickly moves to the line number or
label you specified. The system executes the program before the specified block and quickly
computes the machining status (including the spindle speed, feed rate, M code, and coordinates),
ensuring the system is ready when the execution resumes, as shown in the following figure.

Figure 7.16.3

The operation steps are as follows.

(1) In AUTO mode, press PRG to enter the program execution screen.
(2) Press START to display the Search screen.
(3) Refer to the information of the breakpoint (Break Line Num), enter the line number or label to
be searched, and then press ENTER to complete the setting.
(4) Press RUN, and the system executes the program until reaching the set line or label.
(5) The controller executes and records the execution status of the program blocks prior to the
specified line or label. Then the controller stops at the block and is ready for execution.
(6) Press CYCLE START to execute the program.

Note:

1. After finding the target block, the program stops at the target block and this block remains unexecuted.

Press CYCLE START to start executing the program.

2. Supported formats for searching: program line number or program label (N label).

3. When the program is being executed or after the breakpoint search function is used, you cannot

execute the breakpoint search function again.

7-51
Program (PRG) Group Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual

 SF setting (SF SET)

When the G-code program is in execution, you can use the SF set function to change the cutting

7
feed rate (F command) and spindle speed (S command) specified in the G-code program, as
shown in Figure 7.16.4. Enter a new command value in the SF set dialog box to change the
speed command during execution.

Figure 7.16.4

The operation steps are as follows.

(1) In AUTO mode, press PRG to enter the program execution screen.
(2) Press SF SET and a dialog box appears for you to set the command value.
(3) Enter the S value or F value and press ENTER to complete changing the speed command
setting.

Note:

1. The SF set function is a one-shot function with the S and F settings effective for one time in a single

execution, which do not change the commands in the G-code program.

If requiring to execute this SF setting for multiple times, it is recommended that you edit the command

in EDIT mode to ensure the speed command is correct.

2. After the S value is set, the current spindle speed in the G-code program is changed immediately. After
the F value is set, the system executes with the new feed rate (F command) after the data in the

system buffer is completely processed.

3. If there is no S or F command in the G-code program, you cannot use this function to change the speed

command.

4. Set Pr.10017 [SF speed setting] to enable or disable the F setting for the SF set function.

7-52
Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual Program (PRG) Group

 Barcode reading (BARCODE)

The Barcode reading function is for using the barcode scanner to load the machining files named

7
by barcode into the file queue for execution, which greatly saves the time for file searching. You
can connect the barcode scanner to the USB slot in the front side of the controller.

Figure 7.16.5

The operation steps are as follows.

(1) In AUTO mode, press PRG to enter the program execution screen.
(2) Press BARCODE to enter the screen as shown in Figure 7.16.5.
(3) Use the barcode scanner to scan the barcode to obtain the name of the machining file.
(4) To load the file content, press LOAD. To delete the file which is on the top of the FILE
QUEUE list, press CLEAR. To delete all the files on the FILE QUEUE list, press CLR ALL.

Note:

1. To use this function, you must first create the machining files in the CF card and the file names have to

be consistent with their barcodes.

2. When loading multiple files, the system executes each file in sequence. It automatically removes the file

name from the list once completing the execution.

7-53
Program (PRG) Group Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual

JOG and MPG modes:

 SF setting (SF SET)

7
The operation steps for SF setting are as follows.
(1) In JOG or MPG mode, press PRG to enter the program execution screen.
(2) Press SF SET and a dialog box appears for you to set the command value.
(3) Enter the S value or F value and press ENTER to complete changing the speed command
setting.

 Teach programming (TEACH)

With the TEACH function, you can manually move the axis to any position and use the
programming function keys to have the system convert the final position (coordinates of the three
axes) into a motion block with coordinates specified. Set the system to JOG or MPG mode, and
you can use the TEACH function in the PRG screen for programming the existing or new files.
The TEACH function includes: rapid traverse (POSITION), linear interpolation (LINEAR), circular
interpolation (CIRCULAR), delete (DEL), file creating (NEW FILE), file saving (SAVE), and
absolute / machine coordinates (ABS / MECH). This programming function automatically
generates corresponding command formats according to the different functions. See the
following table for the generated command formats.

Function Format of the auto-generated command

NEW FILE G90 G40 G49 G98 G50 G64 G80 G17 G69 G21
(generate a new
file when teach G54 G15 S3000 M03 F1000
programming is Note: this function generates the corresponding G21 or G20 command according to the
parameter setting of size unit.
enabled)
POSITION (rapid
G00 + X_Y_Z_
traverse)
LINEAR (linear
G01 + X_Y_Z_
interpolation)
CIRCULAR G02 + X_Y_Z_ + I_ J_ or G03 + X_Y_Z_ + I_ J_
(circular Note: this function generates G17+I_ J_, G18+K_ I_, or G19+J_K_ corresponding to the
interpolation) X-Y, Z-X, or Y-Z plane.
ABS (absolute
G90 G00 (or G01 / G02 / G03) + X_Y_Z_
coordinates)
MECH (machine
G53 G00 (or G01 / G02 / G03) + X_Y_Z_
coordinates)

The operation steps for the TEACH function are as follows.

(1) In JOG or MPG mode, press PRG to enter the program execution screen.
(2) Press TEACH to enter the teach screen.
(3) Select the file to be programmed from the existing files or create a new file. To do
programming in the existing file, open the file in EDIT mode. To do programming in a new file,
press NEW FILE, and a dialog box appears for you to enter the file name. Press ENTER
after entering the file name, and you can create a new file in the current directory.

7-54
Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual Program (PRG) Group

(4) Specify the data type of the coordinates. For example, if you desire to display absolute
coordinates, press ABS on the second page of the function bar. Or press MECH to switch to
machine coordinates.
(5) Move the axis to the specified position in JOG or MPG mode, press POSITION or LINEAR
according to the requirement of the mode, and the coordinate command is inserted to the
position where the cursor is located. The coordinate command is generated according to the
7
data type of the coordinate values.
(6) Continued from Step (5), to specify a circular motion, press CIRCULAR to display the
corresponding function bar.
(7) Continued from Step (6), to specify the plane of the arc, press PLANE to select X-Y, Y-Z, or
Z-X.
(8) Move the axes in sequence and set the start, intermediate, and end points of the arc by
pressing P1, P2, and P3 respectively. After P3 is set, the values are automatically converted
into a circular cutting command. The system determines the direction of the arc (G02 or G03)
and the radius according to the trajectory of P1 - P3.
(9) If the coordinate command is incorrect, move the cursor to the block containing the
coordinate command and press DEL (on the function bar of the 1st layer in the teach screen)
to delete the block.
(10) After completing the programming, in addition to the given auto-saving procedure (press
RESET, switch to different system modes, or open another file), you can press SAVE to
save the programming results.

Note:

1. The TEACH function is only available in JOG or MPG mode. It is not displayed in other modes.

2. The allowable file size for the teach function is the same as that for file editing (below 3 MB).

3. The name of the file created for the teach function must comply with the file name requirements.

4. If you repeatedly enter two sets of coordinate with the same values, the system ignores the 2nd

coordinate command to avoid generating an invalid motion block.

5. Set the coordinates of P1, P2, and P3 for the arc command in sequence. The direction and radius for

the circular command is determined by the positions of P1, P2, and P3.

6. If you enter the teach screen without opening a file, the system automatically generates a blank file

named “TEACH.NC” in the directory where the cursor is located (the default setting is to generate a file

in the root directory of CF), so you can directly use the teach function.

7. Set Pr.10017 [SF speed setting] to enable or disable the F setting for the SF set function.

7-55
Program (PRG) Group Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual

MDI mode:

In MDI mode, you can enter simple programs and save, delete, or execute the program content

7
in the PRG screen, as shown in the following figure, which is only available in MDI mode. You
can enter up to 14 program blocks in the screen. After finishing editing the program, press LOAD
to reload and then execute the program. Otherwise, the program cannot be executed.

Figure 7.16.6

Figure 7.16.7

7-56
Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual Program (PRG) Group

In addition, the SAVE function is for saving the program content entered in MDI mode as a file in
the current directory. The naming method is the same as that in Section 7.2 Create a new file.
That is, the file name has to follow the naming convention and should not be duplicated. The
CLR function is for deleting all the program content in the screen in MDI mode, which functions
the same as pressing and holding RESET for 3 seconds.

Note:
7
1. In MDI mode, the RESET key has a two-stage function. Press RESET once to return to the first line of

the manual input program after program interruption. Press and hold RESET for 3 seconds to clear all
the manual input program contents.

2. In MDI mode, after M30 is executed, the cursor returns to the first line of the program. You can run the

program again without reloading the program.

3. In MDI mode, if there is no M30 (Program end) command, the program runs to the last line. To run the

program again, press LOAD to reload the program.

4. After M02 is executed, the cursor stops at the block of M02 and the program status restores to the
default. Then, you can resume the execution from the block of M02 without reloading the program.

7-57
Program (PRG) Group Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual

(This page is intentionally left blank.)

7-58
Offset (OFS) Group
The OFS group provides functions of setting the workpiece coordinates, tool length,
tool radius compensation, and macro variables.

8.1 Coordinate setting (COORD)································································8-2

8.1.1 Auto set (AUTO) ·········································································8-3
8.1.2 Absolute input (ABS)····································································8-6
8.1.3 Incremental input (INC) ································································8-6
8.2 Tool setting·······················································································8-7
8.2.1 Tool length setting (OFFSET) ·························································8-7
8.2.2 Tool wear setting (WEAR) ··························································· 8-10
8.3 Tool magazine management (MAGA) ··················································· 8-11
8.3.1 Multi-magazine management ······················································· 8-15
8.4 Macro variables (MACRO) ································································· 8-16
8.4.1 Local variables (LOCAL) ····························································· 8-16
8.4.2 Global variables (GLOBAL) ························································· 8-16
8.4.3 Non-volatile variables (HOLD) ······················································ 8-16
8.4.4 Extension variables (EXTEND) ···················································· 8-17

8-1
Offset (OFS) Group Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual

The OFS group provides functions of setting the workpiece coordinates, tool length, tool radius
compensation, and macro variables.
Note: bold function names in a box (such as POS) mean the keys on machine operation panel A; bold

8 function names (such as CLR ALL) mean the function keys of F1 - F6.

8.1 Coordinate setting (COORD)

G54 - G59 are the set workpiece coordinate systems for you to select. With commands G54 -
G59, you can simplify the calculation of coordinates during programming as well as change the
coordinate data at any time, achieving more flexible machining process. You can specify the
coordinate values in the coordinate setting screen with one of the workpiece coordinate
commands (G54 - G59), as shown in the following figure.

(1) (2)

Figure 8.1.1
(1) Workpiece coordinate setting: offset coordinates, G54 - G59 coordinate systems
(2) Coordinate information display: machine (MECH) / relative (REL) / absolute (ABS) coordinates

The operation steps are as follows.

(1) Press OFS to enter the OFS screen.
(2) Press COORD to display the corresponding function bar.

Note:

1. Set the coordinate systems only when there is no machining program being executed. Otherwise, data

entry is prohibited.
2. If you press FEED HOLD during program execution, the system status displays “STOP” (Program
stops). If you press (Single block execution) during program execution, the execution stops after

the current block is finished, and the system status displays “Ready”.

8-2
Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual Offset (OFS) Group

8.1.1 Auto set (AUTO)

This function is used to automatically enter the current position of each axis to the coordinate

8
system (G54 - G59) where the cursor is located. The auto set function includes five options: clear
all data (CLR ALL), clear relative coordinates (CLR REL), setting the coordinate system center
(SET L/2), setting a single axis (SET), and setting multiple axes (SET P).

 CLR ALL (clear all data): clears all the axis values of the current coordinate system to 0
while the values in other systems remain unchanged.

 CLR REL (clear relative coordinates): clears the relative coordinate of the axis where the
cursor is located at while the coordinate data of other axes remain unchanged. This
function only clears the displayed relative coordinate instead of the actual workpiece
coordinate.

 SET L/2 (set the coordinate system center): sets the central position of a specific object as
the center of a coordinate system. The NC system automatically calculates and enters the
central position coordinates to the fields, so you do not need to do it manually. The following
operation steps take the X axis as an example.
(1) Set the system to JOG or MPG mode and move the machine axis to the initial contact
point of the workpiece in X-axis direction.
(2) Go to the SET L/2 setting page.
(3) Press Point1 and the circle on the left side of the rectangle becomes red, as shown in
Figure 8.1.1.1, meaning the machine coordinates of the first point is recorded.

Figure 8.1.1.1

(4) Continue to move the machine axis to the other contact point of the workpiece in X-axis
direction.
(5) Press Point2 and the circle on the right side of the rectangle becomes red, meaning
the machine coordinates of the second point is recorded.
(6) Press SET and the system automatically finds the midpoint between the two contact
points of the workpiece in X-axis direction and sets this point as the center of X axis in
the coordinate system, which is the workpiece origin of X axis.

8-3
Offset (OFS) Group Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual

 SET L (set a single axis): automatically enters the current machine coordinate of a single
axis. When you move the cursor to the X, Y, or Z field of a specific coordinate system and
press SET L, the current machine coordinate is automatically entered to the field where the

8 cursor is located. This function only enters the data of a single axis at a time.

Example of setting a single axis

This example illustrates setting the X-axis value by moving the machine axis to the specified
position (workpiece origin in X-axis direction as shown in Figure 8.1.1.2).

X axis workpiece origin

Workpiece

Machine origin Specify the moving distance

in X-axis direction

Figure 8.1.1.2

Then the machine coordinates are shown as in Figure 8.1.1.3. Move the cursor to a specific
coordinate system (such as G54 as shown in Figure 8.1.1.3) and press SET L to automatically
enter the X-axis value of the machine coordinate to the X-axis field in G54 coordinate system,
completing the data entry for a single axis.

Figure 8.1.1.3

8-4
Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual Offset (OFS) Group

 SET P (set multiple axes): automatically enters the coordinates of multiple axes. After
completing the calibration of workpiece center, you can use this function to enter the
machine coordinates of multiple axes (including X, Y, Z, and other axes) simultaneously.

Example of setting multiple axes

Move the machine axis to the specified position, shown as the workpiece origin in Figure 8.1.1.4
8
(the figure illustrates the position of X and Y axes except Z axis).

Workpiece origin

Specify the moving Workpiece

distance in Y-axis
direction

Machine origin Specify the moving

distance in X-axis direction

Figure 8.1.1.4

After completing the calibration of workpiece origin, the machine coordinates are shown as in
Figure 8.1.1.5. Move the cursor to the G54 coordinate system and press SET P to automatically
enter the X-, Y-, Z-, and C-axis machine coordinates to the X-, Y-, Z-, and C-axis fields in G54
coordinate system, completing the data entry for multiple axes.

Figure 8.1.1.5

8-5
Offset (OFS) Group Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual

8.1.2 Absolute input (ABS)

This function is used to enter the absolute coordinate of a single axis to the offset coordinate

8
system or workpiece coordinate system.

Note:

1. The displayed values are in units of mm. If you enter values without specifying the decimal points, the

values are in units of μm. For example, “123456” = 123456 μm = 123.456 mm.

2. You can also press ENTER to enter the absolute coordinates.

Example of absolute setting

Move the tool center from the machine origin to the workpiece origin (X, Y). Then, enter the
X- and Y-axis machine coordinates to the coordinate system (G54 - G59) in the OFS group.

Ｗorkpiece origin (0 , 0)

Specify the moving Workpiece

distance in Y-axis
direction

Machine origin (0 , 0) Specify the moving

distance in X-axis direction

Figure 8.1.2.1

Figure 8.1.2.2

8.1.3 Incremental input (INC)

This function is used to enter the coordinate value to the offset coordinate system or workpiece coordinate

system by incremental settings.

8-6
Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual Offset (OFS) Group

8.2 Tool setting

 The tool setting function of the lathe system includes tool length compensation, tool wear

8
compensation, tool nose radius, tool radius wear, and tool nose type. During program
editing, you need to specify the tool radius compensation number which corresponds to the
number in the compensation data table. Before using the compensation functions, go to the
tool setting screen of the OFS group to enter the compensation values.

 Command format of tool compensation:

T0204: 02 represents tool number 2 and 04 represents the 4th set of the tool length and tool

wear compensation settings in the compensation data table.

T02: if only one set of number is specified, it means you use tool number 2 and the 2nd set
of tool length and tool wear compensation settings in the compensation data table, which is

the same as T0202.

8.2.1 Tool length setting (OFFSET)

The tool length (Tool Offset) setting screen is as shown in the following figure.

(1)
(4)

(3)

(2)

Figure 8.2.2.1

(1) Compensation number, tool length compensation value, tool nose radius compensation
value, and tool nose type
(2) Data input field
(3) Input mode selection
(4) Auxiliary display: machine (MECH), absolute (ABS), and relative (REL) coordinates

Data setting range

Tool length compensation -9000.0 to 9000.0 mm
Tool nose radius compensation -9000.0 to 9000.0 mm
Tool nose type 0 to 9

8-7
Offset (OFS) Group Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual

Tool nose types:

(1) Tool nose type 0 or 9 (2) Tool nose types 1 - 4 (3) Tool nose types 5 - 8

Illustration of tool nose position and tool nose radius compensation:

(4) Actual tool nose position; (5) Hypothetical tool nose position when calibration;

(6) R value of tool nose radius compensation

Options of the OFFSET function:

 ABS (absolute setting): sets absolute values for tool length, tool radius, tool wear
compensation, and tool life. You can press ENTER to set absolute values.
 INC (incremental setting): sets incremental values for tool length, tool radius, tool wear
compensation, and tool life.
 LEN OFST (tool length offset): automatically calculates the corresponding tool length
compensation values (current machine coordinate – the input absolute coordinate) after the
absolute coordinates of each axis are entered. Note that the input absolute coordinate is a
signed value. This function avoids the risk of entering incorrect values and shortens the
setting time.
 ABS OFST (write absolute coordinates): writes the current absolute coordinates to the
tool table.
 CLR ONE (clear single-axis data): clears all the offset data of one single axis.
 ABS / INC MODE (absolute / incremental mode): when you set Pr10059 to 1 (absolute)
or 2 (incremental), the ABS/INC function key displays. When you set Pr10059 to 0, the
function key disappears. After pressing the ABS/INC function key to set the input mode
as absolute or incremental, enter the value and press ENTER to complete the setting.

8-8
Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual Offset (OFS) Group

Example of tool length compensation for X axis

Enter 20.0 (the measured diameter of X axis in units of mm after cutting) to the input field of

8
compensation value for X axis, press LEN OFST, and the system automatically calculates the
tool length compensation value.

Important: when you press LEN OFST after the cutting is complete, do not move the X axis (do
not change its machine coordinate).

8-9
Offset (OFS) Group Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual

8.2.2 Tool wear setting (WEAR)

The tool wear setting screen is as shown in the following figure.

8 (1)
(4)

(2)
(3)

Figure 8.2.1.2

(1) Compensation number for tool wear, wear values of corresponding axes, and
compensation values for tool radius wear
(2) Data input field
(3) Input mode selection
(4) Auxiliary display: machine (MECH), absolute (ABS), and relative (REL) coordinates

Data setting range

Tool wear for each axis -2000.0 to 2000.0 mm
Tool radius wear compensation -2000.0 to 2000.0 mm

Illustration of tool wear:

(1) Compensation amount of the tool nose wear for X axis

(2) Compensation amount of the tool nose wear for Z axis

8-10
Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual Offset (OFS) Group

8.3 Tool magazine management (MAGA)

This function is used to manage the tool positions and their corresponding tool pot numbers after

8
tool change. When a different tool is used, the tool pot positions and the corresponding tool
numbers are recorded in the tool magazine data table.
You can view the recorded tool pot positions corresponding to the tool numbers and also change
the sequence of the tool numbers in the tool magazine data table. With parameter settings, you
can enable the multi-magazine management function. The functions of tool magazine
management are only available in JOG mode, as shown in the following figure.

(1) (2)

(3)
(7)

(4)

(8)
(5)

(6)
Figure 8.3.1

(1) Current program name (7) Number of tool magazine system

(2) Currently executed program Tool number for current command
line Current standby tool number
(3) Current function group screen Current standby tool pot number
(4) Sequence of tool number
(5) Tool number input field (8) Spindle tool number
(6) Current override settings

The operation steps for tool magazine management are as follows.

(1) Set the system to JOG mode.
(2) Press OFS to enter the OFS screen.
(3) Press MAGA to enter the tool magazine data setting screen.
(4) Move the cursor to a specific field.
(5) Enter the tool number and press SET (or ENTER) to change the tool position.

8-11
Offset (OFS) Group Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual

Example of exchanging tool numbers

When you specify a number that has already existed in the data table, the system automatically

8
exchanges the number to be replaced with the one that is repeated. This ensures the tool
numbers in each address of the tool magazine do not overlap, preventing the tool call error.

Workflow description:

(1) Initial status of the tool magazine. Tool

numbers are arranged in sequence in
accordance with the tool pot numbers.

(2) If you set the tool number to 2 for tool

pot 1, then the tool number of tool pot 2
becomes 1. That is, the tool numbers
of tool pots 1 and 2 are exchanged.

(3) If you set the tool number to 5 for tool

pot 3, then the tool number of tool pot 5
becomes 3. That is, the tool numbers
of tool pots 3 and 5 are exchanged.

According to the preceding examples, the procedure of tool number change can avoid the
possibility of mistakenly calling the incorrect tool number.

8-12
Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual Offset (OFS) Group

 RST ALL (reset all tool numbers): resets the tool numbers in the tool magazine. After
resetting, the records of changes in tool numbers and tool pots are cleared, and the tool
numbers are arranged in sequence according to the tool pot numbers. With this function,


you can restore the data to the default setting for troubleshooting tool number
misplacement or resetting the tool numbers.

LOCK (lock the tool pot): locks the spare tool pots. Tool numbers of the locked pots cannot
8
be called. If you use a command in the program to call a locked tool, the system enables
the protection procedure and displays an error message to stop the execution. This
function further checks the tool for program execution, which is a prevention of errors
caused by incorrect tool call, such as damages to the latch of the tool pot or the
interference with the tool pot due to adjacent tools of large diameter. The data fields of the
locked pots are highlighted with a different color, as shown in Figure 8.3.2.

Figure 8.3.2

8-13
Offset (OFS) Group Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual

Example of locking the tool pot

Use the lock function to lock the tool pots adjacent to the tool pot carrying a tool with large

8
diameter, which prevents damages to the mechanical parts caused by misoperation. By blocking
the pots adjacent to the pot which carries a tool of large diameter, you can avoid executing
inappropriate tool call programs and thus prevent the possible collision caused by placing tools
into the adjacent tool pots.

Figure 8.3.3

Assuming that T1 is a tool of large diameter and the adjacent tools are T2 and T16, you can
avoid the interference with the adjacent tools by locking T2 and T16, as shown in the preceding
figure.

Figure 8.3.4

When T1 is a tool of large diameter, its interference with adjacent tools is as shown in Figure
8.3.4. With T2 and T16 locked, you cannot call tools in the two tool pots.

 UNLOCK (unlock the tool pot): unlocks the tool pots. Or you can enter the corresponding
tool number of the locked pot to the data field and press ENTER to unlock the tool pot.

8-14
Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual Offset (OFS) Group

8.3.1 Multi-magazine management

In response to the application needs for multiple tool magazines, you can enable this function

8
with tool magazine parameters after obtaining the permission. You can specify the amount of tool
pots and the corresponding tool numbers of each tool pot for individual tool magazines after
reset according to the magazine specifications. The items [Maga No 1] and [Maga No 2] on the
function bar are used to switch to the management screen of the corresponding tool magazine
systems. Contact the distributors for the multi-magazine management function.

Figure 8.3.1.1

Note:

1. You can set the tool numbers only when the system is in JOG mode. Otherwise, the corresponding

function bar is not displayed.

2. You have to obtain the permission in advance before setting or resetting the tool numbers.

3. Tool numbers in the same tool magazine system cannot be repeated. If you specify a number which

already exists in the magazine, the system automatically changes the existing number with a

non-repeating one. This ensures the tool numbers in each address of the tool magazine do not overlap,

preventing the tool call error.

4. The default spindle tool number is T0. Once tool T0 is placed into the tool magazine, the tool position in

the magazine is recorded as T0 and cannot be locked. That is, when the displayed tool number is “0”,

the LOCK function is disabled for the corresponding tool pot, and a dialog box showing “T0 can’t be

locked!” is displayed.

8-15
Offset (OFS) Group Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual

8.4 Macro variables (MACRO)

With commands using variables, you can modify values, perform conditional operations, and

8
input or output MLC data during program execution. There are four types of macro variables:
local, global, non-volatile, and extended variables, with the data type as double word.

Figure 8.4.1

8.4.1 Local variables (LOCAL)

The system can call up to 8 layers of macro programs and each program has an individual set of
local variables. Thus, there are 8 sets of local variables and each set of local variables ranges
from No. 1 to 50.
The operation steps are as follows.
(1) Press OFS to enter the OFS screen.
(2) Press MACRO to display the variable entry screen.
(3) Press LOCAL and the screen is automatically switched to display the variable table starting
with No. 1.
(4) Move the cursor to a specific field.
(5) Enter the value and press ENTER to complete the setting.

8.4.2 Global variables (GLOBAL)

Global variables are shared by main programs, subprograms, and macro programs, which range
from No. 51 to 250.

8.4.3 Non-volatile variables (HOLD)

Non-volatile variables are for retaining the system status when power is off, which range from
No. 1601 to 1800.

8-16
Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual Offset (OFS) Group

8.4.4 Extension variables (EXTEND)

Up to 1000 extension variables are available in the system, which range from No. 10001 to

8
11000.
Note: the default EXTEND screen displays 450 extension variables (#10001 - #10450). You can set

Pr.10016 EXTEND display to display 1000 extension variables (#10001 - #11000).

8-17
Offset (OFS) Group Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual

(This page is intentionally left blank.)

8-18
Diagnosis (DGN) Group
The DGN group provides functions of machining information, user variables, system
monitoring, and parameter importing / exporting for system optimization.

9.1 Machining information (PROCESS) ·······················································9-2

9.2 User variable (USR VAR) ····································································9-4
9.3 MLC ·······························································································9-5
9.3.1 Bit device (BIT) ···········································································9-6
9.3.2 Register (REG) ···········································································9-7
9.3.3 Device monitoring (DEV MON) ·······················································9-8
9.3.4 Line search (JUMP TO) ······························································ 9-10
9.3.5 Program editing (EDITOR)··························································· 9-10
9.3.6 Status switching (SET) ······························································· 9-13
9.4 System monitoring (SYS MON) ·························································· 9-14
9.4.1 Servo monitoring (SRV MON) ······················································ 9-14
9.4.2 I/O monitoring (I/O MON) ···························································· 9-14
9.4.3 System variables (SYS VAR) ······················································· 9-15
9.4.4 Variable monitoring (VAR MON) ···················································· 9-16
9.5 Password setting (PWD) ··································································· 9-18
9.5.1 System permissions (S SCP) ······················································· 9-18
9.5.2 Machine permissions (M SCP) ····················································· 9-19
9.5.3 User permissions (U1 SCP & U2 SCP) ··········································· 9-22
9.5.4 Usage duration (EXPIRE) ···························································· 9-23
9.6 System information (STATUS) ···························································· 9-26
9.7 Gain tuning (TUNING) ······································································ 9-27
9.8 Import data (IMPORT) ······································································ 9-31
9.9 Export data (EXPORT) ····································································· 9-32
9.10 Multi-language display (TEXT WR) ···················································· 9-34
9.11 LOGO (LOGO WR) ········································································ 9-34

9-1
 Diagnosis (DGN) Group Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual

The DGN group includes a variety of functions. Machining information, user variables, system
monitoring, gain adjustment, and system information are for optimizing the system. The MLC
diagnosis is for monitoring the current status of the MLC devices in the system. Password

9
setting allows you to assign different permission levels to the system functions. In addition,
system parameters can be imported and exported.

Note: bold function names in a box (such as POS) mean the keys on machine operation panel A; bold

function names (such as CLR ALL) mean the function keys of F1 - F6.

9.1 Machining information (PROCESS)

In the PROCESS screen, you can set the number of machining targets and complete pieces as
well as clear the total machining time and the number of complete pieces. Refer to the following
figure.

Figure 9.1.1

9-2
Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual Diagnosis (DGN) Group

The operation steps for setting the number of complete and target pieces are as follows.
(1) Press DGN to enter the DGN screen.
(2) Press PROCESS to enter the machining information screen.

9
(3) Press SET NR and a dialog box appears for you to set the numbers. Refer to the following
figure.

Figure 9.1.2

(4) Enter a value within the range of 0 - 9999 and press ENTER to complete the setting.

The operation steps for clearing the total machining time are as follows.
(1) Press DGN to enter the DGN screen.
(2) Press PROCESS to enter the machining information screen.
(3) Press CLR TIME and a dialog box appears for confirmation.
(4) Enter “Y” and press ENTER to clear the total machining time on the screen.

The operation steps for clearing the number of complete pieces are as follows.
(1) Press DGN to enter the DGN screen.
(2) Press PROCESS to enter the machining information screen.
(3) Press CLR NR and a dialog box appears for confirmation.
(4) Enter “Y” and press ENTER to clear the number of complete pieces on the screen.

9-3
 Diagnosis (DGN) Group Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual

9.2 User variable (USR VAR)

The functions of user variable include system variable (SYS VAR), user variable (USR VAR),
and machine variable (M VAR). The function of system variable is used to monitor specific

9 variables. The functions of user variable and machine variable are used to monitor or set the
registers (D512 - D1023) of the system.

Figure 9.2.1

The operation steps for User variable and Machine variable are as follows:
(1) Press DGN to enter the DGN screen.
(2) Press USR VAR to enter the variable monitoring screen.
(3) Press USR VAR or M VAR on the function bar in the second layer to enter the
corresponding setting screen.
(4) Move the cursor to a specific field.
(5) Enter the specified register number (512 - 1023) and press ENTER to load the data and
variable name of the specific register. The variable name has to be edited with the MLC
Editor software.
(6) Move the cursor to the Value field of the specific register, enter a valid value (range: 0 -
65535), and press ENTER to complete the setting.
(7) Press US DEC, HEX, S DEC, or FLOAT to set the data display format.
(8) Move the cursor to the data in the Value or REG D field to be cleared and press DEL.

9-4
Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual Diagnosis (DGN) Group

9.3 MLC
In the MLC screen, you can monitor the status of all MLC devices and force switch the devices
On or Off, as shown in Figure 9.3.1. MLC-related diagnostic functions include bit device status,
register status, device monitoring, MLC status switching, and MLC editing. The operation steps
for these functions are described in the following sections.
9

Figure 9.3.1

9-5
 Diagnosis (DGN) Group Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual

9.3.1 Bit device (BIT)

MLC programs require a number of commands to trigger the devices to On or Off. The status of
these devices is shown in the MLC Bit Device screen. This function is used to monitor, search

9 for, and force On / Off the bit type MLC devices.

The following operation steps take the M devices as an example.
(1) Press DGN to enter the DGN screen.
(2) Press MLC to display the function bar in the second layer.
(3) Press BIT to enter the screen which displays the status of bit devices.
(4) Press M to display the M device status as follows. Move the cursor to a specific field or
directly search for a specific device by referring to Step (5).

Figure 9.3.1.1

(5) To search for a specific device, such as M107, enter “107” and then press M.
(6) To change the status of a specific device, set the system to non-AUTO mode first. Then,
select the device, enter “1” or “0”, and then press ENTER to force the device On or Off
according to the current status of the device.

9-6
Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual Diagnosis (DGN) Group

9.3.2 Register (REG)

Most of the CNC system functions are triggered by MLC programs. MLC devices are divided
into bit type and word type. The following describes the operation steps for the T registers (word
type device).
(1) Press DGN to enter the DGN screen.
(2) Press MLC to display the function bar in the second layer.
9
(3) Press REG to enter the register device screen.

Figure 9.3.2.1

(4) Press T to enter the T register setting screen.

(5) Enter the device name, such as 10, and press T to search for the device, T10.
(6) Enter the value in the input field and press ENTER to complete the setting.
(7) Go to the last page of the function bar and press US DEC, HEX, S DEC, or FLOAT to set
the data display format.

9-7
 Diagnosis (DGN) Group Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual

9.3.3 Device monitoring (DEV MON)

This function can be used to monitor up to 45 sets of device data. The operation steps are as
follows.

9 (1) Press DGN to enter the DGN screen.

(2) Press MLC to display the function bar in the second layer.
(3) Press DEV MON to display the screen for device name entry as shown in Figure 9.3.3.1.

Figure 9.3.3.1

(4) Enter the name of the device to be monitored as shown in Figure 9.3.3.2. You can enter up
to 45 device names.

Figure 9.3.3.2

Dev (device): when the cursor is located in this field, you can enter the name of the device
to be monitored.
Value: move the cursor to this field to set the data of the device.
Status: enter “0” or “1” to set the device status.

9-8
Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual Diagnosis (DGN) Group

In addition, you can use the functions of US DEC, HEX, S DEC, and FLOAT to set the data
display format according to the requirements. The data in Figure 9.3.3.3 are in hexadecimal
format and the data in Figure 9.3.3.4 are in floating format.

Figure 9.3.3.3

Figure 9.3.3.4

9-9
 Diagnosis (DGN) Group Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual

9.3.4 Line search (JUMP TO)

Use this function to search for a specific line of the MLC program according to the entered line
number.

9 (1) Press DGN to enter the DGN screen.

(2) Press MLC to display the function bar in the second layer.
(3) Enter a specific line number of the MLC program and press JUMP TO to go to the target
line.

9.3.5 Program editing (EDITOR)

You can directly edit the MLC programs with these editing functions on the controller interface in
EDIT mode.

 Basic MLC commands

You can use the LD, LDI, LDP, LDF, OUT, APP, —, and︱ functions to create the
corresponding commands. See Figure 9.3.5.1 for the MLC screen.

Figure 9.3.5.1

The following operation steps take the LD function for example.

(1) Press DGN to enter the DGN screen.
(2) Press MLC to display the function bar in the second layer.
(3) Press EDITOR to enter the MLC Edit screen as shown in Figure 9.3.5.1.
(4) Move the cursor to the field to be edited.
(5) Enter the device name and press LD to complete creating the command.

The preceding steps are also applicable in creating the LDI, LDP, LDF, OUT, APP, —
and︱ commands.

9-10
Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual Diagnosis (DGN) Group

In addition, to specify the values for the Table command in the MLC ladder diagram, press
TABLE to display the MLC table as follows.

Figure 9.3.5.2

 Editing (SELECT, DEL, CUT, COPY, PASTE, ADD LN, DEL LN)
With these functions, you can delete, cut, or copy a single line of the program. Or you can
use these functions with the SELECT function to delete, cut, or copy a certain section of
the MLC program. After completing the editing, use the SAVE function to recompile and
save the MLC program. The operation steps for editing MLC programs are as follows.
(1) Press DGN to enter the DGN screen.
(2) Press MLC to display the function bar in the second layer.
(3) Press EDITOR to enter the MLC Edit screen as shown in Figure 9.3.5.1.
(4) Move the cursor to the field to be edited.
(5) Repeatedly press to display the function bar on the last page in this layer.
(6) Press the corresponding function key for editing. For example, press CUT to delete a
certain line of the program.

9-11
 Diagnosis (DGN) Group Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual

 Symbol
Use this function to delete, copy, and paste the MLC devices. The MLC devices are
represented with the symbols X, Y, M, A, T, C, D, P, and I. The operation steps are as

9
follows.
(1) Press DGN to enter the DGN screen.
(2) Press MLC to display the function bar in the second layer.
(3) Press EDITOR to enter the MLC Edit screen as shown in Figure 9.3.5.1.
(4) Move the cursor to the field to be edited.
(5) Press to display the function bar on the third page.
(6) Press SYMBOL to display the corresponding function bar.
(7) Press the corresponding function key, such as X, to display the list of corresponding
devices and use the functions of delete, copy, or paste as required.

Note: the preceding steps are applicable to other device symbols.

 Save, import, and export MLC program

After editing the MLC program, use the SAVE function to recompile and save the program.
Then restart the system to update the MLC program. In addition, use the corresponding
function keys (IMPORT / EXPORT) to import or export MLC files.

9-12
Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual Diagnosis (DGN) Group

9.3.6 Status switching (SET)

The system runs the MLC program right after starting. To manually switch the execution status,
use this function to stop the MLC program. This function switches the MLC program status to
On or Off, which is usually used to test or check the MLC devices in the system. The operation
steps are as follows.
(1) Press DGN to enter the DGN screen.
9
(2) Press MLC to display the function bar in the second layer.
(3) Press SET to switch to the screen of MLC execution status.
(4) Press RUN / STP to force switch the MLC program status.

Note: after stopping the MLC program, you can see the status of “MLC Stop” in the system status field.

In addition, you can force the MLC device On or Off using the corresponding functions.
 The operation steps for forcing the device On are as follows.
(1) Press DGN to enter the DGN screen.
(2) Press MLC to display the function bar in the second layer.
(3) Press SET to switch to the screen of MLC execution status.
(4) Move the cursor to a specific field.
(5) Press ON to switch the device status to On.

 The operation steps for forcing the device Off are as follows.
(1) Press DGN to enter the DGN screen.
(2) Press MLC to display the function bar in the second layer.
(3) Press SET to switch to the screen of MLC execution status.
(4) Move the cursor to a specific field.
(5) Press OFF to switch the device status to Off.

9-13
 Diagnosis (DGN) Group Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual

9.4 System monitoring (SYS MON)

The various calculation results of the system are displayed in categories with this function.

9 9.4.1 Servo monitoring (SRV MON)

The function of servo monitoring allows users to check information such as the channel port
number and servo status of each axis on the system screen. As shown in Figure 9.4.1.1, both
the spindle and Z axis are in the Off status and both X and Y axes are in the On status.

Figure 9.4.1.1

The operation steps are as follows.

(1) Press DGN to enter the DGN screen.
(2) Press SYS MON to switch to the system monitoring screen.
(3) Press SRV MON to display the servo monitoring screen.

9.4.2 I/O monitoring (I/O MON)

The control switches for external devices can be added to the NC series system with the I/O
extension modules. You can monitor the status of the I/O extension control board connected to
the system on the I/O monitoring screen. The operation steps are as follows.
(1) Press DGN to enter the DGN screen.
(2) Press SYS MON to switch to the system monitoring screen.
(3) Press I/O MON to display the status monitoring screen for the I/O extension module.

9-14
Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual Diagnosis (DGN) Group

9.4.3 System variables (SYS VAR)

In the System Var screen, you can check the following system information.

(1) MPG pulse counter: the original MPG pulse number which is not multiplied by the
magnification (D1042).
(2) Maximum axis number: the maximum number of controllable NC axes of the system.
(3) Tapping error: each time the tapping is finished, you can check the tapping result with this
9
variable. The value of this variable is the maximum difference between the command
position and feedback position during tapping.
(4) Spindle position: the offset rotation angle of the 1st spindle. If the encoder does not go
through the Z phase point, the value of this variable is 0 and the rotation angle of the
spindle is not updated.
(5) Spindle speed: the current speed of the 1st spindle. This is a signed value. When the value
is positive, it means the spindle rotates in forward direction. When the value is negative, it
means the spindle rotates in reverse direction.
(6) 2nd spindle tapping error / 2nd spindle position / 2nd spindle speed: refer to the descriptions in
(3), (4), and (5).
(7) MLC scan time: the average MLC scan time.
(8) The minimum of MLC scan time.
(9) The maximum of MLC scan time.

Figure 9.4.3.1

9-15
 Diagnosis (DGN) Group Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual

9.4.4 Variable monitoring (VAR MON)

 SYS VAR: the system variables include VS0 - VS31 and VS100 - VS131.
The operation steps are as follows.

9 (1) Press DGN to enter the DGN screen.

(2) Press SYS MON to switch to the system monitoring screen.
(3) Press to display the function bar on the second page.
(4) Press VAR MON to display the variable monitoring screen.
(5) Press SYS VAR to display the system variable screen.
(6) Switch to the page of a specific variable.
(7) To search for a specific system variable, directly enter the full name of the variable
(such as VS15) and press ENTER, or simply enter the variable number and press
SYS VAR.

Figure 9.4.4.1

 CH VAR: the channel variables include VC0 - VC31, VC100 - VC131, and VC200 - VC231.
The operation steps are as follows.
(1) Press DGN to enter the DGN screen.
(2) Press SYS MON to switch to the system monitoring screen.
(3) Press to display the function bar on the second page.
(4) Press VAR MON to display the variable monitoring screen.
(5) Press CH VAR to display the channel variable screen.
(6) Switch to the page of a specific variable.
(7) To search for a specific channel variable, directly enter the full name of the variable
and press ENTER, or simply enter the variable number and press CH VAR.

9-16
Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual Diagnosis (DGN) Group

 AXIS VAR: the axis variables include VA0 - VA31, VA100 - VA131, and VA200 - VA231.
The operation steps are as follows.
(1) Press DGN to enter the DGN screen.

9
(2) Press SYS MON to switch to the system monitoring screen.
(3) Press to display the function bar on the second page.
(4) Press VAR MON to display the variable monitoring screen.
(5) Press AXIS VAR to display the axis variable screen.
(6) Switch to the page of a specific variable.
(7) To search for a specific axis variable, directly enter the full name of the variable and
press ENTER, or simply enter the variable number and press AXIS VAR.

 IF VAR: the interface variables include VH0 - VH31, VH200 - VH231, VH400 - VH431, and
VH800 - VH863. The operation steps are as follows.
(1) Press DGN to enter the DGN screen.
(2) Press SYS MON to switch to the system monitoring screen.
(3) Press to display the function bar on the second page.
(4) Press VAR MON to display the variable monitoring screen.
(5) Press IF VAR to display the interface variable screen.
(6) Switch to the page of a specific variable.
(7) To search for a specific interface variable, directly enter the full name of the variable
and press ENTER, or simply enter the variable number and press IF VAR.

 MLC VAR: the MLC variables include VM0 - VM49. The operation steps are as follows.
(1) Press DGN to enter the DGN screen.
(2) Press SYS MON to switch to the system monitoring screen.
(3) Press to display the function bar on the second page.
(4) Press VAR MON to display the variable monitoring screen.
(5) Press MLC VAR to display the MLC variable screen.
(6) Switch to the page of a specific variable.
(7) To search for a specific MLC variable, directly enter the full name of the variable and
press ENTER, or simply enter the variable number and press MLC VAR.

9-17
 Diagnosis (DGN) Group Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual

9.5 Password setting (PWD)

To effectively manage the system operation permissions, use this function to assign different
permission levels to the functions of system (system maintenance), machine (mechanical

9 devices), and user (operation). This prevents users without permissions from changing the
system settings and thus affecting the system operation.

9.5.1 System permissions (S SCP)

This function includes the options of denying the permission (LOCK), granting the permission
(UNLOCK), and checking the system (SYS CHECK). The 4-digit password may contain four
numbers, four letters, or a mix of numbers and letters (no symbols).
The operation steps for granting and denying the system permission are as follows.
(1) Press DGN to enter the DGN screen.
(2) Press PWD to display the function bar of password setting.
(3) Press S SCP to display the corresponding function bar.
(4) When the system permission is granted, press LOCK to immediately deny the permission to
all system-related functions.
(5) When the system permission is denied, press UNLOCK, and a dialog box appears for you
to enter the valid permission password.
(6) After entering the password, press ENTER to grant the permission.

The operation steps for checking the system are as follows.

(1) Press DGN to enter the DGN screen.
(2) Press PWD to display the function bar of password setting.
(3) Press S SCP to display the corresponding function bar.
(4) When the system permission is granted, press SYS CHECK to check the status of the
function items. If the check box for a specific item is selected, it means some parameter
settings of the specific item are incorrect.

9-18
Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual Diagnosis (DGN) Group

9.5.2 Machine permissions (M SCP)

This function includes the options of changing the password (PWG CHG), granting the
permission (LOCK), denying the permission (UNLOCK), resetting the password (RST U1 & RST
U2), enabling the function (FUN ENA), and resetting (RESET). The 4-digit password may
contain four numbers, four letters, or a mix of numbers and letters (no symbols).

The operation steps for changing the password are as follows.

9
(1) Press DGN to enter the DGN screen.
(2) Press PWD to display the function bar of password setting.
(3) Press M SCP to switch to the function bar of machine permission.
(4) Press PWD CHG and a dialog box appears as shown in Figure 9.5.2.1. Enter the old
password and the new password. Then, enter the new password again for confirmation.
(5) Press ENTER to complete changing the password.

Figure 9.5.2.1

The operation steps for granting the machine permission are as follows.
(1) Press DGN to enter the DGN screen.
(2) Press PWD to display the function bar of password setting.
(3) Press M SCP to switch to the function bar of machine permission.
(4) When the machine permission is denied, press UNLOCK and a dialog box appears for you
to enter the valid password.
(5) Enter the valid password and press ENTER to grant the machine permission.

Note: the default password for machine permission is 0000 which is not assigned to any permission level,

meaning that users of any level can access the machine-related functions. You need to change the default

password of 0000 to enable the machine permission, and only users granted with the permission can

access the machine-related functions.

9-19
 Diagnosis (DGN) Group Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual

The operation steps for denying the machine permission are as follows.
(1) Press DGN to enter the DGN screen.
(2) Press PWD to display the function bar of password setting.

9
(3) Press M SCP to switch to the function bar of machine permission.
(4) When the machine permission is granted, press LOCK to deny the permission to all
machine-related functions.

The RST U1 / RST U2 (password resetting) function allows the equipment supplier to reset the
user’s password. If you forget the password, contact the equipment supplier and request a reset
for the password. This function is available only when you are not using the default password.
The operation steps are as follows.
(1) Press DGN to enter the DGN screen.
(2) Press PWD to display the function bar of password setting.
(3) Press M SCP to switch to the function bar of machine permission.
(4) Press RST U1 or RST U2 to reset the user’s password.

The FUN ENA (function enabling) function is designed for the equipment supplier to enable or
disable certain function groups. Once the check box for a specific function group is cleared, that
function group is not available after the system is restarted.
The operation steps are as follows.
(1) Press DGN to enter the DGN screen.
(2) Press PWD to display the function bar of password setting.
(3) Press M SCP to switch to the function bar of machine permission.
(4) Press FUN ENA to enter the setting screen to enable or disable the function groups.
(5) Move the cursor to the check box to be cleared, and then press ENTER to cancel the
selection. Then press OK and restart the system for the changes to take effect.
(6) Continued from Step (5), to keep the original settings, press CANCEL to exit the screen and
discard the previous settings.
(7) To restore to the system default setting, press DEFAULT.

Figure 9.5.2.2

9-20
Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual Diagnosis (DGN) Group

The RESET (system reset) function allows users to restore the system with the system backup
file when the system is in error or the system data is corrupted. In the Default screen, if the
check box for a specific item is selected, it means the data of this specific item is corrupted. You

9
can use this function to restore the data of the specific item. This function is available only with
the proper permission level.
The operation steps are as follows.
(1) Press DGN to enter the DGN screen.
(2) Press PWD to display the function bar of password setting.
(3) Press M SCP to switch to the function bar of machine permission.
(4) Press RESET to enter the corresponding screen and move the cursor to a specific item.
Press ENTER to select the item to be restored.
(5) To clear the check box, move the cursor to the selected item and press ENTER.
(6) Press OK to restore the system.

9-21
 Diagnosis (DGN) Group Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual

9.5.3 User permissions (U1 SCP & U2 SCP)

This function is divided into U1 SCP and U2 SCP, including the options of changing the
password (PWD CHG), denying the permission (LOCK), and granting the permission

9 (UNLOCK). The 4-digit password may contain four numbers, four letter, or a mix of numbers
and letters (no symbols). The following takes U1 SCP for example.

The operation steps for changing the user password are as follows.
(1) Press DGN to enter the DGN screen.
(2) Press PWD to display the function bar of password setting.
(3) When the permission of User 1 (U1 SCP) is denied, press U1 SCP and a dialog box
appears for you to enter the permission password.
(4) Enter the correct permission password and press ENTER, and then the permission of User
1 is granted and the corresponding function bar is displayed.
(5) Press PWD CHG and a dialog box appears. Enter the old password and the new password.
Then, enter the new password again for confirmation.
(6) Press ENTER to complete changing the password.

The operation steps for granting the user permission are as follows.
(1) Press DGN to enter the DGN screen.
(2) Press PWD to display the function bar of password setting.
(3) When the permission of User 1 (U1 SCP) is denied, press U1 SCP and a dialog box
appears for you to enter the permission password.
(4) Enter the correct permission password and press ENTER, and then the permission of User
1 is granted and the corresponding function bar is displayed.

The operation steps for denying the user permission are as follows.
(1) Press DGN to enter the DGN screen.
(2) Press PWD to display the function bar of password setting.
(3) When the permission of User 1 (U1 SCP) is granted, press U1 SCP, and a dialog box
appears for you to enter the permission password.
(4) Press LOCK to deny the permission of User 1.

Note: like the function of machine permission, the default password for user permission is 0000 which is

not assigned to any permission level. You need to change the default password of 0000 to enable the user

permission.

9-22
Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual Diagnosis (DGN) Group

9.5.4 Usage duration (EXPIRE)

For specific situations, you can set the usage duration for the controller with the permission to
this function granted. After the usage duration is set, the available time (hours or days) is
automatically counted. When the setting of usage duration is effective, you can disable or reset
the setting only with the proper permission. When the setting of usage duration is not set or
disabled, no expiration date is displayed in the Deadline field on the screen, as shown in Figure
9
9.5.4.1. Once you set the usage duration and do not disable the setting, the expiration date is
displayed in the Deadline field, as shown in Figure 9.5.4.2.

Figure 9.5.4.1

Figure 9.5.4.2

You can see the controller’s operation expiration date on this screen. When the usage duration
has expired, the NC system will be locked, meaning that any execution of G-code program (in
both AUTO and MDI modes) is prohibited. The execution will not resume until the setting of
usage duration is disabled or extended. If the usage duration has expired, contact the distributor
or equipment supplier for entering the valid password to disable the setting.

9-23
 Diagnosis (DGN) Group Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual

You can use the SETTING function only when the usage duration is not set.
The operation steps for setting the usage duration are as follows.
(1) Press DGN to enter the DGN screen.

9
(2) Press PWD to display the function bar of password setting.
(3) Press EXPIRE to display the expiration information.
(4) Press SETTING to display the setting screen of usage duration.
(5) Enter a valid password to set the usage duration for the controller.

The operation steps for disabling the setting of usage duration are as follows (contact the
distributor or equipment supplier for services).
(1) Press DGN to enter the DGN screen.
(2) Press PWD to display the function bar of password setting.
(3) Press EXPIRE to display the expiration information.
(4) Press RELEASE and a dialog box appears as shown in Figure 9.5.4.3.

Figure 9.5.4.3

(5) Enter the activation code, press ENTER, and cycle power to the system to disable the
setting of usage duration.

Note: after the setting of usage duration is disabled, no expiration date is displayed in the Deadline field as

shown in Figure 9.5.4.1, which means no usage duration is set for the system.

9-24
Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual Diagnosis (DGN) Group

You can grant or deny the permission to the EXP SCP function only with the proper permission
level. When the permission to the EXP SCP function is denied, you need to enter the correct
permission password to grant the permission. When the permission is granted, you can use all

9
the functions under EXP SCP. This function includes the options of changing the password
(PWD CHG), denying the permission (LOCK), and granting the permission (UNLOCK). The
4-digit password may contain four numbers, four letters, or a mix of numbers and letters (no
symbols). The operation steps are as follows.

The operation steps for changing the password for EXP SCP are as follows.
(1) Press DGN to enter the DGN screen.
(2) Press PWD to display the function bar of password setting.
(3) Press EXPIRE to display the expiration information.
(4) When the permission is denied, press EXP SCP and a dialog box appears for you to enter
the password for EXP SCP.
(5) Enter the valid password, press ENTER, and the permission is granted and the
corresponding function bar is displayed.
(6) Press PWD CHG and a dialog box appears. Enter the old password and the new password.
Then, enter the new password again for confirmation.
(7) Press ENTER to complete changing the password.

The operation steps for granting the permission to the EXP SCP function are as follows.
(1) Press DGN to enter the DGN screen.
(2) Press PWD to display the function bar of password setting.
(3) Press EXPIRE to display the expiration information.
(4) When the permission is denied, press EXP SCP and a dialog box appears for you to enter
the password for EXP SCP.
(5) Enter the valid password, press ENTER, and the permission is granted and the
corresponding function bar is displayed.

The operation steps for denying the permission to the EXP SCP function are as follows.
(1) Press DGN to enter the DGN screen.
(2) Press PWD to display the function bar of password setting.
(3) Press EXPIRE to display the expiration information.
(4) When the permission is granted, press EXP SCP to display the corresponding function bar.
(5) Press LOCK to deny the permission.

9-25
 Diagnosis (DGN) Group Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual

9.6 System information (STATUS)

This function provides information about the firmware and hardware versions of the system.
You can maintain and optimize the system according to the version information displayed on the

9 screen. This function includes the options of system status (SYSTEM), firmware serial number
(FW SN), hardware serial number (HW SN), and equipment information (M INFO).

The operation steps for displaying the system status are as follows.
(1) Press DGN to enter the DGN screen.
(2) Press STATUS to enter the system information screen.
(3) Press SYSTEM to display the system status screen.

The operation steps for displaying the firmware serial number are as follows.
(1) Press DGN to enter the DGN screen.
(2) Press STATUS to enter the system information screen.
(3) Press FW SN to display the firmware versions of the system as shown in the following
figure.

Figure 9.6.1

The operation steps for displaying the hardware serial number are as follows.
(1) Press DGN to enter the DGN screen.
(2) Press STATUS to enter the system information screen.
(3) Press HW SN to display the hardware version.

The operation steps for displaying the equipment information are as follows.
(1) Press DGN to enter the DGN screen.
(2) Press STATUS to enter the system information screen.
(3) Press M INFO to display the equipment information screen.
(4) In the screen of equipment information, you can enter the descriptions or notes for a
specific equipment using numbers or letters; or press DEL to delete the information in the
field where the cursor is located.

9-26
Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual Diagnosis (DGN) Group

9.7 Gain tuning (TUNING)

The auto tuning function enables the NC system and servo drive to perform optimized motion
control for meeting different machine characteristics. With this function, the NC system reads
the servo parameters and then adjusts the gain values. The results of gain tuning are returned
to the servo drive, so the control parameters of the controller and drive are consistent. This
facilitates the gain tuning procedure and maintains high-precision control of the system. The
9
Servo Tuning screen is as follows and the following are the operation steps for each
subordinate function.

(4)

(1)

(5)

(2) (3)

(1) Servo parameter: number and name of the servo parameter

(2) Results after gain tuning: displays the calculation results of auto
tuning
(3) System settings: displays the current servo settings
(4) Position setting: Position 1 / Position 2
(5) Tuning conditions

 NEXT AX (next axis): switches to another axis for gain tuning. You need to perform auto
tuning for each axis separately, so after completing setting one axis, use this function to
switch to another axis and continue auto tuning.
The operation steps are as follows.
(1) Press DGN to enter the DGN screen.
(2) Press to display the function bar on the next page.
(3) Press TUNING to enter the auto tuning setting screen.
(4) To set the gain parameters for another axis, press NEXT AX to switch to the specific
axis.

9-27
 Diagnosis (DGN) Group Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual

 READ (read servo parameters): accesses the parameter values from the servo and writes
the values in the Calculate fields.
The operation steps are as follows.

9
(1) Press DGN to enter the DGN screen.
(2) Press to display the function bar on the next page.
(3) Press TUNING to enter the auto tuning setting screen.
(4) Press READ to read the servo parameters back to the controller.

 RUN / STOP, JOG←, JOG→, POS1, POS2: operating functions for auto tuning. Use these
functions to enable auto tuning, set the positioning point, and move the axis.
The operation steps for the continuous operation of a single axis are as follows.
(1) Press DGN to enter the DGN screen.
(2) Press to display the function bar on the next page.
(3) Press TUNING to enter the auto tuning setting screen.
(4) Press to display the function bar on the next page.
(5) Press JOG← to move the axis to the left positioning point.
(6) Press POS1 to set the left positioning point.
(7) Press JOG→ to move the axis to the right positioning point.
(8) Press POS2 to set the right positioning point. The movement is now limited within
Position 1 and Position 2.
(9) Press RUN to start auto tuning.
(10) During auto tuning, press STOP to compete tuning. Then, the system automatically
calculates and generates the optimal gain values.

 COMPUTE (gain calculation): if you changed the parameter values of low-frequency

rigidity, bandwidth, or inertia to accommodate to the machine characteristics, use this
function to calculate and generate the results of gain tuning. The operation steps for
calculating the gain value of a single axis are as follows.
(1) Press DGN to enter the DGN screen.
(2) Press to display the function bar on the next page.
(3) Press TUNING to enter the auto tuning setting screen.
(4) Move the cursor to the fields of Rigidity, BW, and JL/Jm to set the parameters.
(5) Press COMPUTE to calculate the tuning results.

9-28
Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual Diagnosis (DGN) Group

 WR GAIN & WR Notch (write the gain and resonance values): the system automatically
calculates the gain values after auto tuning is finished and the motion stops. If the
calculated gain values are as required, you can use the WR GAIN and WR Notch functions

9
to write the new parameter values to the servo. The operation steps are as follows.
(1) Press DGN to enter the DGN screen.
(2) Press to display the function bar on the next page.
(3) Press TUNING to enter the auto tuning setting screen.
(4) After tuning, the results are automatically calculated.
(5) To write the corresponding gain parameters to the servo, press WR GAIN. To write the
parameter values for resonance suppression to the servo, press WR Notch.

Note:

1. You have to write the results of auto tuning to the servo for the values to take effect.

2. After you use the WR GAIN and WR Notch functions to write the gain and resonance values, the

servo parameters are updated and the previous settings cannot be restored. Thus, double check
before using these functions.

 TAP RIV (calibration for tapping): in tapping applications, calibrate the machine and servo
with this function.
The operation steps for TAP SET(1) are as follows. (This function is available when you are
using a Delta servo product to drive the spindle.)
(1) Press DGN to enter the DGN screen.
(2) Press to display the function bar on the next page.
(3) Press TUNING to enter the auto tuning setting screen.
(4) Complete tuning the servo axes (X, Y, and Z) and the spindle.
(5) Repeatedly press to switch to the function bar on the last page.
(6) Press TAP RIV to switch to the corresponding screen.
(7) Press TAP SET(1) and a dialog box appears for confirmation. Enter “Y” and press
ENTER to complete calibrating the machine for tapping applications.

The operation steps for TAP SET(2) are as follows. (This function is available when you are
using Delta’s AC inverter or a 3rd party servo product to drive the spindle.)
(1) Press DGN to enter the DGN screen.
(2) Press to display the function bar on the next page.
(3) Press TUNING to enter the auto tuning setting screen.
(4) Complete tuning the servo axes (X, Y, and Z) and the spindle.
(5) Repeatedly press to switch to the function bar on the last page.
(6) Press TAP RIV to switch to the corresponding screen.
(7) Press TAP SET(2) and a dialog box appears for confirmation. Enter “Y”, press ENTER,
and a dialog box appears for you to enter the spindle control gain. Enter the correct
value and then press ENTER, and the system adjusts the tapping settings for the
machine according to the set value.

9-29
 Diagnosis (DGN) Group Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual

 SERVO (servo parameters): for displaying and setting servo parameters in the Servo
Tuning screen.
The operation steps are as follows.

9
(1) Press DGN to enter the DGN screen.
(2) Press to display the function bar on the next page.
(3) Press TUNING to enter the auto tuning setting screen.
(4) Repeatedly press to switch to the function bar on the last page.
(5) Press SERVO to display the servo parameter screen.
(6) Move the cursor to the field of the parameter to be edited, enter the value, and press
ENTER to complete the setting.

9-30
Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual Diagnosis (DGN) Group

9.8 Import data (IMPORT)

You can use this function to import the backup parameters to the NC system with the
permission to this function granted. The operation steps are as follows.
(1) Press DGN to enter the DGN screen.
(2) Press to display the function bar on the next page.
(3) Press IMPORT to display the file manager (FILE) window as shown in Figure 9.8.1. Select
9
the directory to import the file, press ENTER, and the system accesses the files in the
folder.

Figure 9.8.1

(4) In the screen of the parameters, move the cursor to the system parameter to be imported.
Then, press ENTER to select or clear the check boxes.
(5) To select all the check boxes, press SEL ALL. To clear all the selected check boxes, press
CLR ALL.

Figure 9.8.2

9-31
 Diagnosis (DGN) Group Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual

(6) Press IMPORT and a dialog box appears for confirmation. Enter “Y” and press ENTER to
import the data in the file to the system. Then, a progress bar of the importing process is
displayed. Cycle power to the system after the importing is complete.

Figure 9.8.3

9.9 Export data (EXPORT)

Use this function to back up the parameter data of the system. The exported files include three
types: parameter files, MLC, and software panel. You have to access the permission to this
function for operation.

Type Filename Description

Parameter files PAR.ncp NC information, servo parameters, and alarms

MLC MLC.gmc MLC programs

MLC MLC.lad Image codes for MLC Ladder

MLC MLC.lcm Notes for MLC Ladder

Software panel HMI.cin Screen information and element properties for software panel

Software panel HMI.img Graphic files for software panel

Software panel HMI.sci Project files for software panel

9-32
Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual Diagnosis (DGN) Group

The operation steps for exporting parameters are as follows:

(1) Press DGN to enter the DGN screen.
(2) Press to display the function bar on the next page.

9
(3) Press EXPORT to enter the parameter export screen.
(4) In the screen of the parameters, move the cursor to the system parameter to be exported.
Press ENTER to select or clear the check boxes. To select all the check boxes, press
SEL ALL. To clear all the selected check boxes, press CLR ALL.

Figure 9.9.1

(5) Press EXPORT and the file manage (FILE) window appears as shown in Figure 9.9.2.
Select the directory to save the exported files, or directly enter the folder name and press
ENTER to save the exported files to the specified folder.

Figure 9.9.2

(6) Then, the screen displays a progress bar showing the exporting process until the
exporting is finished.
(7) If you want to save the exported file to a new folder, name the folder, then press FOLDER to
save the exported file in the folder, as shown in Figure 9.9.2.

9-33
 Diagnosis (DGN) Group Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual

(8) If you save the exported file to a folder where an exported file already exists, a confirmation
window appears as shown in Figure 9.9.3. Enter “Y” and press ENTER to replace the
existing file with the newly exported file.

Figure 9.9.3

9.10 Multi-language display (TEXT WR)

The default display languages for the function group screens and corresponding function bars
are Traditional Chinese, Simplified Chinese, and English. If there is a need for other languages,
use this function to switch the interface to other languages. Contact the distributors or
equipment suppliers for related information.

9.11 LOGO (LOGO WR)

Use this function to set the startup screen of the NC system with user-defined pictures for
displaying the trademark or for other purposes. You can use this function only when the
permission to this function is granted. The operation steps are as follows.
(1) Press DGN to enter the DGN screen.
(2) Repeatedly press to display the function bar on the last page.
(3) Ensure the correct startup screen file (SYSLOGO.bin) is in the USB disk and insert the USB
disk to the controller.
(4) Press LOGO WR and a dialog box appears for confirmation.
(5) Enter “Y”, press OK, and the system automatically reads and loads the startup screen file
from the USB disk.
(6) After the file is uploaded to the system, restart the system to display the updated startup
screen.

9-34
Alarm (ALM) Group
The ALM group screen displays information about the alarms issued by the system in
real time.

10.1 Current alarms (ALARM) ································································· 10-2

10.2 Alarm history (HISTORY) ································································· 10-3

10-1
 Alarm (ALM) Group Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual

When an alarm occurs due to execution error or incorrect command format, the Alarm screen is
automatically displayed. This function group screen shows information about the alarms issued
by the system in real time, so you can troubleshoot the errors according to the displayed alarm

10 information. In addition to displaying the current alarms, the ALM group provides the error log
function.

Note: bold function names in a box (such as POS) mean the keys on machine operation panel A; bold

function names (such as CLR ALL) mean the function keys of F1 - F6.

10.1 Current alarms (ALARM)

When an alarm occurs, troubleshoot the issue first, and then press RESET to clear the alarm
and restore the system to the initial state. The alarm display screen is as follows and the sections
with indicators show information about the alarms.

(1)

(2)

(3)

Figure 10.1.1

(1) Alarm message

(2) Sequence number of the alarm occurred
(3) Alarm code

The operation steps for displaying and clearing the current alarm message(s) are as follows.
(1) Press ALM to enter the ALM screen.
(2) Press ALARM to display the current alarm(s).
(3) Press RESET to clear the alarm message(s) shown on the screen.

10-2
Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual Alarm (ALM) Group

10.2 Alarm history (HISTORY)

This function records all the issued alarm messages and history information. In the History

10
screen, you can access information of all the alarms occurred during system execution. In
addition, you can troubleshoot and analyze the errors according to the occurrence time and
types of alarms. The alarm history records the occurrence time and names of the alarms.
Up to 512 sets of alarm data can be recorded. Besides, you can delete all the alarms with the
CLR ALL (clear all data) function.

Figure 10.2.1

The operation steps for clearing all the alarms are as follows.
(1) Press ALM to enter the ALM screen.
(2) Press HISTORY to display the screen of alarm history log.
(3) Press CLR ALL and a confirmation window appears on the screen.
(4) Enter “Y” in the confirmation window and then press ENTER to clear all the alarms.

10-3
 Alarm (ALM) Group Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual

(This page is intentionally left blank.)

10

10-4
Graph (GRA) Group 11
The GRA group displays the real-time motion trajectory when the program is executing
or checks the machining program when the program is not executing.

11.1 Trajectory display ··········································································· 11-2

11.2 Program simulation········································································· 11-3

11-1
 Graph (GRA) Group Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual

The GRA group provides two functions, trajectory display and program simulation.
Trajectory display: displays the real-time motion trajectory during machining.
Program simulation: checks the accuracy of the program format and machining path before

11 machining.

Note: bold function names in a box (such as POS) mean the keys on machine operation panel A; bold

function names (such as CLR ALL) mean the function keys of F1 - F6.

11.1 Trajectory display

When a machining program is executed, switch the system to GRA mode, and the system
automatically draws the motion trajectory of the current program on the screen, through which
you can check if the actual machining path is correct.

Function descriptions of the keys are as follows.

(1) GRA: press this key to enter the Preview screen.
(2) CENT SET: displays the current position of the tool in the center of the display area.
(3) WIN RST: scales the graphic to a moderate size and centers it in the screen.
(4) WIN SET: press UP, DOWN, LEFT, RIGHT, ZM IN, and ZM OUT under the WIN SET
function to adjust the displayed path graphic.
(5) CLEAR: clears the content in the display area.

11-2
Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual Graph (GRA) Group

11.2 Program simulation

This function checks the program format and draws the complete path of the G-code program

11
before the machining starts. This function includes the options of PV(STEP), GRAPHIC, and
PREVIEW.

Function descriptions of the keys are as follows.

(1) GRA: press this key to enter the Preview screen.
(2) CENT SET: displays the current position of the tool in the center of the display area.
(3) WIN RST: scales the graphic to a moderate size and centers it in the screen.
(4) WIN SET: press UP, DOWN, LEFT, RIGHT, ZM IN, and ZM OUT under the WIN SET
function to adjust the displayed path graphic.
(5) PV(STEP): press this key to draw the path of a single block.
(6) GRAPHIC: checks the program format without referring to the software limits. This function
draws the complete path of the program.
(7) PREVIEW: checks the program format by referring to the software limits. The settings of the
coordinate system and tool compensation should match the actual application so the
complete path can be correctly drawn.
(8) CLEAR: clears the content in the display area.

11-3
 Graph (GRA) Group Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual

Pay attention to the following when using the functions of GRA:

1. When you enable the function of program simulation, the system does not actually perform
machining.

11 2. Switching the system mode during program simulation will force disable the simulation.
3. If the program simulation is canceled while operating, the simulation will start from the initial
block when you execute this function again.
4. Graphics drawn by the function of GRAPHIC or PREVIEW may exceed the display area
because of the setting values of the workpiece coordinate. If so, press GRAPHIC or
PREVIEW again, and the system automatically fits and centers the graphic in the display
area.
5. The function of program simulation in the lathe system only displays graphics from the view
of the X-Z plane.
6. Set the default screen of graphic display with the graphic parameter Pr.14003.

11-4
Parameter (PAR) Group
This chapter introduces functions and settings for all of the parameters.

12.1 Machining parameter (PROCESS) ···················································· 12-4

12.1.1 Machining parameter descriptions ············································· 12-4
12.2 Operating parameter (OPERATE) ····················································12-11
12.2.1 Operating parameter descriptions ············································12-11
12.3 Tool magazine parameter (MAGA) ····················································12-26
12.3.1 Tool magazine parameter descriptions ······································12-26
12.4 Spindle parameter (SPINDLE) ·························································12-27
12.4.1 Spindle parameter descriptions················································12-27
12.5 Machine parameter (MACHINE) ·······················································12-34
12.5.1 Machine parameter descriptions ··············································12-34
12.6 Homing parameter (HOME) ····························································12-37
12.6.1 Homing parameter descriptions ···············································12-37
12.7 Ethernet setting (ETH.) ··································································12-42
12.7.1 Ethernet parameter descriptions ··············································12-42
12.8 Compensation parameter (COMP) ···················································12-43
12.8.1 Compensation parameter descriptions ······································12-43
12.9 System parameter (SYSTEM) ·························································12-46
12.9.1 System parameter descriptions ················································12-46
12.10 MLC setting (MLC) ······································································12-54
12.10.1 MLC parameter descriptions··················································12-54
12.11 Graph parameter (GRAPHIC) ························································12-58
12.11.1 Graph parameter descriptions ················································12-58
12.12 Servo parameter (SERVO) ····························································12-59
12.12.1 Servo parameter descriptions ················································12-59
12.13 Channel setting (CONFIG) ····························································12-62
12.14 RIO setting (SET RIO)··································································12-63
12.14.1 Details of RIO setting ···························································12-64
12.14.2 Setting DAC module (NC-EIO-DAC04) ····································12-66
12.15 Search (SEARCH) ······································································12-67
12.16 Parameter group (PAR GRP) ·························································12-67
12.17 Other settings·············································································12-69

12-1
 Parameter (PAR) Group Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual

12.17.1 Setting for absolute motor ·····················································12-69

12.17.2 Setting synchronous motion control ········································12-71
12.17.3 Command transfer ······························································12-74

12

12-2
Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual Parameter (PAR) Group

Parameters in the PAR group can be divided into machining parameters, operation parameters,
tool magazine parameters, spindle parameters, machine parameters, homing parameters,
Ethernet settings, compensation parameters, system parameters, MLC settings, graph
parameters, servo parameters, channel settings, RIO settings, and parameter group.

The steps to change the parameters are as follows.

12
(1) Press PAR to enter the PAR screen.
(2) Press F1 - F6 (F8) to enter the corresponding parameter setting screen.
(3) Press and to move the cursor to the specified field, and enter an appropriate value
by referring to the range and unit displayed beside the field on the right.
(4) Press ENTER to complete the setting.

The timing for parameters to take effect is divided into three types according to their properties:
after cycling power to the servo drive (S), after cycling power to the system (P), or after pressing
RESET (R). After changing the parameters, you can check the (P), (R), and (S) in red in the
upper right corner of the screen to do the corresponding operation.

Note:

1. Bold function names in a box (such as POS) mean the keys on machine operation panel A; bold

function names (such as CLR ALL) mean the function keys of F1 - F6.

2. In the PAR screen, enter “S + parameter number” and you are directed to the specified parameter
immediately.
3. In this document,【L】indicates the parameters for the lathe system,【M】indicates the parameters

for the milling system, and parameters without【L】or【M】marking are shared by both systems.

12-3
 Parameter (PAR) Group Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual

12.1 Machining parameter (PROCESS)

The PROCESS group includes most of the motion control parameters used during machining,

12 which determine most of the machining results, such as machining time duration and surface
finish of the workpiece.

12.1.1 Machining parameter descriptions

Par. Default Setting Pro-

Item Description
No. value range perty
This parameter changes the maximum feed
rate during circular interpolation based on the
arc radius.
During circular interpolation, the higher the
parameter value, the higher the feed rate, the
greater the amount shifting inward, and the
lower the machining precision.
Arc cutting reference
309 During circular interpolation, the lower the 1000 10 to 50000 R
feed rate
parameter value, the lower the feed rate, the
smaller the amount shifting inward, and the
higher the machining precision.
(During circular interpolation, the arc shifts
inward because of the delayed following of the
servo.)
Unit: mm/min
Sets the minimum feed rate for executing
circular interpolation. The higher the feed rate,
Min. arc reference the less precise the machining and the more
310 the contouring error, while it shortens the 500 10 to 50000 R
feed rate
machining time.
Unit: mm/min
Sets the maximum corner feed rate. The higher
the value, the easier to keep the high speed at
corners for restoring to the feed rate before
deceleration. Setting the value too high or
improper setting may cause vibration of the
machine at the corners.
Unit: mm/min
Max. corner
311 100 0 to 50000 R
reference feed rate

12-4
Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual Parameter (PAR) Group

Par. Default Setting Pro-

Item Description
No. value range perty
Pr.312: the default cutting depth. Refer to the d
value in the following figure.

312
Cutting depth in
G71/G72 turning
cycle【L】
Pr.313: the default retraction amount. Refer to
the e value in the following figure.
【G71】
G71 U(d) R(e)
1000 0 to 50000 R
12
G71 P_ Q_ U(u) W(w) F_ S_ T_

e d

u/2
Retraction amount in w
313 G71/G72 turning 1000 0 to 50000 R
cycle【L】

Sets the default cutting speed. When you set this

parameter without specifying the F value in the
Default cutting feed
314 cutting command, the cutting speed is the speed 0 0 to 20000 P
rate set by this parameter.
Unit: mm/min, inch/min
The default speed when the rapid traverse
10 to
315 G00 feed rate at 0% adjustment rate (D1058) is 0% in RAPID mode. 100 R
10000
Unit: mm/min, inch/min
Sets the maximum speed of each axis in RAPID
316 G00 feed rate mode and for G00. 5000 1 to 60000 R
Unit: mm/min, inch/min
Sets the acceleration and deceleration time for
G00 ACC/DEC time
317 rapid traverse. 200 1 to 2000 R
constant
Unit: msec
Max. cutting feed Sets the maximum cutting feed rate.
318 5000 1 to 60000 R
rate Unit: mm/min, inch/min
Sets the acceleration and deceleration time for
Cutting – ACC/DEC cutting speed. Unit: msec
319 200 1 to 2000 R
time constant (acceleration and deceleration time before
interpolation)
Sets the S-curve time for cutting speed.
Unit: msec
(acceleration and deceleration time before
interpolation)
Feed(mm/min)

Cutting – S-curve
320 20 1 to 2000 R
time constant
Pr.318

Time(ms)
Pr.320 Pr.320 Pr.320 Pr.320

Pr.319 Pr.319

12-5
 Parameter (PAR) Group Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual

Par. Default Setting Pro-

Item Description
No. value range perty
Sets the acceleration and deceleration time of
the cutting speed after interpolation. The higher

12
Cutting – ACC/DEC the value, the greater the contouring error.
321 time constant after 50 1 to 500 R
Unit: msec
interpolation (acceleration and deceleration time after
interpolation)
The time required for accelerating or
decelerating to the target speed when threading.
Threading – Target speed = number of revolution / min x
ACC/DEC time thread pitch
constant after The smaller the parameter value, the shorter the 10 1 to 100
interpolation ineffective threads, but the vibration is more
【L】 violent. The greater the parameter value, the
longer the ineffective threads, but the vibration is
322 less violent. R
Sets the after-interpolation acceleration and
deceleration time.
Cutting – S-curve
time constant after Unit: msec
(ACC / DEC after interpolation) 10 1 to 100
interpolation
【M】 ※ This setting is not available on the lathe
system.

323 Arc radius tolerance When the circular path is specified in center 1 1 to 60000 R
format (I, J, K), the controller calculates the
radius R1 (the distance from the start point to the
circle center) and the radius R2 (the distance
from the end point to the circle center). The
absolute difference between R1 and R2 should be
smaller than Pr.323 (|R1-R2| < Pr.323), or alarm
B00D Arc radius error occurs.
Unit: μm
When the system performs curve fitting, if the
block length of G01 exceeds the setting in
Max. block length of
329 Pr.329, the curve fitting for the block is 20 0 to 10000 R
path smoothing
automatically canceled and the linear
interpolation remains effective. Unit: 0.1 mm
When the angle specified by a single block
exceeds the angle of curve fitting, the curve
Min. corner angle of
330 fitting for the corner is automatically canceled 15 0 to 90 R
path smoothing
and the sharpness is kept.
Unit: degree
Sets the minimum length for corner detection.
Length for corner If the corner is formed of paths that are too short,
331 detection the system keeps looking for the adjacent paths 100 0 to 10000 R
【M】 that are long enough and then starts calculating
the corner angle. Unit: 0.0001 mm
To have a smoother machining path, this
smoothing function automatically adjusts the
coordinates specified in a single block with the
Tolerance of single- adjustable distance set by Pr.332. The greater
332 block path smoothing the value, the smoother the path in the block, but 0 0 to 10000 R
the path is less likely to go through the
【M】 coordinates set in the block. The smaller the
value, the closer the curve fitting path to the
coordinates specified in the original program.
Unit: 0.0001 mm

12-6
Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual Parameter (PAR) Group

Par. Default Setting Pro-

Item Description
No. value range perty
Cosine error for curve fitting. The greater the
value, the smoother the curve. But if the

12
tolerance is set too great, it results in contouring
error. The smaller the value, the more likely the
machining contour is close to the programmed
Contour tolerance of
333 path for linear interpolation, but the curve is less 100 0 to 50000 R
path smoothing
smooth. It is suggested that the parameter value
and the error value set in the CAM software
should be consistent so as to make the path
smoother without affecting the precision.
Unit: 0.0001 mm
Sets the radius for the rotation axis. The greater
the value, the slower the rotation speed and vice
versa.

When you set Pr.344 to 0, this function is

disabled and the rotation axis feed rate is
determined by the F value (deg/min). When you
set Pr.344 to a non-zero value, the system
defines this value as the radius of the rotation
axis to calculate the arc length and performs
interpolation based on the arc length. Meanwhile,
the feed rate for the rotation axis is determined
by the F value (mm/min).

Radius of rotation
344 0 0 to 65535 R
axis

θ
𝐴𝑟𝑐 𝑙𝑒𝑛𝑔𝑡ℎ (𝑚𝑚) = 𝑅π
180
The default unit of feed rate for the linear axis is
mm/min and that for the rotation axis is deg/min.
If the rotation axis used in the application
requiring the feed rate to be consistent with the
tangential velocity (mm/min), you can set Pr.344
with the setting value as close as the distance
between the cutting point and the rotation center
(rotation radius). The smaller the value of Pr.344,
the faster the cutting speed; the greater the value
of Pr.344, the slower the cutting speed.
Unit: 0.1 mm

12-7
 Parameter (PAR) Group Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual

Par. Default Setting Pro-

Item Description
No. value range perty
Pr.345: total removal amount in X-axis direction.

12
Refer to the i value in the following figure.
X axis cutting
amount in G73 Pr.346: total removal amount in Z-axis direction.
345 turning cycle Refer to the k value in the following figure. 1000 0 to 50000
【L】 Pr.347: number of cutting times in a cycle. Refer
to the d value in the following figure.
【G73】
G73 U(i) W(k) R(d)
G73 P_ Q_ U(u) W(w) F_ S_ T_
Z axis cutting depth k+w
346 in G73 turning cycle w 1000 0 to 50000
【L】 R
u/2 i + u/2

Number of cutting u/2

times in G73 turning w
347 cycle 3 1 to 99
【L】

The default retraction amount e for executing

G74/G75 peck turning cycle.
【G75】
G75 R(e)
G75 X/U_ Z/W_ P(△i) Q(△k) R(△d) F_
w
Δd Δk

Retraction amount in Δi
G74/G75 turning
e
348 cycle Δi u/2 1000 0 to 50000 R
【L】
Δi

12-8
Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual Parameter (PAR) Group

Par. Default Setting Pro-

Item Description
No. value range perty
Pr.349: chamfer angle θ for G76/G92 thread
turning cycle, as shown in the following figure.

349
Chamfer angle in
G76/G92 threading
Pr.380: chamfer length r for G76/G92 thread
turning cycle. Chamfer length = parameter value
x (0.1 x lead).
Assuming that the pitch is L, then the chamfer
length for thread turning can be 0L - 12.7L. 45 1 to 89 R
12
【L】 【G76】
G76 P(m)(r)(a) Q(△dmin) R(d)
G76 X/U_ Z/W_ R(i) P(k) Q(△d) F_ L_

θ
Chamfer length in r
380 G76/G92 threading 3 0 to 127 R
【L】

Pr.381: the set number of finishing counts (m) for

Number of finishing threading.
counts in G76 Pr.382: the set tool nose angle (a) of the
381 threading cycle 1 1 to 99 R
threading tool.
【L】 Pr.383: the set minimum cutting depth (△dmin).
【G76】
G76 P(m)(r)(a) Q(△dmin) R(d)
G76 X/U_ Z/W_ R(i) P(k) Q(△d) F_ L_
Tool nose angle in
E
382 G76 threading cycle A 60 0 to 80 R
【L】
u/2

B
D k
i
C
Min. cutting depth in r
383 G76 threading cycle w 1000 0 to 50000 R
【L】

Sets the number of blocks to check in tool

Block No. to check in compensation interference:
510 tool comp. 0 0 to 3 P
Pr.510 = 0: number of blocks = 3
interference
Pr.510 < 3: number of blocks = Pr.510
The acceleration and deceleration S-curve time
G00 S-curve time
511 constant for executing the G00 movement. 1 0 to 2000 R
constant
Unit: msec

12-9
 Parameter (PAR) Group Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual

Par. Default Setting Pro-

Item Description
No. value range perty
Finishing allowance for executing G76 thread
turning cycle.

12 【G76】

G76 P(m)(r)(a) Q(△dmin) R(d)

G76 X/U_ Z/W_ R(i) P(k) Q(△d) F_ L_

Finishing allowance
in G76 threading
515 cycle 200 0 to 50000 R
【L】

a
Δd
1st Δd n
2nd k
3rd
nth
d

12-10
Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual Parameter (PAR) Group

12.2 Operating parameter (OPERATE)

12.2.1 Operating parameter descriptions

12
Default Setting Pro-
Par. No. Item Description
value range perty
G-code macro call-O9010
3 Set these parameters to 0 to disable macro
call.
4 G-code macro call-O9011
5 G-code macro call-O9012
6 G-code macro call-O9013
G-code macro call -
7 G-code macro call-O9014 0 0 to 1000 R
O9010 to O9019
8 G-code macro call-O9015
9 G-code macro call-O9016
10 G-code macro call-O9017
11 G-code macro call-O9018
12 G-code macro call-O9019
M-code macro call-O9020
13 Set these parameters to 0 to disable macro
call.
14 M-code macro call-O9021
15 M-code macro call-O9022
16 M-code macro call-O9023
M-code macro call -
17 M-code macro call-O9024 0 0 to 1000 R
O9020 to O9029
18 M-code macro call-O9025
19 M-code macro call-O9026
20 M-code macro call-O9027
21 M-code macro call-O9028
22 M-code macro call-O9029
T-code macro call-O9000
T-code macro call - 0: off
23 0 0 to 1 R
O9000 1: the system calls the macro program when
reading the T-code.
Call O9030 after breakpoint search.
0: function disabled. After finding the
breakpoint, the system continues executing
the program without calling a macro.
Call O9030 after 1: function enabled. After finding the
24 0 0 to 1 R
breakpoint search breakpoint, the system first calls and
executes O9030 once CYCLE START is
pressed, and then it returns to the main
program and carries on the machining
program from the line with the breakpoint.
Sets G31 input polarity.
0: NC; 1: NO
25 System DIO setting Name Range 0 0 to 1 P
G31 high speed input point 1 0 to 1
G31 high speed input point 2 0 to 1

12-11
 Parameter (PAR) Group Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual

Default Setting Pro-

Par. No. Item Description
value range perty
Name Range
Output control mode
0

12
0: DMCNET
Homing before machining
0 to 1
0: Y; 1: N
Screw unit
0 to 1
0: metric; 1: imperial
Switch for G31 high speed input 1
0 to 1
0: off; 1: on
Switch for G31 high speed input 2
0 to 1
0: off; 1: on
Hardware limit check
0 to 1
0: on; 1: off
Software limit check
0 to 1
0: on; 1: off
Omit decimal places of the floating-
point number in the motion command
0: do not omit
(input 1 in the program to indicate
0 to 1
0.001 mm)
1: omit
System application (input 1 in the program to indicate 0 to
46 96 P
setting 1.000 mm) 0xFFFF
G00 operation mode
0: multiple axes perform synchronous
interpolation and reach the
positioning point at the same time
0 to 1
1: each axis performs individual
interpolation and reaches the
positioning point separately at
different speeds
Macro look-ahead
0 to 1
0: off; 1: on
G00 path blending mode
0: same axis
1: different axes
0 to 1
The greater the setting value of
Pr.334, the larger the chamfer angle
of the path.
Return mode of one-key macro call
0: go to the next line 0 to 1
1: return to the interrupted line
Pre-warning for software limit
0 to 1
0: off; 1: on
MPG filter gain. For setting the MPG
response. The greater the value, the faster the
response, but the machine is subject to 1 to
47 MGP gain 100 R
vibration. 60000
Unit: 0.0001
Sets the MPG filter level.
0: disabled
48 MPG filter 0 0 to 6 R
Level 1 2 3 4 5 6
kHz 31 10 5 2.5 1.6 1.2
Pin Pr.49 = 0 Pr.49 = 1
Axis 1 Positive
1 Axis 1 Positive limit
limit
Axis 1 Negative
2 Axis 1 Negative limit
limit
3 Axis 1 Home Axis 1 Home
Axis 2 Positive
4 Axis 2 Positive limit
49 Axis port input setting limit 0 0 to 1 R
Axis 2 Negative
5 Axis 2 Negative limit
limit
6 Axis 2 Home Axis 2 Home
Axis 3 Positive
7 Axis 3 Positive limit
limit
Axis 3 Negative
8 Axis 3 Negative limit
limit

12-12
Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual Parameter (PAR) Group

Default Setting Pro-

Par. No. Item Description
value range perty
9 Axis 3 Home Axis 3 Home
10 Axis 4 Positive limit Axis 4 Home

12
11 Axis 4 Negative limit Axis 5 Home
12 Axis 4 Home Axis 6 Home
13 COM COM
14 COM COM
15 COM COM
Name Range
50 Macro file display Display O macro file 0 to 1 0 0 to 3 -
Display G/M macro file 0 to 1
Name Range
Spindle check before cutting: when this
function is enabled, if a cutting
command is executed but the spindle
0 to 1
is not in operation, the system displays
an alarm.
0: off; 1: on
Enable non-volatile setting for #10450 -
#10500 0 to 1
0: on; 1: off
Radius compensation mode for the first
point
0: type B; perform compensation when
the first point is convex. 0 to 1
1: type A; do not perform
compensation when the first point is
convex.
G54 - G59 offset coordinate
0 to 1
0: off; 1: on
Stroke protection
0 to 1
0: off; 1: on
1st spindle OA/OB signal sequence
0 to 1
51 System auxiliary tool 0: AB; 1: BA 0 0 to 1 P
Spindle speed percentage reference
during threading 0 to 1
0: spindle override register; 1: 100%
Spindle speed check during cutting
0: off; 1: on
When M03/M04/M05, S, or G00 is set
in the G-code, the first following cutting 0 to 1
command (G01/G02/G03) will be
executed only after the spindle reaches
the target speed.
Return mode after triggering M96
0: go to the next line; 1: return to the 0 to 1
interrupted line
Tapping mode
0 to 1
0: open-loop; 1: following
G98 / G99 default setting
0 to 1
0: program; 1: Pr.306
Handwheel reverse function
(Can reverse back for 30 blocks that
0 to 1
have been executed)
0: off; 1: on
Feedback check (feed axis)
0 to 1
0: on; 1: off
Unit setting for coordinate display.
For example, when you set this parameter to
301 Unit decimal places 3, the coordinates are displayed with three 3 0 to 4 P
decimal places, such as -99999.999 to
+99999.999.

12-13
 Parameter (PAR) Group Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual

Default Setting Pro-

Par. No. Item Description
value range perty
Name Range
EMG stop source

12
0 to 1
0: system (+ M1079); 1: M1079
G00 / G01 transition speed
0: decelerate to zero speed 0 to 1
1: no deceleration (refers to Pr.334)
Machine coordinates recording after
HSI is triggered (#2148 - #2156) 0 to 1
0: command; 1: feedback
MLC axis positioning command type:
0: floating-point number
1: integer; converts values in the
register by referring to the decimal 0 to 1
place setting in Pr.301.
MLC axis positioning commands (D
registers): D1064 - D1080
Jog speed mode:
When enabled, this parameter changes
the unit of D1062 (Speed setting for jog
feeding and dry run) from speed (F) to
percentage (%), with a maximum limit 0 to 1
of 100%.
So, the JOG speed is Pr.640 ×
D1062(%).
0: speed; 1: %
Display range of the special D rotation
axis coordinates
0 to 1
0: the display range is -360 to +360.
1: the display range is 0 to 360.
Whether to refer to speed override
setting for look ahead function
0: the look ahead function does not
refer to the speed override setting.
For linear interpolation, the look
ahead speed refers to the highest
Channel auxiliary speed setting. For arc cutting, the
305 0 362 P
setting look ahead speed refers to the
setting of D1150. When the speed in
D1150 is lower than 80000 mm/min,
the system performs the look ahead
function at 80000 mm/min.
1: refer to the speed override setting
when performing the look ahead
function.
0 to 1
When speed override ≧ 100%, for
linear interpolation, the look ahead
speed refers to the highest speed
setting; for arc cutting, the look
ahead speed refers to the setting in
D1150.
When 0% < speed override setting <
100%, the look ahead speed for
both linear interpolation and arc
cutting refers to [Pr.316* Speed
override].
When speed override = 0%, the look
ahead speed for both linear
interpolation and arc cutting refers to
the F value specified in the G-code.
Whether to check if the X coordinate of
the start point in the G71/G72 turning
cycle is lower than the maximum X
0 to 1
coordinate of the contour profile.【L】
0: check
1: do not check
Maximum speed limit setting of RAPID
mode:
In RAPID mode, this parameter allows
you to set the maximum speed 0 to 1
reference source for each axis.
0: refer to Pr.621.
1: refer to Pr.638.

12-14
Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual Parameter (PAR) Group

Par. Default Setting Pro-

Item Description
No. value range perty
Name Range
Default unit

12
0 to 1
0: metric; 1: imperial
Default programming mode
0 to 1
0: absolute; 1: incremental
Default feed mode
0 to 1
0: feed/min; 1: feed/rev
Default plane
0 to 2
0: G17; 1: G18; 2: G19
Lathe G-code type
0 to 3
0: A; 1: B; 2: C
Set the X axis to diameter / radius
mode 0 to 1
0: diameter; 1: radius
Chamfer/fillet format setting
Value 0 1
G-code programming 0 to
306 Chamfer ,C_ ,C_ / C_ 532 P
parameter 0xFFFF
Fillet ,R_ ,R_ / R_
0 to 1
Linear angle
,A_ ,A_ / A_
function
Note: when the parameter is set to 1,
this setting is effective only when the C
axis and A axis are disabled.
Default workpiece coordinates
Default workpiece
Value
coordinates
0 G54
1 G55 0 to 5
2 G56
3 G57
4 G58
5 G59
Name Range
Tool length compensation mode
0: when the block has a tool length
compensation execution or
cancellation command without a
Z-axis command, Z axis moves.
0 to 1
1: when the block has a tool length
compensation execution or
cancellation command without a
Z-axis command, Z axis does not
move.
Spindle speed after reset
0: command speed remains after reset
Channel application 0 to 1 0 to
307 1: command speed becomes 0 after 0xD4 P
setting reset 0xFFFF
Software limit check mode
0: machine coordinates of the
programmed path 0 to 1
1: machine coordinates of the tool path
(with tool compensation calculated)
Tool length input mode
0 to 1
0: absolute; 1: incremental
G31 input source
0: disable
1: HSI 1 0 to 1
2: HSI 2
3: HSI 1&2

12-15
 Parameter (PAR) Group Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual

Par. Default Setting Pro-

Item Description
No. value range perty
Name Range
Running mode after interruption

12
0: during the execution of a block, if
you manually move the tool from
its original position and then
resumes the program execution,
the tool moves the remaining
distance first and then returns to
the original path in the next motion
block, as shown in the following
figure.

0 to 1

1: during the execution of a block, if

you manually move the tool from
its original position and then
resumes the program execution,
the tool returns to the original path
first and then moves the remaining
distance, as shown in the following
figure.

Software limit check method

0: greater than; the target machine
coordinate value is greater than
Channel application the soft limit setting 0 to
307 0 to 1 0xD4 P
setting 1: greater than or equal to; the target 0xFFFF
machine coordinate value is
greater than or equal to the soft
limit setting
EMG stop mode
0: after the controller stops, the
servo switches to Servo Off
1: after the controller stops, the
servo decelerates to a stop and 0 to 2
switches to Servo Off
2: after the controller stops, the
servo decelerates to a stop and
remains Servo On
MLC variable type
0: Word type
1: Double word type
0 to 1
Set this bit to 1 to change the
interface input / output registers to 8
sets (32-bit) from 16 sets (16-bit).
G00/G01 max. feed rate reference
0: resultant velocity
G00: Pr.316 & Pr.621
G01: Pr.318 & Pr.625 0 to 1
1: individual velocity
G00: Pr.621
G01: Pr.625
Return mode after interruption
0: G00; 1: G01
You can use this parameter to
restore the motion mode when the
machining was interrupted in the
following condition: you press FEED 0 to 1
HOLD during machining, set the
system to MDI mode, move the
machine, and then set the system
back to AUTO mode and resume the
machining without resetting.

12-16
Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual Parameter (PAR) Group

Par. Default Setting Pro-

Item Description
No. value range perty
Synchronous execution for M / S / T-
code and G00

12
(Only M03/M04/M05 and S codes 0 to 1
are supported)
0: off; 1: on
Cancel tool radius compensation for
G00 block
0: off; perform tool radius
compensation when running G00
0 to 1
block
1: on; cancel tool radius
compensation when running G00
block
Name Range
Feed rate reference
0 to 1
0: program; 1: Pr.314
Set local variable to null
0: off, #1 - #50 are 0 0 to 1
1: on, #1 - #50 are null
Current monitoring function
0 to 1
0: off; 1: on
MPG offset
0 to 1
0: off; 1: on
Tool compensation interference
check 0 to 1
0: on; 1: off
Motion speed remains when
coordinate system switches 0 to 1
0: off; 1: on
Motion speed remains when macro
call
0: disable
1: enable 0 to 1
Note: when this function is enabled, the G-
code motion does not slow down when the
main program runs M99.
Dynamic axis compensation function
0: disable
Disables the isocline filter
compensation and retains the filter
output value. This is to prevent the
motor from suddenly rotating to the
Channel auxiliary position it was before the 0 to 1 0 to
308 compensation was enabled. 0 P
setting 1: enable
0xFFFF
Enables the isocline filter
compensation, with each axis
corresponding to the special D
registers, D1126 to D1146.
System halts when running to M99
0: off; returns to the main program
0 to 1
when running to M99
1: on: halts when running to M99
ABS coordinate changes after tool
length / wear modification 0 to 1
0: remain; 1: change
Coordinate system setting after
system reset and M30 execution
0 to 1
0: Pr.306 default
1: continue to use the G-code setting
Tool ID display source
Set to use the G-code or MLC
special D register to control the 0 to 1
spindle tool ID in POS screen.
0: G-code; 1: D1115
Spindle speed reference in feed/rev
mode0: command; in the feed-per-
revolution mode, the calculation of
the cutting speed refers to the
spindle’s command speed. 0 to 1
1: feedback; in the feed-per-
revolution mode, the calculation of
the cutting speed refers to the
spindle’s feedback speed.

12-17
 Parameter (PAR) Group Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual

Par. Default Setting Pro-

Item Description
No. value range perty
C axis mode
0 to 1
0: turning; 1: lathe

12
Peck-drilling escape Sets the retraction amount for performing
324 100 1 to 50000 R
amount peck drilling. Unit: μm
Name Range
Tool withdraw direction (for G76 / G87
cycle command) 0 to 3
0: +X; 1: -X; 2: +Y; 3: -Y
Drilling / tapping mode
0: general 0 to
326 Cycle parameter 1: deep-pecking (feed amount = Q, 0 R
0xFFFF
retraction amount = R)
2: pecking (feed amount = Q, 0 to 3
retraction amount = D)
3: deep-pecking P (feed amount =
Q, retraction amount = R, dwell
time = Pr.513)
Sets the time for the servo motor to decelerate
EMG stop time to zero speed when the emergency stop is
327 pressed in AUTO mode. 50 5 to 500 R
constant
Unit: msec
Sets the delay time for the special M relay
M2114 System emergency stop when the
328 EMG stop delay time 35 0 to 2000 R
system is stopped and in Servo Off status.
Unit: msec
The speed does not decelerate to zero when
G00 is executed between blocks with this
parameter set. Use this parameter to set the
blending ratio. The greater the value, the less
334 G00 blending ratio 0 0 to 100 R
the deceleration at block transitions and the
faster the speed; the smaller the value, the
more the deceleration at block transitions and
the slower the speed. Unit: %
Halt M-code 1 (0: no setting)
Halt M-code 2
Halt M-code 3
350
Halt M-code 4
to Halt M-code 1 - 8 0 0 to 1000 P
Halt M-code 5
357
Halt M-code 6
Halt M-code 7
Halt M-code 8
Spindle-to-C axis M-code for switching the spindle to C axis for
358 mode switch M-code the lathe system. This M-code can be used as 0 0 to 1000 P
【L】 a halt M-code.
C axis-to-Spindle M-code for switching the C axis to spindle for
359 mode switch M-code the lathe system. This M-code can be used as 0 0 to 1000 P
【L】 a halt M-code.
Bit 0 - 5: synchronous direction control of X -
C axes
0: same direction
1: different directions
Name Range
Synchronization
360 Synchronous direction for X axis 0 to 1 0 0 to 0x3F P
direction control
Synchronous direction for Y axis 0 to 1
Synchronous direction for Z axis 0 to 1
Synchronous direction for A axis 0 to 1
Synchronous direction for B axis 0 to 1
Synchronous direction for C axis 0 to 1

12-18
Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual Parameter (PAR) Group

Par. Default Setting Pro-

Item Description
No. value range perty
Specifies the master axis for X axis (slave) to
follow.

12
For example, to have the X axis follow the Y
axis for synchronous motion control, set this
parameter to 2.
Value Master axis
0 0: disable synchronous motion control
Synchronous control
361 1 X 0 0 to 6 P
X
2 Y
3 Z
4 A
5 B
6 C
0: disabled; 1 - 6: X - C
Synchronous control Specifies the master axis for Y axis (slave) to
362 0 0 to 6 P
Y follow.
Synchronous control Specifies the master axis for Z axis (slave) to
363 0 0 to 6 P
Z follow.
Synchronous control Specifies the master axis for A axis (slave) to
364 0 0 to 6 P
A follow.
Synchronous control Specifies the master axis for B axis (slave) to
365 0 0 to 6 P
B follow.
Synchronous control Specifies the master axis for C axis (slave) to
366 0 0 to 6 P
C follow.
Synchronous control Specifies the master axis for U axis (slave) to
367 0 0 to 6 P
U follow.
Synchronous control Specifies the master axis for V axis (slave) to
368 0 0 to 6 P
V follow.
Synchronous control Specifies the master axis for W axis (slave) to
369 0 0 to 6 P
W follow.
Sets the master axis of which command is
sent for X axis (slave) to execute.
Under the transfer control, the master axis’
control command is transferred to the slave
axis for execution.
For example, to transfer Y axis’ (master’s)
control command to X axis to execute, set this
parameter to 2.
371 Transfer control X Value Master axis 0 0 to 6 P
0 0: disable the transfer function
1 X
2 Y
3 Z
4 A
5 B
6 C
Sets the master axis of which command is
372 Transfer control Y 0 0 to 6 P
sent for Y axis (slave) to execute.
Sets the master axis of which command is
373 Transfer control Z 0 0 to 6 P
sent for Z axis (slave) to execute.
Sets the master axis of which command is
374 Transfer control A 0 0 to 6 P
sent for A axis (slave) to execute.
Sets the master axis of which command is
375 Transfer control B 0 0 to 6 P
sent for B axis (slave) to execute.
Sets the master axis of which command is
376 Transfer control C 0 0 to 6 P
sent for C axis (slave) to execute.

12-19
 Parameter (PAR) Group Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual

Par. Default Setting Pro-

Item Description
No. value range perty
Sets the master axis of which command is
377 Transfer control U 0 0 to 6 P
sent for U axis (slave) to execute.

12
Sets the master axis of which command is
378 Transfer control V 0 0 to 6 P
sent for V axis (slave) to execute.
Sets the master axis of which command is
379 Transfer control W 0 0 to 6 P
sent for W axis (slave) to execute.
Name Range
Handwheel reverse mode for M, S, T-
code execution:
Sets whether to skip the M, S, and T-
codes execution when the handwheel
reverses.
0: stop; execution for M, S, and T 0 to 1
codes is stopped when the
handwheel reverses.
1: skip (function enabled); skip the M,
S, T-codes when the handwheel
reverses.
Homing speed refers to the speed
override setting.
0: disable
1: the speed for searching for the 0 to 1
sensor and homing refers to D1056
(applicable to homing modes 1, 2, 4,
5, and 8.)
Homing function supports MPG
simulation.
When the MPG simulation is enabled,
you can use the handwheel for
returning to the origin (optional
function). 0 to 1
(applicable to homing modes 1, 2, and
5)
0: disable
Channel application 1: enable
485 0 0 to 65535 P
setting Lock axis moving direction in AUTO
mode.
When the special M relays (M1344 -
M1361) corresponding to the axes are
triggered, the operation in JOG or
MPG mode is locked based on the
current operating direction. In HOME
mode, the homing motion is stopped
whenever any of the special M relays 0 to 1
for axis movement is triggered. When
performing arc commands, the system
also checks whether to lock the
operation in positive/negative direction
based on the arc path.
0: disable
1: lock the axis moving direction in
AUTO mode
G31 Feed mode setting.
0: mm/min 0 to 1
1: refers to the feed mode currently
used by the system
Enable the register for handwheel
pulse input.
D1175 (int16): input the handwheel
pulse (increment)
0 to 1
D1352 (int32): read the handwheel
pulse
0: disable
1: enable

12-20
Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual Parameter (PAR) Group

Par. Default Setting Pro-

Item Description
No. value range perty
Name Range
Tilt axis function (optional).
※ Pr.497: tilt axis angle setting
0: disable
1: enable
Clear local variables after M99 is
0 to 1

12
executed.
0 to 1
0: keep the local variables
1: clear the local variables
Tool length compensation after M30 is
executed.
0 to 1
0: cancel the tool length compensation
1: keep the tool length compensation
Channel application
485 Tool length compensation after M02 is 0 0 to 65535 P
setting executed.
0 to 1
0: cancel the tool length compensation
1: keep the tool length compensation
Tool length compensation after system
reset and powered on.
0 to 1
0: cancel the tool length compensation
1: keep the tool length compensation
Tool life calculation.
0: disable 0 to 1
1: enable
Reference source for tool life
calculation.
0 to 1
0: tool compensation ID
1: tool ID
Escape amount setting for peck tapping.
Peck-tapping escape ※ If this parameter is 0, the escape amount
498 0 0 to 50000 R
amount【M】 refers to the Pr.324 setting.
Unit: μm
If there is a motion command in the program,
the [Axis limit] special M relay is set to On. In
this case, you must set the [Allow axis
movement] special M relay to On to have this
program block executed.

Name Range
X axis movement protection (0: on; 1: off) 0 to 1
Y axis movement protection (0: on; 1: off) 0 to 1
Z axis movement protection (0: on; 1: off) 0 to 1
A axis movement protection (0: on; 1: off) 0 to 1
B axis movement protection (0: on; 1: off) 0 to 1
C axis movement protection (0: on; 1: off) 0 to 1
U axis movement protection (0: on; 1: off) 0 to 1
V axis movement protection (0: on; 1: off) 0 to 1
W axis movement protection (0: on; 1: off) 0 to 1
Axis movement
501 Relevant special M relays: 0 0 to 65535 P
protection
X axis Allow X axis
M2400 M1312
movement limit movement
Y axis Allow Y axis
M2401 M1313
movement limit movement
Z axis Allow Z axis
M2402 M1314
movement limit movement
A axis Allow A axis
M2403 M1315
movement limit movement
B axis Allow B axis
M2404 M1316
movement limit movement
C axis Allow C axis
M2405 M1317
movement limit movement
U axis Allow U axis
M2406 M1318
movement limit movement
V axis Allow V axis
M2407 M1319
movement limit movement
W axis Allow W axis
M2408 M1320
movement limit movement

12-21
 Parameter (PAR) Group Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual

Par. Default Setting Pro-

Item Description
No. value range perty
The polygon cutting operation requires one
spindle and one rotation axis. Use this

12
parameter to set the rotation axis (tool axis) to
use.
Value Axis No.
0 Function disabled
Polygon cutting axis 4 A
508 0 0, 4 to 9 P
setting
5 B
6 C
7 U
8 V
9 W
Torque limit switch for each servo axis
(required with MLC)
Axis No. Bit Decimal
X 0 1
Y 1 2
Z 2 4
A 3 8
Torque limit for each
509 B 4 16 0 0 to 65535 P
axis
C 5 32
U 6 64
V 7 128
W 8 256
For example, to enable the torque limit of X
and Z axes, you must add the decimal values
of these axes, so set Pr.509 to 5.
The dwell time at the top of the hole refers to
this parameter setting when the drilling /
Drilling/tapping cycle tapping mode is set as follows.
513 dwell time above hole 0 0 to 50000 R
(1) Pr.326 (drilling/tapping mode) is set to 3
bottom
(2) Variable L in drilling / tapping command =
3
After the system sends a motion command,
and the time set by Pr.514 passes while the
514 Feedback check time 0 0 to 65535 R
position feedback value remains the same,
alarm 4FFD occurs. Unit: ms
Name Range
Operation panel filter time (ms) 1 to 3
Home / limit input point planning
0 to 1
0: off; 1: on
EMG stop source
0: IES 0 to 1
1: HSI on OPENCNC
2006 Input source setup Enable RIO as the HSI contact 0 0 to 49152 P
0: off; 1: on
Special Special
DI DI
M M
X280 M2128 X284 M2132 0 to 1

X281 M2129 X285 M2133

X282 M2130 X286 M2134
X283 M2131 X287 M2135

12-22
Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual Parameter (PAR) Group

Par. Default Setting Pro-

Item Description
No. value range perty
0: rising-edge triggered
1: falling-edge triggered

2010
High speed input
trigger setting
Name
HSI 1 trigger setting
HSI 2 trigger setting
Range
0 to 1
0 to 1
Setting Pr.2010 to 0 for the counter to count
0 0 to 65535 P 12
when it is rising-edge triggered; setting
Pr.2010 to 1 for the counter to count when it is
falling-edge triggered.
Signal conversion card (for converting motion
commands to pulses) output setting
0: general (connect to the servo drive)
1: bridge (connect the physical wiring of the
command end to the feedback end)
Name Range
1st axis feedback source 0 to 1
2nd axis feedback source 0 to 1
rd
3 axis feedback source 0 to 1
4th axis feedback source 0 to 1
5th axis feedback source 0 to 1
Signal conversion 6th axis feedback source 0 to 1
2049 0 0 to 65535 P
card output setting 7th axis feedback source 0 to 1
8th axis feedback source 0 to 1
9th axis feedback source 0 to 1
th
10 axis feedback source 0 to 1
11th axis feedback source 0 to 1
th
12 axis feedback source 0 to 1
Pulse command type
0: A/B phase
1: CW/CCW 0 to 3
2: Pulse/direction
3: A/B phase
Pulse logic
0 to 1
0: positive; 1: negative
Encoder resolution of
the signal conversion
2050 The motor single-frequency pulse number. 0 0 to 65535 P
card for 1st axis
(single-phase)
Encoder resolution of
the signal conversion
2051 The motor single-frequency pulse number. 0 0 to 65535 P
card for 2nd axis
(single-phase)
Encoder resolution of
the signal conversion
2052 The motor single-frequency pulse number. 0 0 to 65535 P
card for 3rd axis
(single-phase)
Encoder resolution of
the signal conversion
2053 The motor single-frequency pulse number. 0 0 to 65535 P
card for 4th axis
(single-phase)
Encoder resolution of
the signal conversion
2054 The motor single-frequency pulse number. 0 0 to 65535 P
card for 5th axis
(single-phase)

12-23
 Parameter (PAR) Group Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual

Par. Default Setting Pro-

Item Description
No. value range perty
Encoder resolution of
the signal conversion

12
2055 The motor single-frequency pulse number. 0 0 to 65535 P
card for 6th axis
(single-phase)
Encoder resolution of
the signal conversion
2056 The motor single-frequency pulse number. 0 0 to 65535 P
card for 7th axis
(single-phase)
Encoder resolution of
the signal conversion
2057 The motor single-frequency pulse number. 0 0 to 65535 P
card for 8th axis
(single-phase)
Encoder resolution of
the signal conversion
2058 The motor single-frequency pulse number. 0 0 to 65535 P
card for 9th axis
(single-phase)
Encoder resolution of
the signal conversion
2059 The motor single-frequency pulse number. 0 0 to 65535 P
card for 10th axis
(single-phase)
When performing cylinder interpolation with
the plane specified (by G-code), set Pr.601 as
the linear axis parallel to the rotation axis on
The parallel axis of this plane.
the rotation axis that
executes cylinder Value Parallel axis
601 0 0 to 3 P
interpolation 0 Function disabled
(1 - 3: X - Z) 1 X
2 Y
3 Z
Sets the maximum movement speed for G00
and manual motion modes (JOG, MPG,
RAPID, and HOME).
G00/manual
621 When you set this parameter to 0, the axis is 5000 0 to 60000 R
maximum speed
not restricted by the maximum feed speed of
G00; its speed is determined by Pr.316.
Unit: mm/min, inch/min, rpm
Sets the acceleration and deceleration time
G00/manual for G00 and manual motion modes (JOG,
622 50 0 to 10000 R
ACC/DEC time MPG, RAPID, and HOME).
Unit: msec
Sets the S-curve time constant for G00 and
G00/manual manual motion modes (JOG, MPG, RAPID,
623 5 1 to 2000 R
S-curve time and HOME).
Unit: msec
Sets the maximum speed for G01 of each
axis.
625 G01 maximum speed When you set this parameter to 0, the axis is 0 0 to 60000 R
not restricted by the maximum feed speed of
G01; its speed is determined by Pr.318.
Unit: mm/min, inch/min, rpm
Maximum speed of Maximum speed limit of RAPID mode.
638 10 0 to 65535 R
RAPID mode Unit: mm/min, inch/min, rpm
The maximum speed when the jog override is
at 100%.
Note:
640 Jog speed at 100% 1. To enable the function, set the parameter Pr.305 0 0 to 65535 R
(JOG speed mode).
2. The speed limit refers to Pr.621 (G00/manual
maximum speed).

12-24
Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual Parameter (PAR) Group

Par. Default Setting Pro-

Item Description
No. value range perty
During synchronous control, if the following
error between the master and slaves exceeds

12
Synchronous
642 the value set by Pr.642, B645 [Excessive 50 0 to 1000 R
tolerance
synchronous following error] occurs.
Unit: 0.1 mm
If the following error exceeds the setting of
Pr.643 in any movement, B630 [Excessive
following error] occurs. This parameter is for
Feedback following
643 setting the tolerance for the servo following 30000 1 to 60000 R
error
command.
Unit: μm (linear axes); 0.1 degree (rotation
axes)
The function of checking whether the position
is reached for G00, G09, and G61 blocks.
This parameter sets the range for defining
“position reached” (linear axis: 0.001 mm;
rotation axis: 0.1 degree). When this setting is
Range for defining as not 0, this position reached check function is
646 0 0 to 6000 R
position reached enabled. When the position reached check
function is on, the system will not execute the
following block unless the error between the
command and the feedback is lower than the
setting of Pr.646 for the axis (Cmd - Fbk <
Pr.646).
When starting, the system checks the error
between the command and the feedback from
Feedback position the servo. If the error exceeds the setting of
648 Pr.648, the servo cannot switch to Servo on. 20 1 to 6000 R
check after startup
Unit: μm (linear axes), 0.1 degree (rotation
axes)

12-25
 Parameter (PAR) Group Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual

12.3 Tool magazine parameter (MAGA)

With the tool magazine parameters, you can specify the type and number of magazines and

12
determine whether to enable the tool magazine functions.
Contact the distributors or equipment suppliers for settings of hardware parameters.

12.3.1 Tool magazine parameter descriptions

Default Setting Pro-

Par. No. Item Description
value range perty
Name Range
Switch for lathe tool No. check: when
the tool ID is greater than the
maximum tool number in the
magazine, the alarm B00E Tool No. 0 to 1
selection error occurs.
Tool magazine 0: off
336 1: on
0x0800 0 to 65535 P
control
Spindle tool No. after magazine reset
0: 0 0 to 1
1: continue numbering
Types of ATC
0: exchanger 0 to 1
1: non-exchanger
0: off (tool magazine data table is not updated
instantly)
1: on (tool magazine data table is updated
Tool magazine instantly)
337 1 0 to 3 P
enabling Name Range
Tool magazine 1 0 to 1
Tool magazine 2 0 to 1
Sets the number of tool stations of tool
magazine 1 (in response to the mechanical
Tool magazine 1
338 differences of tool magazines, you can use this 10 2 to 255 P
total tool No.
parameter to set the number of the placeable
tools).
Tool magazine 1
standby tool Sets the standby tool pocket index when the
339 1 1 to 100 P
pocket No. after reset function is used for tool magazine 1.
reset
Sets the tool number of the start tool pocket
Tool magazine 1
340 when the reset function is used for tool 1 1 to 100 P
start tool No.
magazine 1.
Sets the number of tool stations of tool
magazine 2 (in response to the mechanical
Tool magazine 2
341 differences of tool magazines, you can use this 10 2 to 255 P
total tool No.
parameter to set the number of the placeable
tools).
Tool magazine 2
Sets the standby tool pocket number when the
342 standby tool No. 1 1 to 100 P
reset function is used for tool magazine 2.
after reset
Sets the tool number of the start tool pocket
Tool magazine 2
343 when the reset function is used for tool 1 1 to 100 P
start tool No.
magazine 2.
1st DMCNET
2012 Supported station numbers are 10 to 12. 0 0 to 65535 P
servo magazine
2nd DMCNET
2013 Supported station numbers are 10 to 12. 0 0 to 65535 P
servo magazine

12-26
Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual Parameter (PAR) Group

Default Setting Pro-

Par. No. Item Description
value range perty
3rd DMCNET
2014 Supported station numbers are 10 to 12. 0 0 to 65535 P
servo magazine

12.4 Spindle parameter (SPINDLE)

12
12.4.1 Spindle parameter descriptions
Par. Default Setting Pro-
Item Description
No. value range perty
Calibrates the spindle voltage output. When
the controller has the spindle stopped (sets the
Spindle voltage spindle to zero speed), but the spindle is still -1000 to
37 0 R
output offset rotating, set this parameter to adjust the +1000
voltage output to have the spindle come to a
stop. Unit: 0.001V
Spindle default
398 The default spindle speed when power is on. 0 0 to 60000 P
speed
Name Range
Spindle function
0: off 0 to 1
1: on
Closed-loop control flag
0: off 0 to 1
1: on (feedback encoder is required)
Spindle output mode
0: communication (DMCNET)
0 to 2
1: pulse (B series)
2: analog voltage
Speed control mode
1
1: PUU
Spindle encoder magnification
0: 1000 times 0 to 1
1: 4 times
Analog spindle speed source
0: command 0 to 1
1: encoder
Analog spindle feedback encoder
source
Spindle application 0 to 1 0 to
399 0: spindle 0 P
setting 1: motor 0xFFFF
Spindle speed reference
0: program 0 to 1
1: Pr.398
Spindle Max. speed command check
0: off 0 to 1
1: on
Spindle speed D1380 display mode
0: command speed (S-code)
1: instant speed
Closed-loop = instant speed from 0 to 1
spindle feedback
Open-loop = instant speed from
spindle command
Spindle voltage output mode
0: -10V to +10V
0 to 1
1: 0V to +10V (only effective in open-
loop control)
Multi-stage spindle feedback encoder
switch
0 to 1
0: off
1: on
Spindle encoder port
401 Sets the feedback channel of spindle encoder. 8 0 to 8 P
No.
Spindle encoder Sets the encoder resolution (single-phase).
402 1280 2 to 60000 P
resolution Unit: pulse/rev

12-27
 Parameter (PAR) Group Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual

Par. Default Setting Pro-

Item Description
No. value range perty
Sets the analog speed integral gain of the
spindle. The greater the value, the faster the

12
403 Spindle integral gain response. But if the gain is too large, it may 50 1 to 1000 P
cause machine jitter.
Unit: 0.001 rad/s
Sets the maximum speed for spindle
positioning.
If the current speed exceeds the setting of
Pr.404, the system decreases the spindle
Spindle high speed to the speed set in Pr.404 and then
404 100 1 to 20000 R
positioning speed performs spindle positioning.
If the spindle speed is lower than the setting of
Pr.404, it refers to Pr.420 Spindle low
positioning speed.
Unit: rpm
Spindle positioning Sets the Z-phase offset for spindle positioning.
405 0 0 to 36000 R
offset Unit: 0.01 degree
Sets the allowable error between the target
Spindle target speed
406 speed and actual speed for the spindle. 10 0 to 300 P
error
Unit: rpm
Sets the spindle positioning error. If the actual
positioning error exceeds the setting, the
spindle positioning fails.
Spindle positioning Position error M2258
407 100 0 to 36000 P
error
Error > Pr.407 0
Error ≦ Pr.407 1
Unit: 0.01 degree
If the spindle speed is lower or equal to this
parameter value, the zero speed signal is on.
Spindle zero speed Spindle speed M2257
408 5 0 to 1000 P
error
Spindle speed > Pr.408 0
Spindle speed ≦ Pr.408 1
Spindle maximum Sets the maximum speed for the spindle.
409 20000 0 to 600000 P
speed Unit: rpm
Spindle minimum
410 Sets the minimum speed for spindle. Unit: rpm 10 0 to 10000 P
speed
Sets the acceleration and deceleration time for
Spindle ACC/DEC the spindle. The greater the value, the longer
411 20 1 to 20000 R
time constant the acceleration and deceleration time.
Unit: msec
Spindle S-curve time Sets the S-curve time constant of the spindle.
412 10 1 to 2000 R
constant Unit: msec
When the spindle is under closed-loop voltage
control, switch M1127 to instantly change the
spindle Kpp gain.
M1127 Spindle Kpp gain
0 Pr.419
1 Pr.413
413 Spindle 2nd Kpp gain 0 1 to 1000 R
When the spindle performs positioning at low
speed, it requires a higher gain value, while a
high gain value may lead to vibration during
high-speed rotation. Use D1380 Spindle actual
speed and this parameter to instantly change
the spindle Kpp gain value.
Sets the acceleration and deceleration time for
Tapping ACC/DEC
416 the tapping operation of the 1st spindle. 2000 1 to 20000 R
time constant
Unit: msec
Sets the S-curve time constant for the tapping
Tapping S-curve time
417 operation of the 1st spindle. 100 1 to 2000 R
constant
Unit: msec

12-28
Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual Parameter (PAR) Group

Par. Default Setting Pro-

Item Description
No. value range perty
When the spindle is under closed-loop voltage
control, use this parameter to adjust the
spindle position loop bandwidth. The greater

12
the gain, the lower the following error, and the
more precise the positioning. However, if the
419 Spindle Kpp gain 0 0 to 1000 R
value is set too high, it may cause vibration.
The parameter value is relevant to the
bandwidth of the inverter. It is recommended
that you start from a lower gain and then
gradually increase the value.
If the spindle speed is slower than the setting
of Pr.404 or the spindle is stopped, and the
Spindle low
420 system performs spindle positioning, the 100 1 to 20000 R
positioning speed
spindle applies the speed set in Pr.420.
Unit: rpm
Tapping retraction setting. The tapping
retraction speed is F multiply by the value of
Tapping retraction
421 Pr.421. The higher the value, the faster the 10 10 to 50 R
speed ratio
retraction.
Unit: 0.1 times
Gear ratio numerator Sets the numerator of the first set of spindle
422 1 0 to 60000 P
1 gear ratio.
Gear ratio Sets the denominator of the first set of spindle
423 1 0 to 60000 P
denominator 1 gear ratio.
Gear ratio numerator Sets the numerator of the second set of
424 1 0 to 60000 P
2 spindle gear ratio.
Gear ratio Sets the denominator of the second set of
425 1 0 to 60000 P
denominator 2 spindle gear ratio.
Gear ratio numerator Sets the numerator of the third set of spindle
426 1 0 to 60000 P
3 gear ratio.
Gear ratio Sets the denominator of the third set of spindle
427 1 0 to 60000 P
denominator 3 gear ratio.
Gear ratio numerator Sets the numerator of the fourth set of spindle
428 1 0 to 60000 P
4 gear ratio.
Gear ratio Sets the denominator of the fourth set of
429 1 0 to 60000 P
denominator 4 spindle gear ratio.
Tool retraction Adjusts the pre-calculated stop distance for the
distance adjustment tapping operation (feed axis follows the
430 rate for tapping spindle). (Unit: 0.1%) 1000 0 to 2000 P
operation (feed axis The default value for the parameter is 1000
follows the spindle) (100%) and the maximum limit is 200%.
Tap-learning setting The manual setting value after the tap-learning
434 0 0 to 65535 P
value operation is complete.
Default value for tap- The tap-learning default value can improve the
435 0 0 to 65535 P
learning operation efficiency for the tap-learning process.
When the error between the 1st spindle
command and the feedback speed is greater
than the value of Pr.406 and the duration
exceeds the error checking time (msec) set in
1st spindle error
436 Pr.436, the alarm B646 (Excessive spindle 0 0 to 65535 R
checking time
speed error) occurs and this will stop the feed
axis and spindle. When Pr.436 is set to 0, the
system does not check whether the spindle
target speed is reached.

12-29
 Parameter (PAR) Group Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual

Par. Default Setting Pro-

Item Description
No. value range perty
Name Range
Spindle positioning turn for proximity

12
switch:
When using the proximity switch for
positioning function, use this 0 to 3
parameter to set the number of
rotations of the spindle during Z-
phase searching.
Feedback encoder setting for multi-
stage spindle
0 to 1
0: absolute encoder
1: incremental encoder
Unit switch for spindle target speed
error
0: the unit of spindle target speed
error (Pr.406) is rpm. 0 to 1
1: the unit of spindle target speed
error (Pr.406) is 0.1%.
Note: the maximum setting is 50%.
1st spindle gear maximum speed limit
0: disable
Spindle auxiliary 1: enable
437 0 to 1 0 0 to 3 P
You can set the maximum speed for
function
the four gears of the 1st spindle in the
POS screen.
Reference for [Spindle speed
reached] when threading
0: the condition for “speed reached”
is that the speed is lower than 0 to 1
10 rpm.
1: the condition for “speed reached”
refers to M2256.
G97 maximum speed of 1st spindle
0: enable; both G96 and G97 are
restricted by G50. 0 to 1
1: disable; G96 is restricted by G50.
G97 is not restricted by G50.
Switch of spindle polarity check:
When the spindle output mode is
analog voltage or pulse, the spindle
command is opposite to the feedback
0 to 1
direction and the alarm [431C: spindle
polarity error] occurs.
0: enable (default)
1: disable
2nd spindle default
438 The default spindle speed when power is on. 0 0 to 60000 P
speed

12-30
Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual Parameter (PAR) Group

Par. Default Setting Pro-

Item Description
No. value range perty
Name Range
Spindle function
0 to 1

12
0: off
1: on
Closed-loop control flag
0: off 0 to 1
1: on (feedback encoder is required)
Spindle output mode
0: communication (DMCNET)
0 to 2
1: pulse (B series)
2: analog voltage
Speed control mode
1
1: PUU
Spindle encoder magnification
0: 1000 times 0 to 1
1: 4 times
Analog spindle speed source
0: command 0 to 1
1: encoder
2nd spindle Analog spindle feedback encoder 0 to
439 0 P
application setting source 0xFFFF
0 to 1
0: spindle
1: motor
Spindle speed reference
0: program 0 to 1
1: Pr.438
Spindle Max. speed command check
0: off 0 to 1
1: on
Spindle speed D1458 display mode
0: command speed (S-code)
1: instant
Closed loop = instant spindle 0 to 1
feedback speed
Open loop = instant spindle command
speed
Spindle voltage output mode
0: -10V to +10V
0 to 1
1: 0V to +10V (available under open
loop control)
2nd spindle encoder Sets the feedback channel of the spindle
441 8 0 to 8 P
port No. encoder.
2nd spindle encoder Sets the encoder resolution (single-phase).
442 1280 2 to 60000 P
resolution Unit: pulse/rev
The analog speed integral gain of the spindle.
The greater the value, the faster the response.
2nd spindle integral
443 But if the gain is too large, it may cause 50 1 to 1000 P
gain
machine jitter.
Unit: 0.001 rad/s
Sets the maximum speed for spindle
positioning. If the current speed exceeds the
setting of Pr.444, the spindle decelerates to
the speed set in Pr.444 and then performs
2nd spindle high
444 positioning. 100 1 to 20000 P
positioning speed
If the spindle speed is lower than the setting of
Pr.444, it refers to Pr.460 Spindle low
positioning speed.
Unit: rpm
2nd spindle Sets the Z-phase offset for spindle positioning.
445 0 0 to 36000 R
positioning offset Unit: 0.01 degree
Sets the allowable error between the target
2nd spindle target
446 speed and actual speed of the spindle. 10 0 to 300 P
speed error
Unit: rpm
Sets the spindle positioning error. If the actual
positioning error exceeds the setting, the
2nd spindle spindle positioning fails.
447 Unit: 0.01 degree 100 0 to 36000 P
positioning error
Position error M2263
Error > Pr.447 0
Error < Pr.447 1

12-31
 Parameter (PAR) Group Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual

Par. Default Setting Pro-

Item Description
No. value range perty
If the spindle speed is lower or equal to this
2nd spindle zero
448 parameter value, the zero speed signal is on. 5 0 to 1000 P
speed error

12
(NC > MLC M2262)
2nd spindle maximum Sets the maximum speed for the spindle.
449 20000 0 to 600000 P
speed Unit: rpm
nd
2 spindle minimum Sets the minimum speed for the spindle.
450 10 0 to 10000 P
speed Unit: rpm
Sets the acceleration and deceleration time for
2nd spindle ACC/DEC the spindle. The greater the value, the longer
451 20 1 to 20000 R
time constant the acceleration and deceleration time.
Unit: msec
2nd spindle
Sets the S-curve time constant of the spindle.
452 S-curve time 10 1 to 2000 R
Unit: msec
constant
When the spindle is under closed-loop voltage
control, switch M1143 to instantly change the
spindle Kpp gain.
M1143 Spindle Kpp gain
0 Pr.459
2nd spindle 1 Pr.453
453 0 1 to 1000 R
2nd Kpp gain When the spindle performs positioning at low
speed, it requires a higher gain value, while a
high gain value may lead to vibration during
high-speed rotation. Use D1380 Spindle actual
speed and this parameter to instantly change
the spindle Kpp gain value.
2nd spindle tapping Sets the acceleration and deceleration time for
456 ACC/DEC time the tapping operation of the 2nd spindle. 2000 1 to 20000 R
constant Unit: msec
Sets the S-curve time constant for the tapping
2nd spindle tapping S-
457 operation of the 2nd spindle. 100 1 to 2000 R
curve time constant
Unit: msec
When the spindle is under closed-loop voltage
control, use this parameter to adjust the
spindle position loop bandwidth. The greater
the gain, the lower the following error, and the
more precise the positioning. However, if the
459 2nd spindle Kpp gain 0 0 to 1000 R
value is set too high, it may cause vibration.
The parameter value is relevant to the
bandwidth of the inverter. It is recommended
that you start from a lower gain and then
gradually increase the value.
If the current spindle speed is slower than the
2nd spindle low setting of Pr.444 or is zero, and the system
460 100 1 to 20000 P
positioning speed performs spindle positioning, the spindle
applies the speed set in Pr.460. Unit: rpm
Tapping retraction setting. The tapping
nd retraction speed is F multiply by the value of
2 spindle tapping
461 Pr.461. The higher the value, the faster the 10 10 to 50 R
retraction speed ratio
retraction.
Unit: 0.1 times
2nd spindle gear ratio Sets the numerator of the first set of the 2nd
462 1 0 to 60000 P
numerator 1 spindle gear ratio.
2nd spindle gear ratio Sets the denominator of the first set of the 2nd
463 1 0 to 60000 P
denominator 1 spindle gear ratio.
2nd spindle gear ratio Sets the numerator of the second set of the 2nd
464 1 0 to 60000 P
numerator 2 spindle gear ratio.
2nd spindle gear ratio Sets the denominator of the second set of the
465 1 0 to 60000 P
denominator 2 2nd spindle gear ratio.
2nd spindle gear ratio Sets the numerator of the third set of the 2nd
466 1 0 to 60000 P
numerator 3 spindle gear ratio.
2nd spindle gear ratio Sets the denominator of the third set of the 2nd
467 1 0 to 60000 P
denominator 3 spindle gear ratio.
2nd spindle gear ratio Sets the numerator of the fourth set of the 2nd
468 1 0 to 60000 P
numerator 4 spindle gear ratio.

12-32
Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual Parameter (PAR) Group

Par. Default Setting Pro-

Item Description
No. value range perty
2nd spindle gear ratio Sets the denominator of the fourth set of the
469 1 0 to 60000 P
denominator 4 2nd spindle gear ratio.
When the error between the 2nd spindle

476
2nd spindle speed
error checking time
command and the feedback speed is greater
than the value of Pr.446 and the duration
exceeds the error checking time (msec) set in
Pr.476, the alarm B646 (Excessive spindle
speed error) occurs and this will stop the feed
0 0 to 65535 R
12
axis and spindle. When Pr.476 is set to 0, the
system does not check whether the spindle
target speed is reached.
Name Range
Unit switch for spindle target speed
error
2nd spindle auxiliary 0: the unit of spindle target speed
477 0 0 to 3 P
function error (Pr.446) is rpm. 0 to 1
1: the unit of spindle target speed
error (Pr.446) is 0.1%.
Note: the maximum setting is 50%.
Pr.512 sets the filter time for the spindle
feedback speed.
In the feed-per-revolution mode in the lathe
system, this parameter is used to alleviate the
fluctuation of feed rate caused by the noise
from the spindle speed feedback, thus it can
Spindle feedback avoid affecting the surface finish during
512 speed processing. 0 0 to 65525 R
filter time ※ You must set Pr.399 spindle speed source
to 1 (encoder).
Pr.512 Spindle feedback filter value
Pr.512 = 0 4 ms
0 < Pr.512 < 200 Pr.512 (ms)
200 < Pr.512 200 ms

12-33
 Parameter (PAR) Group Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual

12.5 Machine parameter (MACHINE)

12.5.1 Machine parameter descriptions

12
Par. Default Setting Pro-
Item Description
No. value range perty
Sets the machine coordinates for the 1st
software positive limit.
Set this parameter to 0 to disable the function.
Unit: mm
1. An overtravel will cause the software
positive limit error.
2. You can cancel the software limit by
triggering the special M relay.
Axis Cancel the software limit
1st software positive X M1248 -10^5 to
602 10^5 R
limit +10^5
Y M1249
Z M1250
A M1251
B M1252
C M1253
U M1254
V M1255
W M1256
Sets the machine coordinates for the 1st
software negative limit.
Set this parameter to 0 to disable the function.
1st software negative Unit: mm -10^5 to
603 -10^5 R
limit 1. An overtravel will cause the software +10^5
negative limit error.
2. You can cancel the software limit by
triggering the special M relay.
Sets the machine coordinates for the 2nd
software positive limit.
2nd software positive -10^5 to
604 Set this parameter to 0 to disable the function. 10^5 R
limit +10^5
An overtravel will cause the software positive
limit error. Unit: mm
Sets the machine coordinates for the 2nd
software negative limit.
2nd software negative -10^5 to
605 Set this parameter to 0 to disable the function. -10^5 R
limit +10^5
An overtravel will cause the software negative
limit error. Unit: mm
When the function of decimal places for the
lead screw pitch (Pr.634) is enabled, you can
input the decimals for the pitch value with
Decimals of lead Pr.627.
627 0 0 to 9999 P
screw pitch Unit: 0.1 μm
Lead screw pitch for the axis:
Pr.633 + Pr.627 x 0.0001 (mm).
Sets the input polarity of positive / negative
hardware limits and the home sensor.
Sets to 0 as an active Low NC switch.
Sets to 1 as an active High NO switch.
628 Sensor setting Name Range
0 0 to 3F P
Positive limit sensor setting 0 to 1
Negative limit sensor setting 0 to 1
Home sensor setting 0 to 1
Sets the motor resolution per revolution
630 Encoder resolution 1280 10 to 50000 P
(single-phase).

12-34
Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual Parameter (PAR) Group

Par. Default Setting Pro-

Item Description
No. value range perty
Sets the gear number of the counter shaft.

631 Shaft gear number 1 1 to 65535 P

12
632 Motor gear number Sets the number of gear teeth for the motor. 1 1 to 65535 P
Sets the corresponding lead screw pitch for the
axis.
633 Lead screw pitch 10 2 to 100 P
This parameter is only effective for linear axes
(i.e., ineffective for rotation axes). Unit: mm
Name Range
Magnification (using G50 command is
required)
0 to 1
0: off
1: on
Rotation axis feed mode (available for
A, B, and C axes but not for X, Y, and
Z axes.)
0: the rotation axis rotates to the
specified position (degree) through
a non-shortest path.
1: the rotation axis rotates to the
0 to 5
specified position (degree) through
the shortest path.
2: shows the position (degree) of the
rotation axis in linear
representation.
5: sets the rotation axis as a linear
axis.
Encoder magnification
0: 1000 times (Pr.630×1000) 0 to 1
1: 4 times (Pr.630×4)
Rotation axis unit selection
634 Axis control variables (available for Pr.618, Pr.619, Pr.620, 5 0 to 65535 P
Pr.621, and Pr.625) 0 to 1
0: rpm
1: deg/min
Decimal places of lead screw pitch
0: off
1: on 0 to 1
(Lead screw pitch = Pr.633 +
Pr.627*0.0001)
Handwheel reverse motion setting
0: when you operate the handwheel in
the positive direction, the machine
coordinates move in the positive
direction. 0 to 1
1: when you operate the handwheel
in the reverse direction, the
machine coordinates move in the
negative direction.
Calculate the corresponding angle of
the rotation axis when the MLC axis is
switched to the NC axis (only when
Pr.616 = 2, 5) 0 to 1
0: off
1: on

12-35
 Parameter (PAR) Group Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual

Par. Default Setting Pro-

Item Description
No. value range perty
Lathe rotation axis reverse motion
(valid in AUTO mode)

12
0: rotates to the specified angle in the
0 to 1
original direction.
1: rotates to the specified angle in the
reverse direction.

12-36
Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual Parameter (PAR) Group

12.6 Homing parameter (HOME)

12.6.1 Homing parameter descriptions

12
Par. Default Setting Pro-
Item Description
No. value range perty
After performing homing and finding the Z
pulse, the system has the axis offset by the
Machine origin value of Pr.606 and refers to the offset position -10^5 to
606 0 R
coordinates as the machine origin. +10^5
Unit: mm
Sets the machine coordinates for the 2nd
reference point.
2nd reference -10^5 to
607 (Sets the 2nd reference point in the G30 0 R
coordinates +10^5
command.)
Unit: mm
Sets the machine coordinates for the 3rd
reference point.
3rd reference -10^5 to
608 (Sets the 3rd reference point in the G30 0 R
coordinates +10^5
command.)
Unit: mm
Sets the machine coordinates for the 4th
reference point.
4th reference -10^5 to
609 (Sets the 4th reference point in the G30 0 R
coordinates +10^5
command.)
Unit: mm
Sets the position error for the 2nd, 3rd, and 4th
reference points. For example, when Pr.610 =
Reference position 0.2, it means when the position error between -10^8 to
610 0 R
tolerance the machine coordinate and the 2nd reference +10^8
point is within ±0.2 mm, the axis is regarded as
reaching the 2nd reference point.
The homing operation refers to this parameter
setting to fine-tune the position of the slave
axis.
The setting steps are as follows:
1. Enable Pr.617 synchronous motion
calibration function for the slave axis.
Make sure that the origin parameters of
the master and slave axes are consistent.
2. After confirming the mechanical positions
of the master and slave axes are correct,
activate the synchronous motion function
(M1088).
-2147483647
Calibration value for 3. HMI operation steps:
613 DGN > System Monitoring > Synchronous 0 to P
synchronous motion 2147483647
Motion Monitoring.
4. In the Synchronous Motion Monitoring
screen, when the synchronous motion
calibration is set to 1, the system
calculates the synchronous motion
calibration value and automatically writes
the results to Pr.613.
Note: you must enable Pr.617 synchronous
motion calibration function, so that the
calibration field appears.
5. Cycle power on the controller, perform the
homing procedure, and then you can
perform the calibration.

12-37
 Parameter (PAR) Group Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual

Par. Default Setting Pro-

Item Description
No. value range perty
0: define current position as the origin
1: mode 1

12
When homing, once the servo reaches the
home sensor, it reverses and the system
regards the first Z pulse as the origin.

Start Speed 1

Finish Speed 2

Z Pulse

Home sensor

2: mode 2
When homing, after the servo reaches the
home sensor, it carries on in the same
direction to leave the home sensor, and the
system regards the first Z pulse as the origin.
Speed 2
Speed 1
Start Finish

Z Pulse
Home sensor

3: mode 3
The servo looks for the Z pulse at the 2nd
homing speed (Pr.619) and the system regards
it as the origin.

Start Speed 2
616 Origin search mode Home 1 0 to 24 P
Z pulse

4: mode 4 (OT mode)

When homing, the system regards the positive
limit as the home sensor. When the positive
limit is triggered, the servo reverses and the
system regards the first Z pulse as the origin.

Start Speed 1
Finish Speed 2

Z Pulse

+ Limit sensor

5: mode 5
Absolute motor.

6: mode 6
When homing, once the servo reaches the
home sensor, it reverses and decelerates to a
stop, and the system regards the stop point as
the origin.

Speed 1
Start Finish

Home sensor

12-38
Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual Parameter (PAR) Group

Par. Default Setting Pro-

Item Description
No. value range perty
7: mode 7 (the function is exclusive to
Renishaw’s BiSS C type single-turn absolute

12
motors)
After the servo performs homing for the
absolute motor, if the system triggers the
special M relays for homing (M1236 - M1241),
the system regards the current position as the
origin without clearing the machine
coordinates.

8: mode 8
There are two possible conditions when
homing. One is that the servo first reaches the
home sensor and the other is that the servo
first reaches the limit sensor.

Condition 1: the servo first reaches the home

sensor and reverses to find the Z pulse.

Start Speed 1
Finish Speed 2

Z Pulse

Home sensor

Condition 2: the servo first reaches the limit

sensor and reverses to find the home sensor,
616 Origin search mode and then it carries on in the same direction to 1 0 to 24 P
find the Z pulse.
Start Speed 1
Finish Speed 2 Speed 1

Z Pulse

Home sensor
Limit sensor

24: mode 24
Using this mode to perform homing is
recommended when there is a home sensor on
the mechanical part and an absolute motor is
used.
The servo first finds the origin in the way as
mode 4 does and the the system uses the
absolute reset (Abs Rst) function in the DGN
screen. After resetting the origin of the
absolute motor, cycle power to the system.
The homing mode is automatically switched to
mode 5 after power cycling.

Start Speed 1
Finish Speed 2

Z Pulse
Home sensor

12-39
 Parameter (PAR) Group Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual

Par. Default Setting Pro-

Item Description
No. value range perty
Name Range
Origin search direction

12
0: reverse 0 to 1
1: forward
Search home sensor when homing
0: off 0 to 1
1: on
Homing mode of rotation axis
0: single-turn
After the system calculates the
corresponding angle, the axis only
moves by the remaining angular
distance.
0 to 1
1: absolute
The homing procedure refers to the
machine coordinates and returns the
axis to the machine origin. No
processing for the corresponding
angle.
Return mode after reaching home
sensor
0: return to the machine origin
After finding the Z pulse, the axis
offsets by the value set in Pr.606.
Then, the system regards the current
0 to 1
617 Origin search setting position as the machine origin, 1 0 to 31 P
completing the homing procedure.
1: return to the Z pulse
After finding the Z pulse, the servo no
longer moves, completing the homing
procedure.
Homing option for sync. motion
0: when the synchronous control
function is enabled, the slave axes
and the master axis return to the
origin synchronously.
0 to 1
1: when the synchronous control
function is enabled, each axis can
return to the origin individually with
the synchronous protection function
(Pr.642) remaining enabled.
Distance for ignoring the Z pulse
0: off
When the servo leaves the sensor and
stops, it regards the first found Z pulse
as the reference Z pulse for homing.
1: on 0 to 1
After the servo leaves the sensor and
travels more than the fixed distance
set in Pr.645, it regards the first found
Z pulse as the reference Z pulse for
homing.

12-40
Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual Parameter (PAR) Group

Par. Default Setting Pro-

Item Description
No. value range perty
Name Range
Synchronous motion calibration

12
function
0: off
1: on
The homing procedure refers to Pr.613
(calibration value for synchronous
motion) to fine-tune the slave axis
position. You need to use this
parameter to enable the calibration
617 Origin search setting function for the slave axis. Make sure 1 0 to 31 P
0 to 1
the mechanical positions of the master
and slave axes are correct. Go to the
screen for setting synchronous
motions on the HMI. Calculate the Z
pulse difference between the master
and slave axes (Pr.613 calibration
value for synchronous motion) for the
slave to calibrate the position based
on this Z pulse difference and Pr.613
the next time the homing is executed.
Sets the speed for searching the home sensor
618 1st homing speed (Home Dog protector). 2000 0 to 10000 R
Unit: mm/min
nd Sets the speed for searching the Z pulse.
619 2 homing speed 200 0 to 2000 R
Unit: mm/min
Sets the speed for the first homing after
system starting with Pr.618 and Pr.619.
After the first homing, the servo refers to the
set value of Pr.620 for the following homing
Speed for moving to procedures.
620 10 0 to 20000 R
reference point ※The homing speed setting range is as
follows:
Pr.618 (Min.) ≦ Pr.620 ≦ Pr.621 (Max.)
Unit: mm/min
During homing, when the home sensor is
triggered (On), the motor reverses until the
signal is Off. If the moving distance exceeds
Homing origin
624 the setting of this parameter but the home 20 1 to 2000 R
protection distance
sensor signal remains On, the system sends
the alarm [B636 Home sensor error].
Unit: mm
Linear axis: after the servo leaves the sensor,
it travels more than the given distance
(Pitch*Pr.645%) to look for the Z pulse. If the
nearest Z pulse is within this given distance,
Distance for ignoring then it looks for the next Z pulse.
the Z pulse 0% to
645 Rotation axis: after the servo leaves the 100 R
100%
(0 to 100%) sensor, it travels more than the given distance
(Pr.645%*360-degree of the motor) to look for
the Z pulse. If the nearest Z pulse is within this
given distance, then it looks for the next Z
pulse.

12-41
 Parameter (PAR) Group Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual

12.7 Ethernet setting (ETH.)

The CNC system can use Ethernet to remotely connect to a PC.

12 12.7.1

Par. No.
Ethernet parameter descriptions

Item Description
Default
value
Setting
range
Pro-
perty
10030 Host name System’s host name. CNC000 1 to 8 R
10031 IP address Sets the system IP address. 0.0.0.0 0 to 255 P

10032 Subnet mask Sets the subnet mask of the system. 0.0.0.0 0 to 255 P

10033 Default gateway Sets the system default gateway. 0.0.0.0 0 to 255 P
Name Range
Remote network function switch
0: disable 0 to 1
1: enable
Remote PC IP limitation
0: specified address
10034 Network function 0 0 to 1 P
Looks for the remote computer IP
addresses set in Pr.10036 to
Pr.10040. 0 to 1
1: domain
The computers in the same domain
of the CNC can directly connect to
the CNC.
Enable the DHCP function.
10035 DHCP switch 0: disable 0 0 to 1 P
1: enable
Remote PC IP
10036 IP address 1 0 255 P
address 1
Remote PC IP
10037 IP address 2 0 255 P
address 2
Remote PC IP
10038 IP address 3 0 255 P
address 3
Remote PC IP
10039 IP address 4 0 255 P
address 4
Remote PC IP
10040 IP address 5 0 255 P
address 5
Specifies an IP address from Pr.10036 -
Pr.10040 for the NETWORK folder under [File
Shared remote manage].
10041 0 0 to 5 P
directory IP address 0: do not specify an IP address.
1 - 5: specifies the corresponding IP
addresses in Pr.10036 - Pr.10040.
Name Range
FTP function switch 0 to 1
FTP anonymous user
10055 FTP setting Users without an account can 0 to 1 0 0 to 11 P
connect to the CNC FTP.
Set as main file after loaded 0 to 1
0: off; 1: on
Sets the username with 1 - 32 characters.
10057 FTP username The first character must be an English letter in CNCFTP - P
lower case.
10058 FTP password Sets the password with 1 - 8 characters. 12345678 - P

12-42
Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual Parameter (PAR) Group

12.8 Compensation parameter (COMP)

During the operation of machine tool, differences in mechanical parts may lead to motion error,

12
and thus affect the machining result.
Set the relevant compensation parameters to have the controller compute the appropriate
compensation amount according to the machine characteristics.
(1) When entering values in the length compensation fields, press um to enter absolute
values, or press um+ to enter incremental values.
(2) Use the CNCSoft to convert the compensation data measured by the calibration equipment
into compensation parameter files. Then, press IMPORT on the function bar in the next
page to import the data in absolute format. You can also press IMPORT+ to import and add
the data to the existing values.
(3) Press OK to confirm the update.

12.8.1 Compensation parameter descriptions

Par. Default Setting Pro-

Item Description
No. value range perty
There is backlash in the lead pitch for most of
the mechanical systems. Set this parameter
with a positive value to compensate for
backlash in positive direction, and vice versa.
Set this parameter to 0 to disable the backlash
compensation function. Unit: mm, inch

Backlash
1000 compensation 0 -2 to +2 R
amount

(1) Backlash in Y axis

Sets the time constant of backlash
compensation. When the backlash
Backlash
1001 compensation time is 0, the backlash 0 0 to 10000 R
compensation time
compensation function is disabled.
Unit: 0.1 msec
Backlash Sets the delay time before enabling the
1002 compensation delay backlash compensation function. 0 0 to 10000 R
time Unit: 0.1 msec

12-43
 Parameter (PAR) Group Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual

Par. Default Setting Pro-

Item Description
No. value range perty
Sets the friction compensation amount.
Unit: mm

12
Friction compensation mode
0 1
Friction
1003 compensation 0 0 to 1 R
amount

Sets the friction compensation time.

Unit: 0.1 msec
Friction compensation mode
0 1

Friction
1004 0 0 to 10000 R
compensation time

Sets the friction compensation delay time.

Unit: 0.1 msec
Friction compensation mode
0 1
Friction
1005 compensation delay 0 0 to 10000 R
time

Name Range
Absolute or incremental input.
0: absolute input (actual value of the
measuring point)
0 to 1
1: incremental input (the difference
between the current and previous
measuring points)
Friction compensation in positive
direction.
Timing: compensates when the machine
Thread pitch moves in positive direction. 0 to 1 0 to
1006 0 R
compensation setting 0: disable 0xFFFF
1: enable
Friction compensation in negative
direction.
Timing: compensates when the machine
moves in reverse direction. 0 to 1
0: disable
1: enable
Friction compensation mode
0 to 1
0: pulse width

12-44
Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual Parameter (PAR) Group

Par. Default Setting Pro-

Item Description
No. value range perty

Pr.1005 Pr.1004 Pr.1005

Pr.1003
12
1: exponential

Pr.1005 Pr.1004

Pr.1003

Measuring direction (of the start point)

0: positive; positive direction from
machine coordinates 0 to 1
1: negative: negative direction from
machine coordinates
Bi-directional thread pitch compensation
0: disable 0 to 1
1: enable
Sets the number of the measuring points for
Measuring point the lead screw pitch compensation with the
1007 0 0 to 128 R
number maximum as 128. Set this parameter to 0 to
disable the compensation function.
Sets the interval between each measuring point
1008 Measuring interval on the lead screw. 0 0 to 300 R
Unit: mm
Sets the offset between the measuring point
and machine origin. For example, when you set
this parameter to 0, there will be no offset from
the origin; when you set this parameter to 10, -1000 to
1009 Measuring offset 0 R
there will be an offset of 10 mm from the origin. +1000
Note: the direction of the offset should be identical to
the direction specified in Pr.1006 Measuring
direction.
Sets the lead screw pitch compensation in
1010 positive direction for the 1st to 128th points. The
to Data 1 - Data 128 first point is usually the origin of the machine 0 -20 to +20 R
1137 coordinates.
Unit: mm (linear axes), deg (rotation axes)
Sets the lead screw pitch compensation in
negative direction for the 1st to 128th points.
1138
Reverse data 1 - Enable Pr.1006 Bi-directional thread pitch
to 0 -20 to +20 R
Reverse data 128 compensation to have this parameter group
1265
take effect. Unit: mm (linear axes), deg
(rotation axes)

12-45
 Parameter (PAR) Group Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual

12.9 System parameter (SYSTEM)

In the system parameter setting screen, you can change the settings of the system’s working

12 environment, such as system date, system time, background color, function bar text color, and
label text color. You can set each of these items individually as required.

12.9.1 System parameter descriptions

Par. Setting Pro-

Item Description Default value
No. range perty
10000 System date Sets the system date (format: yyyy/mm/dd). - - -
10001 System time Sets the system time (format: hh:mm:ss). - - -
Sets the system language.
0: English
10002 System language 1: Traditional Chinese 1 0 to 2 -
2: Simplified Chinese
Note: this parameter is only available for A series
models.
10003 Screen brightness Sets the screen brightness. 50 1 to 99 -
Set this parameter to change the language of
the software screens. The setting range varies
User-defined according to the number of languages set by
10004 the user. 0 0 to 10 -
language
※For the B series system, you must use this
parameter to change the language.
Name Range
Mouse sensitivity 0 to 100
HID-compliant mouse
0 to 1
(0: off; 1: on)
Automatically enable the keyboard
NumLock 0 to 1
(0: off; 1: on)
Cursor display time (second) 1 to 15
Touch IO (0: off; 1: on)
When the screen element is
External device triggered, M1153 is on for a short 256 to
10005 period of time. 256 R
setting 36708
This feature is typically used to
control the touch buzzer of the
touch panel.
Note: this parameter is only available for
B-series models.
Keyboard pop-up mode
0 to 1
(0: double-click; 1: single-click)
Enable USB port for connecting to
machine operation panel B
(0: off; 1: on) 0 to 1
Note: this function requires a dedicated
USB conversion card.

Execute the macro program specified by this

Initial macro parameter before pressing CYCLE START. 9000 to
10007 0 P
program Note: this program has to be stored in the O_Macro 9999
folder and the naming rule is O+Pr.10007.
Sets the unit system for length display on the
System length NC system.
10008 0 0 to 1 P
unit 0: metric
1: imperial

12-46
Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual Parameter (PAR) Group

Par. Setting Pro-

Item Description Default value
No. range perty
Sets the coordinate display of the
synchronous axes.

12
Name Range
Sync axis coordinate display
Sync axis 0: disable 0 to 1
10009 0 0 to 65535 -
coordinate setting 1: enable
Sync axis workpiece coordinate
display
0 to 1
0: disable
1: enable
Enable the screensaver.
10010 Screensaver 0: disable 0 0 to 1 -
1: enable
Screensaver time
10011 Sets the first wait time for the screensaver. 10 1 to 60 -
1
Screen brightness Sets the first level of brightness for the
10012 30 0 to 99 -
1 screensaver.
Screensaver time
10013 Sets the second wait time for the screensaver. 30 1 to 60 -
2
Screen brightness Sets the second level of brightness for the
10014 10 0 to 99 -
2 screensaver.
Name Range
Account permission activation
method
0: by system 0 0 to 65535 P
0 to 1
1: by external I/O
M2934 = 1 (lock)
M2934 = 0 (unlock)
Auto open the previous file: after
enabling this function, when you
insert the USB drive or CF card to the
controller, the system automatically 0 to 1
opens the last executed file.
0: disable
1: enable
Auxiliary input window
(This function should be used with the
mouse. With the mouse connected to
the system, when you click the upper
right corner of the screen, a list 0 to 1
appears; when you click the input
10015 Account setting field, a keyboard appears.)
0: disable
1: enable
Machining count display format 0 0 to 65535 P
0: Word 0 to 1
1: Double word
No pop-up window display
0: displays the pop-up window 0 to 1
1: do not display the pop-up window
Automatically divide the value without
decimal points by 1000.
0: divide by 1000. In the OFS screen,
the entered value is automatically
0 to 1
divided by 1000.
1: do not divide by 1000. In the OFS
screen, the entered value is not
automatically divided by 1000.
SEARCH method
0: line number or label number 0 to 1
1: label number

12-47
 Parameter (PAR) Group Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual

Par. Setting Pro-

Item Description Default value
No. range perty
Set the opened file as the main file
0: yes

12
1: no
※When the parameter is set to 1, if
the system switches to AUTO mode,
the main file you set with the auxiliary 0 to 1
key [Main] is opened.
※When the parameter is set to 1, if
the system switches to AUTO mode,
but it cannot find the main file, then
the main file switches to Default.NC.
Name Range
Reset system after EMG release: sets
whether to automatically generate a
Reset signal after the emergency stop
is released. 0 to 1
0: disable
1: enable
[SOFT] display after startup:
Sets whether to display the SOFT
screen as the default screen after
system startup. 0 to 1
0: disable
1: switch to SOFT screen after startup
Alarm screen settings
0: do not display the alarm screen
when an alarm occurs. 0 to 1
1: display the alarm screen when an
alarm occurs.
System parameter auto backup:
when this function is enabled, the
system automatically makes a
backup of the parameter data and
stores it to the CF card. Once any of
the parameters is modified, the 0 to 1
backup data in the CF card is
updated as well.
10016 System setting 4 0 to 65535 P
0: disable
1: enable
Hidden axis display:
If you set not to display an axis in the
CONFIG screen, the system refers to
this parameter setting to determine
whether the OFS screen hides the 0 to 1
specific axis coordinate.
0: display axis coordinate
1: do not display axis coordinate
O macro file protection:
0: off
1: on
When the parameter is enabled,
O_macro_ECP appears in the INTER
folder, and the O Macros moved into 0 to 1
that folder can neither be copied nor
read. In this case, you can set
Pr.10017 (Macro call file source) to
internal memory to protect the macro
content.
EXTEND (extension variable) display
0: 450 extension variables (#10001 -
#10450) 0 to 1
1: 1000 extension variables (#10001 -
#11000)

12-48
Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual Parameter (PAR) Group

Par. Setting Pro-

Item Description Default value
No. range perty
Write protection for parameters
0: disable write protection 0 to 1

12
1: enable write protection
[POS] screen display
0: on; 1: off 0 to 1
Note: this parameter is only available for A
series models.
[PRG] screen display
0: on; 1: off 0 to 1
Note: this parameter is only available for A
series models.
[OFS] screen display
0: on; 1: off 0 to 1
Note: this parameter is only available for A
series models.
[DGN] screen display
0: on; 1: off 0 to 1
Note: this parameter is only available for A
series models.
[ALM] screen display
0: on; 1: off 0 to 1
Note: this parameter is only available for A
series models.
[GRA] screen display
0: on; 1: off 0 to 1
Note: this parameter is only available for A
series models.
[PAR] screen display
0: on; 1: off 0 to 1
Note: this parameter is only available for A
series models.
[SOFT] screen display
0: on; 1: off 0 to 1
Note: this parameter is only available for A
series models.
Name Range
G-code editing: sets whether to allow
G-code editing.
0 to 1
0: editing is not allowed
1: editing is allowed
Macro call file source
0: CF card 0 to 1
1: internal memory
SF speed setting: sets whether you
can use the SF SET function to set
the cutting feed rate (F). 0 to 1
G-code edit
10017 0: disable 1 0 to 65535 -
setting
1: enable
Program auto reset after editing: sets
whether the cursor will automatically
return to the program starting line
after file editing. 0 to 1
0: disable
1: enable
Subprogram call file source
0: program (same disk as the main
0 to 1
program)
1: USB disk

12-49
 Parameter (PAR) Group Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual

Par. Setting Pro-

Item Description Default value
No. range perty
Name Range
Subprogram file name display:

12
The current program title field
displays the currently running
subprogram. 0 to 1
0: enable
1: disable
Support .txt file
0: disable 0 to 1
G-code edit 1: enable
10017 1 0 to 65535 -
setting Path of test program for friction
compensation:
The location where the program files
generated by the friction 0 to 1
compensation function are stored.
0: CF card
1: O_Macro
System macro command function
0: disable 0 to 1
1: enable

10018 Background color Sets the background color. LIGHTGRAY 0 to 65535 -

10019 Title bar text color Sets the text color for the title bar. BLACK 0 to 65535 -
Mode bar text
10020 Sets the text color for the mode bar. DARKBLUE 0 to 65535 -
color
Function bar text
10021 Sets the text color for the function bar. BLACK 0 to 65535 -
color
10022 Label text color Sets the text color for the labels. BLACK 0 to 65535 -
Numeric value
10023 Sets the text color for numeric values. BLUE 0 to 65535 -
color
Table gridline
10024 Sets the color of table gridline. BLACK 0 to 65535 -
color
System cursor COLOR_
10025 Sets the cursor color in the system. 0 to 65535 -
color S07
System text
10026 Sets the text highlight color in the system. WHITE 0 to 65535 -
highlight color
Software panel
10027 Sets the cursor color in the software panel. YELLOW 0 to 65535 -
cursor color
System alarm
10028 Sets the color of system alarms. RED 0 to 65535 -
color
User-defined
10029 Sets the color of user-defined alarms. BLUE 0 to 65535 -
alarm color
Software panel Sets the text highlight color in the software COLOR_
10042 0 to 65535 -
text highlight color panel. S07

12-50
Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual Parameter (PAR) Group

Par. Setting Pro-

Item Description Default value
No. range perty
Name Range
[OPERATE] display

12
0: on; 1: off 0 to 1
Note: this parameter is only available for A
series models.
[MAGA] display
0: on; 1: off 0 to 1
Note: this parameter is only available for A
series models.
[SPINDLE] display
0: on; 1: off 0 to 1
Note: this parameter is only available for A
series models.
[MACHINE] display
0: on; 1: off 0 to 1
Note: this parameter is only available for A
series models.
[HOME] display
0: on; 1: off 0 to 1
Note: this parameter is only available for A
series models.
[COMP] display
0: on; 1: off 0 to 1
[PAR] group item Note: this parameter is only available for A
10043 series models. 0 0 to 65535 P
display
[SYSTEM] display
0: on; 1: off 0 to 1
Note: this parameter is only available for A
series models.
[MLC] display
0: on; 1: off 0 to 1
Note: this parameter is only available for A
series models.
[GRAPHIC] display
0: on; 1: off 0 to 1
Note: this parameter is only available for A
series models.
[SERVO] display
0: on; 1: off 0 to 1
Note: this parameter is only available for A
series models.
[CONFIG] display
0: on; 1: off 0 to 1
Note: this parameter is only available for A
series models.
[SET RIO] display
0: on; 1: off 0 to 1
Note: this parameter is only available for A
series models.

12-51
 Parameter (PAR) Group Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual

Par. Setting Pro-

Item Description Default value
No. range perty
Enable the TEACH function for the
corresponding axis. The TEACH function of

12
the PRG group is only available in JOG or
MPG mode.
Name Range
X axis teaching
0 to 1
0: off; 1: on
Y axis teaching
0 to 1
0: off; 1: on
Z axis teaching
0 to 1
0: off; 1: on
A axis teaching
0 to 1
Channel 0 - axis 0: off; 1: on
10044 0 0 to 65535 P
teaching setting B axis teaching
0 to 1
0: off; 1: on
C axis teaching
0 to 1
0: off; 1: on
U axis teaching
0 to 1
0: off; 1: on
V axis teaching
0 to 1
0: off; 1: on
W axis teaching
0 to 1
0: off; 1: on
Teaching G-code generation
0: only for moving axes; 1: for all 0 to 1
axes
Name Range
[TUNING] display
0: on; 1: off 0 to 1
Note: this parameter is only available for
A series models.
[TEXT WR] display
0: on; 1: off 0 to 1
Note: this parameter is only available for
A series models.
[PRG]/[OFS]/ [LOGO WR] display
10045 [DGN] group item 0: on; 1: off 0 0 to 65535 P
0 to 1
display Note: this parameter is only available for
A series models.
[MACRO] display
0: on; 1: off 0 to 1
Note: this parameter is only available for
A series models.
[FILE QUEUE] display
0: on; 1: off 0 to 1
Note: this parameter is only available for
A series models.

12-52
Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual Parameter (PAR) Group

Par. Setting Pro-

Item Description Default value
No. range perty
Name Range
Barcode file reading

12
0: disable
1: file scan (the PRG screen shows
the option of [BARCODE], and you
can use the LOAD function to load 0 to 2
the file to the main file).
2: special M trigger (scan the
10053 Barcode setting barcode to load the corresponding 0 0 to 8190 P
file to the main file).
The special M relay for triggering 0 to
barcode reading 1023
Barcode reading file source
0 to 1
0: CF card; 1: internal memory
Barcode input mode
0 to 1
0: element; 1: system
Sets the time duration for automatically
10054 Auto logout time 0 0 to 1440 -
logging out the permission account. Unit: min
Name Range
OFFSET
0: auxiliary key; 1: absolute; 0 to 2
2: incremental
WEAR
0: auxiliary key; 1: absolute; 0 to 2
2: incremental
COORD
0: auxiliary key; 1: absolute; 0 to 2
2: incremental
10059 OFS input mode Coordinate system auto setting 0 0 to 42 -
mode
0: write the machine coordinates to
the coordinate system
0 to 1
1: write the machine coordinates
corresponding to 0 point of
absolute coordinates to the
coordinate system
Clear offset coordinates after
setting the workpiece coordinates
0 to 1
0: disable
1: enable
Maximum tool Sets the maximum tool wear for a single cut to
10060 wear for a single avoid machining size error. 0 0 to 65535 -
cut Unit: 0.001 mm
Sets the maximum reading length.
10061 Barcode setting 0: 64 characters (maximum) 0 0 to 63 P
1 - 63: 1 - 63 characters
Sets to have the system read the specific NC
main file after each startup.
System default
10063 0: off; 1: on 0 0 to 1 P
main file
Note: this parameter is only available for models
dedicated to CAD/CAM applicaitons.

12-53
 Parameter (PAR) Group Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual

12.10 MLC setting (MLC)

12.10.1 MLC parameter descriptions

12
Par. Setting Pro-
Item Description Default value
No. range perty
When you set this value and enable
Pr.2001 control flag, the MLC ladder
scanning is available at a fixed time
2000 MLC scan time 2 2 to 1000 P
interval (ms). Setting this value too large
can cause delays in updating the MLC
devices.
MLC fixed scan time
0: off
2001 Control flag 0 0 to 1 P
1: on (leaves more process resource for
the HMI)
Sets the filter time for local I/O.
2003 Local I/O filter time 0 0 to 20 P
Unit: msec
12000 Program title Sets the program title. - - -
12001 Company name Enter the company name. - - -
12002 Designer name Enter the designer name. - - -
Sets whether to show the comments.
12003 Show comment 0: off 0 0 to 1 -
1: on
Sets whether to show the symbols.
12004 Show symbol 0: disable 0 0 to 1 -
1: on
12005 Ladder color Sets the ladder color. BLACK 0 to 65535 -
12006 Ladder text color Sets the text color for the ladder. BLACK 0 to 65535 -
12007 Ladder symbol color Sets the symbol color for the ladder. BLACK 0 to 65535 -
12008 Ladder cursor color Sets the cursor color for the ladder. LIGHT BLUE 0 to 65535 -
Ladder monitoring Sets the monitoring status display color LIGHT
12009 0 to 65535 -
status display color for the ladder. GREEN
Ladder device Sets the comment color of the device for
12010 BROWN 0 to 65535 -
comment color the ladder.
Ladder segment Sets the comment color of the section for
12011 BROWN 0 to 65535 -
comment color the ladder.
Ladder row comment Sets the comment color of the ladder
12012 BROWN 0 to 65535 -
color row.
Ladder monitoring Sets the color of the monitoring values
12013 LIGHT RED 0 to 65535 -
value color for the ladder.
NC special device COLOR_
12014 Sets the color of NC special devices. 0 to 65535 -
color S2B
MLC special device
12015 Sets the color of MLC special devices. MAGENTA 0 to 65535 -
color
Name Range
MLC edit protection:
when this function is enabled,
you can only edit the MLC
programs in EDIT mode. 0 to 1
0: off
12016 MLC protection 1: on
1 0 to 65535 P
MLC display
0: on
1: off 0 to 1
Note: this parameter is only
available for A series models.

12-54
Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual Parameter (PAR) Group

Par. Setting Pro-

Item Description Default value
No. range perty
MLC auto backup: when this
function is enabled, the system

12
automatically makes a backup
of the MLC data and store it to
the CF card. 0 to 1
0: off
1: on
Note: this parameter is only
available for A series models.
EMG protection for MLC file
saving
0 to 1
0: on
1: off
Show MLC file-saving reminder
upon group switch
0: off
0 to 1
1: on
Note: this parameter is only
available for A series models.
Name Range
MLC file immediately takes
effect after loaded: when this
function is enabled, MLC files
take effect right after being 0 to 1
loaded without a system restart.
0: disable
1: enable
Record system data in special
D registers
0: disable
1: enable

D1102: main file name

Name range: O0000 - O9999
D1103, D1104:
Total machining time (sec.)
D1105, D1106:
Single machining time (sec.)
D1107: year, month
D1108: day, hour
12017 MLC setting D1109: minute, second 0 0 to 65535 P
Note: set hexadecimal format to
access the D registers and then 0 to 1
convert the data into decimal format
for use.
Example:
Year 2020 February 28th,
PM06:45:59
D1107 = 14 02
14 (HEX) = 20 (DEC)
Year 2000 + 20
02 (HEX) = 02 (DEC)
D1108=1C 12
1C (HEX) = 28 (DEC)
12 (HEX) = 18 (DEC)
D1109 = 2D 3B
2D (HEX) = 45 (DEC)
3B (HEX) = 59 (DEC)

Keyboard shortcuts for

triggering M device
0 to 1
0: off
1: on

12-55
 Parameter (PAR) Group Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual

Par. Setting Pro-

Item Description Default value
No. range perty
MLC user-defined keypad
0: off 0 to 1

12
1: on
MLC user-defined keypad mode
0: single point 0 to 1
1: multiple points
[SPACE]+[POS]
M device triggered 0: function disabled
12019 0 0 to 3071 -
with keyboard 1 to 3071: sets the device M1 to M3071
shortcuts
[SPACE]+[PRG]
M device triggered 0: function disabled
12020 0 0 to 3071 -
with keyboard 1 to 3071: sets the device M1 to M3071
shortcuts
[SPACE]+[OFS]
M device triggered 0: function disabled
12021 0 0 to 3071 -
with keyboard 1 to 3071: sets the device M1 to M3071
shortcuts
[SPACE]+[DGN]
M device triggered 0: function disabled
12022 0 0 to 3071 -
with keyboard 1 to 3071: sets the device M1 to M3071
shortcuts
[SPACE]+[ALM]
M device triggered 0: function disabled
12023 0 0 to 3071 -
with keyboard 1 to 3071: sets the device M1 to M3071
shortcuts
[SPACE]+[GRA]
M device triggered 0: function disabled
12024 0 0 to 3071 -
with keyboard 1 to 3071: sets the device M1 to M3071
shortcuts
[SPACE]+[PAR]
M device triggered 0: function disabled
12025 0 0 to 3071 -
with keyboard 1 to 3071: sets the device M1 to M3071
shortcuts
[SPACE]+[SOFT]
M device triggered 0: function disabled
12026 0 0 to 3071 -
with keyboard 1 to 3071: sets the device M1 to M3071
shortcuts
Name Range
Enable A0 - A15 alarms 0 to 1
Enable A16 - A31 alarms 0 to 1
Enable A32 - A47 alarms 0 to 1
Enable A48 - A63 alarms 0 to 1
Enable A64 - A79 alarms 0 to 1
Enable A80 - A95 alarms 0 to 1
Enable A96 - A111 alarms 0 to 1
12027 Enable user alarm 0 Enable A112 - A127 alarms 0 to 1 0 0 to 65535 P
Enable A128 - A143 alarms 0 to 1
Enable A144 - A159 alarms 0 to 1
Enable A160 - A175 alarms 0 to 1
Enable A176 - A191 alarms 0 to 1
Enable A192 - A207 alarms 0 to 1
Enable A208 - A223 alarms 0 to 1
Enable A224 - A239 alarms 0 to 1
Enable A240 - A255 alarms 0 to 1

12-56
Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual Parameter (PAR) Group

Par. Setting Pro-

Item Description Default value
No. range perty
Name Range
Enable A256 - A271 alarms 0 to 1
Enable A272 - A287 alarms
Enable A288 - A303 alarms
Enable A304 - A319 alarms
Enable A320 - A335 alarms
0 to 1
0 to 1
0 to 1
0 to 1
12
Enable A336 - A351 alarms 0 to 1
Enable A352 - A367 alarms 0 to 1
12028 Enable user alarm 1 Enable A368 - A383 alarms 0 to 1 0 0 to 65535 P
Enable A384 - A399 alarms 0 to 1
Enable A400 - A415 alarms 0 to 1
Enable A416 - A431 alarms 0 to 1
Enable A432 - A447 alarms 0 to 1
Enable A448 - A463 alarms 0 to 1
Enable A464 - A479 alarms 0 to 1
Enable A480 - A495 alarms 0 to 1
Enable A496 - A511 alarms 0 to 1
1. If this M device is on, the default key
combination function is disabled.
System / user-defined 2. If this M device is off, the default key
keypad combination function is enabled.
12029 Note: 0 0 to 3071 -
Switch the M device
number 1. This function only takes effect when
Pr.12017 [MLC user-defined keypad] is 1.
2. This parameter is only available for the
OPENCNC system.
1. Writes the key code received by the
keypad to the corresponding D
register.
2. When the key is pressed, the value is
Value of the user- written to the D register. When the
defined keypad key key is released, the D register value
12030 0 0 to 1535 -
Corresponded D is cleared to 0.
device number Note:
1. This function only takes effect when
Pr.12017 [MLC user-defined keypad] is 1.
2. This parameter is only available for the
OPENCNC system.

12-57
 Parameter (PAR) Group Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual

12.11 Graph parameter (GRAPHIC)

12.11.1 Graph parameter descriptions

12 Par. No.

14000
Item

Line color Sets the line color.

Description
Default
value

0
Setting
range

0 to 65535
Pro-
perty

14001 Background color Sets the background color. 1183 0 to 65535 -

Sets the graphic display.
Graphic display Name Range
14002 1 0 to 65535 -
setting Line width 0 to 4
Enable the auxiliary line display 0 to 1

Name Range
Graphic default screen 0 to 1
X-Y plane display direction

0 to 3

Y-Z plane display direction

14003 Graphic setting 0 0 to 65535 P
0 to 3

X-Z plane display direction

0 to 3

X-Y plane graphic The graphic dimension of the X-Y plane. 5 to

14004 200 -
dimension Unit: mm 100000
Y-Z plane graphic The graphic dimension of the Y-Z plane. 5 to
14005 200 -
dimension Unit: mm 100000
X-Z plane graphic The graphic dimension of the X-Z plane. 5 to
14006 200 -
dimension Unit: mm 100000
X-Y-Z plane graphic The graphic dimension of the X-Y-Z plane. 5 to
14007 200 -
dimension Unit: mm 100000
Name Range
Auto preview:
When this function is enabled and you
press AUTO, the CNC quickly scans
the NC programs one time and
calculates the appropriate plot range 0 to 1
on the GRA screen.
0: do not execute auto preview
14008 Graphic setting 0 0 to 65535 P
1: execute auto preview
Reserve graphics after M30:
When this function is enabled, the
graphics are automatically reserved
after M30 is executed. 0 to 1
0: off
1: on
14010 Grid color Sets the grid color. 46516 0 to 65535 -
14011 Subgrid color Sets the subgrid color. 46516 0 to 65535 -
Coordinate axis
14012 Sets the color of the coordinate axes. 65504 0 to 65535 -
color
14013 Auxiliary line color Sets the color of the auxiliary lines. 2016 0 to 65535 -

12-58
Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual Parameter (PAR) Group

12.12 Servo parameter (SERVO)

12.12.1 Servo parameter descriptions

12
Default Setting
Group No. Name Description
value range
P0 0 Firmware version Displays the firmware version of the servo. - 0
Input for control Sets the control mode. 0x00 to
P1 1 mode and control Name Range 0 0x110F
command Torque output direction 0 to 1 (HEX)
The low-pass filter for position commands is
Position command usually used for eliminating undesired high-
P1 8 0 0
smoothing constant frequency response or noise and smoothing
the commands. Unit: 10 msec
P1 32 Motor stop mode Motor stop mode. 0 0 to 20
The low-pass filter for S-curve is usually used
S-curve ACC/DEC for eliminating undesired high-frequency
P1 36 0 0
constant response or noise and smoothing the
commands. Unit: msec
P1 37 Load inertia ratio Load inertia ratio of servo motor. Unit: 0.1 times 10 0 to 2000
E-gear ratio E-gear ratio numerator. Do not change the
P1 44 1 1 to (229-1)
numerator (N1) setting in the Servo On state. Unit: pulse
E-gear ratio E-gear ratio denominator. Do not change the
P1 45 1 1 to (231-1)
denominator (M1) setting in the Servo On state. Unit: pulse
Depends
Regenerative resistor Depends
P1 52 Regenerative resistor value Unit: ohm on
value models on models
Depends
Regenerative resistor Depends
P1 53 Regenerative resistor capacity Unit: Watt on
capacity models on models

Sets the maximum speed of the servo motor.

P1 55 Maximum speed limit 0 0 to 65535
The default is the rated speed. Unit: rpm
Percentage of friction Sets the percentage of friction compensation.
P1 62 0 0 to 100
compensation (%) Unit: %
Constant of friction Sets the smoothing constant of friction
P1 63 4 4
compensation (ms) compensation. Unit: ms
The moving filter smooths the beginning and
Position command -
P1 68 end of the step command, but it also delays 4 0 to 100
moving filter
the command. Unit: ms
Increasing the position control gain can
enhance the position response and reduce the
P2 0 Position control gain deviation in position control. If you set the 35 0 to 2047
value too high, it may cause vibration and
noise. Unit: rad/s
Adjusts the rate of change for the position
control gain according to the gain switching
Rate of change for condition. This parameter is usually used for
P2 1 100 10 to 500
position control gain adjusting the gain of the feed axis for it to be
in accordance with that of the spindle when
tapping. Unit: %
If the position control command changes
position smoothly, increasing the gain value
Position feed forward can reduce the position following errors. If the
P2 2 50 0 to 100
gain command does not change smoothly,
decreasing the gain value can reduce the
mechanical vibration during operation. Unit: %

12-59
 Parameter (PAR) Group Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual

Default Setting
Group No. Name Description
value range
If the position control command changes
position smoothly, decreasing the smoothing

12
Position feed forward constant value can reduce the position
P2 3 gain smoothing following errors. If the command does not 5 2 to 100
constant change smoothly, increasing the smoothing
constant value can reduce the mechanical
vibration during operation. Unit: msec
Increasing the speed control gain can
enhance the speed response. If you set the
P2 4 Speed control gain 500 0 to 8191
value too high, it may cause vibration and
noise. Unit: rad/s
Adjusts the rate of change for the speed
Rate of change for
P2 5 control gain according to the gain switching 100 10 to 500
speed control gain
condition. Unit: %
Increasing the value of the integral speed
control can enhance the speed response and
Speed integral
P2 6 reduce the deviation in speed control. If you 100 0 to 1023
compensation
set the value too high, it may cause vibration
and noise. Unit: rad/s
If the speed control command changes speed
smoothly, increasing the gain value can
reduce the speed following errors. If the
Speed feed forward
P2 7 command does not change smoothly, 0 0 to 100
gain
decreasing the gain value can reduce
mechanical vibration.
Unit: %
DI response filter Digital input response filter time.
P2 9 2 0 to 20
time Unit: 2 msec
DI1 functional
P2 10 DI1 functional planning - -
planning
DI2 functional
P2 11 DI2 functional planning - -
planning
DI3 functional
P2 12 DI3 functional planning - -
planning
DI4 functional
P2 13 DI4 functional planning - -
planning
DI5 functional
P2 14 DI5 functional planning - -
planning
DI6 functional
P2 15 DI6 functional planning - -
planning
DI7 functional
P2 16 DI7 functional planning - -
planning
DI8 functional
P2 17 DI8 functional planning - -
planning
Notch filter frequency The first setting for mechanical resonance
P2 23 1000 50 to 1000
(1) frequency. Unit: Hz
The first Notch filter attenuation level. The
Notch filter
P2 24 Notch filter is disabled when this parameter is 0 0 to 32
attenuation level (1)
set to 0. Unit: dB
Sets the time constant for the low-pass filter
Resonance
for resonance suppression. The low-pass filter
P2 25 suppression low- 2 0 to 1000
is disabled when this parameter is set to 0.
pass filter
Unit: 0.1 msec
Increasing this parameter can increase the
damping of the speed loop. Setting the value
of P2-26 to equal P2-06 is recommended. In
P2 26 Anti-interference gain 0 0
Position mode, decrease the value of this
parameter to reduce position overshoot.
Unit: 0.001

12-60
Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual Parameter (PAR) Group

Default Setting
Group No. Name Description
value range
Gain switching When the signal of gain switching is on, the
0 to 4
P2 27 condition and method rate of change for the speed control gain is 0

12
(HEX)
selection changed to the setting of P2-05.
Gain switching time Controls the switching of smoothing gain.
P2 28 10 0 to 1000
constant Unit: 10 msec
Notch filter frequency The second setting for mechanical resonance
P2 43 1000 50 to 2000
(2) frequency. Unit: Hz
The second Notch filter attenuation level.
Notch filter
P2 44 The Notch filter is disabled when this 0 0 to 32
attenuation level (2)
parameter is set to 0. Unit: dB
Notch filter frequency The third setting for mechanical resonance
P2 45 1000 50 to 2000
(3) frequency. Unit: Hz
The third Notch filter attenuation level.
Notch filter
P2 46 The Notch filter is disabled when this 0 0 to 32
attenuation level (3)
parameter is set to 0. Unit: dB
0: fixed parameter settings
Auto resonance 1: automatically saves the parameter settings
P2 47 1 0 to 2
suppression mode after resonance suppression
2: continuous suppression of resonance
Speed detection filter
P2 49 Sets the filter for speed estimation. Unit: sec 0 0 to 1F
and jitter suppression
0 to
Rotary axis position Sets the total number of pulses required for
P2 52 0 1,000,000,0
scale one turn of the rotation axis.
00
Increasing the position control integral
Position integral
P2 53 compensation to reduce the position steady- 0 0 to 1023
compensation
state errors. Unit: rad/s
Sets the operation mode of the motor. Cycle
power to the servo to have the setting take
P2 69 Absolute encoder effect. 0 0 to 1
0: incremental type
1: absolute type
CANopen / DMCNET
P3 12 CANopen / DMCNET support setting 0 0 to 111
support setting

P4 0 Fault record (N) The last abnormal status record. 0 -

Fault record
P4 1 The second to last abnormal status record. 0 -
(N-1)
Fault record
P4 2 The third to last abnormal status record. 0 -
(N-2)
Fault record
P4 3 The fourth to last abnormal status record. 0 -
(N-3)
Fault record
P4 4 The fifth to last abnormal status record. 0 -
(N-4)

P5 0 Firmware subversion Displays the firmware subversion of the servo. 0 -

12-61
 Parameter (PAR) Group Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual

12.13 Channel setting (CONFIG)

You can enable the axes and define their attributes with this function as shown in Figure

12
12.13.1. This function is not available in AUTO and MDI modes.

Figure 12.13.1

The operation steps are as follows.

(1) Press PAR to enter the PAR screen.
(2) Press to display the function bar on the third page.
(3) Press CONFIG to enter the channel setting screen.
(4) The attribute setting fields of an axis that is not enabled are grayed-out. Select the check
box of Enable for the axis to set its attributes.
(5) NC/MLC axis selection: select either NC or MLC axis.
(6) Port number: port number of the axis should be identical to the station number in the servo
system. No. 1 is compulsory while other numbers can be arranged randomly.
(7) After defining all the axes, press OK.
(8) Restart the NC system.

Note:

1. To enable an axis, firstly select the check box of the corresponding Enable field. Then, you can set the axis as either

an NC axis or MLC axis and set its port number which cannot be identical to other port numbers.

2. To disable an axis, move the cursor to the corresponding Enable field and press ENTER to cancel the selection.

Then, the axis is disabled.

3. When you change the value of the parameter with a P marked in the Parameter Name field, you have to restart the

NC system to have the changed value take effect. When you change the value of the parameter without a P marked

in the Parameter Name field, it takes effect immediately without power cycling of the system.

12-62
Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual Parameter (PAR) Group

12.14 RIO setting (SET RIO)

The NC system can add the control switches for external devices with the I/O extension

12
modules. You can enable the I/O module in the RIO Setting screen as shown in Figure 12.14.1.

Figure 12.14.1

The operation steps are as follows.

(1) Press PAR to enter the PAR screen.
(2) Press to display the function bar on the third page.
(3) Press SET RIO to enter the RIO Setting page.
(4) Press and to move the cursor to the corresponding Enable field of the specified RIO
port, and press ENTER to select the check box and enable its corresponding settings.
(5) Press and to move the cursor to the Sensor setting field, press ENTER, and an
input window appears. After entering the value, press ENTER to complete the setting.
(6) Press and to move the cursor to the Disc. field, and press ENTER to select or
cancel the selection.
(7) After enabling and setting all the I/O modules, press OK to complete the setting.

12-63
 Parameter (PAR) Group Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual

12.14.1 Details of RIO setting

RIO: press OK after completing the settings.

12
(1) (2) (3) (4)

(1) Displays the status of the RIO ports in sequence according to the station numbers.
(2) Select the check box of the corresponding Enable field and set the RIO type to 0 as AD/DA,
1 as DA, 2 as AD, or 3 as DIO.
(3) DI input of the RIO can be set as the positive limit, negative limit, and home sensor of each
axis, while only the DIs of Station 0 (the first RIO board) can be set. DIs on other RIO
boards cannot be set. You can set 32 points in total from DI0 to DI31.
(4) Select the Disc. Field to have the DO remain its status when it is disconnected from the
controller.

12-64
Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual Parameter (PAR) Group

Home Limit: press OK after completing the setting.

(1)
12

(2)

(1) Axis selection: positive limit DI, negative limit DI, and home DI of X - A axes are input from
the AXIS 1~4 connector on the controller (this connector is only available on NC3XX series
models). According to the selected axes, each axis takes three DI points from X256, which
are positive limit DI, negative limit DI, and home limit DI respectively.
For example, if you select Y and Z axes, the positive limit, negative limit, and home limit for
each axis are as shown in the following table.
Axis
X axis Y axis Z axis
Signal
Positive limit AXIS_P1 X256 X259
Negative limit AXIS_P2 X257 X260
Home AXIS_P3 X258 X261

The special M relay code corresponding to the DI signal of each axis does not change
regardless of the signal source.
Axis
X axis Y axis Z axis
Signal
Positive limit M2144 M2148 M2152
Negative limit M2145 M2149 M2153
Home M2146 M2150 M2154

(2) Sets the filter level of the DI on the RIO board.

Level 0 Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Level 4 Level 5

200 μs 200 μs 400 μs 600 μs 800 μs 1 ms

12-65
 Parameter (PAR) Group Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual

12.14.2 Setting DAC module (NC-EIO-DAC04)

The following steps illustrate how to set the DAC (Digital to analog converter) module.

12
(1) In the RIO Setting screen, enable the 5th port. You can only set the 5th to 8th ports of the
DAC module.
(2) Set its RIO type to 1, and then D1464 - D1467 correspond to the output points 0 - 3 on the
module card.
(3) Turn the rotary switch of the DAC module to 4.
(4) Connect the DAC module to the controller in the same way as connecting the RIO.
(5) After completing the previous four steps, cycle power to the system. Then, set the value
1024 to D1464, and you can measure 1.25V at the output point 0 on the DAC module
(-/+10V correspond to -8191 to +8192).

Refer to the following table for the RIO port numbers and their corresponding MLC special
register addresses.

DAC / Port No. 5 6 7 8

Output point 0 D1464 D1472 D1480 D1488

Output point 1 D1465 D1473 D1481 D1489

Output point 2 D1466 D1474 D1482 D1490

Output point 3 D1467 D1475 D1483 D1491

12-66
Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual Parameter (PAR) Group

12.15 Search (SEARCH)

You can use the Search function to find the specified parameter field by entering the parameter

12
number. The operation steps are as follows.
(1) Press PAR to enter the PAR screen.
(2) Use to turn the page and switch the function bar to the Search function page.
(3) Enter the parameter number to be searched to the input field in the lower left corner of the
screen.
(4) Press SEARCH to search for the specified parameter.

Note: in addition to using the Search function, you can also search for the parameter in the PAR screen by entering “S +

parameter number” and pressing ENTER.

12.16 Parameter group (PAR GRP)

Various types of parameters are available in the NC system. Equipment distributors can use the
parameter group function to provide users with the most appropriate combination of parameters
according to industrial requirements for machining, which simplifies the complicated parameter
adjustments.
With this function, you can use G05P_ to switch the parameter groups during machining as
shown in Figure 12.16.1.

Figure 12.16.1

The operation steps are as follows.

(1) Press PAR to enter the PAR screen.
(2) Use to turn the page and switch the function bar to the PAR GRP function page.
(3) Press PAR GRP to enter the parameter group setting page.
(4) Enter the specified parameter number in the No. field and press ENTER to display the
corresponding parameter name.
(5) Press SRT PAR to display the parameters by numbers in ascending or descending order.

12-67
 Parameter (PAR) Group Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual

(6) Press and to move the cursor to the Group field, enter the value, and press
ENTER to complete setting the parameter group. You can also stop the cursor at the
Group field, press RED PAR, and a confirmation window appears. Enter “Y” and press

12 ENTER to access the current parameter values and write them to the corresponding fields.
(7) To delete a group, press and to move the cursor to any of the fields of the group
to be deleted, press DEL GRP, and a confirmation window appears. Enter “Y” and press
ENTER to delete the group.
(8) After enabling multiple groups, press AVERAGE and a confirmation window appears. Enter
“Y” and press ENTER, and the system divides the maximum of the setting parameter by
the number of currently enabled groups and defines the quotient as the first term, assigning
values to each group field in arithmetic progression with the common difference the same
as the first term.
(9) Press SAVE, and a confirmation window appears. Enter “Y” and press ENTER to save the
settings.
(10) After setting the groups, press and to move the cursor to the specified group
field, then press WRT PAR, and a confirmation window appears. Enter “Y” and press
ENTER to write the values to corresponding parameters.

Note:

1. The WRT PAR (parameter write) function overwrites the original values, so ensure the new values are correct

before using this function.

2. The parameter group function supports up to 20 parameters and 20 groups.

12-68
Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual Parameter (PAR) Group

12.17 Other settings

12.17.1 Setting for absolute motor

12
Follow these steps to set the system when using the NC series controller with an absolute
motor.

(1) In the homing parameter screen, set Pr.616 Origin search mode to 5 (either an incremental
or absolute encoder can be used. When you use an absolute motor for the first time, cycle
power to the servo and controller after setting the parameter.)
Refer to the following figure.

(2) After setting the parameter, to reset the absolute encoder, go to DGN > SYS MON > SRV
MON as shown in the following figure.

12-69
 Parameter (PAR) Group Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual

(3) Set the system to JOG or MPG mode to use the absolute reset function. In JOG or MPG
mode, move the axis to the position to be defined as the origin, enter “1” and press ENTER
to complete the setting. Meanwhile, the Home indicator is on, meaning that this axis has

12 Note:
completed homing.

1. When a servo alarm occurs, the special M relay for absolute reset (Abs Rst) becomes 0, meaning that the absolute

origin is lost. The following are the relevant alarms for absolute reset.

AL060: absolute position is lost. Perform absolute reset.

AL061: battery undervoltage. Replace the battery of the encoder.

AL069: wrong encoder. Ensure an absolute encoder is connected.

2. In MPG mode, the absolute reset function is only applicable to the currently selected axis. For example, when you

select X axis in MPG mode, enter “1” and press ENTER to complete the absolute reset.

12-70
Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual Parameter (PAR) Group

12.17.2 Setting synchronous motion control

Application description: the A axis (slave axis) is required to follow the Z axis (master axis) in the

12
same direction. Assuming that M13 is to enable the synchronous function and M14 is to disable
it, the settings are as follows.
1. Set Pr.350 to 13.
2. Set Pr.351 to 14.
3. Set Pr.364 Synchronous control A to 3.

When M13 is executed, the MLC triggers M1088 (Trigger for synchronous control) and M1092
(A slave axis follows the master axis) at the same time. When the system commands the Z axis
to move, the A axis moves synchronously. If there is a command to move A axis when the
synchronous function is enabled, an alarm occurs since the slave axis (A axis) cannot receive a
motion command from the system. Execute M14 to turn off M1088 to disable the
synchronization function.

The synchronous control function is effective in AUTO, MDI, JOG, MPG, and HOME modes.

Important:
(1) Once you set an axis as a master axis, you cannot set it as a slave axis.
(2) Once you set an axis as a slave axis, you cannot set it as a master axis.
(3) Multiple slave axes can follow the same master axis.
(4) To perform homing when the synchronous control function is enabled, moves the master
axis.
(5) When you press RESET, the system does not disable the synchronous control function.

Sample code:
G98
G90 G54 G00 X0.000 Y0.000 Z0.000
G00 Z50.000 (Z axis moves individually)
G00 A0.000 (A axis moves individually)
M13 (Synchronous motion function enabled)
G01 Z100.000 F100 (A axis synchronously moves with the Z axis)
G4X2.000
G01 Z150.000
M14 (Synchronous motion function disabled)
G00 A100.000 (A axis moves individually)
M30

12-71
 Parameter (PAR) Group Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual

Relevant parameters:
Par. Default Setting
Item Description Property
No. value range

12
Halt M-code 1 (0: no setting)
Halt M-code 2
Halt M-code 3
350 - Halt M-code Halt M-code 4
0 0 to 1000 P
357 1-8 Halt M-code 5
Halt M-code 6
Halt M-code 7
Halt M-code 8
Sets the synchronization direction.
0: same direction
1: different directions
Name Range
Synchronous direction for X axis 0 to 1
Synchronous direction for Y axis 0 to 1
Synchronization
360 Synchronous direction for Z axis 0 to 1 0 0 to 0x3F P
direction control
Synchronous direction for A axis 0 to 1
Synchronous direction for B axis 0 to 1
Synchronous direction for C axis 0 to 1
Synchronous direction for U axis 0 to 1
Synchronous direction for V axis 0 to 1
Synchronous direction for W axis 0 to 1
Specifies the master axis when X axis is the
slave axis. For example, set this parameter to
Synchronous 2 if desiring to set Y axis as the master axis for
361 0 0 to 6 P
control X synchronous control.
0: disabled; 1 - 9: X - W
Specifies the master axis when Y axis is the
Synchronous slave axis.
362 0 0 to 6 P
control Y
0: disabled; 1 - 9: X - W
Specifies the master axis when Z axis is the
Synchronous slave axis.
363 0 0 to 6 P
control Z
0: disabled; 1 - 9: X - W
Specifies the master axis when A axis is the
Synchronous slave axis.
364 0 0 to 6 P
control A
0: disabled; 1 - 9: X - W
Specifies the master axis when B axis is the
Synchronous slave axis.
365 0 0 to 6 P
control B
0: disabled; 1 - 9: X - W
Specifies the master axis when C axis is the
Synchronous slave axis.
366 0 0 to 6 P
control C
0: disabled; 1 - 9: X - W
Specifies the master axis when U axis is the
Synchronous slave axis.
367 0 0 to 9 P
control U
0: disabled; 1 - 9: X - W
Specifies the master axis when V axis is the
Synchronous slave axis.
368 0 0 to 9 P
control V 0: disable
0: disabled; 1 - 9: X - W
Specifies the master axis when W axis is the
Synchronous slave axis.
369 0 0 to 9 P
control W 0: disable
0: disabled; 1 - 9: X - W

12-72
Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual Parameter (PAR) Group

Special M relays for enabling synchronous control function:

Function description Special relay code
Trigger for synchronous control M1088

12
X slave axis follows the master axis M1089
Y slave axis follows the master axis M1090
Z slave axis follows the master axis M1091
A slave axis follows the master axis M1092
B slave axis follows the master axis M1093
C slave axis follows the master axis M1094
U slave axis follows the master axis M1095
V slave axis follows the master axis M1096
W slave axis follows the master axis M1097

12-73
 Parameter (PAR) Group Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual

12.17.3 Command transfer

Application description: transfer the command for Z axis to A axis (transfer axis).

12 Assuming that M20 is to enable transfer and M21 is to disable it, the settings are as follows.
1.

2.
Set Pr.350 to 20.
Set Pr.351 to 21.
3. Set Pr.374 Transfer control A to 3.

After executing M20 to trigger M1098 (Trigger for transfer command) and M1102 (A axis
receives command from master axis), the system transfers the command that moves Z axis to A
axis (that is, Z axis does not move). If a command that moves the A axis is executed, an alarm
occurs since the transfer axis (A axis) cannot receive a motion command. Execute M21 to turn
off M1098 to disable the command transfer control function. Enabling (M20) and disabling (M21)
this function are only available in AUTO and MDI modes. Execute M21 to end the program. The
command transfer function is not available in JOG, MPG, and HOME modes.

Important:
(1) Once you set an axis as a transfer axis, you cannot set it as a master axis.
(2) Once you set an axis as a master axis, you cannot set it as a transfer axis.
(3) Multiple transfer axes can refer to the same master axis.
(4) The transfer function is not available in HOME mode.
(5) When you press RESET, the system does not disable the command transfer function.
(6) When the command is transferred from Z axis to A axis, the tool length compensation
function is available.
(7) A cutting cycle command for Z axis can be transferred.

Sample code:
G98
G54 G00 X10.000 Y10.000 Z10.000
G00 Z50.000
G00 A0.000
M20 (The controller pre-reads M20 and then enables command transfer control.)
G01 Z0. 000 F100 (The Z-axis command actually moves the A axis.)
G01 Z100.000
G4X2.
G01 Z150.000
M21 (The controller pre-reads M21 and then disables command transfer control.)
G00 A100.000
M30

12-74
Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual Parameter (PAR) Group

Relevant parameters:
Default Setting
Par. No. Item Description Property
value range

12
Halt M-code 1 (0: no setting)
Halt M-code 2
Halt M-code 3
Halt M-code Halt M-code 4
350 - 357 0 0 to 1000 P
1-8 Halt M-code 5
Halt M-code 6
Halt M-code 7
Halt M-code 8
Sets the transfer control direction.
Bit 0 - 8: transfer direction of X - W axes
0: same direction
1: different directions
Name Range
Transfer direction X 0 to 1

Transfer control Transfer direction Y 0 to 1

370 0 0 to 0x3F P
direction Transfer direction Z 0 to 1
Transfer direction A 0 to 1
Transfer direction B 0 to 1
Transfer direction C 0 to 1
Transfer direction U 0 to 1
Transfer direction V 0 to 1
Transfer direction W 0 to 1
Specifies the X axis as the axis to receive the
transfer command. When transfer control
function is enabled, the command is
Transfer control transferred to have the X axis move while the
371 originally commanded axis does not move. For 0 0 to 6 P
X
example, set this parameter to 2 if desiring to
transfer the control command from the Y axis.
0: disabled; 1 - 9: X - W
Specifies the Y axis as the axis to receive the
transfer command. When transfer control
Transfer control function is enabled, the command is
372 transferred to have the Y axis move while the 0 0 to 6 P
Y
originally commanded axis does not move.
0: disabled; 1 - 9: X - W
Specifies the Z axis as the axis to receive the
transfer command. When transfer control
Transfer control function is enabled, the command is
373 transferred to have the Z axis move while the 0 0 to 6 P
Z
originally commanded axis does not move.
0: disabled; 1 - 9: X - W
Specifies the A axis as the axis to receive the
transfer command. When transfer control
Transfer control function is enabled, the command is
374 transferred to have the A axis move while the 0 0 to 6 P
A
originally commanded axis does not move.
0: disabled; 1 - 9: X - W
Specifies B axis as the axis to receive the
transfer command. When transfer control
Transfer control function is enabled, the command is
375 transferred to have the B axis move while the 0 0 to 6 P
B
originally commanded axis does not move.
0: disabled; 1 - 9: X - W

12-75
 Parameter (PAR) Group Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual

Default Setting
Par. No. Item Description Property
value range
Specifies the C axis as the axis to receive the
transfer command. When transfer control

12
Transfer control function is enabled, the command is
376 transferred to have the C axis move while the 0 0 to 6 P
C
originally commanded axis does not move.
0: disabled; 1 - 9: X - W
Specifies the U axis as the axis to receive the
transfer command. When transfer control
Transfer control function is enabled, the command is
377 transferred to have the U axis move while the 0 0 to 9 P
U
originally commanded axis does not move.
0: disabled; 1 - 9: X - W
Specifies the V axis as the axis to receive the
transfer command. When transfer control
Transfer control function is enabled, the command is
378 transferred to have the V axis move while the 0 0 to 9 P
V
originally commanded axis does not move.
0: disabled; 1 - 9: X - W
Specifies the W axis as the axis to receive the
transfer command. When transfer control
Transfer control function is enabled, the command is
379 transferred to have the W axis move while the 0 0 to 9 P
W
originally commanded axis does not move.
0: disabled; 1 - 9: X - W

Relevant special M relays for transfer control function:

Function description Special relay code
Trigger for transfer command M1098
X axis receives command from master axis M1099
Y axis receives command from master axis M1100
Z axis receives command from master axis M1101
A axis receives command from master axis M1102
B axis receives command from master axis M1103
C axis receives command from master axis M1104
U axis receives command from master axis M1105
V axis receives command from master axis M1106
W axis receives command from master axis M1107
Transfer function in execution M2228

12-76
Software (SOFT) Group
The SOFT group function is for customizing the operation screens with the CNCSoft
software. This chapter provides the example screens.

13.1 ScreenEditor software ····································································· 13-2

13-1
 Software (SOFT) Group Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual

With the ScreenEditor, you can design your own operation screen to replace the machine
operation panel B or add customized functions.

13
Note: bold function names in a box (such as POS) mean the keys on machine operation panel A; bold

function names (such as CLR ALL) mean the function keys of F1 - F6.

13.1 ScreenEditor software

 ScreenEditor
Go to the main page of the Delta CNCSoft software to open the ScreenEditor software for
screen editing, as shown in Figure 13.1.1.

Figure 13.1.1

 Enter ScreenEditor, and you can see the operation interface as shown in Figure 13.1.2.

Figure 13.1.2

13-2
Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual Software (SOFT) Group

 After compiling the screens and creating the screen data files, you can import the files to the
controller using the USB disk or through the Internet, as shown in Figure 13.1.3.

13

Figure 13.1.3

13-3
 Software (SOFT) Group Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual

(This page is intentionally left blank.)

13

13-4
MLC Special M Relay
and Special D Register
This chapter provides detailed descriptions for the dedicated controlling devices of the
NC system, through which you can quickly check the MLC status in the NC system.
For more advanced control functions, refer to the NC Series MLC Application Manual.

14.1 Introduction to MLC special M relay and special D register ··················· 14-2
14.2 List of special M ·········································································· 14-3
14.3 List of special D ·········································································14-29

14-1
 MLC Special M Relay and Special D Register Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual

14.1 Introduction to MLC special M relay and special D

register

14
The MLC (Motion Logic Control) and NC are two independent systems. The MLC system
performs button triggering controls, MLC axis movements, and other logic controls, while the NC
system manages the system and servo axis related functions. The MLC special M relays and
special D registers serve as the I/O interface between these two systems for data exchange and
signal transmission.

The outputs mentioned in this chapter refer to the signals sent from the MLC special M relays
and special D registers to the NC system. On the other hand, the inputs refer to the signals sent
from the NC system to the MLC special M relays and special D registers. The M letter prefixed
codes are in bit format referring to signal 0 (Off) or 1 (On). The D prefixed codes are in word
format referring to numerical values such as 1000. The MLC special M relays and special D
registers are all represented in the form of M- and D- suffixed with four digits.

Data exchanges between the two systems are categorized into four groups.
1: MLC bit output from MLC to NC (special M, bit output)
2: MLC bit input from NC to MLC (special M, bit input)
3: MLC word output from MLC to NC (special D, word output)
4: MLC word input from NC to MLC (special D, word input)

14-2
Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual MLC Special M Relay and Special D register

14.2 List of special M

Device
Function name Special M Description
type

HMI output point 1

HMI output point 2

M1024

M1025
Sends the special M status to the system variable (#_).
The corresponding system variable is #1801.
Sends the special M status to the system variable (#_).
The corresponding system variable is #1802.
R/W

R/W
14
Sends the special M status to the system variable (#_).
HMI output point 3 M1026 R/W
The corresponding system variable is #1803.
Sends the special M status to the system variable (#_).
HMI output point 4 M1027 R/W
The corresponding system variable is #1804.
Sends the special M status to the system variable (#_).
HMI output point 5 M1028 R/W
The corresponding system variable is #1805.
Sends the special M status to the system variable (#_).
HMI output point 6 M1029 R/W
The corresponding system variable is #1806.
Sends the special M status to the system variable (#_).
HMI output point 7 M1030 R/W
The corresponding system variable is #1807.
Sends the special M status to the system variable (#_).
HMI output point 8 M1031 R/W
The corresponding system variable is #1808.
Sends the special M status to the system variable (#_).
HMI output point 9 M1032 R/W
The corresponding system variable is #1809.
Sends the special M status to the system variable (#_).
HMI output point 10 M1033 R/W
The corresponding system variable is #1810.
Sends the special M status to the system variable (#_).
HMI output point 11 M1034 R/W
The corresponding system variable is #1811.
Sends the special M status to the system variable (#_).
HMI output point 12 M1035 R/W
The corresponding system variable is #1812.
Sends the special M status to the system variable (#_).
HMI output point 13 M1036 R/W
The corresponding system variable is #1813.
Sends the special M status to the system variable (#_).
HMI output point 14 M1037 R/W
The corresponding system variable is #1814.
Sends the special M status to the system variable (#_).
HMI output point 15 M1038 R/W
The corresponding system variable is #1815.
Sends the special M status to the system variable (#_).
HMI output point 16 M1039 R/W
The corresponding system variable is #1816.
Sends the special M status to the system variable (#_).
HMI output point 17 M1040 R/W
The corresponding system variable is #1817.
Sends the special M status to the system variable (#_).
HMI output point 18 M1041 R/W
The corresponding system variable is #1818.
Sends the special M status to the system variable (#_).
HMI output point 19 M1042 R/W
The corresponding system variable is #1819.
Sends the special M status to the system variable (#_).
HMI output point 20 M1043 R/W
The corresponding system variable is #1820.
Sends the special M status to the system variable (#_).
HMI output point 21 M1044 R/W
The corresponding system variable is #1821.
Sends the special M status to the system variable (#_).
HMI output point 22 M1045 R/W
The corresponding system variable is #1822.
Sends the special M status to the system variable (#_).
HMI output point 23 M1046 R/W
The corresponding system variable is #1823.
Sends the special M status to the system variable (#_).
HMI output point 24 M1047 R/W
The corresponding system variable is #1824.
Sends the special M status to the system variable (#_).
HMI output point 25 M1048 R/W
The corresponding system variable is #1825.
Sends the special M status to the system variable (#_).
HMI output point 26 M1049 R/W
The corresponding system variable is #1826.

14-3
 MLC Special M Relay and Special D Register Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual

Device
Function name Special M Description
type
Sends the special M status to the system variable (#_).
HMI output point 27 M1050 R/W
The corresponding system variable is #1827.

14 HMI output point 28

HMI output point 29

M1051

M1052
Sends the special M status to the system variable (#_).
The corresponding system variable is #1828.
Sends the special M status to the system variable (#_).
The corresponding system variable is #1829.
R/W

R/W

Sends the special M status to the system variable (#_).

HMI output point 30 M1053 R/W
The corresponding system variable is #1830.
Sends the special M status to the system variable (#_).
HMI output point 31 M1054 R/W
The corresponding system variable is #1831.
Sends the special M status to the system variable (#_).
HMI output point 32 M1055 R/W
The corresponding system variable is #1832.
System mode You can control the statuses of M1056 - M1059 to
selection: switch between the system modes.
0: auto execution Binary
(AUTO) System
M1059 M1058 M1057 M1056 Decimal
mode
1: program edit (Bit 3) (Bit 2) (Bit 1) (Bit 0)
M1056
(EDIT) 0 0 0 0 0 AUTO
M1057
2: manual input (MDI) 0 0 0 1 1 EDIT R/W
M1058
3: MPG feeding
M1059 0 0 1 0 2 MDI
(MPG)
4: jog feeding (JOG) 0 0 1 1 3 MPG

5: rapid feeding 0 1 0 0 4 JOG

(RAPID) 0 1 0 1 5 RAPID
6: homing (HOME) 0 1 1 0 6 HOME
Single block In AUTO mode, the program stops after one block is
M1060 R/W
execution executed.
Cycle Start M1061 The system executes Cycle Start. R/W
The NC controller pauses immediately after the special
NC stop M1062 R/W
M is triggered.
System stop M1063 The system stops operating. R/W
When M1076 or the Reset signal of machine operation
System reset M1064 panel A is triggered, the system resets, and this special R
M is triggered.
When the special M is triggered, the feed rate F of G01
Dummy execution M1065 in AUTO mode refers to the feed rate specified in the R/M
D1062 register.
Optional stop The Optional stop key. When M01 is executed, the
M1066 R/W
(M01 Pause) controller immediately stops.
When this function is enabled, the program skips the
Single block skip (‘/’) M1067 R/W
block with the symbol ‘/’.
Lock all axes
M1068 Locks the X, Y, and Z axes movements of the machine. R/W
movements
Lock Z axis
M1069 Locks the Z axis movement of the machine. R/W
movement
When this function is enabled, the limit signal of each
Ignore axis limit M1070 R/W
axis is ignored.
Lock M, S, and
M1071 The program skips M, S, and T-codes in the execution. R/W
T-codes
The MLC sends this signal after the system confirms
DMCNET connection that the DMCNET connection is successful. Note that
M1072 R
successful this signal signifies the connection is successful
instead of the Servo On status.
This function is not affected by the setting of Pr.307
Trigger G31 Skip M1073 R/W
[G31 input source].

14-4
Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual MLC Special M Relay and Special D register

Device
Function name Special M Description
type
Macro call initial Macro call initialization (only works in AUTO mode and
M1074 R/W
preparation with correct macro ID).

14
Macro program activation (only works in AUTO mode
Macro call activation M1075 R/W
and with correct macro ID).
When the special M is triggered, the MLC sends the
System reset M1076 R/W
signal to the NC to reset the system.
When the special M is On, the NC system stops
Main program stops operating when the main program reads M99. You
M1077 R/W
at M99 need to set Pr.308 [System halts when running to
M99].
M96 Program When the special M is triggered, the system executes
M1078 R/W
interruption M96 Program interruption.
According to the setting of Pr.305 [EMG stop source],
MLC emergency stop M1079 when the special M is On, the system immediately R/W
stops.
During program execution, the movement speed is
Handwheel (MPG)
M1080 controlled by the speed you rotate the handwheel R/W
simulation
(MPG).
Disable inhibit zone The inhibit zone protection is disabled after this special
M1085 R/W
protection M is triggered.
To use the synchronous function, you need to set this
Trigger for
M1088 special M to On to have the system activate the R/W
synchronous control
synchronous function.
X slave axis follows Have the X axis follow the master axis when the
M1089 R/W
the master axis synchronous function is used.
Y slave axis follows Have the Y axis follow the master axis when the
M1090 R/W
the master axis synchronous function is used.
Z slave axis follows Have the Z axis follow the master axis when the
M1091 R/W
the master axis synchronous function is used.
A slave axis follows Have the A axis follow the master axis when the
M1092 R/W
the master axis synchronous function is used.
B slave axis follows Have the B axis follow the master axis when the
M1093 R/W
the master axis synchronous function is used.
C slave axis follows Have the C axis follow the master axis when the
M1094 R/W
the master axis synchronous function is used.
U slave axis follows Have the U axis follow the master axis when the
M1095 R/W
the master axis synchronous function is used.
V slave axis follows Have the V axis follow the master axis when the
M1096 R/W
the master axis synchronous function is used.
W slave axis follows Have the W axis follow the master axis when the
M1097 R/W
the master axis synchronous function is used.
To use the transfer function, you need to set this
Trigger for transfer
M1098 special M to On to have the system activate the R/W
command
transfer function.
X axis receives
Have the X axis receive the command when the
command from the M1099 R/W
transfer function is used.
master axis
Y axis receives
Have the Y axis receive the command when the
command from the M1100 R/W
transfer function is used.
master axis
Z axis receives
Have the Z axis receive the command when the
command from the M1101 R/W
transfer function is used.
master axis
A axis receives
Have the A axis receive the command when the
command from the M1102 R/W
transfer function is used.
master axis

14-5
 MLC Special M Relay and Special D Register Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual

Device
Function name Special M Description
type
B axis receives
Have the B axis receive the command when the
command from the M1103 R/W

14
transfer function is used.
master axis
C axis receives
Have the C axis receive the command when the
command from the M1104 R/W
transfer function is used.
master axis
U axis receives
Have the U axis receive the command when the
command from the M1105 R/W
transfer function is used.
master axis
V axis receives
Have the V axis receive the command when the
command from the M1106 R/W
transfer function is used.
master axis
W axis receives
Have the W axis receive the command when the
command from the M1107 R/W
transfer function is used.
master axis
The handwheel (MPG) function is executed with the
keys on machine operation panel B, and this is a
Panel MPG pulse + M1118 R/W
forward pulse signal. Refer to D1040 for the enabling
method.
The handwheel (MPG) function is executed with the
keys on machine operation panel B, and this is a
Panel MPG pulse - M1119 R/W
reverse pulse signal. Refer to D1040 for the enabling
method.
1st spindle forward
M1120 The special M for 1st spindle forward rotation. R/W
rotation
1st spindle reverse
M1121 The special M for 1st spindle reverse rotation. R/W
rotation
Change the statuses of M1122 and M1123 to switch
the gear ratio of the 1st spindle.
M1123 M1122
0 0 1st gear ratio
0 1 2nd gear ratio
1st spindle gear ratio M1122
1 0 3rd gear ratio R/W
selection M1123 th
1 1 4 gear ratio
1st gear ratio = Pr.422 / Pr.423
2nd gear ratio = Pr.424 / Pr.425
3rd gear ratio = Pr.426 / Pr.427
4th gear ratio = Pr.428 / Pr.429
1st spindle positioning
M1124 The special M for 1st spindle positioning. R/W
control
1st spindle retraction The special M for retracting the 1st spindle after
M1125 R/W
after tapping tapping.
Trigger this special M to switch the lathe spindle
Lathe spindle switch
M1126 between the C axis and S axis. R/W
between C / S axis
Note: this is a dedicated function for lathe.
Select the parameter to refer to for the analog voltage
1st spindle analog proportional gain of the 1st spindle with this special M.
voltage proportional M1127 R/W
Refer to Pr.413 when M1127 is On.
gain
Refer to Pr.419 when M1127 is Off.
2nd spindle forward
M1136 The special M for 2nd spindle forward rotation. R/W
rotation
2nd spindle reverse
M1137 The special M for 2nd spindle reverse rotation. R/W
rotation

14-6
Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual MLC Special M Relay and Special D register

Device
Function name Special M Description
type
Change the statuses of M1138 and M1139 to switch
the gear ratio of the 2nd spindle.

14
M1138 M1139
0 0 1st gear ratio
0 1 2nd gear ratio
2nd spindle gear ratio M1138
1 0 rd
3 gear ratio R/W
selection M1139
1 1 4th gear ratio
1st gear ratio = Pr.462 / Pr.463
2nd gear ratio = Pr.464 / Pr.465
3rd gear ratio = Pr.466 / Pr.467
4th gear ratio = Pr.468 / Pr.469
2nd spindle
M1140 The special M for 2nd spindle positioning. R/W
positioning control
2nd spindle retraction The special M for retracting the 2nd spindle after
M1141 R/W
after tapping tapping.
Select the parameter to refer to for the analog voltage
2nd spindle analog proportional gain of the 2nd spindle with this special M.
voltage proportional M1143 R/W
Refer to Pr.453 when M1143 is On.
gain
Refer to Pr.459 when M1143 is Off.
When this special M is On, the MLC sends the signal to
MST code execution
M1152 inform the NC system that the M, S, or T-code R/W
complete
execution is complete.
Screen element
M1153 When the screen element is triggered, M1153 is On. R
trigger I/O
Tool magazine 1 moves forward. When this special M
Tool magazine 1
M1168 is On, the value of D1372 (Rotation increment) R/W
moves forward
increases by 1.
Tool magazine 1 moves backward. When this special
Tool magazine 1
M1169 M is On, the value of D1372 (Rotation increment) R/W
moves backward
decreases by 1.
Tool change in tool Exchange the data of D1371 (Standby tool number)
M1170 R/W
magazine 1 and D1374 (Spindle tool number).
Tool magazine 1 When this special M is On, the tool data in tool
M1171 R/W
reset magazine 1 is reset.
Tool magazine 2 moves forward. When this special M
Tool magazine 2
M1172 is On, the value of D1377 (Tool magazine 2 tool pot R/W
moves forward
number (standby)) increases by 1.
Tool magazine 2 moves backward. When this special
Tool magazine 2
M1173 M is On, the value of D1377 (Tool magazine 2 tool pot R/W
moves backward
number (standby)) decreases by 1.
Tool change in tool Exchange the data of D1375 (Standby tool number)
M1174 R/W
magazine 2 and D1378 (Spindle tool number).
Tool magazine 2 When this special M is On, the tool data in tool
M1175 R/W
reset magazine 2 is reset.
Activate X axis
M1184 The special M for activating the MLC X axis. R/W
(MLC axis)
Activate Y axis
M1185 The special M for activating the MLC Y axis. R/W
(MLC axis)
Activate Z axis
M1186 The special M for activating the MLC Z axis. R/W
(MLC axis)
Activate A axis
M1187 The special M for activating the MLC A axis. R/W
(MLC axis)
Activate B axis
M1188 The special M for activating the MLC B axis. R/W
(MLC axis)
Activate C axis
M1189 The special M for activating the MLC C axis. R/W
(MLC axis)

14-7
 MLC Special M Relay and Special D Register Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual

Device
Function name Special M Description
type
Activate U axis
M1190 The special M for activating the MLC U axis. R/W
(MLC axis)

14 Activate V axis
(MLC axis)
Activate W axis
(MLC axis)
M1191

M1192
The special M for activating the MLC V axis.

The special M for activating the MLC W axis.

R/W

R/W

Activate the spindle

M1193 The special M for activating the MLC spindle. R/W
(MLC axis)
MLC axis incremental The special D positioning command values specified
M1194 R/W
motion command by each MLC axis are incremental values.
NC / MLC axis
M1200 On: MLC axis; off: NC axis. R/W
switching (X axis)
NC / MLC axis
M1201 On: MLC axis; off: NC axis. R/W
switching (Y axis)
NC / MLC axis
M1202 On: MLC axis; off: NC axis. R/W
switching (Z axis)
NC / MLC axis
M1203 On: MLC axis; off: NC axis. R/W
switching (A axis)
NC / MLC axis
M1204 On: MLC axis; off: NC axis. R/W
switching (B axis)
NC / MLC axis
M1205 On: MLC axis; off: NC axis. R/W
switching (C axis)
NC / MLC axis
M1206 On: MLC axis; off: NC axis. R/W
switching (U axis)
NC / MLC axis
M1207 On: MLC axis; off: NC axis. R/W
switching (V axis)
NC / MLC axis
M1208 On: MLC axis; off: NC axis. R/W
switching (W axis)
X axis forward jog
M1216 Special M for triggering X axis forward jog operation. R/W
control
Y axis forward jog
M1217 Special M for triggering Y axis forward jog operation. R/W
control
Z axis forward jog
M1218 Special M for triggering Z axis forward jog operation. R/W
control
A axis forward jog
M1219 Special M for triggering A axis forward jog operation. R/W
control
B axis forward jog
M1220 Special M for triggering B axis forward jog operation. R/W
control
C axis forward jog
M1221 Special M for triggering C axis forward jog operation. R/W
control
U axis forward jog
M1222 Special M for triggering U axis forward jog operation. R/W
control
V axis forward jog
M1223 Special M for triggering V axis forward jog operation. R/W
control
W axis forward jog
M1224 Special M for triggering W axis forward jog operation. R/W
control
X axis reverse jog
M1226 Special M for triggering X axis reverse jog operation. R/W
control
Y axis reverse jog
M1227 Special M for triggering Y axis reverse jog operation. R/W
control
Z axis reverse jog
M1228 Special M for triggering Z axis reverse jog operation. R/W
control
A axis reverse jog
M1229 Special M for triggering A axis reverse jog operation. R/W
control

14-8
Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual MLC Special M Relay and Special D register

Device
Function name Special M Description
type
B axis reverse jog
M1230 Special M for triggering B axis reverse jog operation. R/W
control

14
C axis reverse jog
M1231 Special M for triggering C axis reverse jog operation. R/W
control
U axis reverse jog
M1232 Special M for triggering U axis reverse jog operation. R/W
control
V axis reverse jog
M1233 Special M for triggering V axis reverse jog operation. R/W
control
W axis reverse jog
M1234 Special M for triggering W axis reverse jog operation. R/W
control
X axis homing control M1236 Special M for triggering X axis homing. R/W
Y axis homing control M1237 Special M for triggering Y axis homing. R/W
Z axis homing control M1238 Special M for triggering Z axis homing. R/W
A axis homing control M1239 Special M for triggering A axis homing. R/W
B axis homing control M1240 Special M for triggering B axis homing. R/W
C axis homing control M1241 Special M for triggering C axis homing. R/W
U axis homing control M1242 Special M for triggering U axis homing. R/W
V axis homing control M1243 Special M for triggering V axis homing. R/W
W axis homing control M1244 Special M for triggering W axis homing. R/W
Cancel X axis 1st
M1248 Special M for canceling the X axis 1st software limit. R/W
software limit
Cancel Y axis 1st
M1249 Special M for canceling the Y axis 1st software limit. R/W
software limit
Cancel Z axis 1st
M1250 Special M for canceling the Z axis 1st software limit. R/W
software limit
Cancel A axis 1st
M1251 Special M for canceling the A axis 1st software limit. R/W
software limit
Cancel B axis 1st
M1252 Special M for canceling the B axis 1st software limit. R/W
software limit
Cancel C axis 1st
M1253 Special M for canceling the C axis 1st software limit. R/W
software limit
Cancel U axis 1st
M1254 Special M for canceling the U axis 1st software limit. R/W
software limit
Cancel V axis 1st
M1255 Special M for canceling the V axis 1st software limit. R/W
software limit
Cancel W axis 1st
M1256 Special M for canceling the W axis 1st software limit. R/W
software limit
Lock X axis M1257 Special M for locking X axis. R/W
Lock Y axis M1258 Special M for locking Y axis. R/W
Lock Z axis M1259 Special M for locking Z axis. R/W
Lock A axis M1260 Special M for locking A axis. R/W
Lock B axis M1261 Special M for locking B axis. R/W
Lock C axis M1262 Special M for locking C axis. R/W
Lock U axis M1263 Special M for locking U axis. R/W
Lock V axis M1264 Special M for locking V axis. R/W
Lock W axis M1265 Special M for locking W axis. R/W
X axis Servo Off M1266 Special M for setting the X axis to Servo Off status. R/W
Y axis Servo Off M1267 Special M for setting the Y axis to Servo Off status. R/W
Z axis Servo Off M1268 Special M for setting the Z axis to Servo Off status. R/W
A axis Servo Off M1269 Special M for setting the A axis to Servo Off status. R/W
B axis Servo Off M1270 Special M for setting the B axis to Servo Off status. R/W

14-9
 MLC Special M Relay and Special D Register Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual

Device
Function name Special M Description
type
C axis Servo Off M1271 Special M for setting the C axis to Servo Off status. R/W

14
U axis Servo Off M1272 Special M for setting the U axis to Servo Off status. R/W
V axis Servo Off M1273 Special M for setting the V axis to Servo Off status. R/W
W axis Servo Off M1274 Special M for setting the W axis to Servo Off status. R/W
Switch MLC X axis
The MLC X axis positioning command (D1064) is
command to M1280 R/W
incremental.
incremental
Switch MLC Y axis
The MLC Y axis positioning command (D1066) is
command to M1281 R/W
incremental.
incremental
Switch MLC Z axis
The MLC Z axis positioning command (D1068) is
command to M1282 R/W
incremental.
incremental
Switch MLC A axis
The MLC A axis positioning command (D1070) is
command to M1283 R/W
incremental.
incremental
Switch MLC B axis
The MLC B axis positioning command (D1072) is
command to M1284 R/W
incremental.
incremental
Switch MLC C axis
The MLC C axis positioning command (D1074) is
command to M1285 R/W
incremental.
incremental
Switch MLC U axis
The MLC U axis positioning command (D1076) is
command to M1286 R/W
incremental.
incremental
Switch MLC V axis
The MLC V axis positioning command (D1078) is
command to M1287 R/W
incremental.
incremental
Switch MLC W axis
The MLC W axis positioning command (D1080) is
command to M1288 R/W
incremental.
incremental
MLC X axis control When the special M is On, X axis is in speed mode.
M1289 R/W
mode When the special M is Off, X axis is in position mode.
MLC Y axis control When the special M is On, Y axis is in speed mode.
M1290 R/W
mode When the special M is Off, Y axis is in position mode.
MLC Z axis control When the special M is On, Z axis is in speed mode.
M1291 R/W
mode When the special M is Off, Z axis is in position mode.
MLC A axis control When the special M is On, A axis is in speed mode.
M1292 R/W
mode When the special M is Off, A axis is in position mode.
MLC B axis control When the special M is On, B axis is in speed mode.
M1293 R/W
mode When the special M is Off, B axis is in position mode.
MLC C axis control When the special M is On, C axis is in speed mode.
M1294 R/W
mode When the special M is Off, C axis is in position mode.
MLC U axis control When the special M is On, U axis is in speed mode.
M1295 R/W
mode When the special M is Off, U axis is in position mode.
MLC V axis control When the special M is On, V axis is in speed mode.
M1296 R/W
mode When the special M is Off, V axis is in position mode.
MLC W axis control When the special M is On, W axis is in speed mode.
M1297 R/W
mode When the special M is Off, W axis is in position mode.
When you set the special M to On in the MLC axis
MLC X axis high-
M1298 mode and trigger the corresponding DI of X axis, the R/W
speed input triggering
MLC X axis immediately stops.
When you set the special M to On in the MLC axis
MLC Y axis high-
M1299 mode and trigger the corresponding DI of Y axis, the R/W
speed input triggering
MLC Y axis immediately stops.

14-10
Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual MLC Special M Relay and Special D register

Device
Function name Special M Description
type
When you set the special M to On in the MLC axis
MLC Z axis high-
M1300 mode and trigger the corresponding DI of Z axis, the R/W

14
speed input triggering
MLC Z axis immediately stops.
When you set the special M to On in the MLC axis
MLC A axis high-
M1301 mode and trigger the corresponding DI of A axis, the R/W
speed input triggering
MLC A axis immediately stops.
When you set the special M to On in the MLC axis
MLC B axis high-
M1302 mode and trigger the corresponding DI of B axis, the R/W
speed input triggering
MLC B axis immediately stops.
When you set the special M to On in the MLC axis
MLC C axis high-
M1303 mode and trigger the corresponding DI of C axis, the R/W
speed input triggering
MLC C axis immediately stops.
When you set the special M to On in the MLC axis
MLC U axis high-
M1304 mode and trigger the corresponding DI of U axis, the R/W
speed input triggering
MLC U axis immediately stops.
When you set the special M to On in the MLC axis
MLC V axis high-
M1305 mode and trigger the corresponding DI of V axis, the R/W
speed input triggering
MLC V axis immediately stops.
When you set the special M to On in the MLC axis
MLC W axis high-
M1306 mode and trigger the corresponding DI of W axis, the R/W
speed input triggering
MLC W axis immediately stops.
When the special M is On, the 1st and 2nd spindle
Spindle speed speed commands refer to the settings of D1148 and
M1307 R/W
command source D1152; when the special M is Off, the spindle speed
command refers to the S-code setting in the program.
When Pr.501 [Axis movement protection] is set to 1,
Allow X axis
M1312 you have to set this special M to On for the X axis to R/W
movement
move.
When Pr.501 [Axis movement protection] is set to 1,
Allow Y axis
M1313 you have to set this special M to On for the Y axis to R/W
movement
move.
When Pr.501 [Axis movement protection] is set to 1,
Allow Z axis
M1314 you have to set this special M to On for the Z axis to R/W
movement
move.
When Pr.501 [Axis movement protection] is set to 1,
Allow A axis
M1315 you have to set this special M to On for the A axis to R/W
movement
move.
When Pr.501 [Axis movement protection] is set to 1,
Allow B axis
M1316 you have to set this special M to On for the B axis to R/W
movement
move.
When Pr.501 [Axis movement protection] is set to 1,
Allow C axis
M1317 you have to set this special M to On for the C axis to R/W
movement
move.
When Pr.501 [Axis movement protection] is set to 1,
Allow U axis
M1318 you have to set this special M to On for the U axis to R/W
movement
move.
When Pr.501 [Axis movement protection] is set to 1,
Allow V axis
M1319 you have to set this special M to On for the V axis to R/W
movement
move.
When Pr.501 [Axis movement protection] is set to 1,
Allow W axis
M1320 you have to set this special M to On for the W axis to R/W
movement
move.

14-11
 MLC Special M Relay and Special D Register Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual

Device
Function name Special M Description
type
When Pr.485 [Lock axis moving direction in AUTO
mode] is set to 1, in AUTO and MDI modes, setting this

14
special M to On disables the X axis from moving in the
Lock machine X axis
positive direction. In JOG, MPG, and RAPID modes,
movement in positive M1344 R/W
setting this special M to On disables the X axis from
direction
moving in the positive direction whether Pr.485 is set or
not. In HOME mode, setting this special M to On
disables the X axis from executing homing.
When Pr.485 [Lock axis moving direction in AUTO
mode] is set to 1, in AUTO and MDI modes, setting this
special M to On disables the Y axis from moving in the
Lock machine Y axis
positive direction. In JOG, MPG, and RAPID modes,
movement in positive M1345 R/W
setting this special M to On disables the Y axis from
direction
moving in the positive direction whether Pr.485 is set or
not. In HOME mode, setting this special M to On
disables the Y axis from executing homing.
When Pr.485 [Lock axis moving direction in AUTO
mode] is set to 1, in AUTO and MDI modes, setting this
special M to On disables the Z axis from moving in the
Lock machine Z axis
positive direction. In JOG, MPG, and RAPID modes,
movement in positive M1346 R/W
setting this special M to On disables the Z axis from
direction
moving in the positive direction whether Pr.485 is set or
not. In HOME mode, setting this special M to On
disables the Z axis from executing homing.
When Pr.485 [Lock axis moving direction in AUTO
mode] is set to 1, in AUTO and MDI modes, setting this
special M to On disables the A axis from moving in the
Lock machine A axis
positive direction. In JOG, MPG, and RAPID modes,
movement in positive M1347 R/W
setting this special M to On disables the A axis from
direction
moving in the positive direction whether Pr.485 is set or
not. In HOME mode, setting this special M to On
disables the A axis from executing homing.
When Pr.485 [Lock axis moving direction in AUTO
mode] is set to 1, in AUTO and MDI modes, setting this
special M to On disables the B axis from moving in the
Lock machine B axis
positive direction. In JOG, MPG, and RAPID modes,
movement in positive M1348 R/W
setting this special M to On disables the B axis from
direction
moving in the positive direction whether Pr.485 is set or
not. In HOME mode, setting this special M to On
disables the B axis from executing homing.
When Pr.485 [Lock axis moving direction in AUTO
mode] is set to 1, in AUTO and MDI modes, setting this
special M to On disables the C axis from moving in the
Lock machine C axis
positive direction. In JOG, MPG, and RAPID modes,
movement in positive M1349 R/W
setting this special M to On disables the C axis from
direction
moving in the positive direction whether Pr.485 is set or
not. In HOME mode, setting this special M to On
disables the C axis from executing homing.
When Pr.485 [Lock axis moving direction in AUTO
mode] is set to 1, in AUTO and MDI modes, setting this
special M to On disables the U axis from moving in the
Lock machine U axis
positive direction. In JOG, MPG, and RAPID modes,
movement in positive M1350 R/W
setting this special M to On disables the U axis from
direction
moving in the positive direction whether Pr.485 is set or
not. In HOME mode, setting this special M to On
disables the U axis from executing homing.

14-12
Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual MLC Special M Relay and Special D register

Device
Function name Special M Description
type
When Pr.485 [Lock axis moving direction in AUTO
mode] is set to 1, in AUTO and MDI modes, setting this

14
special M to On disables the V axis from moving in the
Lock machine V axis
positive direction. In JOG, MPG, and RAPID modes,
movement in positive M1351 R/W
setting this special M to On disables the V axis from
direction
moving in the positive direction whether Pr.485 is set or
not. In HOME mode, setting this special M to On
disables the V axis from executing homing.
When Pr.485 [Lock axis moving direction in AUTO
mode] is set to 1, in AUTO and MDI modes, setting this
special M to On disables the W axis from moving in the
Lock machine W axis
positive direction. In JOG, MPG, and RAPID modes,
movement in positive M1352 R/W
setting this special M to On disables the W axis from
direction
moving in the positive direction whether Pr.485 is set or
not. In HOME mode, setting this special M to On
disables the W axis from executing homing.
When Pr.485 [Lock axis moving direction in AUTO
mode] is set to 1, in AUTO and MDI modes, setting this
special M to On disables the X axis from moving in the
Lock machine X axis
negative direction. In JOG, MPG, and RAPID modes,
movement in M1353 R/W
setting this special M to On disables the X axis from
negative direction
moving in the negative direction whether Pr.485 is set
or not. In HOME mode, setting this special M to On
disables the X axis from executing homing.
When Pr.485 [Lock axis moving direction in AUTO
mode] is set to 1, in AUTO and MDI modes, setting this
special M to On disables the Y axis from moving in the
Lock machine Y axis
negative direction. In JOG, MPG, and RAPID modes,
movement in M1354 R/W
setting this special M to On disables the Y axis from
negative direction
moving in the negative direction whether Pr.485 is set
or not. In HOME mode, setting this special M to On
disables the Y axis from executing homing.
When Pr.485 [Lock axis moving direction in AUTO
mode] is set to 1, in AUTO and MDI modes, setting this
special M to On disables the Z axis from moving in the
Lock machine Z axis
negative direction. In JOG, MPG, and RAPID modes,
movement in M1355 R/W
setting this special M to On disables the Z axis from
negative direction
moving in the negative direction whether Pr.485 is set
or not. In HOME mode, setting this special M to On
disables the Z axis from executing homing.
When Pr.485 [Lock axis moving direction in AUTO
mode] is set to 1, in AUTO and MDI modes, setting this
special M to On disables the A axis from moving in the
Lock machine A axis
negative direction. In JOG, MPG, and RAPID modes,
movement in M1356 R/W
setting this special M to On disables the A axis from
negative direction
moving in the negative direction whether Pr.485 is set
or not. In HOME mode, setting this special M to On
disables the A axis from executing homing.
When Pr.485 [Lock axis moving direction in AUTO
mode] is set to 1, in AUTO and MDI modes, setting this
special M to On disables the B axis from moving in the
Lock machine B axis
negative direction. In JOG, MPG, and RAPID modes,
movement in M1357 R/W
setting this special M to On disables the B axis from
negative direction
moving in the negative direction whether Pr.485 is set
or not. In HOME mode, setting this special M to On
disables the B axis from executing homing.

14-13
 MLC Special M Relay and Special D Register Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual

Device
Function name Special M Description
type
When Pr.485 [Lock axis moving direction in AUTO
mode] is set to 1, in AUTO and MDI modes, setting this

14
special M to On disables the C axis from moving in the
Lock machine C axis
negative direction. In JOG, MPG, and RAPID modes,
movement in M1358 R/W
setting this special M to On disables the C axis from
negative direction
moving in the negative direction whether Pr.485 is set
or not. In HOME mode, setting this special M to On
disables the C axis from executing homing.
When Pr.485 [Lock axis moving direction in AUTO
mode] is set to 1, in AUTO and MDI modes, setting this
special M to On disables the U axis from moving in the
Lock machine U axis
negative direction. In JOG, MPG, and RAPID modes,
movement in M1369 R/W
setting this special M to On disables the U axis from
negative direction
moving in the negative direction whether Pr.485 is set
or not. In HOME mode, setting this special M to On
disables the U axis from executing homing.
When Pr.485 [Lock axis moving direction in AUTO
mode] is set to 1, in AUTO and MDI modes, setting this
special M to On disables the V axis from moving in the
Lock machine V axis
negative direction. In JOG, MPG, and RAPID modes,
movement in M1360 R/W
setting this special M to On disables the V axis from
negative direction
moving in the negative direction whether Pr.485 is set
or not. In HOME mode, setting this special M to On
disables the V axis from executing homing.
When Pr.485 [Lock axis moving direction in AUTO
mode] is set to 1, in AUTO and MDI modes, setting this
special M to On disables the W axis from moving in the
Lock machine W axis
negative direction. In JOG, MPG, and RAPID modes,
movement in M1361 R/W
setting this special M to On disables the W axis from
negative direction
moving in the negative direction whether Pr.485 is set
or not. In HOME mode, setting this special M to On
disables the W axis from executing homing.
Trigger breakpoint The MLC sends this special M signal to trigger the
M1567 R/W
search function breakpoint search function.
The status of this special M can be switched by the NC
HMI input point 1 M2080 R
system variable #1864.
The status of this special M can be switched by the NC
HMI input point 2 M2081 R
system variable #1865.
The status of this special M can be switched by the NC
HMI input point 3 M2082 R
system variable #1866.
The status of this special M can be switched by the NC
HMI input point 4 M2083 R
system variable #1867.
The status of this special M can be switched by the NC
HMI input point 5 M2084 R
system variable #1868.
The status of this special M can be switched by the NC
HMI input point 6 M2085 R
system variable #1869.
The status of this special M can be switched by the NC
HMI input point 7 M2086 R
system variable #1870.
The status of this special M can be switched by the NC
HMI input point 8 M2087 R
system variable #1871.
The status of this special M can be switched by the NC
HMI input point 9 M2088 R
system variable #1872.
The status of this special M can be switched by the NC
HMI input point 10 M2089 R
system variable #1873.
The status of this special M can be switched by the NC
HMI input point 11 M2090 R
system variable #1874.
The status of this special M can be switched by the NC
HMI input point 12 M2091 R
system variable #1875.

14-14
Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual MLC Special M Relay and Special D register

Device
Function name Special M Description
type
The status of this special M can be switched by the NC
HMI input point 13 M2092 R
system variable #1876.

14
The status of this special M can be switched by the NC
HMI input point 14 M2093 R
system variable #1877.
The status of this special M can be switched by the NC
HMI input point 15 M2094 R
system variable #1878.
The status of this special M can be switched by the NC
HMI input point 16 M2095 R
system variable #1879.
The status of this special M can be switched by the NC
HMI input point 17 M2096 R
system variable #1880.
The status of this special M can be switched by the NC
HMI input point 18 M2097 R
system variable #1881.
The status of this special M can be switched by the NC
HMI input point 19 M2098 R
system variable #1882.
The status of this special M can be switched by the NC
HMI input point 20 M2099 R
system variable #1883.
The status of this special M can be switched by the NC
HMI input point 21 M2100 R
system variable #1884.
The status of this special M can be switched by the NC
HMI input point 22 M2101 R
system variable #1885.
The status of this special M can be switched by the NC
HMI input point 23 M2102 R
system variable #1886.
The status of this special M can be switched by the NC
HMI input point 24 M2103 R
system variable #1887.
The status of this special M can be switched by the NC
HMI input point 25 M2104 R
system variable #1888.
The status of this special M can be switched by the NC
HMI input point 26 M2105 R
system variable #1889.
The status of this special M can be switched by the NC
HMI input point 27 M2106 R
system variable #1890.
The status of this special M can be switched by the NC
HMI input point 28 M2107 R
system variable #1891.
The status of this special M can be switched by the NC
HMI input point 29 M2108 R
system variable #1892.
The status of this special M can be switched by the NC
HMI input point 30 M2109 R
system variable #1893.
The status of this special M can be switched by the NC
HMI input point 31 M2110 R
system variable #1894.
The status of this special M can be switched by the NC
HMI input point 32 M2111 R
system variable #1895.
NC system is started When the NC system is ready, it sets this special M to
M2112 R
and ready On.
System macro alarm When the macro alarm (MR____) occurs in the NC
M2113 R
occurs system, the system sets this special M to On.
When you press the EMERGENCY STOP button to
System emergency
M2114 immediately stop the system, the system sets this R
stop
special M to On.
When the servo is ready, the system sets this special
Servo enabled M2115 R
M to On.
When the machine coordinate of X axis is 0, the NC
X axis at the origin M2119 R
system sets this special M to On.
When the machine coordinate of Y axis is 0, the NC
Y axis at the origin M2120 R
system sets this special M to On.
When the machine coordinate of Z axis is 0, the NC
Z axis at the origin M2121 R
system sets this special M to On.

14-15
 MLC Special M Relay and Special D Register Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual

Device
Function name Special M Description
type
When the machine coordinate of A axis is 0, the NC
A axis at the origin M2122 R
system sets this special M to On.

14 B axis at the origin

C axis at the origin

M2123

M2124
When the machine coordinate of B axis is 0, the NC
system sets this special M to On.
When the machine coordinate of C axis is 0, the NC
system sets this special M to On.
R

When the machine coordinate of U axis is 0, the NC

U axis at the origin M2125 R
system sets this special M to On.
When the machine coordinate of V axis is 0, the NC
V axis at the origin M2126 R
system sets this special M to On.
When the machine coordinate of W axis is 0, the NC
W axis at the origin M2127 R
system sets this special M to On.
MLC X axis high- When the MLC X axis high-speed input trigger (M1298)
speed input triggering M2128 is set to On and the DI of X axis is triggered, the NC R
feedback sets this special M to On.
MLC Y axis high- When the MLC Y axis high-speed input trigger (M1299)
speed input triggering M2129 is set to On and the DI of Y axis is triggered, the NC R
feedback sets this special M to On.
MLC Z axis high- When the MLC Z axis high-speed input trigger (M1300)
speed input triggering M2130 is set to On and the DI of Z axis is triggered, the NC R
feedback sets this special M to On.
MLC A axis high- When the MLC A axis high-speed input trigger (M1301)
speed input triggering M2131 is set to On and the DI of A axis is triggered, the NC R
feedback sets this special M to On.
MLC B axis high- When the MLC B axis high-speed input trigger (M1302)
speed input triggering M2132 is set to On and the DI of B axis is triggered, the NC R
feedback sets this special M to On.
MLC C axis high- When the MLC C axis high-speed input trigger (M1303)
speed input triggering M2133 is set to On and the DI of C axis is triggered, the NC R
feedback sets this special M to On.
MLC U axis high- When the MLC U axis high-speed input trigger (M1304)
speed input triggering M2134 is set to On and the DI of U axis is triggered, the NC R
feedback sets this special M to On.
MLC V axis high- When the MLC V axis high-speed input trigger (M1305)
speed input triggering M2135 is set to On and the DI of V axis is triggered, the NC R
feedback sets this special M to On.
MLC W axis high- When the MLC W axis high-speed input trigger (M1306)
speed input triggering M2136 is set to On and the DI of W axis is triggered, the NC R
feedback sets this special M to On.
When the G31P1 (High-speed input contact 1) Skip
HSI1 M2142 R
signal is input to the NC, this special M is On.
When the G31P2 (High-speed input contact 2) Skip
HSI2 M2143 R
signal is input to the NC, this special M is On.
Port 1 positive When the positive hardware limit of Port 1 is triggered,
M2144 R
hardware limit this special M is On.
Port 1 negative When the negative hardware limit of Port 1 is triggered,
M2145 R
hardware limit this special M is On.
When the home signal of Port 1 is triggered, this
Port 1 home signal M2146 R
special M is On.
Port 2 positive When the positive hardware limit of Port 2 is triggered,
M2148 R
hardware limit this special M is On.
Port 2 negative When the negative hardware limit of Port 2 is triggered,
M2149 R
hardware limit this special M is On.
When the home signal of Port 2 is triggered, this
Port 2 home signal M2150 R
special M is On.
Port 3 positive When the positive hardware limit of Port 3 is triggered,
M2152 R
hardware limit this special M is On.

14-16
Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual MLC Special M Relay and Special D register

Device
Function name Special M Description
type
Port 3 negative When the negative hardware limit of Port 3 is triggered,
M2153 R
hardware limit this special M is On.

14
When the home signal of Port 3 is triggered, this
Port 3 home signal M2154 R
special M is On.
Port 4 positive When the positive hardware limit of Port 4 is triggered,
M2156 R
hardware limit this special M is On.
Port 4 negative When the negative hardware limit of Port 4 is triggered,
M2157 R
hardware limit this special M is On.
When the home signal of Port 4 is triggered, this
Port 4 home signal M2158 R
special M is On.
Port 5 positive When the positive hardware limit of Port 5 is triggered,
M2160 R
hardware limit this special M is On.
Port 5 negative When the negative hardware limit of Port 5 is triggered,
M2161 R
hardware limit this special M is On.
When the home signal of Port 5 is triggered, this
Port 5 home signal M2162 R
special M is On.
Port 6 positive When the positive hardware limit of Port 6 is triggered,
M2164 R
hardware limit this special M is On.
Port 6 negative When the negative hardware limit of Port 6 is triggered,
M2165 R
hardware limit this special M is On.
When the home signal of Port 6 is triggered, this
Port 6 home signal M2166 R
special M is On.
Port 7 positive When the positive hardware limit of Port 7 is triggered,
M2168 R
hardware limit this special M is On.
Port 7 negative When the negative hardware limit of Port 7 is triggered,
M2169 R
hardware limit this special M is On.
When the home signal of Port 7 is triggered, this
Port 7 home signal M2170 R
special M is On.
Port 8 positive When the positive hardware limit of Port 8 is triggered,
M2172 R
hardware limit this special M is On.
Port 8 negative When the negative hardware limit of Port 8 is triggered,
M2173 R
hardware limit this special M is On.
When the home signal of Port 8 is triggered, this
Port 8 home signal M2174 R
special M is On.
Port 9 positive When the positive hardware limit of Port 9 is triggered,
M2176 R
hardware limit this special M is On.
Port 9 negative When the negative hardware limit of Port 9 is triggered,
M2177 R
hardware limit this special M is On.
When the home signal of Port 9 is triggered, this
Port 9 home signal M2178 R
special M is On.
When the M-code is executed in the program, the NC
sets this special M to On. After M1152 (M, S, and T-
codes execution complete) is triggered, this special M
M-code execution M2208 is set to Off. The NC does not trigger this special M R
when the program executes M00, M01, M02, M30,
M96, M97, M98, and M99, or an M-code that is used
for macro call.
When the S-code is executed in the program, the NC
sets this special M to On. After M1152 (M, S, and T-
S-code execution M2209 codes execution complete) is triggered, this special M R
is set to Off. The NC does not trigger this special M
when the S-code is used for macro call.

14-17
 MLC Special M Relay and Special D Register Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual

Device
Function name Special M Description
type
When the T-code is executed in the program, the NC
sets this special M to On. After M1152 (M, S, and T-

14
codes execution complete) is triggered, this special M
is set to Off. The NC does not trigger this special M
T-code execution M2210 when the T-code is used for macro call. This special M R
is related to the station ID setting in the tool magazine.
The NC triggers this special M only when the T-code
value is set within the specified range of tool number
for the tool magazine parameter.
Tool magazine 1 After you use M1171 to reset the tool magazine, the
M2212 R
reset complete NC sets this special M to On.
Tool magazine 2 After you use M1175 to reset the tool magazine, the
M2213 R
reset complete NC sets this special M to On.
M96 (Program
When M96 (Program interruption) is in execution, the
interruption) in M2216 R
NC sets this special M to On.
execution
After completing loading the G-code, the NC sets this
G-code ready M2223 R
special M to On.
Macro call initial
M2224 Indicates the macro call initial preparation is complete. R
preparation complete
Macro call in
M2225 Indicates the macro call is in execution. R
execution
Macro call error M2226 Indicates the macro call is in error. R
Synchronous function This special M is On when the synchronous function is
M2227 R
in execution in execution.
Transfer function in This special M is On when the transfer function is in
M2228 R
execution execution.
System reset This special M is On when the system reset is
M2229 R
complete complete.
When the handwheel is in forward operation, this
Handwheel (MPG) in
M2232 special M is On; when the handwheel is in reverse R
forward operation
operation or stationary, this special M is Off.
When the handwheel is in reverse operation, this
Handwheel (MPG) in
M2233 special M is On; when the handwheel is in forward R
reverse operation
operation or stationary, this special M is Off.
When reading M99, the NC system sets this special M
System stops at M99 M2238 R
to On.
Lathe C / S axis When the lathe system is switched from Spindle mode
M2239 R
switching to C axis mode, this special M is On.
Channel alarm When an error occurs to the NC channel, this special M
M2240 R
message is On.
Auto execution When the NC system is in AUTO mode, this special M
M2241 R
(AUTO) is On.
When the NC system is in EDIT mode, this special M is
Program edit (EDIT) M2242 R
On.
When the NC system is in MDI mode, this special M is
Manual input (MDI) M2243 R
On.
When the NC system is in MPG mode, this special M is
MPG feeding (MPG) M2244 R
On.
When the NC system is in JOG mode, this special M is
Jog feeding (JOG) M2245 R
On.
Rapid feeding When the NC system is in RAPID mode, this special M
M2246 R
(RAPID) is On.
When the NC system is in HOME mode, this special M
Homing (HOME) M2247 R
is On.
Single block When the NC system pauses after executing one
M2249 R
execution single block, this special M is On.

14-18
Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual MLC Special M Relay and Special D register

Device
Function name Special M Description
type
When the NC system is executing the program, this
Program in execution M2250 R
special M is On.

14
Pause M2251 When the NC system pauses, this special M is On. R
M00 program stop M2252 When the NC system reads M00, this special M is On. R
M01 program stop
M2253 When the NC system reads M01, this special M is On. R
(optional)
M02 end of program M2254 When the NC system reads M02, this special M is On. R
M30 end of program
M2255 When the NC system reads M30, this special M is On. R
and returns
1st spindle reaches When the 1st spindle speed reaches the target value,
M2256 R
the target speed this special M is On.
1st spindle reaches When the 1st spindle speed reaches zero speed, this
M2257 R
zero speed special M is On.
1st spindle positioning When the 1st spindle reaches the target position, this
M2258 R
complete special M is On.
1st spindle is in rigid When the 1st spindle performs tapping, this special M is
M2259 R
tapping mode On.
1st spindle rigid When the 1st spindle tapping is interrupted, this special
M2260 R
tapping interruption M is On.
2nd spindle reaches When the 2nd spindle speed reaches the target value,
M2261 R
the target speed this special M is On.
2nd spindle reaches When the 2nd spindle speed reaches zero speed, this
M2262 R
zero speed special M is On.
2nd spindle When the 2nd spindle reaches the target position, this
M2263 R
positioning complete special M is On.
2nd spindle in rigid When the 2nd spindle performs tapping, this special M
M2264 R
tapping mode is On.
2nd spindle rigid When the 2nd spindle tapping is interrupted, this special
M2265 R
tapping interruption M is On.
When the machining program ends, this special M is
Program ends M2271 R
On.
X axis homing When the X axis homing is complete, the NC system
M2272 R
complete sets this special M to On.
Y axis homing When the Y axis homing is complete, the NC system
M2273 R
complete sets this special M to On.
Z axis homing When the Z axis homing is complete, the NC system
M2274 R
complete sets this special M to On.
A axis homing When the A axis homing is complete, the NC system
M2275 R
complete sets this special M to On.
B axis homing When the B axis homing is complete, the NC system
M2276 R
complete sets this special M to On.
C axis homing When the C axis homing is complete, the NC system
M2277 R
complete sets this special M to On.
U axis homing When the U axis homing is complete, the NC system
M2278 R
complete sets this special M to On.
V axis homing When the V axis homing is complete, the NC system
M2279 R
complete sets this special M to On.
W axis homing When the W axis homing is complete, the NC system
M2280 R
complete sets this special M to On.
X axis positioned at
When the X axis reaches the 2nd reference point, the
the 2nd reference M2286 R
NC system sets this special M to On.
point
Y axis positioned at
When the Y axis reaches the 2nd reference point, the
the 2nd reference M2287 R
NC system sets this special M to On.
point

14-19
 MLC Special M Relay and Special D Register Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual

Device
Function name Special M Description
type
Z axis positioned at
When the Z axis reaches the 2nd reference point, the
the 2nd reference M2288 R

14
NC system sets this special M to On.
point
A axis positioned at
When the A axis reaches the 2nd reference point, the
the 2nd reference M2289 R
NC system sets this special M to On.
point
B axis positioned at
When the B axis reaches the 2nd reference point, the
the 2nd reference M2290 R
NC system sets this special M to On.
point
C axis positioned at
When the C axis reaches the 2nd reference point, the
the 2nd reference M2291 R
NC system sets this special M to On.
point
U axis positioned at
When the U axis reaches the 2nd reference point, the
the 2nd reference M2292 R
NC system sets this special M to On.
point
V axis positioned at
When the V axis reaches the 2nd reference point, the
the 2nd reference M2293 R
NC system sets this special M to On.
point
W axis positioned at
When the W axis reaches the 2nd reference point, the
the 2nd reference M2294 R
NC system sets this special M to On.
point
X axis positioned at
When the X axis reaches the 3rd reference point, the
the 3rd reference M2295 R
NC system sets this special M On.
point
Y axis positioned at
When the Y axis reaches the 3rd reference point, the
the 3rd reference M2296 R
NC system sets this special M to On.
point
Z axis positioned at
When the Z axis reaches the 3rd reference point, the
the 3rd reference M2297 R
NC system sets this special M to On.
point
A axis positioned at
When the A axis reaches the 3rd reference point, the
the 3rd reference M2298 R
NC system sets this special M to On.
point
B axis positioned at
When the B axis reaches the 3rd reference point, the
the 3rd reference M2299 R
NC system sets this special M to On.
point
C axis positioned at
When the C axis reaches the 3rd reference point, the
the 3rd reference M2300 R
NC system sets this special M to On.
point
U axis positioned at
When the U axis reaches the 3rd reference point, the
the 3rd reference M2301 R
NC system sets this special M to On.
point
V axis positioned at
When the V axis reaches the 3rd reference point, the
the 3rd reference M2302 R
NC system sets this special M to On.
point
W axis positioned at
When the W axis reaches the 3rd reference point, the
the 3rd reference M2303 R
NC system sets this special M to On.
point
In Position mode, this special M is On when the X axis
MLC X axis is in MLC axis control mode and the X axis reaches the
M2304 R
positioning complete positioning point; in Speed mode, this special M is On
when the target speed is reached.
In Position mode, this special M is On when the Y axis
MLC Y axis is in MLC axis control mode and the Y axis reaches the
M2305 R
positioning complete positioning point; in Speed mode, this special M is On
when the target speed is reached.

14-20
Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual MLC Special M Relay and Special D register

Device
Function name Special M Description
type
In Position mode, this special M is On when the Z axis
MLC Z axis is in MLC axis control mode and the Z axis reaches the

14
M2306 R
positioning complete positioning point; in Speed mode, this special M is On
when the target speed is reached.
In Position mode, this special M is On when the A axis
MLC A axis is in MLC axis control mode and the A axis reaches the
M2307 R
positioning complete positioning point; in Speed mode, this special M is On
when the target speed is reached.
In Position mode, this special M is On when the B axis
MLC B axis is in MLC axis control mode and the B axis reaches the
M2308 R
positioning complete positioning point; in Speed mode, this special M is On
when the target speed is reached.
In Position mode, this special M is On when the C axis
MLC C axis is in MLC axis control mode and the C axis reaches the
M2309 R
positioning complete positioning point; in Speed mode, this special M is On
when the target speed is reached.
In Position mode, this special M is On when the U axis
MLC U axis is in MLC axis control mode and the U axis reaches the
M2310 R
positioning complete positioning point; in Speed mode, this special M is On
when the target speed is reached.
In Position mode, this special M is On when the V axis
MLC V axis is in MLC axis control mode and the V axis reaches the
M2311 R
positioning complete positioning point; in Speed mode, this special M is On
when the target speed is reached.
In Position mode, this special M is On when the W axis
MLC W axis is in MLC axis control mode and the W axis reaches
M2312 R
positioning complete the positioning point; in Speed mode, this special M is
On when the target speed is reached.
When the X axis is moving (in any modes), this special
X axis is moving M2320 R
M is On.
When the Y axis is moving (in any modes), this special
Y axis is moving M2321 R
M is On.
When the Z axis is moving (in any modes), this special
Z axis is moving M2322 R
M is On.
When the A axis is moving (in any modes), this special
A axis is moving M2323 R
M is On.
When the B axis is moving (in any modes), this special
B axis is moving M2324 R
M is On.
When the C axis is moving (in any modes), this special
C axis is moving M2325 R
M is On.
When the U axis is moving (in any modes), this special
U axis is moving M2326 R
M is On.
When the V axis is moving (in any modes), this special
V axis is moving M2327 R
M is On.
When the W axis is moving (in any modes), this special
W axis is moving M2328 R
M is On.
X axis is moving in This special M is On when the X axis is moving in the
M2336 R
forward direction forward direction.
Y axis is moving in This special M is On when the Y axis is moving in the
M2337 R
forward direction forward direction.
Z axis is moving in This special M is On when the Z axis is moving in the
M2338 R
forward direction forward direction.
A axis is moving in This special M is On when the A axis is moving in the
M2339 R
forward direction forward direction.
B axis is moving in This special M is On when the B axis is moving in the
M2340 R
forward direction forward direction.
C axis is moving in This special M is On when the C axis is moving in the
M2341 R
forward direction forward direction.

14-21
 MLC Special M Relay and Special D Register Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual

Device
Function name Special M Description
type
U axis is moving in This special M is On when the U axis is moving in the
M2342 R
forward direction forward direction.

14 V axis is moving in
forward direction
W axis is moving in
forward direction
M2343

M2344
This special M is On when the V axis is moving in the
forward direction.
This special M is On when the W axis is moving in the
forward direction.
R

X axis is moving in This special M is On when the X axis is moving in the

M2345 R
reverse direction reverse direction.
Y axis is moving in This special M is On when the Y axis is moving in the
M2346 R
reverse direction reverse direction.
Z axis is moving in This special M is On when the Z axis is moving in the
M2347 R
reverse direction reverse direction.
A axis is moving in This special M is On when the A axis is moving in the
M2348 R
reverse direction reverse direction.
B axis is moving in This special M is On when the B axis is moving in the
M2349 R
reverse direction reverse direction.
C axis is moving in This special M is On when the C axis is moving in the
M2350 R
reverse direction reverse direction.
U axis is moving in This special M is On when the U axis is moving in the
M2351 R
reverse direction reverse direction.
V axis is moving in This special M is On when the V axis is moving in the
M2352 R
reverse direction reverse direction.
W axis is moving in This special M is On when the W axis is moving in the
M2353 R
reverse direction reverse direction.
NC / MLC axis When the system switches the X axis from NC axis
switching complete M2354 mode to MLC axis mode with M1200, this special M is R
(X axis) On.
NC / MLC axis When the system switches the Y axis from NC axis
switching complete M2355 mode to MLC axis mode with M1201, this special M is R
(Y axis) On.
NC / MLC axis When the system switches the Z axis from NC axis
switching complete M2356 mode to MLC axis mode with M1202, this special M is R
(Z axis) On.
NC / MLC axis When the system switches the A axis from NC axis
switching complete M2357 mode to MLC axis mode with M1203, this special M is R
(A axis) On.
NC / MLC axis When the system switches the B axis from NC axis
switching complete M2358 mode to MLC axis mode with M1204, this special M is R
(B axis) On.
NC / MLC axis When the system switches the C axis from NC axis
switching complete M2359 mode to MLC axis mode with M1205, this special M is R
(C axis) On.
NC / MLC axis When the system switches the U axis from NC axis
switching complete M2360 mode to MLC axis mode with M1206, this special M is R
(U axis) On.
NC / MLC axis When the system switches the V axis from NC axis
switching complete M2361 mode to MLC axis mode with M1207, this special M is R
(V axis) On.
NC / MLC axis When the system switches the W axis from NC axis
switching complete M2362 mode to MLC axis mode with M1208, this special M is R
(W axis) On.
X axis is positioned
When the X axis reaches the 4th reference point, this
at the 4th reference M2368 R
special M is On.
point
Y axis is positioned
When the Y axis reaches the 4th reference point, this
at the 4th reference M2369 R
special M is On.
point

14-22
Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual MLC Special M Relay and Special D register

Device
Function name Special M Description
type
Z axis is positioned at
When the Z axis reaches the 4th reference point, this
the 4th reference M2370 R

14
special M is On.
point
A axis is positioned at
When the A axis reaches the 4th reference point, this
the 4th reference M2371 R
special M is On.
point
B axis is positioned
When the B axis reaches the 4th reference point, this
at the 4th reference M2372 R
special M is On.
point
C axis is positioned
When the C axis reaches the 4th reference point, this
at the 4th reference M2373 R
special M is On.
point
U axis is positioned
When the U axis reaches the 4th reference point, this
at the 4th reference M2374 R
special M is On.
point
V axis is positioned
When the V axis reaches the 4th reference point, this
at the 4th reference M2375 R
special M is On.
point
W axis is positioned
When the W axis reaches the 4th reference point, this
at the 4th reference M2376 R
special M is On.
point
When the X axis origin coordinate is established in the
X axis homing
M2377 system and the “Homing complete” symbol is displayed R
complete
in the POS screen, this special M is On.
When the Y axis origin coordinate is established in the
Y axis homing
M2378 system and the “Homing complete” symbol is displayed R
complete
in the POS screen, this special M is On.
When the Z axis origin coordinate is established in the
Z axis homing
M2379 system and the “Homing complete” symbol is displayed R
complete
in the POS screen, this special M is On.
When the A axis origin coordinate is established in the
A axis homing
M2380 system and the “Homing complete” symbol is displayed R
complete
in the POS screen, this special M is On.
When the B axis origin coordinate is established in the
B axis homing
M2381 system and the “Homing complete” symbol is displayed R
complete
in the POS screen, this special M is On.
When the C axis origin coordinate is established in the
C axis homing
M2382 system and the “Homing complete” symbol is displayed R
complete
in the POS screen, this special M is On.
When the U axis origin coordinate is established in the
U axis homing
M2383 system and the “Homing complete” symbol is displayed R
complete
in the POS screen, this special M is On.
When the V axis origin coordinate is established in the
V axis homing
M2384 system and the “Homing complete” symbol is displayed R
complete
in the POS screen, this special M is On.
When the W axis origin coordinate is established in the
W axis homing
M2385 system and the “Homing complete” symbol is displayed R
complete
in the POS screen, this special M is On.
X axis is in Servo When the X axis is in the Servo On status, M2386 = 1.
M2386 R
On / Off status When the X axis is in the Servo Off status, M2386 = 0.
Y axis is in Servo When the Y axis is in the Servo On status, M2387 = 1.
M2387 R
On / Off status When the Y axis is in the Servo Off status, M2387 = 0.
Z axis is in Servo When the Z axis is in the Servo On status, M2388 = 1.
M2388 R
On / Off status When the Z axis is in the Servo Off status, M2388 = 0.
A axis is in Servo When the A axis is in the Servo On status, M2389 = 1.
M2389 R
On / Off status When the A axis is in the Servo Off status, M2389 = 0.
B axis is in Servo When the B axis is in the Servo On status, M2390 = 1.
M2390 R
On / Off status When the B axis is in the Servo Off status, M2390 = 0.

14-23
 MLC Special M Relay and Special D Register Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual

Device
Function name Special M Description
type
C axis is in Servo When the C axis is in the Servo On status, M2391 = 1.
M2391 R
On / Off status When the C axis is in the Servo Off status, M2391 = 0.

14 U axis is in Servo
On / Off status
V axis is in Servo
On / Off status
M2392

M2393
When the U axis is in the Servo On status, M2392 = 1.
When the U axis is in the Servo Off status, M2392 = 0.
When the V axis is in the Servo On status, M2393 = 1.
When the V axis is in the Servo Off status, M2393 = 0.
R

W axis is in Servo When the W axis is in the Servo On status, M2394 = 1.

M2394 R
On / Off status When the W axis is in the Servo Off status, M2394 = 0.
When Pr.501 [Axis movement protection] is set to 1, if
X axis movement there is movement in the specific axis during
M2400 R
limit machining, the system sets the corresponding special
M to On.
When Pr.501 [Axis movement protection] is set to 1, if
Y axis movement there is movement in the specific axis during
M2401 R
limit machining, the system sets the corresponding special
M to On.
When Pr.501 [Axis movement protection] is set to 1, if
Z axis movement there is movement in the specific axis during
M2402 R
limit machining, the system sets the corresponding special
M to On.
When Pr.501 [Axis movement protection] is set to 1, if
A axis movement there is movement in the specific axis during
M2403 R
limit machining, the system sets the corresponding special
M to On.
When Pr.501 [Axis movement protection] is set to 1, if
B axis movement there is movement in the specific axis during
M2404 R
limit machining, the system sets the corresponding special
M to On.
When Pr.501 [Axis movement protection] is set to 1, if
C axis movement there is movement in the specific axis during
M2405 R
limit machining, the system sets the corresponding special
M to On.
When Pr.501 [Axis movement protection] is set to 1, if
U axis movement there is movement in the specific axis during
M2406 R
limit machining, the system sets the corresponding special
M to On.
When Pr.501 [Axis movement protection] is set to 1, if
V axis movement there is movement in the specific axis during
M2407 R
limit machining, the system sets the corresponding special
M to On.
When Pr.501 [Axis movement protection] is set to 1, if
W axis movement there is movement in the specific axis during
M2408 R
limit machining, the system sets the corresponding special
M to On.
If the operation result is 0 when the MLC executes the
MLC instruction ADD, DADD, FADD, SUB, DSUB, FSUB, FMUL, FDIV,
M2824 R
operation result is 0 FINT, FDOT, FRAD, and FDEG instructions, this
special M is On.
If the operation result is smaller than -32,768 when the
MLC executes the ADD and SUB instructions, this
MLC instruction
M2825 special M is On. If the operation result is smaller than R
borrow operation
-2,147,483,648 when the MLC executes the DADD and
DSUB instructions, this special M is On.
If the operation result is greater than 32,767 when the
MLC executes the ADD and SUB instructions, this
MLC instruction carry
M2826 special M is On. If the operation result is greater than R
operation
2,147,483,647 when the MLC executes the DADD and
DSUB instructions, this special M is On.

14-24
Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual MLC Special M Relay and Special D register

Device
Function name Special M Description
type
If the dividend is 0 when the MLC executes DIV, DDIV,
and FDIV instruction, this special M is On. If the

14
conversion range exceeds K0 to K9,999 when the MLC
MLC instruction
M2828 executes the BCD instruction, this special M is On. If R
operation error
the conversion range exceeds K0 to K99,999,999
when the MLC executes the DBCD instruction, this
special M is On.
RIO connection
M2832 Remote I/O connection status: success = 1; failure = 0. R
status - Station 1
RIO connection
M2833 Remote I/O connection status: success = 1; failure = 0. R
status - Station 2
RIO connection
M2834 Remote I/O connection status: success = 1; failure = 0. R
status - Station 3
RIO connection
M2835 Remote I/O connection status: success = 1; failure = 0. R
status - Station 4
RIO connection
M2836 Remote I/O connection status: success = 1; failure = 0. R
status - Station 5
RIO connection
M2837 Remote I/O connection status: success = 1; failure = 0. R
status - Station 6
RIO connection
M2838 Remote I/O connection status: success = 1; failure = 0. R
status - Station 7
RIO connection
M2839 Remote I/O connection status: success = 1; failure = 0. R
status - Station 8
DMCNET connection
M2864 DMCNET connection status: success = 1; failure = 0 R
status - Station 1
DMCNET connection
M2865 DMCNET connection status: success = 1; failure = 0 R
status - Station 2
DMCNET connection
M2866 DMCNET connection status: success = 1; failure = 0 R
status - Station 3
DMCNET connection
M2867 DMCNET connection status: success = 1; failure = 0 R
status - Station 4
DMCNET connection
M2868 DMCNET connection status: success = 1; failure = 0 R
status - Station 5
DMCNET connection
M2869 DMCNET connection status: success = 1; failure = 0 R
status - Station 6
DMCNET connection
M2870 DMCNET connection status: success = 1; failure = 0 R
status - Station 7
DMCNET connection
M2871 DMCNET connection status: success = 1; failure = 0 R
status - Station 8
DMCNET connection
M2872 DMCNET connection status: success = 1; failure = 0 R
status - Station 9
DMCNET connection
M2873 DMCNET connection status: success = 1; failure = 0 R
status - Station 10
DMCNET connection
M2874 DMCNET connection status: success = 1; failure = 0 R
status - Station 11
DMCNET connection
M2875 DMCNET connection status: success = 1; failure = 0 R
status - Station 12
When this special M is set to On, the IX00 interruption
IX00 interruption
M2880 input function is enabled. R/W
input
Input point: X0 contact of controller main board I/O.
When this special M is set to On, the IX01 interruption
IX01 interruption input function is enabled.
M2881 R/W
input
Input point: X1 contact of controller main board I/O.
When this special M is set to On, the IX02 interruption
IX02 interruption
M2882 input function is enabled. R/W
input
Input point: X2 conatct of controller main board I/O.

14-25
 MLC Special M Relay and Special D Register Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual

Device
Function name Special M Description
type
When this special M is set to On, the IX03 interruption
IX03 interruption
M2883 input function is enabled. R/W

14
input
Input point: X3 conatct of controller main board I/O.
When this special M is set to On, the IX04 interruption
IX04 interruption
M2884 input function is enabled. R/W
input
Input point: X4 conatct of controller main board I/O.
When this special M is set to On, the IX05 interruption
IX05 interruption
M2885 input function is enabled. R/W
input
Input point: X5 conatct of controller main board I/O.
When this special M is set to On, the IX06 interruption
IX06 interruption
M2886 input function is enabled. R/W
input
Input point: X6 conatct of controller main board I/O.
When this special M is set to On, the IX07 interruption
IX07 interruption
M2887 input function is enabled. R/W
input
Input point: X7 conatct of controller main board I/O.
When this special M is set to On, the IC00 interruption
IC00 interruption
M2888 input function is enabled. R/W
input
Input point: hardware high-speed input counter HSI_1.
When this special M is set to On, the IC01 interruption
IC01 interruption
M2889 input function is enabled. R/W
input
Input point: hardware high-speed input counter HSI_2.
When this special M is set to On, the IR00 interruption
IR00 interruption
M2896 input function is enabled. R/W
input
Input point: X0 contact of remote I/O card 0.
When this special M is set to On, the IR01 interruption
IR01 interruption
M2897 input function is enabled. R/W
input
Input point: X1 contact of remote I/O card 0.
When this special M is set to On, the IR02 interruption
IR02 interruption
M2898 input function is enabled. R/W
input
Input point: X2 contact of remote I/O card 0.
When this special M is set to On, the IR03 interruption
IR03 interruption
M2899 input function is enabled. R/W
input
Input point: X3 contact of remote I/O card 0.
When this special M is set to On, the IR04 interruption
IR04 interruption
M2900 input function is enabled. R/W
input
Input point: X4 contact of remote I/O card 0.
When this special M is set to On, the IR05 interruption
IR05 interruption
M2901 input function is enabled. R/W
input
Input point: X5 contact of remote I/O card 0.
When this special M is set to On, the IR06 interruption
IR06 interruption
M2902 input function is enabled. R/W
input
Input point: X6 contact of remote I/O card 0.
When this special M is set to On, the IR07 interruption
IR07 interruption
M2903 input function is enabled. R/W
input
Input point: X7 contact of remote I/O card 0.
When this special M is set to On, the IR08 interruption
IR08 interruption
M2904 input function is enabled. R/W
input
Input point: X8 contact of remote I/O card 0.
When this special M is set to On, the IR09 interruption
IR09 interruption
M2905 input function is enabled. R/W
input
Input point: X9 contact of remote I/O card 0.
When this special M is set to On, the IR10 interruption
IR10 interruption
M2906 input function is enabled. R/W
input
Input point: X10 contact of remote I/O card 0.
When this special M is set to On, the IR11 interruption
IR11 interruption
M2907 input function is enabled. R/W
input
Input point: X11 contact of remote I/O card 0.

14-26
Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual MLC Special M Relay and Special D register

Device
Function name Special M Description
type
When this special M is set to On, the IR12 interruption
IR12 interruption
M2908 input function is enabled. R/W

14
input
Input point: X12 contact of remote I/O card 0.
When this special M is set to On, the IR13 interruption
IR13 interruption
M2909 input function is enabled. R/W
input
Input point: X13 contact of remote I/O card 0.
When this special M is set to On, the IR14 interruption
IR14 interruption
M2910 input function is enabled. R/W
input
Input point: X14 contact of remote I/O card 0.
When this special M is set to On, the IR15 interruption
IR15 interruption
M2911 input function is enabled. R/W
input
Input point: X15 contact of remote I/O card 0.
When this special M is set to On, the IR16 interruption
IR16 interruption
M2912 input function is enabled. R/W
input
Input point: X16 contact of remote I/O card 0.
When this special M is set to On, the IR17 interruption
IR17 interruption
M2913 input function is enabled. R/W
input
Input point: X17 contact of remote I/O card 0.
When this special M is set to On, the IR18 interruption
IR18 interruption
M2914 input function is enabled. R/W
input
Input point: X18 contact of remote I/O card 0.
When this special M is set to On, the IR19 interruption
IR19 interruption
M2915 input function is enabled. R/W
input
Input point: X19 contact of remote I/O card 0.
When this special M is set to On, the IR20 interruption
IR20 interruption
M2916 input function is enabled. R/W
input
Input point: X20 contact of remote I/O card 0.
When this special M is set to On, the IR21 interruption
IR21 interruption
M2917 input function is enabled. R/W
input
Input point: X21 contact of remote I/O card 0.
When this special M is set to On, the IR22 interruption
IR22 interruption
M2918 input function is enabled. R/W
input
Input point: X22 contact of remote I/O card 0.
When this special M is set to On, the IR23 interruption
IR23 interruption
M2919 input function is enabled. R/W
input
Input point: X23 contact of remote I/O card 0.
When this special M is set to On, the IR24 interruption
IR24 interruption
M2920 input function is enabled. R/W
input
Input point: X24 contact of remote I/O card 0.
When this special M is set to On, the IR25 interruption
IR25 interruption
M2921 input function is enabled. R/W
input
Input point: X25 contact of remote I/O card 0.
When this special M is set to On, the IR26 interruption
IR26 interruption
M2922 input function is enabled. R/W
input
Input point: X26 contact of remote I/O card 0.
When this special M is set to On, the IR27 interruption
IR27 interruption
M2923 input function is enabled. R/W
input
Input point: X27 contact of remote I/O card 0.
When this special M is set to On, the IR28 interruption
IR28 interruption
M2924 input function is enabled. R/W
input
Input point: X28 contact of remote I/O card 0.
When this special M is set to On, the IR29 interruption
IR29 interruption
M2925 input function is enabled. R/W
input
Input point: X29 contact of remote I/O card 0.
When this special M is set to On, the IR30 interruption
IR30 interruption
M2926 input function is enabled. R/W
input
Input point: X30 contact of remote I/O card 0.

14-27
 MLC Special M Relay and Special D Register Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual

Device
Function name Special M Description
type
When this special M is set to On, the IR31 interruption
IR31 interruption
M2927 input function is enabled. R/W

14
input
Input point: X31 contact of remote I/O card 0.
The user permission is locked when this special M is
Lock user permission M2934 On. You have to set Pr.10015 [Account permission R/W
activation method] to 1 to activate this special M.
Restrict program
M2935 Restricts program editing in the controller. R/W
editing
DCNT counter C64 When this special M is set to On, the counter
M2944 R/W
counts down decrements by 1 every time it is triggered.
DCNT counter C65 When this special M is set to On, the counter
M2945 R/W
counts down decrements by 1 every time it is triggered.
DCNT counter C66 When this special M is set to On, the counter
M2946 R/W
counts down decrements by 1 every time it is triggered.
DCNT counter C67 When this special M is set to On, the counter
M2947 R/W
counts down decrements by 1 every time it is triggered.
DCNT counter C68 When this special M is set to On, the counter
M2948 R/W
counts down decrements by 1 every time it is triggered.
DCNT counter C69 When this special M is set to On, the counter
M2949 R/W
counts down decrements by 1 every time it is triggered.
DCNT counter C70 When this special M is set to On, the counter
M2950 R/W
counts down decrements by 1 every time it is triggered.
DCNT counter C71 When this special M is set to On, the counter
M2951 R/W
counts down decrements by 1 every time it is triggered.
DCNT counter C72 When this special M is set to On, the counter
M2952 R/W
counts down decrements by 1 every time it is triggered.
DCNT counter C73 When this special M is set to On, the counter
M2953 R/W
counts down decrements by 1 every time it is triggered.
DCNT counter C74 When this special M is set to On, the counter
M2954 R/W
counts down decrements by 1 every time it is triggered.
DCNT counter C75 When this special M is set to On, the counter
M2955 R/W
counts down decrements by 1 every time it is triggered.
DCNT counter C76 When this special M is set to On, the counter
M2956 R/W
counts down decrements by 1 every time it is triggered.
DCNT counter C77 When this special M is set to On, the counter
M2957 R/W
counts down decrements by 1 every time it is triggered.
In AUTO mode, the system automatically executes the
File queue auto
M2980 next program in the FILE QUEUE list when this special R/W
processing
M is triggered.
G00 teaching
M2992 When G00 Teaching is triggered, this special M is On. R
triggered
G01 teaching
M2993 When G01 Teaching is triggered, this special M is On. R
triggered
G00 teaching record When G00 Teaching is used and the trajectory is
M2994 R
complete recorded, this special M is On.
G01 teaching record When G01 Teaching is used and the trajectory is
M2995 R
complete recorded, this special M is On.

14-28
Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual MLC Special M Relay and Special D register

14.3 List of special D

Special Device
Function name Description
D type

Number of complete
Set the value in the Process screen or with the MLC
input.
Set Pr.10015 [Machining count display format] to
determine which special D is the source of the
displayed data. D1019 is the high word of the 32-bit
14
D1018 register. R/W
pieces (32-bit)
When Pr.10015 [Machining count display format] is 0,
the source is D1022 and D1023.
When Pr.10015 [Machining count display format] is 1,
the source is D1018 (D1019) and D1020 (D1021).
Number of machining Set the value in the Process screen or with the MLC
D1020 R/W
targets (32-bit) input. D1021 is the high word of the 32-bit register.
Number of complete Set the value in the Process screen or with the MLC
D1022 R/W
pieces input.
Number of machining Set the value in the Process screen or with the MLC
D1023 R/W
targets input.
Sends the special D value to the system variable
HMI output point 1 D1024 R/W
#1833.
Sends the special D value to the system variable
HMI output point 2 D1025 R/W
#1834.
Sends the special D value to the system variable
HMI output point 3 D1026 R/W
#1835.
Sends the special D value to the system variable
HMI output point 4 D1027 R/W
#1836.
Sends the special D value to the system variable
HMI output point 5 D1028 R/W
#1837.
Sends the special D value to the system variable
HMI output point 6 D1029 R/W
#1838.
Sends the special D value to the system variable
HMI output point 7 D1030 R/W
#1839.
Sends the special D value to the system variable
HMI output point 8 D1031 R/W
#1840.
Sends the special D value to the system variable
HMI output point 9 D1032 R/W
#1841.
Sends the special D value to the system variable
HMI output point 10 D1033 R/W
#1842.
Sends the special D value to the system variable
HMI output point 11 D1034 R/W
#1843.
Sends the special D value to the system variable
HMI output point 12 D1035 R/W
#1844.
Sends the special D value to the system variable
HMI output point 13 D1036 R/W
#1845.
Sends the special D value to the system variable
HMI output point 14 D1037 R/W
#1846.
Sends the special D value to the system variable
HMI output point 15 D1038 R/W
#1847.
Sends the special D value to the system variable
HMI output point 16 D1039 R/W
#1848.
MPG operation mode selection. When D1040 is set to
0, an external MPG is used; when D1040 is set to 10,
MPG operation mode D1040 the keys on machine operation panel B are used for R/W
MPG operation, with M1118 and M1119 as the
triggering signals.
MPG operation channel
D1041 Channel selection for MPG operation. The default is 0. R/W
setting

14-29
 MLC Special M Relay and Special D Register Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual

Special Device
Function name Description
D type
MPG pulse magnification settings, ×1, ×10, and ×100.
The movement is the minimum unit (0.001 mm) multiply

14
MPG pulse magnification D1042 R/W
by the magnification.
For example, 1 × 0.001 = 0.001 mm/cnt.
Select the axis to be operated with the handwheel
(MPG).
Axis Setting value
X 0
Y 1
Z 2
MPG axis selection D1043 R/W
A 3
B 4
C 5
U 6
V 7
W 8
When the system is ready, the number of the connected
DMCNET axes is represented with decimal values
DMCNET ready for HMI D1048 converted from the binary data. For example, D1048 R
represents the binary data 1111 as 15 in decimal to
indicate there are 4 axes connected.
The setting of the cutting feed rate (F) in units of
Cutting feed rate percentage in the program. For example, when F is set
D1056 R/W
adjustment to 1000, if the current value of D1056 is 50, it means the
actual command output is 500 mm/min (1000 x 50%).
The setting of the speed of G00 Rapid traverse in units
of percentage. For example, when the speed set for
Rapid traverse
D1058 rapid traverse is 6000, if D1058 is set to 50, the actual R/W
adjustment rate
speed for G00 Rapid traverse is 3000 mm/min (6000 x
50%).
The setting of the S value in units of percentage
1st spindle speed specified in the program. For example, when S1000 is
D1060 R/W
adjustment specified in the program, if this special D is set to 30,
the actual spindle speed is 300 rpm (1000 x 30%).
The movement speed (F) setting for a dry run in JOG or
Speed setting for jog AUTO mode. If this special D is set to 50, the
D1062 R/W
feeding and dry run movement speed (F) is 50 mm/min. The setting range
for this 32-bit special D is 0 to 65535 mm/min.
Specifies the X axis moving amount in the MLC axis
MLC X axis positioning
D1064 mode. R/W
command
Unit: mm, inch. This special D is a 32-bit register.
Specifies the Y axis moving amount in the MLC axis
MLC Y axis positioning
D1066 mode. R/W
command
Unit: mm, inch. This special D is a 32-bit register.
Specifies the Z axis moving amount in the MLC axis
MLC Z axis positioning
D1068 mode. R/W
command
Unit: mm, inch. This special D is a 32-bit register.
Specifies the A axis moving amount in the MLC axis
MLC A axis positioning
D1070 mode. R/W
command
Unit: mm, inch. This special D is a 32-bit register.
Specifies the B axis moving amount in the MLC axis
MLC B axis positioning
D1072 mode. R/W
command
Unit: mm, inch. This special D is a 32-bit register.
Specifies the C axis moving amount in the MLC axis
MLC C axis positioning
D1074 mode. R/W
command
Unit: mm, inch. This special D is a 32-bit register.

14-30
Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual MLC Special M Relay and Special D register

Special Device
Function name Description
D type
Specifies the U axis moving amount in the MLC axis
MLC U axis positioning
D1076 mode. R/W

14
command
Unit: mm, inch. This special D is a 32-bit register.
Specifies the V axis moving amount in the MLC axis
MLC V axis positioning
D1078 mode. R/W
command
Unit: mm, inch. This special D is a 32-bit register.
Specifies the W axis moving amount in the MLC axis
MLC W axis positioning
D1080 mode. R/W
command
Unit: mm, inch. This special D is a 32-bit register.
Specifies the X axis movement speed in the MLC axis
MLC X axis positioning
D1082 mode. R/W
speed
Unit: mm, inch/min. This special D is a 32-bit register.
Specifies the Y axis movement speed in the MLC axis
MLC Y axis positioning
D1084 mode. R/W
speed
Unit: mm, inch/min. This special D is a 32-bit register.
Specifies the Z axis movement speed in the MLC axis
MLC Z axis positioning
D1086 mode. R/W
speed
Unit: mm, inch/min. This special D is a 32-bit register.
Specifies the A axis movement speed in the MLC axis
MLC A axis positioning mode.
D1088 R/W
speed Unit: refer to Pr.634 [Rotation axis unit selection].
This special D is a 32-bit register.
Specifies the B axis movement speed in the MLC axis
MLC B axis positioning mode.
D1090 R/W
speed Unit: refer to Pr.634 [Rotation axis unit selection].
This special D is a 32-bit register.
Specifies the C axis movement speed in the MLC axis
MLC C axis positioning mode.
D1092 R/W
speed Unit: refer to Pr.634 [Rotation axis unit selection].
This special D is a 32-bit register.
Specifies the U axis movement speed in the MLC axis
MLC U axis positioning mode.
D1094 R/W
speed Unit: refer to Pr.634 [Rotation axis unit selection].
This special D is a 32-bit register.
Specifies the V axis movement speed in the MLC axis
MLC V axis positioning mode.
D1096 R/W
speed Unit: refer to Pr.634 [Rotation axis unit selection].
This special D is a 32-bit register.
Specifies the W axis movement speed in the MLC axis
MLC W axis positioning mode.
D1098 R/W
speed Unit: refer to Pr.634 [Rotation axis unit selection].
This special D is a 32-bit register.
Specifies the spindle movement speed in the MLC axis
MLC spindle positioning
D1100 mode. R/W
speed
Unit: rpm. This special D is a 32-bit register.
When Pr.12017 [Record system data in special D
Main file name D1102 registers] is set to 1, this special D records the file R
names of O0000 - O9999 which are recently used.
When Pr.12017 [Record system data in special D
Total machining time D1103 registers] is set to 1, the total machining time is recoded R
in units of seconds. This special D is a 32-bit register.
When Pr.12017 [Record system data in special D
registers] is set to 1, the single machining time is
Single machining time D1105 R
recorded in units of seconds. This special D is a 32-bit
register.
When Pr.12017 [Record system data in special D
System time: year, month D1107 registers] is set to 1, the year and month of the system R
time is recorded.

14-31
 MLC Special M Relay and Special D Register Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual

Special Device
Function name Description
D type
When Pr.12017 [Record system time in special D
System time: day, hour D1108 registers] is set to 1, the day and hour of the system R

14
time is recorded.
When Pr.12017 [Record system time in special D
System time: minute,
D1109 registers] is set to 1, the minute and second of the R
second
system time is recorded.
Specifies the macro call file name O9xxx. For example,
Macro call file name D1111 when K9100 is written to D1111, the system calls the R/W
macro program O9100.
Sets the adjustment rate (in percentage) of the S value
specified for the 2nd spindle in the program. For
2nd spindle speed
D1112 example, when S1000 is specified in the program, if this R/W
adjustment
special D is set to 30, the actual spindle speed is
300 rpm (1000 x 30%).
When the spindle is in DMCNET mode, you can output
Spindle analog voltage analog voltage with this special D.
D1114 R/W
output (Port 2) Setting range: -1000 to +1000; unit: 0.01V.
This special D is available only on B series models.
When Pr.308 [Tool ID display source] is set to 1, the
Lathe tool number
D1115 tool number of the lathe is selected by this special D. R/W
selection
Setting range: 0 to 65535.
When the spindle is in DMCNET mode, you can output
Spindle analog voltage
D1125 analog voltage with this special D. R/W
output (Port 1)
Setting range: -1000 to +1000; unit: 0.01V.
Equi-slope filter The filter compensation value for X axis.
D1126 R/W
compensation for X axis Unit: mm
Equi-slope filter The filter compensation value for Y axis.
D1128 R/W
compensation for Y axis Unit: mm
Equi-slope filter The filter compensation value for Z axis.
D1130 R/W
compensation for Z axis Unit: mm
Equi-slope filter The filter compensation value for A axis.
D1132 R/W
compensation for A axis Unit: mm or deg
Equi-slope filter The filter compensation value for B axis.
D1134 R/W
compensation for B axis Unit: mm or deg
Equi-slope filter The filter compensation value for C axis.
D1136 R/W
compensation for C axis Unit: mm or deg
Equi-slope filter The filter compensation value for U axis.
D1138 R/W
compensation for U axis Unit: mm or deg
Equi-slope filter The filter compensation value for V axis.
D1140 R/W
compensation for V axis Unit: mm or deg
Equi-slope filter The filter compensation value for W axis.
D1142 R/W
compensation for W axis Unit: mm or deg
Linear axis compensation The compensation speed for the linear axis.
D1144 R/W
speed Unit: mm/sec
Rotation axis The compensation speed for the rotation axis.
D1146 R/W
compensation speed Unit: deg/sec
1st spindle speed The 1st spindle speed is written with this special D.
D1148 R/W
(written with special D) (Must be used with M1307.)
Adjusts the preview speed of the arc block when the
Arc preview speed D1150 PREVIEW function is used. R/W
This special D is a 32-bit register.
2nd spindle speed The 2nd spindle speed is written with this special D.
D1152 R/W
(written with special D) (Must be used with M1307.)
Spindle tool number The spindle tool number is written with this special D.
D1172 R/W
(written with special D) (Pr.308 [Tool ID display source] must be set to 1.)
Standby tool number The standby tool number is written with this special D.
D1173 R/W
(written with special D) (Pr.308 [Tool ID display source] must be set to 1.)

14-32
Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual MLC Special M Relay and Special D register

Special Device
Function name Description
D type
Command tool number The command tool number is written with this special D.
D1174 R/W
(written with special D) (Pr.308 [Tool ID display source] must be set to 1.)

14
The MPG pulse command is set with this special D.
MPG pulse input value
D1175 Setting Pr.485 [Enable the register for handwheel pulse R/W
(int16, INC)
input] to 1 to enable this function.
The value of the special D is specified with the system
HMI input point 1 D1336 R
variable #1896.
The value of the special D is specified with the system
HMI input point 2 D1337 R
variable #1897.
The value of the special D is specified with the system
HMI input point 3 D1338 R
variable #1898.
The value of the special D is specified with the system
HMI input point 4 D1339 R
variable #1899.
The value of the special D is specified with the system
HMI input point 5 D1340 R
variable #1900.
The value of the special D is specified with the system
HMI input point 6 D1341 R
variable #1901.
The value of the special D is specified with the system
HMI input point 7 D1342 R
variable #1902.
The value of the special D is specified with the system
HMI input point 8 D1343 R
variable #1903.
The value of the special D is specified with the system
HMI input point 9 D1344 R
variable #1904.
The value of the special D is specified with the system
HMI input point 10 D1345 R
variable #1905.
The value of the special D is specified with the system
HMI input point 11 D1346 R
variable #1906.
The value of the special D is specified with the system
HMI input point 12 D1347 R
variable #1907.
The value of the special D is specified with the system
HMI input point 13 D1348 R
variable #1908.
The value of the special D is specified with the system
HMI input point 14 D1349 R
variable #1909.
The value of the special D is specified with the system
HMI input point 15 D1350 R
variable #1910.
The value of the special D is specified with the system
HMI input point 16 D1351 R
variable #1911.
Number of received MPG
D1352 Reads the MPG pulse number. R
pulses
When the program reads the S-code, the value of the
S-code is stored in D1364 and D1369 simultaneously.
1st spindle command
speed D1364 D1364: 32-bit display. D1365 is the high word of the R
(32-bit) 32-bit register.
D1369: 16-bit display.
Unit: rpm.
When the program reads the M-code, the value of the
M-code is stored in D1368. When the M-code is used
M-code data D1368 for macro call, the value in this special D does not R
change. The M-code here does not include M00, M01,
M02, M30, M98, and M99.
When the program reads the S-code, the value of the
1st spindle S-code data D1369 S-code is stored in D1369. When the S-code is used for R
macro call, the value in this special D does not change.

14-33
 MLC Special M Relay and Special D Register Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual

Special Device
Function name Description
D type
When the program reads the T-code, the value of the
T-code is stored in D1370. When the T-code is used for

14
macro call, the value in this special D does not change.
T-code data (command) D1370 The value of this register is related to the station ID R
setting in the tool magazine. The T-code data is
displayed only when the value in the program is within
the range set by Pr.338.
Tool magazine 1 T-code
D1371 Records the latest T-code value read in tool magazine 1. R
data (standby)
D1372 = tool pot number of the command tool minus
standby tool pot number (D1373).
When M1168 (Tool magazine 1 moves forward) or
Tool magazine 1 T-code M1169 (Tool magazine 1 moves backward) is On, the
D1372 R
data (rotation increment) standby tool pot number increases or decreases. The
value of D1372 is the difference between the tool pot
number of the command tool and the standby tool pot
number.
Tool magazine 1 tool pot The value in this special D is the standby tool pot
D1373 R
number (standby) number in tool magazine 1.
Tool magazine 1 spindle The spindle tool number currently used in tool
D1374 R
tool number (in use) magazine 1.
Tool magazine 2 T-code
D1375 Records the latest T-code value read in tool magazine 2. R
data (standby)
D1376 = tool pot number of the command tool minus
standby tool pot number (D1377).
When M1172 (Tool magazine 2 moves forward) or
Tool magazine 2 T-code M1173 (Tool magazine 2 moves backward) is On, the
D1376 R
data (rotation increment) standby tool pot number increases or decreases. The
value of D1376 is the difference between the tool pot
number of the command tool and the standby tool pot
number.
Tool magazine 2 tool pot The value in this special D is the standby tool pot
D1377 R
number (standby) number in tool magazine 2.
Tool magazine 2 spindle The spindle tool number currently used in tool
D1378 R
tool number (in use) magazine 2.
Feed rate D1379 Accesses the cutting feed rate. R
Accesses the spindle speed. This special D is a 32-bit
register.
The source of the value displayed in this special D can
be changed with Pr.399 [Spindle speed D1380 display
1st spindle actual speed mode].
D1380 R
(32-bit)
When Pr.399 [Spindle speed D1380 display mode] is 0,
the source is the S-code command in the program.
When Pr.399 [Spindle speed D1380 display mode] is 1,
the source is the spindle current speed.
When you use G01, G02, or G03, this special D
Current G-code
D1383 displays the corresponding number of the G-code. R
(G01, G02, or G03)
(G01 = 1; G02 = 2; G03 = 3)
X axis machine X axis machine coordinate. This special D is a 32-bit
D1384 R
coordinate register.
Y axis machine Y axis machine coordinate. This special D is a 32-bit
D1386 R
coordinate register.
Z axis machine Z axis machine coordinate. This special D is a 32-bit
D1388 R
coordinate register.
A axis machine A axis machine coordinate. This special D is a 32-bit
D1390 R
coordinate register.
B axis machine B axis machine coordinate. This special D is a 32-bit
D1392 R
coordinate register.

14-34
Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual MLC Special M Relay and Special D register

Special Device
Function name Description
D type
C axis machine C axis machine coordinate. This special D is a 32-bit
D1394 R
coordinate register.
U axis machine
coordinate
V axis machine
coordinate
D1396

D1398
U axis machine coordinate. This special D is a 32-bit
register.
V axis machine coordinate. This special D is a 32-bit
register.
R

R
14
W axis machine W axis machine coordinate. This special D is a 32-bit
D1400 R
coordinate register.
X axis absolute X axis absolute coordinate. This special D is a 32-bit
D1402 R
coordinate register.
Y axis absolute Y axis absolute coordinate. This special D is a 32-bit
D1404 R
coordinate register.
Z axis absolute Z axis absolute coordinate. This special D is a 32-bit
D1406 R
coordinate register.
A axis absolute A axis absolute coordinate. This special D is a 32-bit
D1408 R
coordinates register.
B axis absolute B axis absolute coordinate. This special D is a 32-bit
D1410 R
coordinate register.
C axis absolute C axis absolute coordinate. This special D is a 32-bit
D1012 R
coordinate register.
U axis absolute U axis absolute coordinate. This special D is a 32-bit
D1414 R
coordinate register.
V axis absolute V axis absolute coordinate. This special D is a 32-bit
D1416 R
coordinate register.
W axis absolute W axis absolute coordinate. This special D is a 32-bit
D1418 R
coordinate register.
X axis DMCNET current monitoring. The data is an
X axis DMCNET current integer word.
D1420 R
monitoring
(The current value is not updated in HOME mode.)
Y axis DMCNET current monitoring. The data is an
Y axis DMCNET current integer word.
D1421 R
monitoring
(The current value is not updated in HOME mode.)
Z axis DMCNET current monitoring. The data is an
Z axis DMCNET current integer word.
D1422 R
monitoring
(The current value is not updated in HOME mode.)
A axis DMCNET current monitoring. The data is an
A axis DMCNET current integer word.
D1423 R
monitoring
(The current value is not updated in HOME mode.)
B axis DMCNET current monitoring. The data is an
B axis DMCNET current integer word.
D1424 R
monitoring
(The current value is not updated in HOME mode.)
C axis DMCNET current monitoring. The data is an
C axis DMCNET current integer word.
D1425 R
monitoring
(The current value is not updated in HOME mode.)
U axis DMCNET current monitoring. The data is an
U axis DMCNET current integer word.
D1426 R
monitoring
(The current value is not updated in HOME mode.)
V axis DMCNET current monitoring. The data is an
V axis DMCNET current integer word.
D1427 R
monitoring
(The current value is not updated in HOME mode.)
W axis DMCNET current monitoring. The data is an
W axis DMCNET current integer word.
D1428 R
monitoring
(The current value is not updated in HOME mode.)

14-35
 MLC Special M Relay and Special D Register Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual

Special Device
Function name Description
D type
DMCNET current monitoring for the 1st spindle. The
SP1 DMCNET current data is an integer word.

14
D1429 R
monitoring (The current value is not updated in spindle positioning
mode.)
DMCNET current monitoring for the 2nd spindle. The
SP2 DMCNET current data is an integer word.
D1430 R
monitoring (The current value is not updated in spindle positioning
mode.)
Displays the current workpiece coordinate system.
Workpiece coordinate
D1450 Program format: GXXPXX; display format: XXXX. R
system
For example, G55 = 5500; G54P01 = 5401.
Accesses the 2nd spindle speed. D1459 is the high word
of the 32-bit register.
The source of the displayed value is set by Pr.439
2nd spindle actual speed [Spindle speed D1458 display mode].
D1458 R
(32-bit) When Pr.439 [Spindle speed D1485 display mode] is 0,
the source is the S-code command in the program.
When Pr.439 [Spindle speed D1485 display mode] is 1,
the source is the spindle speed command.
When the program executes the S-code specified for
the 2nd spindle, the value of the S-code is stored in
2nd spindle command D1460 and D1462 simultaneously.
speed D1460 D1460: 32-bit display; D1461 is the high word of the 32- R
(32-bit) bit register.
D1462: 16-bit display.
Unit: rpm.
When the program executes the S-code specified for
the 2nd spindle, the value of the S-code is stored in
2nd spindle S-code data D1462 D1462. When you use S-code macro call, the value of R
this special D does not change.
Unit: rpm.
Functions of these special D registers differ according
to the RIO setting in the NC system.
When the RIO is set for ADC, the four IN ports of the
ADC stations (4 - 7) correspond to the following four
sets of special D codes: D1464 - D1467, D1472 -
D1475, D1480 - D1483, and D1488 - D1491.
D1464 - When the RIO is set for TAD, the four IN ports of the
Use ADC, TAD, or DAC R/W
D1495 TAD stations (4 - 7) correspond to the following four
sets of special D codes: D1464 - D1471, D1472 -
D1479, D1480 - D1487, and D1488 - 1491.
When the RIO is set for DAC, the four IN ports of the
DAC stations (4 - 7) correspond to the following four
sets of special D codes: D1464 - D1467, D1472 -
D1475, D1480 - D1483, and D1488 - D1491.
Setting each bit of this special D to define the positive
User-defined hardware
D1500 and negative limits and the home signal of the NC W
signal
system.
Setting each bit of this special D to define the positive
User-defined hardware
D1501 and negative limits and the home signal of the NC W
signal
system.
Setting each bit of this special D to define the positive
User-defined hardware
D1502 and negative limits and the home signal of the NC W
signal
system.
Setting each bit of this special D to define the positive
User-defined hardware
D1503 and negative limits and the home signal of the NC W
signal
system.
X axis residual X axis residual coordinate. This special D is a 32-bit
D1506 R
coordinate register.

14-36
Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual MLC Special M Relay and Special D register

Special Device
Function name Description
D type
Y axis residual Y axis residual coordinate. This special D is a 32-bit
D1508 R
coordinate register.

14
Z axis residual Z axis residual coordinate. This special D is a 32-bit
D1510 R
coordinate register.
A axis residual A axis residual coordinate. This special D is a 32-bit
D1512 R
coordinate register.
B axis residual B axis residual coordinate. This special D is a 32-bit
D1514 R
coordinate register.
C axis residual C axis residual coordinate. This special D is a 32-bit
D1516 R
coordinate register.
U axis residual U axis residual coordinate. This special D is a 32-bit
D1518 R
coordinate register.
V axis residual V axis residual coordinate. This special D is a 32-bit
D1520 R
coordinate register.
W axis residual W axis residual coordinate. This special D is a 32-bit
D1522 R
coordinate register.
Servo magazine 1
D1524 The command tool number of the 1st servo magazine. R/W
command tool number
Servo magazine 1
D1525 The command character of the 1st servo magazine. R/W
command character
Servo magazine 1
D1526 Displays the tool number in the 1st servo magazine. R/W
tool number feedback
Servo magazine 1
D1527 Displays the current status of the 1st servo magazine. R/W
status feedback
Servo magazine 2
D1528 The command tool number in the 2nd servo magazine. R/W
command tool number
Servo magazine 2
D1529 The command character of the 2nd servo magazine. R/W
command character
Servo magazine 2 tool
D1530 Displays the tool number in the 2nd servo magazine. R/W
number feedback
Servo magazine 2
D1531 Displays the current status of the 2nd servo magazine. R/W
status feedback
Servo magazine 3
D1532 The command tool number of the 3rd servo magazine. R/W
command tool number
Servo magazine 3
D1533 The command character of the 3rd servo magazine. R/W
command character
Servo magazine 3
D1534 Displays the tool number in the 3rd servo magazine. R/W
tool number feedback
Servo magazine 3
D1535 Displays the current status of the 3rd servo magazine. R/W
status feedback

14-37
 MLC Special M Relay and Special D Register Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual

(This page is intentionally left blank.)

14

14-38
Troubleshooting
This chapter provides the information about the alarms and troubleshooting methods
for the NC system. Search for the methods of handling the NC system malfunctions in
this chapter.

15.1 Alarm description ··········································································· 15-2

15.1.1 MLC errors (1200 - 13FF) ·························································· 15-3
15.1.2 Servo error (1E00) ··································································· 15-4
15.1.3 Remote I/O error (1F00) ···························································· 15-4
15.1.4 HMI related alarms (3010 - 3FFF)················································ 15-5
15.1.5 NC system errors (4200 - 4FFF)·················································· 15-7
15.1.6 Machining related alarms (B000 - B0FF) ······································· 15-9
15.1.7 Tool compensation related alarms (B100 - B1FF) ···························15-11
15.1.8 Lathe related alarms (B300 - B3FF) ············································15-13
15.1.9 Command related alarms (B600 - B6FF; B64x not included) ············15-14
15.1.10 Synchronous motion and temperature compensation related alarms
(B640 - B64F) ······································································15-17
15.1.11 Lathe cycle command alarms (B6A1 - B6AF)·······························15-17

15-1
 Troubleshooting Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual

15.1 Alarm description

The CNC alarms can be divided into three categories, which are system alarms, user-defined

15
alarms, and user-defined macro alarms. This chapter mainly explains the system alarms while
the user-defined alarms are not covered.
Alarm category Alarm code Alarm description
System alarms ____ Alarms caused by system error or operation error.
The user-defined alarms which you use with the MLC program.
User-defined alarms A_ When the A_ device is triggered, the alarm corresponding to
the A_ device occurs as well.
The user-defined macro alarm works with variable #6000 = _.
User-defined
MR_ You can have the alarm triggered and have the corresponding
macro alarms
macro alarm displayed on the controller.

The system alarms are divided into MLC related alarms, HMI related alarms, and NC related
alarms by function.
System alarm
Alarm code range Error type Description
category
1200 - 12FF MLC system error -
1300 - 13FF Ethernet error -
This alarm displays the information
about the station number of the
MLC related alarms 1E00 Servo error
servo axis in error and the error
code.
This alarm displays the information
1F00 Remote I/O error about the remote I/O station
number in error.
HMI related alarms 3010 - 3FFF HMI error -
These alarms are displayed with a
dialog box. The information is
4200 - 4FFF NC system error
added to neither the Alarm screen
nor the History screen.
According to the high byte of the
NC related alarms alarm code, you can identify which
channel is in error:
B000 - EFFF NC channel error BXXX: CH0
CXXX: CH1 (reserved)
DXXX: CH2 (reserved)
EXXX: CH3 (reserved)

15-2
Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual Troubleshooting

15.1.1 MLC errors (1200 - 13FF)

Alarm code Name Cause and corrective action

15
1. An error occurs when the MLC accesses the NC
1200 NC memory access error memory.
2. Restart the controller or send it back for servicing.
1. The startup of the NC system is not complete.
1201 NC not ready
2. Restart the controller or send it back for servicing.
1. NC memory buffer is in error or not ready.
1202 Memory error
2. Restart the controller or send it back for servicing.
1. NC output port does not exist.
1203 Output port does not exist
2. Check the axis parameter setting.
1. Failed to clear the MLC codes.
1204 MLC code clear error
2. Send the controller back for servicing.
1. Failed to write the MLC codes to the flash
1205 MLC flash memory error memory.
2. Restart the controller or send it back for servicing.
1. SRAM write-in error.
1206 SRAM error
2. Send the controller back for servicing.
1. An error occurs when the system accesses the
1207 Host I/O channel error host I/O.
2. Restart the controller or send it back for servicing.
1. An error occurs when the system accesses the
1208 Remote I/O channel error remote I/O.
2. Restart the controller or send it back for servicing.
1. NC parameters are not set or not initialized.
120A NC parameter error
2. Re-initialize the parameters.
1. Compensation parameter write-in error.
120B Compensation PAR error
2. Reload the compensation parameters.
1. An error occurs when the system clears the
120C Compen. PAR clear error compensation parameter from memory.
2. Reload the compensation parameters.
1. An error occurs when the system writes the
120D Compen. PAR write-in error compensation parameter to memory.
2. Reload the compensation parameters.
1. Parameter initialization error.
120E PAR initialization error
2. Re-initialize the parameters.
1. Memory clear error.
120F Memory clear error
2. Restart the controller or send it back for servicing.
1. Memory write-in error or memory initialization
1210 Memory write-in error error.
2. Restart the controller or send it back for servicing.
1. Servo parameter setting error.
1211 Servo axis does not exist
2. Check the parameter settings.
1. Servo parameter setting error.
1212 Servo axis PAR setting error
2. Check the parameter settings.
1. DMCNET initialization error.
1213 DMCNET initialization error 2. Make sure the DMCNET cable is securely
connected.
1. Non-volatile memory error.
1214 Non-volatile memory error
2. Restart the controller or send it back for servicing.
1. The bottom layer of communication between MLC
and NC is in error.
1215 Internal comm. error
2. Use the correct firmware version.
3. Set the correct channel parameters.

15-3
 Troubleshooting Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual

Alarm code Name Cause and corrective action

1. The following conditions occur when the MLC is
in execution:
 The divisor of the division command is 0.

15
 The target position of the CJ/CALL command
is invalid.
 The number of digits displayed in the BCD
1216 MLC PRG error command is invalid.
 The number of tables in the VRT command is
invalid.
 MLC code error.
2. Check and correct the MLC program.
3. Reload the MLC program.
1. The current number of MLC parameters in the
internal memory does not match the number of
1217 MLC PAR does not match parameters planned in the firmware.
2. Update the firmware or send the controller back
for servicing.
1. Check the network connection.
1300 Network com. error
2. Restart the controller or send it back for servicing.

15.1.2 Servo error (1E00)

Alarm code Name Cause and corrective action

[1530]: alarm signal (DI) in the NC-EIO-PMC02 or
NC-EIO-PMC06 conversion card (for converting
motion commands to pulses) is triggered.
Check the cause of the error which occurs in the
connected servo drive.
[1531]: the conversion card generates more than
24,000 pulses within 1 ms.
Check the controller's encoder resolution setting and
make sure the motor speed is within the specified
range.
[1532]: pulse leakage.
When the motor is stopped, the conversion card
compares the command pulse number with the
1E00 Servo error feedback pulse number. If the pulse number
difference is greater than 1% of the encoder
resolution, this alarm occurs.
1. Check if the signal traces are shielded.
2. Check if the equipment is properly grounded.
[1560]: station number repetition error.
1. Check the station number setting in the channel
parameter.
2. Check the setting of the rotary switch for station
number on the conversion card.
3. Check the setting of P3-00 for the drive station
number.
Refer to the relevant servo drive user manuals for the
definition and troubleshooting of other related errors.

15.1.3 Remote I/O error (1F00)

Alarm code Name Cause and corrective action

1. Remote I/O error.
1F00 Remote I/O error 2. Check the remote I/O connection or replace the
remote I/O board.

15-4
Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual Troubleshooting

15.1.4 HMI related alarms (3010 - 3FFF)

Alarm code Name Cause and corrective action

15
1. An error occurs when the system establishes the
HMI communication interface HMI communication interface.
3010
establishing error
2. Restart the controller or send it back for servicing.
1. An error occurs when the system creates the HMI
HMI communication memory area communication memory area.
3011
creating error
2. Restart the controller or send it back for servicing.
1. An error occurs when the system creates the HMI
HMI interface command area interface command area.
3012
creating error
2. Restart the controller or send it back for servicing.
1. HMI interface memory area error.
3013 HMI interface memory area error
2. Restart the controller or send it back for servicing.
HMI interface communication port 1. HMI interface communication port error.
3014
error 2. Restart the controller or send it back for servicing.
1. MLC interface memory area error.
3015 MLC interface memory area error
2. Restart the controller or send it back for servicing.
1. HMI file transmission error.
3016 HMI file transmission error
2. Restart the controller or send it back for servicing.
1. HMI data transmission error.
3017 HMI data transmission error
2. Restart the controller or send it back for servicing.
1. Incorrect FTP setting.
3018 FTP PAR setting error
2. Recheck the setting of FTP parameters.
1. The file name is invalid.
3100 Invalid file name
2. Modify the file name.
1. The macro call exceeded 8 layers.
3101 Exceeded subroutine call LVL
2. Check the macro program.
1. G-code range exceeded. For example, G100 is
3102 G-code range exceeded used when only G00 to G99 are supported.
2. Check the G-code and modify the program.
1. System internal memory area is in error.
3103 Memory error 2. Use the system recovery function or send the
controller back for servicing.
1. System internal parameter memory area is in error.
3200 Internal PAR CRC error 2. Use the system recovery function or send the
controller back for servicing.
1. System MLC program memory area is in error.
3201 MLC PRG error 2. Reload the MLC program or send the controller
back for servicing.
1. No CF card is inserted or the inserted CF card is
invalid.
3202 CF card read failed
2. Make sure the CF card is correctly installed or
replace the CF card.
Make sure the CF card is correctly inserted and the
3203 PAR backup failed
storage space is sufficient.
Make sure the CF card is correctly inserted and the
3204 MLC backup failed
storage space is sufficient.
1. The usage duration has expired.
3205 Machine is locked 2. Contact the equipment manufacturer to disable or
extend the setting of machine usage duration.
1. There are system parameters with the set values
3206 PAR value exceeds the range exceeding the specified range.
2. Check and modify the parameter values.

15-5
 Troubleshooting Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual

Alarm code Name Cause and corrective action

1. Failed to load the external device driver with the
software panel.
3207 COM port DLL load error
2. Update the software panel to reload the external

15
device driver.
1. System usage duration expiration reminder.
3208 Machine to be locked soon 2. Contact the equipment manufacturer to disable or
extend the setting of machine usage duration.
1. The system update is complete and requires
Sys updated, please restart the restarting.
3209
controller
2. Restart the controller.
1. The controller battery is low.
320A System battery is low
2. Replace the controller battery.
1. The connection between the software panel and
the external device is disconnected.
3210 COM port disconnection
2. Check the connection settings between the
controller and the external device.
1. Failed to open the external device driver with the
software panel.
3211 COM port DLL open error
2. Update the software panel to reload the external
device driver.
1. An error occurs when the external device driver is
loaded with the software panel.
3212 Failed to create COM port
2. Update the software panel and make sure the
setting of the external link file is correct.
1. Failed to load the TCPIP driver with the software
panel.
3213 Load TCPIP DLL Err
2. Update the software panel to reload the external
device driver.
1. Network connection is in error.
3214 TCPIP comm. disconnection
2. Check the network wiring or connection status.
1. Network communication initialization is in error.
3215 Network comm. init. failed
2. Check the network wiring or connection status.
1. No response from the bottom layer after the
system is reset.
3216 System reset error
2. Update the firmware or send the controller back for
servicing.
1. Failed to remotely enable the backup import.
3217 Failed to import full backup 2. Check the operation mode. Make sure the backup
storage device is correctly installed.
1. Failed to remotely enable the backup export.
3218 Failed to export full backup 2. Check the operation mode. Make sure the backup
storage device is correctly installed.
1. The firmware update function is enabled remotely.
Auto update is set, please restart 2. Cycle power to enable the automatic firmware
3219
the controller update function. You must put the firmware file in
the [pkt] folder in the root directory of the USB disk.
1. Failed to update the system firmware remotely.
2. Make sure the following conditions are resolved
before updating the firmware.
Sys. update failed, please restart  The firmware version is incorrect.
3220
the controller  The file format does not match.
 The firmware update version is not supported.
 The emergency stop of the controller is not
pressed.

15-6
Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual Troubleshooting

15.1.5 NC system errors (4200 - 4FFF)

Alarm code Name Cause and corrective action

15
1. Homing has not been executed for each axis
4200 Execute homing before automatic operation.
2. Execute homing for each axis.
1. The origin coordinates for the absolute type
4201 Absolute origin setting motor are not established.
2. Go to [DGN] to execute ABS RST.
1. An error occurs when the MLC accesses the NC
memory.
4300 MLC accessing memory error
2. Restart the controller, update the firmware, or
send the controller back for servicing.
Restart the controller, update the firmware, or send
4301 MLC is not ready
the controller back for servicing.
1. Failed to clear the I/O module program.
4302 I/O module program clearing failed
2. Send the controller back for servicing.
1. Failed to write the I/O module program.
4303 I/O module program write-in failed
2. Send the controller back for servicing.
1. Failed to clear the NC system program.
4304 NC system program clearing failed 2. Restart the controller, update the firmware, or
send the controller back for servicing.
1. Failed to install the NC system program.
NC system program installation
4305 2. Restart the controller, update the firmware, or
failed
send the controller back for servicing.
1. Failed to clear the macro program.
4306 Macro clearing failed 2. Restart the controller and re-execute the INT
MCR (macro internal memory) function.
1. Failed to install the macro program.
4307 Macro installation failed 2. Restart the controller and re-execute the INT
MCR (macro internal memory) function.
1. An error occurs when the system loads the
4308 G-code loading error G-code.
2. Check the machining program.
1. The I/O module program is not initialized.
4310 I/O module PRG not initialized
2. Send the controller back for servicing.
4311 FPGA code length error Send the controller back for servicing.
4312 FPGA code corrupted Send the controller back for servicing.
1. The I/O module status is in error.
4313 I/O module status error 2. Check if the I/O board is firmly installed and the
wiring is securely connected.
1. Program configuration of the I/O module is in
error.
4314 I/O module PRG configuration error
2. Check if the I/O board is firmly installed and the
wiring is securely connected.
4315 I/O board hardware interface error Send the controller back for servicing.
I/O board hardware interface reading
4316 Send the controller back for servicing.
error
1. The NC system command is in error.
4317 NC system command error 2. Check the machining program or the macro
content.
1. HMI initialization failed.
4318 HMI file loading error 2. Restart the controller, update the firmware, or
send the controller back for servicing.

15-7
 Troubleshooting Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual

Alarm code Name Cause and corrective action

1. The NC parameter is in error.
4319 NC parameter error 2. Reload the parameter file to the controller,
update the firmware, or send the controller back

15
for servicing.
1. Undefined or duplicate tool number in the tool
magazine.
(1) Duplicate tool numbers (Cutter No.) in the
Tool magazine management (MAGA) list.
431A Tool magazine setting error (2) The sum of the values set for Pr.339 (Tool
magazine 1 standby tool pot No. after reset) and
Pr.340 (Tool magazine 1 start tool No.) is greater
than the maximum tool number in the system.
2. Check the setting of tool magazine parameters.
1. The NC parameter is in error.
431B NC parameter error 2. Check for all the parameter settings. Make sure
the encoder pulse number, and the gear numbers
of the output shaft and motor are set to 0.
1. Spindle voltage output does not match the motor
rotation direction.
2. Check if the wiring of the spindle encoder OA/OB
431C Spindle polarity error is correct.
3. By setting Pr.51 [1st spindle OA/OB signal
sequence], you can adjust the phase sequence
of the feedback OA/OB of the spindle encoder.
1. When you switch the servo to On or Off in AUTO
mode but position overflow occurs to the
Servo overflow protection during specified axis, the servo is not switched to On or
4FFC Off and this alarm occurs.
machining
2. Check the servo parameters for preventing
position overflow.
1. The position feedback is not changed after the
motion command is issued.
2. Check for the servo parameter settings, such as
whether the setting values for the servo
Position feedback protection during bandwidth, motor speed limit, and torque limit
4FFD
machining are too low.
3. Check if the servo feedback signal wiring
functions normally.
4. Check if the motor rotates normally.
1. There is an overspeed motion command.
Overspeed protection during 2. Make sure the parameter settings are not set too
4FFE
machining high, such as the output gear ratio and cutting
speed setting.

15-8
Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual Troubleshooting

15.1.6 Machining related alarms (B000 - B0FF)

Alarm code Name Cause and corrective action

15
1. The G-code line number is illegal.
B000 Illegal G-code line number
2. Check the machining program.
1. The G-code length is illegal.
B001 Illegal G-code length
2. Check the machining program.
1. The G-code file is not found.
B002 G-code file not found
2. Check the file contents.
1. The name of the loaded file is in error.
B003 Loaded file name error
2. Reload the program file.
1. Buffer access error occurs when the system
Workpiece coordinates buffer access calculates the workpiece coordinates.
B005
error 2. Reload the machining program or update the
firmware.
1. Command index error occurs when the system
Workpiece coordinates command calculates the workpiece coordinates.
B006
index error 2. Reload the machining program or update the
firmware.
1. The servo port settings are in conflict.
B007 Servo port setting conflict
2. Check the parameter settings.
1. An error occurs when the system internal
program is operating.
B008 Memory overlap
2. Reload the machining program or update the
firmware.
1. The G-code buffer is in error.
B009 G-code buffer error 2. Reload the machining program or update the
firmware.
B025 G-code format error Check the N label in the machining program.
1. The command index of the computing
interpolator in the system is in error.
B00A Interpolator cmd index Err
2. Reload the machining program or update the
firmware.
1. An error occurs when the command buffer of
the computing interpolator in the system
B00B INTRPL cmd BUF access Err accesses data.
2. Reload the machining program or update the
firmware.
1. The feed rate is undefined.
B00C Undefined feed rate 2. Check the machining program and define the
feed rate.
1. Arc radius calculation is in error.
B00D Arc radius error 2. Check the arc machining program or increase
the tolerance for arc radius error.
1. Incorrect tool ID is specified for tool change or
T-code execution.
B00E Tool ID selection error
2. Check if the tool ID is within the setting range of
tool change or T-code execution.
1. The number of the connecting axes does not
match the parameter setting.
B00F Servo connection axes Err 2. Check the port number in the channel setting
and the station number setting of the connecting
servo.
1. The system cannot correctly calculate the tool
B014 Incorrect tool compen. radius radius compensation value in the G-code.
2. Check the G-code and modify the program.

15-9
 Troubleshooting Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual

Alarm code Name Cause and corrective action

1. This alarm occurs when the synchronous
function is enabled and you specify the slave
axis moving amount in the G-code.

15
B015 Sync cmd error
2. Check the machining program. After the
synchronous function is enabled, do not specify
the slave axis moving amount in the G-code.
1. The tool compensation number specified in the
G-code exceeds the setting range.
B017 Tool assignment error
2. Modify the tool compensation number setting in
the G-code.
1. An error occurs when the system checks for the
command transfer in MDI mode.
B018 Cmd transfer not allowed
2. Command transfer can only be done before the
machining program is executed.
1. The axis does not receive G-code motion
commands when the servo is Off.
B019 Servo command error
2. Check if the command axis is in the Servo Off
state.
1. The amount of the processed interface data
exceeds the range, such as tool change,
magazine setting, variable writing (#_), and G10
B01A Data amount error data setting.
2. Check if the G-codes and MLC processing
actions are operating normally.
1. The spindle is not rotating during machining.
2. This alarm occurs when the function of Pr.51
B01B Spindle not running [Spindle check before cutting] is enabled.
3. Make sure the spindle rotation command is
issued.
1. The spindle speed command exceeds the
maximum spindle speed.
B01C Spindle cmd speed error 2. Redefine the spindle speed.
3. Modify the setting of Pr.409 [Spindle maximum
speed].
1. The stop function is triggered when the path
enters the inhibit zone.
2. AUTO mode: correct the G-code execution
B01D Stroke limit error
path.
3. MDI mode: move to the opposite direction of the
inhibit zone to clear the error.
1. The spindle is in analog voltage and closed-loop
control. This alarm occurs when the spindle
encoder feedback is in error.
B01F Spindle feedback error 2. The analog output voltage drops to 0V after this
alarm occurs.
3. Check if the wiring for the encoder feedback
cable is correct.
1. An emergency stop occurs.
B020 Emergency stop 2. Check if the EMG button is pressed.
3. Check the emergency stop status.
1. The chamfer / rounding command cannot be
calculated.
B021 Chamfer / rounding Err
2. Check and modify the chamfer / rounding
command in the G-code.
Illegal G-code command when transfer G28 command is not allowed to use when the
B023
enabled transfer function is enabled.

15-10
Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual Troubleshooting

15.1.7 Tool compensation related alarms (B100 - B1FF)

Alarm code Name Cause and corrective action

15
1. Tool radius compensation is interfered or the
calculation for the tool compensation
coordinates is in error.
B100 Tool compen. interference
2. Check and modify the programmed
machining path or modify the tool radius for
compensation.
1. This alarm occurs when the block containing
arc interpolation is executed and you cancel
the tool radius compensation.
B101 Cancel radius compen. in arc
2. Modify the machining program to avoid
disabling the tool radius compensation
during circular interpolation.
1. This alarm occurs when the block containing
arc interpolation is executed and you enable
the tool radius compensation.
B102 Enable radius compen. in arc
2. Modify the machining program to avoid
enabling the tool radius compensation
during circular interpolation.
1. The tool path is interfered after tool radius
compensation.
B103 Radius interference
2. Check and modify the machining program or
modify the tool radius for compensation.
1. The tool compensation path is too short.
B104 Tool compen. amount too small 2. Check and modify the machining program or
modify the tool radius for compensation.
1. An error occurs when the system switches
the tool radius compensation to the right or
B105 G41 / G42 switch error left direction.
2. Check and modify the programmed
machining path.
1. This alarm occurs when the system
executes G31 Skip command during tool
B106 Use G31 in tool compen. radius compensation.
2. Check and modify the machining program.
1. NURBS interpolation is in error.
2. Check if the G-code in the NURBS function
complies with the command format.
B108 NURBS interpolation error
3. Check if the coordinates of the first control
point of NURBS are the same as the
coordinates specified in the previous block.
1. The arc interpolation points are insufficient.
B109 Insufficient 3D arc points
2. Check and modify the machining program.
The G-code for polar coordinate interpolation
Simultaneous interpolation (G07.1) for Y
B10A cannot be executed for Y and C axes at the
and C axes not allowed
same time.
1. This error occurs when Pr.508 [Polygon
cutting axis setting] is set to 0 and the
system executes G51.2.
2. This alarm occurs when Pr.508 [Polygon
B10B Tool axis setting error (G51.2)
cutting tool axis number] is set to a linear
axis and the system executes G51.2.
3. Correct the setting for Pr.508 [Polygon
cutting axis setting].

15-11
 Troubleshooting Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual

Alarm code Name Cause and corrective action

1. This error occurs when you set Pr.634 [Axis
control variables - rotation axis feed mode]
to linear mode for the tool axis and the

15
B10C Illegal tool axis rotation mode (G51.2) system executes G51.2.
2. Change the setting of Pr.634 [Axis control
variables - rotation axis feed mode] to
rotation mode.
1. This alarm occurs when G51.2 [Polygon
cutting] is enabled and you specified axis
Illegal polygon interpolation G-code movement for the tool axis in the G-code.
B10D
(G51.2)
2. Check the G-code and modify the machining
program.
Z-axis length of arc exceeds 2A Z-axis length of the arc exceeds 2A during the
B10E
(G2.1 / G3.1) interpolation of ellipse.
End point coordinates in another quadrant The start and end coordinates are in different
B01F
(G2.1 / G3.1) quadrants during the interpolation of ellipse.
Identical start and end coordinates The start and end coordinates are identical
B110
(G2.1 / G3.1) during the interpolation of ellipse.
Major (A) and minor (B) axis lengths of the Lengths of the major axis (A) and minor axis (B)
B111 ellipse must be greater than 0 of the ellipse must be positive values during the
(G2.1 / G3.1) interpolation of ellipse.
Parabolic interpolation format error
B112 The format of parabolic interpolation is in error.
(G2.2 / G3.2)
The parabolic path does not exist or the
Parabolic path does not exist
B113 coordinates are out of range during parabolic
(G2.2 / G3.2)
interpolation.
When the tapping is executed with the Z axis
ACC/DEC time too long
B117 following the spindle, the acceleration or
(Pr.51 [Tapping mode] is set to following)
deceleration time is too long.

15-12
Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual Troubleshooting

15.1.8 Lathe related alarms (B300 - B3FF)

Alarm code Name Cause and corrective action

15
1. The calculation result of the variable lead thread
is less than 0.
2. When you use the function of variable lead
thread, if the lead increment per turn (K) is a
B301 Thread pitch error negative value, the thread pitch becomes smaller
with the increment of the number of turns. When
the decrement in pitch is greater than the
standard lead (FK), this alarm occurs.
3. Check the G-code and modify the program.
1. The turning feed rate for thread cutting is too fast.
B302 Spindle speed too fast
2. Reduce the spindle speed.
1. You switch the system from Spindle mode to
B303 Spindle / C axis switching Err C axis mode while the C axis mode is disabled.
2. Set Pr.308 [C axis mode] to 0.
1. Thread cutting operation is prohibited in C axis
Thread cutting prohibited in C axis mode.
B304
mode 2. Switch the system from C axis mode to Spindle
mode to execute the thread cutting operation.
1. In C axis mode, Pr.399 [Spindle output mode] is
Spindle output mode error in C axis set to analog voltage for SP1.
B305
mode 2. Adjust the setting of Pr.399 [Spindle output mode]
for SP1.
1. In Spindle mode, the breakpoint search is in
progress and the execution pauses at the M-code
Breakpoint search error in Spindle for switching the system from Spindle mode to C
B306
mode axis mode.
2. Reset the breakpoint’s line number.
1. In C axis mode, the breakpoint search is in
progress and the execution pauses at the M-code
Breakpoint search error in C axis for switching the system from C axis mode to
B307
mode Spindle mode.
2. Reset the breakpoint’s line number.
1. Check if the G-codes of the polar coordinate
interpolation function comply with the command
format.
2. Check if the polar coordinate interpolation
function contains any unsupported G-codes.
3. Check if the plane selection is switched when the
system is executing the polar coordinate
B308 Polar coordinate interpolation error command.
4. Check if there is a tool number specified in the
polar coordinate interpolation command.
5. The polar coordinate interpolation mode is
available only when both of the following
conditions are met: the system feed mode is
feed/min (G98) and the system is in C axis mode
(M2239 = 1).
1. This error occurs when Pr.51 [Spindle target
speed check during cutting] is enabled.
Spindle target speed not reached
B309 2. M2256 (1st spindle reaches the target speed) is
when cutting
Off during cutting. Adjust the setting of Pr.406
[Spindle target speed error].

15-13
 Troubleshooting Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual

15.1.9 Command related alarms (B600 - B6FF; B64x not included)

Alarm code Name Cause and corrective action

15
1. G-code error.
B600 G-code error
2. Check the G-code and modify the program.
1. The subroutine called excessive program layers.
B601 Excessive layers in subroutine call 2. The subroutine cannot call more than 8 program
layers.
1. The G-code in the program contains only the
number without the letter G (such as inputting 01
B602 No G-code symbol for G01).
2. Check the G-code and modify the program.
1. The variable symbol is in error.
B603 Variable symbol error
2. Check the G-code and modify the program.
1. Unsupported character or symbol is used in the
B604 Illegal G-code symbol G-code.
2. Check the G-code and modify the program.
1. Illegal string is used in the G-code command
B605 Illegal G-code command string (such as “-2.0,”, “X2.0-.0”, “.2.0”, or “XX2.0”).
2. Check the G-code and modify the program.
1. The subroutine call is in error.
B606 Subroutine call error
2. Check the G-code and modify the program.
1. The subroutine file name is in error.
B607 Subroutine file name error
2. Check the G-code and modify the program.
1. The subroutine layer number is in error.
B608 Subroutine layer No. error
2. Check the G-code and modify the program.
1. G-code is executed without homing.
B609 Cycle EXEC, no homing
2. Execute homing for each axis first.
1. The syntax for the dwell time command is in error.
B60A Dwell time cmd syntax error
2. Check the G-code and modify the program.
1. The arc magnification ratio is in error.
B60C Arc magnification ratio error
2. Check the G-code and modify the program.
1. An error occurs when the system performs
B60D Homing intermediate point Err homing through the intermediate point.
2. Check the G-code and modify the program.
1. G28, G29, or G30 cannot be executed during
B60E Homing Err in Cyclic machining cyclic machining.
2. Check the G-code and modify the program.
1. The specified range for the extended workpiece
B60F G54 extension code err coordinate system is in error.
2. Check the range specified in the G-code.
1. The type of the macro variable is in error.
B610 Macro variable type error
2. Check the macro and modify the program.
1. The macro command is not found.
B611 Macro not found
2. Check the macro and modify the program.
1. After the GOTO command is compiled, the N
B612 Macro cmd N label error label is not an integer.
2. Check the macro and modify the program.
1. The setting for the macro bit is in error.
B613 Macro bit setting error
2. Check the macro and modify the program.
1. This error occurs when the macro performs
B614 Divisor in the macro is zero division operation and the divisor is zero.
2. Check the macro and modify the program.
1. The macro command is too long.
B615 Macro command too long
2. Check the macro and modify the program.

15-14
Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual Troubleshooting

Alarm code Name Cause and corrective action

1. The macro command operand does not exist.
B616 Macro Cmd operand does not exist
2. Check the macro and modify the program.

15
1. The macro command is in error.
B617 Macro command error
2. Check the macro and modify the program.
1. The macro syntax usage is illegal.
B618 Macro Cmd syntax error
2. Check the macro and modify the program.
1. The macro operand syntax is in error.
B619 Macro operand syntax error
2. Check the macro and modify the program.
1. The macro command is illegal.
B61A Illegal macro command
2. Check the macro and modify the program.
1. No corresponding N label is found when the
N label specified by GOTO cmd is GOTO command is executed.
B61C
not found
2. Check the G-code and specify the correct N label.
1. User-defined macro alarm is triggered.
B620 User-defined macro alarm 2. This user-defined macro alarm is triggered when
there is a #6000 command in the G-code
program.
1. The halt M-code is invalid.
(1) An axis movement is specified in the block
containing the halt M-code.
B621 Invalid halt M-code (2) Other G-codes are specified in the block
containing the halt M-code.
2. Check the G-code and make sure the halt M-code
is used individually.
1. The feed rate is set as a negative value.
B623 Feed rate is negative
2. Check the G-code and modify the feed rate.
1. Milling & lathe: do not support synchronous
interpolation for the linear and rotary axes.
B625 Interpolation axis error
2. Milling: NC200 does not support tapping.
3. Use NC300 or above models.
1. The following error is too large.
2. Make sure the servo parameter setting is correct.
B630 Excessive following error
3. Check if the system parameter Pr.643 is set too
small.
1. The hardware limit is triggered.
2. Move the axis out of the inhibit zone.
B631 Hardware limit error
3. Check the hardware limit wiring and sensor
setting.
1. The axis position exceeds the 1st software limit.
B632 1st software limit error
2. Move the axis out of the inhibit zone.
1. The axis position exceeds the 2nd software limit.
B634 2nd software limit error
2. Move the axis out of the inhibit zone.
1. The home sensor is in error.
B636 Home sensor error
2. Check if the home sensor is installed correctly.
1. When the system switches between the MLC and
B637 MLC axis not stopped NC axis modes, the MLC axis is still in motion.
2. Modify the MLC program.
1. This error occurs when Pr.46 [Pre-warning for
software limit] is enabled.
2. Modify the program.
3. Check the parameter setting for the 1st software
B638 1st software limit error (line No.) limit.
4. Exclude the factors that cause excessive
following error, such as the servo gain is too low
or the wiring of motor power cable UVW is in
error.

15-15
 Troubleshooting Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual

Alarm code Name Cause and corrective action

1. This error occurs when Pr.46 [Pre-warning for
software limit] is enabled.
2. Modify the program.

15
3. Check the parameter setting of the 2nd software
B639 2nd software limit error (line No.) limit.
4. Exclude the factors that cause excessive
following error, such as the servo gain is too low
or the wiring of motor power cable UVW is in
error.
1. The G10 parameter definition is illegal.
B650 Illegal G10 PAR definition
2. Check if the G-code is used correctly.
1. The G10 parameter range is set incorrectly.
B651 G10 PAR range error
2. Check if the G-code parameter range is correct.
1. There is no spindle speed specified in the cycle
command.
B652 No spindle speed for cycle
2. Check the G-code and specify the spindle speed
(S).
1. There is no feed rate specified in the cycle
B653 No feed rate for cycle command.
2. Check the G-code and specify the feed rate (F).
1. The usage of the cycle command is illegal.
B654 Illegal cycle command
2. Check the G-code and modify the cycle command.
1. Illegal M-code command.
Specific function not disabled when 2. Check if the specific G-code command (G16,
B655
M96 executed G24, G41, G42, or G51) is enabled before and
after M96 execution.
1. The special M relay for calling subroutine is
M96 is issued when subroutine triggered during G-code execution.
B656
interruption is in execution 2. Check if the subroutine includes an M96
command.

15-16
Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual Troubleshooting

15.1.10 Synchronous motion and temperature compensation related

alarms (B640 - B64F)

15
Alarm code Name Cause and corrective action
1. The temperature exceeds the sensing range.
B640 Overheat
2. Check the sensor's output specification.
1. The temperature sensor is disconnected.
Temperature sensor
B642 2. Check if the wiring for the temperature sensor
disconnected
functions normally.
1. The temperature sensor is in error.
B643 Temperature detection error
2. Check if the temperature sensor is installed correctly.
1. During synchronous motion control, this alarm
occurs when the following error between the master
and slave axes exceeds the value set in Pr.642.
Excessive synchronous following
B645 2. Check if the servo gain settings for the master and
error
slave axes are compatible.
3. Exclude the factors that cause the following error of
the slave axis.
1. This alarm occurs when the difference between the
command speed of 1st spindle (2nd spindle) and
feedback speed exceeds the value set in Pr.406
(Pr.446) and this condition lasts for more than the
B646 Excessive spindle speed error spindle speed error checking time set in Pr.436
(Pr.476).
2. When Pr.436 or Pr.476 is set to 0, the system does
not check for the spindle speed error.

15.1.11 Lathe cycle command alarms (B6A1 - B6AF)

Alarm code Name Cause and corrective action

1. The specific N label is not found in the cycle
B6A1 No specific N label in G70 - G73 command.
2. Check the G-code and correct the N label.
1. N label is not specified in the cycle command.
B6A2 No N label specified by G70 - G73
2. Check the G-code and add the correct N label.
1. The taper calculation of the thread cutting cycle
command is in error.
B6A3 Cycle command taper error
2. Modify the G-code and check related
parameters.
1. The chamfer geometry dimension is incorrect.
B6A4 Chamfer command error 2. Modify the G-code and check related
parameters.
1. Drilling / tapping cannot be executed.
B6A5 Illegal drilling / tapping
2. Check the G-code and the C axis status.
Check if the X coordinate of the G71 or G72 start
B6A6 Incorrect start point (G71 / G72) point is less than the X coordinate of the cycle
command end point.
1. The cutting depth of G74 / G75 peck drilling is
G74 / G75 cutting depth greater than greater than the depth of the cavity.
B6A7
cavity depth 2. Check the G-code and modify the drilling
depth.
1. Tool life < 0 times.
B6A8 Tool life is over
2. Reset the tool life of the specific tool.

15-17
 Troubleshooting Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual

(This page is intentionally left blank.)

15

15-18
Revision History
Release Date Version Chapter Revision contents
V2.0
December, 2022 1.4 Added B series product model explanation.
(Second edition)
2.2 Added B series product installation description.
1. Added the permissible current values of the
3.1.10 remote I/O relay.
2. Added the remote I/O wiring diagrams.
3.2 Added B series product wiring information.
Updated the table of corresponding buttons for
4.4
OPENCNC models.
Added the descriptions for the 2nd spindle
12.4
parameters.
Updated the descriptions of the parameter Pr.616
12.6.1
Origin search mode.
Added the function of automatically dividing the
12.9.1 value without decimal points by 1000 to the
parameter Pr.10015.
1. Added Pr.12029 Switch between the system and
user-defined keypad.
12.10.1
2. Added Pr.12030 Value of the user-defined keypad
key.
V1.0
April, 2020
(First edition)

For relevant information about [Delta CNC Lathe Machine Solution - Operation and Maintenance
Manual], please refer to:

(1) Delta CNC Lathe Machine Solution - G Command Guidelines

(2) Delta CNC NC Series Solution - MLC Application Manual

1
Revision History Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual

(This page is intentionally left blank.)